16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer's Reference Manual

16-bit MCU and DSC
Programmer’s Reference Manual
High-Performance Microcontrollers (MCU)
and Digital Signal Controllers (DSC)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F
Note the following details of the code protection feature on Microchip devices:
•
Microchip products meet the specification contained in their particular Microchip Data Sheet.
•
Microchip believes that its family of products is one of the most secure families of its kind on the market today, when used in the
intended manner and under normal conditions.
•
There are dishonest and possibly illegal methods used to breach the code protection feature. All of these methods, to our
knowledge, require using the Microchip products in a manner outside the operating specifications contained in Microchip’s Data
Sheets. Most likely, the person doing so is engaged in theft of intellectual property.
•
Microchip is willing to work with the customer who is concerned about the integrity of their code.
•
Neither Microchip nor any other semiconductor manufacturer can guarantee the security of their code. Code protection does not
mean that we are guaranteeing the product as “unbreakable.”
Code protection is constantly evolving. We at Microchip are committed to continuously improving the code protection features of our
products. Attempts to break Microchip’s code protection feature may be a violation of the Digital Millennium Copyright Act. If such acts
allow unauthorized access to your software or other copyrighted work, you may have a right to sue for relief under that Act.
Information contained in this publication regarding device
applications and the like is provided only for your convenience
and may be superseded by updates. It is your responsibility to
ensure that your application meets with your specifications.
MICROCHIP MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, WRITTEN OR ORAL, STATUTORY OR
OTHERWISE, RELATED TO THE INFORMATION,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ITS CONDITION,
QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR PURPOSE. Microchip disclaims all liability
arising from this information and its use. Use of Microchip
devices in life support and/or safety applications is entirely at
the buyer’s risk, and the buyer agrees to defend, indemnify and
hold harmless Microchip from any and all damages, claims,
suits, or expenses resulting from such use. No licenses are
conveyed, implicitly or otherwise, under any Microchip
intellectual property rights.
Trademarks
The Microchip name and logo, the Microchip logo, dsPIC,
KEELOQ, KEELOQ logo, MPLAB, PIC, PICmicro, PICSTART,
PIC32 logo, rfPIC and UNI/O are registered trademarks of
Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other
countries.
FilterLab, Hampshire, HI-TECH C, Linear Active Thermistor,
MXDEV, MXLAB, SEEVAL and The Embedded Control
Solutions Company are registered trademarks of Microchip
Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A.
Analog-for-the-Digital Age, Application Maestro, chipKIT,
chipKIT logo, CodeGuard, dsPICDEM, dsPICDEM.net,
dsPICworks, dsSPEAK, ECAN, ECONOMONITOR,
FanSense, HI-TIDE, In-Circuit Serial Programming, ICSP,
Mindi, MiWi, MPASM, MPLAB Certified logo, MPLIB,
MPLINK, mTouch, Omniscient Code Generation, PICC,
PICC-18, PICDEM, PICDEM.net, PICkit, PICtail, REAL ICE,
rfLAB, Select Mode, Total Endurance, TSHARC,
UniWinDriver, WiperLock and ZENA are trademarks of
Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other
countries.
SQTP is a service mark of Microchip Technology Incorporated
in the U.S.A.
All other trademarks mentioned herein are property of their
respective companies.
© 2005-2011, Microchip Technology Incorporated, Printed in
the U.S.A., All Rights Reserved.
Printed on recycled paper.
ISBN: 978-1-61341-357-9
Microchip received ISO/TS-16949:2009 certification for its worldwide
headquarters, design and wafer fabrication facilities in Chandler and
Tempe, Arizona; Gresham, Oregon and design centers in California
and India. The Company’s quality system processes and procedures
are for its PIC® MCUs and dsPIC® DSCs, KEELOQ® code hopping
devices, Serial EEPROMs, microperipherals, nonvolatile memory and
analog products. In addition, Microchip’s quality system for the design
and manufacture of development systems is ISO 9001:2000 certified.
DS70157F-page 2
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Table of Contents
PAGE
SECTION 1. INTRODUCTION
5
Introduction ......................................................................................................................................................... 6
Manual Objective ................................................................................................................................................ 6
Development Support ......................................................................................................................................... 6
Style and Symbol Conventions ........................................................................................................................... 7
Instruction Set Symbols ...................................................................................................................................... 8
SECTION 2. PROGRAMMER’S MODEL
9
16-bit MCU and DSC Core Architecture Overview ............................................................................................ 10
Programmer’s Model ......................................................................................................................................... 14
Working Register Array ..................................................................................................................................... 18
Default Working Register (WREG) .................................................................................................................... 18
Software Stack Frame Pointer .......................................................................................................................... 18
Software Stack Pointer ...................................................................................................................................... 19
Stack Pointer Limit Register (SPLIM) ................................................................................................................ 19
Accumulator A and Accumulator B (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F and dsPIC33E Devices) ........................................ 19
Program Counter ............................................................................................................................................... 19
TBLPAG Register .............................................................................................................................................. 19
PSVPAG Register (PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F) ..................................................................... 19
RCOUNT Register ............................................................................................................................................ 20
DCOUNT Register (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F and dsPIC33E Devices) ................................................................. 20
DOSTART Register (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F and dsPIC33E Devices) ............................................................... 20
DOEND Register (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F and dsPIC33E Devices) .................................................................... 21
STATUS Register .............................................................................................................................................. 21
Core Control Register ....................................................................................................................................... 24
Shadow Registers ............................................................................................................................................. 24
DO Stack (dsPIC33E Devices) .......................................................................................................................... 25
SECTION 3. INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW
37
Introduction ....................................................................................................................................................... 38
Instruction Set Overview ................................................................................................................................... 38
Instruction Set Summary Tables ....................................................................................................................... 40
SECTION 4. INSTRUCTION SET DETAILS
51
Data Addressing Modes .................................................................................................................................... 52
Program Addressing Modes .............................................................................................................................. 61
Instruction Stalls ................................................................................................................................................ 62
Byte Operations ................................................................................................................................................ 64
Word Move Operations ..................................................................................................................................... 66
Using 10-bit Literal Operands ........................................................................................................................... 69
Software Stack Pointer and Frame Pointer ....................................................................................................... 70
Conditional Branch Instructions ........................................................................................................................ 76
Z Status Bit ........................................................................................................................................................ 77
Assigned Working Register Usage .................................................................................................................... 78
DSP Data Formats (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F and dsPIC33E Devices) ................................................................. 81
Accumulator Usage (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F and dsPIC33E Devices) ................................................................ 83
Accumulator Access (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F and dsPIC33E Devices) .............................................................. 84
DSP MAC Instructions (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F and dsPIC33E Devices) ........................................................... 84
DSP Accumulator Instructions (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F and dsPIC33E Devices) ............................................... 88
Scaling Data with the FBCL Instruction (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F and dsPIC33E Devices) ................................. 88
Normalizing the Accumulator with the FBCL Instruction (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F and dsPIC33E Devices) ........ 90
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 3
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Extended-precison Arithmetic using mixed-sign ............................................. multiplications (dsPIC33E only) 91
SECTION 5. INSTRUCTION DESCRIPTIONS
93
Instruction Symbols ........................................................................................................................................... 94
Instruction Encoding Field Descriptors Introduction .......................................................................................... 94
Instruction Description Example ........................................................................................................................ 98
Instruction Descriptions ..................................................................................................................................... 99
SECTION 6. BUILT-IN FUNCTIONS
445
Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 446
Built-in Function List ........................................................................................................................................ 447
SECTION 7. REFERENCE
483
Instruction Bit Map ........................................................................................................................................... 484
Instruction Set Summary Table ....................................................................................................................... 486
Revision History .............................................................................................................................................. 496
SECTION 8. INDEX
497
SECTION 9. WORLDWIDE SALES AND SERVICE
502
DS70157F-page 4
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
1
Introduction
Section 1. Introduction
HIGHLIGHTS
This section of the manual contains the following major topics:
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 6
Manual Objective .............................................................................................................. 6
Development Support ....................................................................................................... 6
Style and Symbol Conventions ......................................................................................... 7
Instruction Set Symbols .................................................................................................... 8
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 5
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
1.1
INTRODUCTION
Microchip Technology focuses on products for the embedded control market. Microchip is a
leading supplier of the following devices and products:
•
•
•
•
•
•
8-bit General Purpose Microcontrollers (PIC® MCUs)
16-bit Digital Signal Controllers (dsPIC® DSCs)
16-bit and 32-bit Microcontrollers (MCUs)
Speciality and Standard Nonvolatile Memory Devices
Security Devices (KEELOQ® Security ICs)
Application-specific Standard Products
Information about these devices and products, with corresponding technical documentation, is
available on the Microchip web site (www.microchip.com).
1.2
MANUAL OBJECTIVE
This manual is a software developer’s reference for the 16-bit MCU and DSC device families. It
describes the Instruction Set in detail and also provides general information to assist the
development of software for the 16-bit MCU and DSC device families.
This manual does not include detailed information about the core, peripherals, system integration
or device-specific information. The user should refer to the specific device family reference
manual for information about the core, peripherals and system integration. For device-specific
information, the user should refer to the specific device data sheets. The information that can be
found in the data sheets includes:
•
•
•
•
Device memory map
Device pinout and packaging details
Device electrical specifications
List of peripherals included on the device
Code examples are given throughout this manual. These examples are valid for any device in
the 16-bit MCU and DSC families.
1.3
DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT
Microchip offers a wide range of development tools that allow users to efficiently develop and
debug application code. Microchip’s development tools can be broken down into four categories:
•
•
•
•
Code generation
Hardware/Software debug
Device programmer
Product evaluation boards
Information about the latest tools, product briefs and user guides can be obtained from the
Microchip web site (www.microchip.com) or from your local Microchip Sales Office.
Microchip offers other reference tools to speed the development cycle. These include:
•
•
•
•
•
Application Notes
Reference Designs
Microchip web site
Local Sales Offices with Field Application Support
Corporate Support Line
The Microchip web site also lists other sites that may be useful references.
DS70157F-page 6
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 1. Introduction
1
1.4
STYLE AND SYMBOL CONVENTIONS
Table 1-1:
Document Conventions
Symbol or Term
Description
set
To force a bit/register to a value of logic ‘1’.
clear
To force a bit/register to a value of logic ‘0’.
Reset
1.
2.
0xnnnn
Designates the number ‘nnnn’ in the hexadecimal number system. These
conventions are used in the code examples. For example, 0x013F or
0xA800.
: (colon)
Used to specify a range or the concatenation of registers/bits/pins.
One example is ACCAU:ACCAH:ACCAL, which is the concatenation of
three registers to form the 40-bit Accumulator.
Concatenation order (left-right) usually specifies a positional relationship
(MSb to LSb, higher to lower).
<>
Specifies bit locations in a particular register.
One example is SR<7:5> (or IPL<2:0>), which specifies the register and
associated bits or bit locations.
LSb, MSb
Indicates the Least Significant or Most Significant bit in a field.
LSB, MSB
Indicates the Least/Most Significant Byte in a field of bits.
lsw, msw
Indicates the least/most significant word in a field of bits
Courier New
Font
Used for code examples, binary numbers and for Instruction mnemonics
in the text.
To force a register/bit to its default state.
A condition in which the device places itself after a device Reset
occurs. Some bits will be forced to ‘0’ (such as interrupt enable bits),
while others will be forced to ‘1’ (such as the I/O data direction bits).
Times New
Used for equations and variables.
Roman Font, Italic
Times New
Roman Font,
Bold Italic
Used in explanatory text for items called out from a figure, equation, or
example.
Note:
A Note presents information that we want to re-emphasize, either to help
you avoid a common pitfall, or make you aware of operating differences
between some device family members. A Note can be in a box, or when
used in a table or figure, it is located at the bottom of the table or figure.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 7
Introduction
Throughout this document, certain style and font format conventions are used. Table 1-1
provides a description of the conventions used in this document.
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
1.5
INSTRUCTION SET SYMBOLS
The summary tables in Section 3.2 “Instruction Set Overview” and Section 7.2 “Instruction
Set Summary Table”, and the instruction descriptions in Section 5.4 “Instruction
Descriptions” utilize the symbols shown in Table 1-2.
Table 1-2:
Symbols Used in Instruction Summary Tables and Descriptions
Symbol(1)
Description
{ }
Optional field or operation
[text]
The location addressed by text
(text)
The contents of text
#text
The literal defined by text
a ∈ [b, c, d] “a” must be in the set of [b, c, d]
<n:m>
Register bit field
{label:}
Optional label name
Acc
Accumulator A or Accumulator B
AWB
Accumulator Write Back
bit4
4-bit wide bit position (0:7 in Byte mode, 0:15 in Word mode)
Expr
Absolute address, label or expression (resolved by the linker)
f
File register address
lit1
1-bit literal (0:1)
lit4
4-bit literal (0:15)
lit5
5-bit literal (0:31)
lit8
8-bit literal (0:255)
lit10
10-bit literal (0:255 in Byte mode, 0:1023 in Word mode)
lit14
14-bit literal (0:16383)
lit16
16-bit literal (0:65535)
lit23
23-bit literal (0:8388607)
Slit4
Signed 4-bit literal (-8:7)
Slit6
Signed 6-bit literal (-32:31) (range is limited to -16:16)
Slit10
Signed 10-bit literal (-512:511)
Slit16
Signed 16-bit literal (-32768:32767)
TOS
Top-of-Stack
Wb
Base working register
Wd
Destination working register (direct and indirect addressing)
Wdo
Destination working register (direct and indirect addressing, including indirect addressing with offset)
Wm, Wn
Working register divide pair (dividend, divisor)
Wm * Wm
Working register multiplier pair (same source register)
Wm * Wn
Working register multiplier pair (different source registers)
Wn
Both source and destination working register (direct addressing)
Wnd
Destination working register (direct addressing)
Wns
Source working register (direct addressing)
WREG
Default working register (assigned to W0)
Ws
Source working register (direct and indirect addressing)
Wso
Source working register (direct and indirect addressing, including indirect addressing with offset)
Wx
Source Addressing mode and working register for X data bus prefetch
Wxd
Destination working register for X data bus prefetch
Wy
Source Addressing mode and working register for Y data bus prefetch
Wyd
Destination working register for Y data bus prefetch
Note 1: The range of each symbol is instruction dependent. Refer to Section 5. “Instruction Descriptions” for
the specific instruction range.
DS70157F-page 8
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 2. Programmer’s Model
HIGHLIGHTS
2
This section of the manual contains the following major topics:
16-bit MCU and DSC Core Architecture Overview ......................................................... 10
Programmer’s Model....................................................................................................... 14
Working Register Array ................................................................................................... 18
Default Working Register (WREG) ................................................................................. 18
Software Stack Frame Pointer ........................................................................................ 18
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 9
Programmer’s
Model
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
2.1
16-BIT MCU AND DSC CORE ARCHITECTURE OVERVIEW
This section provides an overview of the 16-bit architecture features and capabilities for the
following families of devices:
• 16-bit Microcontrollers (MCU):
- PIC24F
- PIC24H
- PIC24E
• 16-bit Digital Signal Controllers (DSC):
- dsPIC30F
- dsPIC33F
- dsPIC33E
2.1.1
Features Specific to 16-bit MCU and DSC Core
The core of the 16-bit MCU and DSC devices is a 16-bit (data) modified Harvard architecture with
an enhanced instruction set. The core has a 24-bit instruction word, with an 8-bit Op code field.
The Program Counter (PC) is 23 bits wide and addresses up to 4M x 24 bits of user program
memory space. An instruction prefetch mechanism is used to help maintain throughput and
provides predictable execution. The majority of instructions execute in a single cycle.
2.1.1.1
REGISTERS
The 16-bit MCU and DSC devices have sixteen 16-bit working registers. Each of the working
registers can act as a data, address or offset register. The 16th working register (W15) operates
as a software Stack Pointer for interrupts and calls.
2.1.1.2
INSTRUCTION SET
The instruction set is almost identical for the 16-bit MCU and DSC architectures. The instruction
set includes many Addressing modes and was designed for optimum C compiler efficiency.
2.1.1.3
DATA SPACE ADDRESSING
The data space can be addressed as 32K words or 64 Kbytes. The upper 32 Kbytes of the data
space memory map can optionally be mapped into program space at any 16K program word
boundary, which is a feature known as Program Space Visibility (PSV). The program to data
space mapping feature lets any instruction access program space as if it were the data space,
which is useful for storing data coefficients.
Note:
2.1.1.4
Some devices families support Extended Data Space (EDS) addressing. See the
specific device data sheet and family reference manual for more details on this
feature.
ADDRESSING MODES
The core supports Inherent (no operand), Relative, Literal, Memory Direct, Register Direct,
Register Indirect, and Register Offset Addressing modes. Each instruction is associated with a
predefined Addressing mode group, depending upon its functional requirements. As many as
seven Addressing modes are supported for each instruction.
For most instructions, the CPU is capable of executing a data (or program data) memory read, a
working register (data) read, a data memory write and a program (instruction) memory read per
instruction cycle. As a result, 3-operand instructions can be supported, allowing A + B = C
operations to be executed in a single cycle.
DS70157F-page 10
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 2. Programmer’s Model
2.1.1.5
ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC UNIT
A high-speed, 17-bit by 17-bit multiplier is included to significantly enhance the core’s arithmetic
capability and throughput. The multiplier supports Signed, Unsigned, and Mixed modes, as well
as 16-bit by 16-bit, or 8-bit by 8-bit integer multiplication. All multiply instructions execute in a
single cycle.
The 16-bit Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU) is enhanced with integer divide assist hardware that
supports an iterative non-restoring divide algorithm. It operates in conjunction with the REPEAT
instruction looping mechanism, and a selection of iterative divide instructions, to support 32-bit
(or 16-bit) divided by 16-bit integer signed and unsigned division. All divide operations require 19
cycles to complete, but are interruptible at any cycle boundary.
2.1.1.6
2
EXCEPTION PROCESSING
2.1.2
PIC24E and dsPIC33E Features
In addition to the information provided in Section 2.1.1 “Features Specific to 16-bit MCU and
DSC Core”, this section describes the enhancements that are available in the PIC24E and
dsPIC33E families of devices.
2.1.2.1
DATA SPACE ADDRESSING
The Base Data Space address is used in conjunction with a read or write page register (DSRPAG
or DSWPAG) to form an Extended Data Space (EDS) address, which can also be used for PSV
access. The EDS can be addressed as 8 M words or 16 Mbytes. Refer to Section 3. “Data
Memory” (DS70595) in the “dsPIC33E/PIC24E Family Reference Manual” for more details on
EDS, PSV, and table accesses.
Note:
2.1.2.2
Some PIC24F devices also support Extended Data Space. Refer to Section 44.
“CPU with EDS” (DS39732) and Section 45. “Data Memory with EDS”
(DS39733) of the PIC24F Family Reference Manual for details.
AUTOMATIC MIXED-SIGN MULTIPLICATION MODE (dsPIC33E ONLY)
In addition to signed and unsigned DSP multiplications, dsPIC33E devices support mixed-sign
(unsigned-signed and signed-unsigned) multiplications without the need to dynamically
reconfigure the multiplication mode and shift data to account for the difference in operand
formats. This mode is particularly beneficial for executing extended-precision (32-bit and 64-bit)
algorithms. Besides DSP instructions, MCU multiplication (MUL) instructions can also utilize
either accumulator as a result destination, thereby enabling faster extended-precision arithmetic.
Refer to 4.10.1 “Implied DSP Operands (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F and dsPIC33E Devices)” and
4.18 “Extended-precison Arithmetic using mixed-sign multiplications (dsPIC33E only)”
for more details on mixed-sign DSP multiplications.
2.1.2.3
MCU MULTIPLICATIONS WITH 16-BIT RESULT
16x16-bit MUL instructions include an option to store the product in a single 16-bit working
register rather than a pair of registers. This feature helps free up a register for other purposes, in
cases where the numbers being multiplied are small in magnitude and therefore expected to
provide a 16-bit result. See the individual MUL instruction descriptions in 5.4 “Instruction
Descriptions” for more details.
2.1.2.4
HARDWARE STACK FOR DO LOOPS (dsPIC33E ONLY)
The single-level DO loop shadow register-set has been replaced by 4-level deep DO loop
hardware stack. This provides automatic DO loop register save/restore for up to 3 levels of DO
loop nesting, resulting in more efficient implementation of nested loops. Refer to 2.19 “DO Stack
(dsPIC33E Devices)” for more details on DO loop nesting in dsPIC33E devices.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 11
Programmer’s
Model
The 16-bit MCU and DSC devices have a vectored exception scheme with support for up to 8
sources of non-maskable traps and up to 246 interrupt sources. In both families, each interrupt
source can be assigned to one of seven priority levels.
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
2.1.2.5
DSP CONTEXT SWITCH SUPPORT (dsPIC33E ONLY)
In dsPIC33E devices, the DSP overflow and saturation status bits are writable. This allows the
state of the DSP Engine to be efficiently saved and restored while switching between DSP tasks.
See 2.16.4 “DSP ALU Status Bits (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F and dsPIC33E Devices)” for more
details on DSP status bits.
2.1.2.6
EXTENDED CALL AND GOTO INSTRUCTIONS
The new CALL.L Wn and GOTO.L Wn instructions extend the capabilities of the CALL Wn and
GOTO Wn by enabling 32-bit addresses for computed branch/call destinations. In these
enhanced instructions, the destination address is provided by a pair of working registers rather
than a single 16-bit register. See the CALL.L and GOTO.L instruction descriptions in
5.4 “Instruction Descriptions” for more details.
2.1.2.7
COMPARE-BRANCH INSTRUCTIONS
dsPIC33E/PIC24E devices feature conditional Compare-Branch (CPBxx) instructions. These
instructions extend the capabilities of the Compare-Skip (CPSxx) instructions by allowing
branches rather than only skipping over a single instruction. See the CPBEQ, CPBNE, CPBGT
and CPBLT instruction descriptions in 5.4 “Instruction Descriptions” for more details on
compare-branch instructions.
2.1.3
dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E Features
In addition to the information provided in Section 2.1.1 “Features Specific to 16-bit MCU and
DSC Core”, this section describes the DSP enhancements that are available in the dsPIC30F,
dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E families of devices.
2.1.3.1
PROGRAMMING LOOP CONSTRUCTS
Overhead free program loop constructs are supported using the DO instruction, which is
interruptible.
2.1.3.2
DSP INSTRUCTION CLASS
The DSP class of instructions.are seamlessly integrated into the architecture and execute from
a single execution unit.
2.1.3.3
DATA SPACE ADDRESSING
The data space is split into two blocks, referred to as X and Y data memory. Each memory block
has its own independent Address Generation Unit (AGU). The MCU class of instructions operate
solely through the X memory AGU, which accesses the entire memory map as one linear data
space. The DSP dual source class of instructions operates through the X and Y AGUs, which
splits the data address space into two parts. The X and Y data space boundary is arbitrary and
device-specific.
2.1.3.4
MODULO AND BIT-REVERSED ADDRESSING
Overhead-free circular buffers (modulo addressing) are supported in both X and Y address
spaces. The modulo addressing removes the software boundary checking overhead for DSP
algorithms. Furthermore, the X AGU circular addressing can be used with any of the MCU class
of instructions. The X AGU also supports bit-reverse addressing, to greatly simplify input or
output data reordering for radix-2 FFT algorithms.
2.1.3.5
DSP ENGINE
The DSP engine features a high-speed, 17-bit by 17-bit multiplier, a 40-bit ALU, two 40-bit
saturating accumulators and a 40-bit bidirectional barrel shifter. The barrel shifter is capable of
shifting a 40-bit value, up to 16 bits right, or up to 16 bits left, in a single cycle. The DSP
instructions operate seamlessly with all other instructions and have been designed for optimal
real-time performance. The MAC instruction and other associated instructions can concurrently
fetch two data operands from memory while multiplying two working registers. This requires that
DS70157F-page 12
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 2. Programmer’s Model
the data space be split for these instructions and linear for all others. This is achieved in a
transparent and flexible manner through dedicating certain working registers to each address
space.
2.1.3.6
EXCEPTION PROCESSING
The dsPIC30F devices have a vectored exception scheme with support for up to 8 sources of
non-maskable traps and up to 54 interrupt sources. The dsPIC33F and dsPIC33E have a similar
exception scheme, but support up to 118, and up to 246 interrupt sources, respectively. In all
three families, each interrupt source can be assigned to one of seven priority levels.
Refer to Section 6 and 28 “ Interrupts” of the dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual, Sections
6, 29,32, 41, 47 and 53 of the dsPIC33F/PIC24H Family Reference Manual and Section 6 of the
dsPIC33E/PIC24E Family Reference Manual, for more details on Exception Processing.
2
Programmer’s
Model
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 13
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
2.2
PROGRAMMER’S MODEL
Figure 2-1 through Figure 2-4 show the programmer’s model diagrams for the 16-bit MCU and
DSC families of devices.
Figure 2-1:
PIC24F and PIC24H Programmer’s Model Diagram
15
PUSH.S
Shadow
Register
0
W0/WREG
DIV and MUL
Result Registers
W1
Legend
W2
W3
W4
W5
W6
W7
Working Registers
W8
W9
W10
W11
W12
W13
W14/Frame Pointer
W15/Stack Pointer
Stack Pointer Limit Register
SPLIM
0
22
0
7
0
Data Table Page Address
TABPAG
TBLPAG
7
0
Program Space Visibility Page Address
PSVPAG
PSVPAG
13
0
REPEAT Loop Counter
RCOUNT
15
0
CPU Core Control Register
CORCON
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
DC
Program Counter
IPL2 IPL1 IPL0 RA
N
OV
Z
C
Status Register
SRH
DS70157F-page 14
SRL
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 2. Programmer’s Model
Figure 2-2:
PIC24E Programmer’s Model Diagram
15
PUSH.S and
POP.S Shadow
Registers
0
W0/WREG
DIV and MUL
Result Registers
W1
Legend
W2
W3
W4
W5
2
W6
W7
Working Registers
Programmer’s
Model
W8
W9
W10
W11
W12
W13
W14/Frame Pointer
W15/Stack Pointer
Stack Pointer Limit Register
SPLIM
0
22
0
7
0
Data Table Page Address
TABPAG
TBLPAG
9
0
Data Space Read Page Address
PSVPAG
DSRPAG
8
0
Data Space Write Page Address
PSVPAG
DSWPAG
15
0
REPEAT Loop Counter
RCOUNT
15
0
CPU Core Control Register
CORCON
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
DC
Program Counter
IPL2 IPL1 IPL0 RA
N
OV
Z
C
Status Register
SRH
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
SRL
DS70157F-page 15
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Figure 2-3:
dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F Programmer’s Model Diagram
15
PUSH.S
Shadow
Register
0
W0/WREG
DIV and MUL
Result Registers
W1
DO Shadow
Register
W2
W3
Legend
W4
MAC Operand
Registers
W5
W6
W7
Working Registers
W8
W9
MAC Address
Registers
W10
W11
W12
W13
W14/Frame Pointer
W15/Stack Pointer
Stack Pointer Limit Register
SPLIM
39
15
31
0
ACCA
ACCB
0
22
0
7
Data Table Page Address
7
0
Program Space Visibility Page Address
PSVPAG
PSVPAG
13
0
REPEAT Loop Counter
RCOUNT
13
0
DO Loop Counter
DCOUNT
24
0
0
DOSTART
0
DOEND
0
24
15
SB OAB SAB DA
DC
DO Loop End Address
0
CPU Core Control Register
CORCON
SA
DO Loop Start Address
0
0
OB
Program Counter
0
TABPAG
TBLPAG
OA
DSP
Accumulators
IPL2 IPL1 IPL0 RA
N
OV
Z
C
Status Register
SRH
DS70157F-page 16
SRL
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 2. Programmer’s Model
Figure 2-4:
dsPIC33E Programmer’s Model Diagram
15
PUSH.S and
POP.S Shadow
Registers
0
W0/WREG
DIV and MUL
Result Registers
W1
Nested DO
Stack
W2
W3
Legend
W4
MAC Operand
Registers
W5
W6
W7
2
Working Registers
W8
Programmer’s
Model
W9
MAC Address
Registers
W10
W11
W12
W13
W14/Frame Pointer
W15/Stack Pointer
Stack Pointer Limit Register
SPLIM
39
15
31
0
ACCA
ACCB
0
22
Program Counter
0
7
0
Data Table Page Address
TABPAG
TBLPAG
9
0
X Data Space Read Page Address
PSVPAG
DSRPAG
8
0
X Data Space Write Page Address
PSVPAG
DSWPAG
15
0
REPEAT Loop Counter
RCOUNT
15
0
DO Loop Counter
DCOUNT
24
0
0
DOSTART
0
DOEND
0
24
15
SA
SB OAB SAB
DA
DC
DO Loop End Address
0
CPU Core Control Register
CORCON
OB
DO Loop Start Address
0
0
OA
DSP
Accumulators
IPL2 IPL1 IPL0 RA
N
OV
Z
C
Status Register
SRH
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
SRL
DS70157F-page 17
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
All registers in the programmer’s model are memory mapped and can be manipulated directly by
the instruction set. A description of each register is provided in Table 2-1.
Note:
Unless otherwise specified, the Programmer’s Model Register Descriptions in
Table 2-1 apply to all MCU and DSC device families.
Table 2-1:
Programmer’s Model Register Descriptions
Register
CORCON
CPU Core Configuration register
PC
23-bit Program Counter
(1)
Program Space Visibility Page Address register
(2)
DSRPAG
Extended Data Space (EDS) Read Page register
DSWPAG(2)
Extended Data Space (EDS) Write Page register
RCOUNT
REPEAT Loop Count register
SPLIM
Stack Pointer Limit Value register
SR
ALU and DSP Engine STATUS register
TBLPAG
Table Memory Page Address register
W0-W15
Working register array
ACCA, ACCB(3)
40-bit DSP Accumulators
DCOUNT(3)
DO Loop Count register
DOSTART(3)
DO Loop Start Address register
DOEND(3)
DO Loop End Address register
PSVPAG
Note 1:
2:
3:
2.3
Description
This register is only available on PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, and dsPIC33F
devices.
This register is only available on PIC24E and dsPIC33E devices.
This register is only available on dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E devices.
WORKING REGISTER ARRAY
The 16 working (W) registers can function as data, address or offset registers. The function of a
W register is determined by the instruction that accesses it.
Byte instructions, which target the working register array, only affect the Least Significant Byte
(LSB) of the target register. Since the working registers are memory mapped, the Least and Most
Significant Bytes can be manipulated through byte-wide data memory space accesses.
2.4
DEFAULT WORKING REGISTER (WREG)
The instruction set can be divided into two instruction types: working register instructions and file
register instructions. The working register instructions use the working register array as data
values or as addresses that point to a memory location. In contrast, file register instructions
operate on a specific memory address contained in the instruction opcode.
File register instructions that also utilize a working register do not specify the working register that
is to be used for the instruction. Instead, a default working register (WREG) is used for these file
register instructions. Working register, W0, is assigned to be the WREG. The WREG assignment
is not programmable.
2.5
SOFTWARE STACK FRAME POINTER
A frame is a user-defined section of memory in the stack, used by a function to allocate memory
for local variables. W14 has been assigned for use as a Stack Frame Pointer with the link (LNK)
and unlink (ULNK) instructions. However, if a Stack Frame Pointer and the LNK and ULNK
instructions are not used, W14 can be used by any instruction in the same manner as all other
W registers. On dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, a Stack Frame Active (SFA) Status bit is used
to support nested stack frames. See Section 4.7.2 “Software Stack Frame Pointer” for
detailed information about the Frame Pointer.
DS70157F-page 18
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 2. Programmer’s Model
2.6
SOFTWARE STACK POINTER
W15 serves as a dedicated Software Stack Pointer, and will be automatically modified by function
calls, exception processing and returns. However, W15 can be referenced by any instruction in
the same manner as all other W registers. This simplifies reading, writing and manipulating the
Stack Pointer. Refer to Section 4.7.1 “Software Stack Pointer” for detailed information about
the Stack Pointer.
2.7
STACK POINTER LIMIT REGISTER (SPLIM)
The SPLIM is a 16-bit register associated with the Stack Pointer. It is used to prevent the Stack
Pointer from overflowing and accessing memory beyond the user allocated region of stack
memory. Refer to Section 4.7.3 “Stack Pointer Overflow” for detailed information about the
SPLIM.
ACCUMULATOR A AND ACCUMULATOR B (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F AND
dsPIC33E DEVICES)
Accumulator A (ACCA) and Accumulator B (ACCB) are 40-bit wide registers, utilized by DSP
instructions to perform mathematical and shifting operations. Each accumulator is composed of
3 memory mapped registers:
• AccxU (bits 39-32)
• AccxH (bits 31-16)
• AccxL (bits 15-0)
In dsPIC33E devices, Accumulator A and Accumulator B can also be used as destination
registers in MCU MUL.xx instructions. This helps reduce the execution time of
extended-precision arithmetic operations.
Refer to Section 4.12 “Accumulator Usage (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F and dsPIC33E Devices)”
for details on using ACCA and ACCB.
2.9
PROGRAM COUNTER
The Program Counter (PC) is 23 bits wide. Instructions are addressed in the 4M x 24-bit user
program memory space by PC<22:1>, where PC<0> is always set to ‘0’ to maintain instruction
word alignment and provide compatibility with data space addressing. This means that during
normal instruction execution, the PC increments by 2.
Program memory located at 0x800000 and above is utilized for device configuration data, Unit ID
and Device ID. This region is not available for user code execution and the PC can not access
this area. However, one may access this region of memory using table instructions. For details
on accessing the configuration data, Unit ID, and Device ID, refer to the specific device family
reference manual.
2.10
TBLPAG REGISTER
The TBLPAG register is used to hold the upper 8 bits of a program memory address during table
read and write operations. Table instructions are used to transfer data between program memory
space and data memory space. For details on accessing program memory with the table
instructions, refer to the family reference manual of the specific device.
2.11
PSVPAG REGISTER (PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F AND dsPIC33F)
Program space visibility allows the user to map a 32-Kbyte section of the program memory space
into the upper 32 Kbytes of data address space. This feature allows transparent access of
constant data through instructions that operate on data memory. The PSVPAG register selects
the 32-Kbyte region of program memory space that is mapped to the data address space. For
details on program space visibility, refer to the specific device family reference manual.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 19
Programmer’s
Model
2.8
2
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
2.12
RCOUNT REGISTER
The 14-bit RCOUNT register (16-bit for PIC24E and dsPIC33E devices) register contains the
loop counter for the REPEAT instruction. When a REPEAT instruction is executed, RCOUNT is
loaded with the repeat count of the instruction, either “lit14” for the “REPEAT #lit14” instruction
(“lit15” for the “REPEAT #lit15” instruction for PIC24E and dsPIC33E devices), or the 14 LSb
of the Wn register for the “REPEAT Wn” instruction (entire Wn for PIC24E and dsPIC33E
devices). The REPEAT loop will be executed RCOUNT + 1 time.
Note 1: If a REPEAT loop is executing and gets interrupted, RCOUNT may be cleared by
the Interrupt Service Routine to break out of the REPEAT loop when the foreground
code is re-entered.
2: Refer to the specific device family reference manual for complete details about
REPEAT loops.
2.13
DCOUNT REGISTER (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F AND dsPIC33E DEVICES)
The 14-bit DCOUNT register (16-bit for dsPIC33E devices) contains the loop counter for
hardware DO loops. When a DO instruction is executed, DCOUNT is loaded with the loop count
of the instruction, either “lit14” for the “DO #lit14,Expr” instruction (“lit15” for the “DO
#lit15,Expr” instruction for dsPIC33E devices) or the 14 LSb of the Ws register for the “DO
Ws,Expr” instruction (entire Wn for dsPIC33E devices). The DO loop will be executed
DCOUNT + 1 times.
Note 1: In dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F devices, the DCOUNT register contains a shadow
register. See Section 2.18 “Shadow Registers” for information on shadow registers.
2: The dsPIC33E devices have a 4-level-deep, nested DO stack instead of a shadow
register.
3: Refer to the specific device family reference manual for complete details about DO
loops.
2.14
DOSTART REGISTER (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F AND dsPIC33E DEVICES)
The DOSTART register contains the starting address for a hardware DO loop. When a DO
instruction is executed, DOSTART is loaded with the address of the instruction that follows the
DO instruction. This location in memory is the start of the DO loop. When looping is activated,
program execution continues with the instruction stored at the DOSTART address after the last
instruction in the DO loop is executed. This mechanism allows for zero overhead looping.
Note 1: For dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F devices, DOSTART has a shadow register. See
Section 2.18 “Shadow Registers” for information on shadowing.
2: The dsPIC33E devices have a 4-level-deep, nested DO stack instead of a shadow
register. The DOSTART register is read-only in dsPIC33E devices.
3: Refer to the specific device family reference manual for complete details about DO
loops.
DS70157F-page 20
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 2. Programmer’s Model
2.15
DOEND REGISTER (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F AND dsPIC33E DEVICES)
The DOEND register contains the ending address for a hardware DO loop. When a DO instruction
is executed, DOEND is loaded with the address specified by the expression in the DO instruction.
This location in memory specifies the last instruction in the DO loop. When looping is activated
and the instruction stored at the DOEND address is executed, program execution will continue
from the DO loop start address (stored in the DOSTART register).
Note 1: For dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F devices, DOEND has a shadow register. See
Section 2.18 “Shadow Registers” for information on shadow registers.
2: The dsPIC33E devices have a 4-level-deep, nested DO stack instead of a shadow
register.
3: Refer to the specific device family reference manual for complete details about DO
loops.
STATUS REGISTER
The 16-bit STATUS register maintains status information for the instructions which have been
executed most recently. Operation Status bits exist for MCU operations, loop operations and
DSP operations. Additionally, the STATUS register contains the CPU Interrupt Priority Level bits,
IPL<2:0>, which are used for interrupt processing.
Depending on the MCU and DSC family, one of the following STATUS registers is used:
• Register 2-1 for PIC24F, PIC24H, and PIC24E devices
• Register 2-2 for dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F devices
• Register 2-3 for dsPIC33E devices
2.16.1
MCU ALU Status Bits
The MCU operation Status bits are either affected or used by the majority of instructions in the
instruction set. Most of the logic, math, rotate/shift and bit instructions modify the MCU Status bits
after execution, and the conditional Branch instructions use the state of individual Status bits to
determine the flow of program execution. All conditional branch instructions are listed in Section
4.8 “Conditional Branch Instructions”.
The Carry (C), Zero (Z), Overflow (OV), Negative (N), and Digit Carry (DC) bits show the
immediate status of the MCU ALU by indicating whether an operation has resulted in a Carry,
Zero, Overflow, Negative result, or Digit Carry. When a subtract operation is performed, the C
flag is used as a Borrow flag.
The Z Status bit is useful for extended precision arithmetic. The Z Status bit functions like a
normal Z flag for all instructions except those that use a carry or borrow input (ADDC, CPB,
SUBB and SUBBR). See Section 4.9 “Z Status Bit” for more detailed information.
Note 1: All MCU bits are shadowed during execution of the PUSH.S instruction and they are
restored on execution of the POP.S instruction.
2: All MCU bits, except the DC flag (which is not in the SRL), are stacked during
exception processing (see Section 4.7.1 “Software Stack Pointer”).
2.16.2
REPEAT Loop Status Bit
The REPEAT Active bit (RA) is used to indicate when looping is active. The RA flag indicates that
a REPEAT instruction is being executed, and it is only affected by the REPEAT instructions. The
RA flag is set to ‘1’ when the instruction being repeated begins execution, and it is cleared when
the instruction being repeated completes execution for the last time.
Since the RA flag is also read-only, it may not be directly cleared. However, if a REPEAT or its
target instruction is interrupted, the Interrupt Service Routine may clear the RA flag of the SRL,
which resides on the stack. This action will disable looping once program execution returns from
the Interrupt Service Routine, because the restored RA will be ‘0’.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 21
Programmer’s
Model
2.16
2
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
2.16.3
DO Active bit (DA) (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F and dsPIC33E Devices)
The DO Active bit (DA) is used to indicate when looping is active. The DO instructions affect the
DA flag, which indicates that a DO loop is active. The DA flag is set to ‘1’ when the first instruction
of the DO loop is executed, and it is cleared when the last instruction of the loop completes final
execution.
The DA flag is read-only. This means that looping is not initiated by writing a ‘1’ to DA, nor is it
terminated by writing a ‘0’ to DA. If a DO loop must be terminated prematurely, the EDT bit,
CORCON<11>, should be used.
DS70157F-page 22
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 2. Programmer’s Model
2.16.4
DSP ALU Status Bits (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F and dsPIC33E
Devices)
The high byte of the STATUS Register (SRH) is used by the DSP class of instructions, and it is
modified when data passes through one of the adders. The SRH provides status information
about overflow and saturation for both accumulators. The Saturate A, Saturate B, Overflow A and
Overflow B (SA, SB, OA, OB) bits provide individual accumulator status, while the Saturate AB
and Overflow AB (SAB, OAB) bits provide combined accumulator status. The SAB and OAB bits
provide an efficient method for the software developer to check the register for saturation or
overflow.
The SA and SB bits are used to indicate when an operation has generated an overflow out of the
MSb of the respective accumulator. The SA and SB bits are active, regardless of the Saturation
mode (Disabled, Normal or Super) and may be considered “sticky”. Namely, once the SA or SB
bit is set to ‘1’, it can only be cleared manually by software, regardless of subsequent DSP
operations. When it is required, the BCLR instruction can be used to clear the SA or SB bit.
In addition, the SA and SB bits can be set by software in dsPIC33E devices, enabling efficient
context state switching.
For convenience, the OA and OB bits are logically ORed together to form the OAB flag, and the
SA and SB bits are logically ORed to form the SAB flag. These cumulative Status bits provide
efficient overflow and saturation checking when an algorithm is implemented. Instead of
interrogating the OA and the OB bits independently for arithmetic overflows, a single check of
OAB can be performed. Likewise, when checking for saturation, SAB may be examined instead
of checking both the SA and SB bits. Note that clearing the SAB flag will clear both the SA and
SB bits.
2.16.5
Interrupt Priority Level Status Bits
The three Interrupt Priority Level (IPL) bits of the SRL, SR<7:5>, and the IPL3 bit, CORCON<3>,
set the CPU’s IPL which is used for exception processing. Exceptions consist of interrupts and
hardware traps. Interrupts have a user-defined priority level between 0 and 7, while traps have a
fixed priority level between 8 and 15. The fourth Interrupt Priority Level bit, IPL3, is a special IPL
bit that may only be read or cleared by the user. This bit is only set when a hardware trap is
activated and it is cleared after the trap is serviced.
The CPU’s IPL identifies the lowest level exception which may interrupt the processor. The
interrupt level of a pending exception must always be greater than the CPU’s IPL for the CPU to
process the exception. This means that if the IPL is 0, all exceptions at priority Level 1 and above
may interrupt the processor. If the IPL is 7, only hardware traps may interrupt the processor.
When an exception is serviced, the IPL is automatically set to the priority level of the exception
being serviced, which will disable all exceptions of equal and lower priority. However, since the
IPL field is read/write, one may modify the lower three bits of the IPL in an Interrupt Service
Routine to control which exceptions may preempt the exception processing. Since the SRL is
stacked during exception processing, the original IPL is always restored after the exception is
serviced. If required, one may also prevent exceptions from nesting by setting the NSTDIS bit
(INTCON1<15>).
Note:
For more detailed information on exception processing, refer to the family reference
manual of the specific device.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 23
2
Programmer’s
Model
The OA and OB bits are used to indicate when an operation has generated an overflow into the
guard bits (bits 32 through 39) of the respective accumulator. This condition can only occur when
the processor is in Super Saturation mode, or if saturation is disabled. It indicates that the
operation has generated a number which cannot be represented with the lower 31 bits of the
accumulator. The OA and OB bits are writable in dsPIC33E devices.
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
2.17
CORE CONTROL REGISTER
For all MCU and DSC devices, the 16-bit CPU Core Control register (CORCON), is used to set
the configuration of the CPU. This register provides the ability to map program space into data
space.
In addition to setting CPU modes, the CORCON register contains status information about the
IPL<3> Status bit, which indicates if a trap exception is being processed.
Depending on the MCU and DSC family, one of the following CORCON registers is used:
•
•
•
•
Register 2-4 for PIC24F and PIC24H devices
Register 2-5 for PIC24E devices
Register 2-6 for dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F devices
Register 2-7 for dsPIC33E devices
2.17.1
dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E Specific bits
In addition to setting CPU modes, the following features are available through the CORCON
register:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Set the ACCA and ACCB saturation enable
Set the Data Space Write Saturation mode
Set the Accumulator Saturation and Rounding modes
Set the Multiplier mode for DSP operations
Terminate DO loops prematurely
Provide status information about the DO loop nesting level (DL<2:0>)
Select fixed or variable interrupt latency (dsPIC33E only)
2.17.1.1
PIC24E and dsPIC33E SPECIFIC BITS
A Status bit (SFA) is available that indicates whether the Stack Frame is active.
Note:
2.18
PIC24E and dsPIC33E devices do not have a PSV control bit, it has been replaced
by the SFA bit.
SHADOW REGISTERS
A shadow register is used as a temporary holding register and can transfer its contents to or from
the associated host register when instructed. Some of the registers in the programmer’s model
have a shadow register, which is utilized during the execution of a DO, POP.S, or PUSH.S
instruction. Shadow register usage is shown in Table 2-2.
Note:
The DO instruction is only available in dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E devices.
Table 2-2:
Automatic Shadow Register Usage
DO(1)
POP.S/PUSH.S
DCOUNT(1)
Yes
—
DOSTART(1)
Yes
—
Location
Yes
—
DOEND(1)
STATUS Register – DC, N, OV, Z and C bits
—
Yes
W0-W3
—
Yes
Note 1: The DO shadow registers are only available in dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F devices.
For dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F devices, since the DCOUNT, DOSTART and DOEND registers are
shadowed, the ability to nest DO loops without additional overhead is provided. Since all shadow
registers are one register deep, up to one level of DO loop nesting is possible. Further nesting of
DO loops is possible in software, with support provided by the DO Loop Nesting Level Status bits
(DL<2:0>) in the CORCON register (CORCON<10:8>).
Note:
DS70157F-page 24
All shadow registers are one register deep and not directly accessible. Additional
shadowing may be performed in software using the software stack.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 2. Programmer’s Model
2.19
DO STACK (dsPIC33E DEVICES)
The DO stack is used to preserve the following elements associated with a DO loop underway
when another DO loop is encountered (i.e., a nested DO loop).
• DOSTART register value
• DOEND register value
• DCOUNT register value
Note that the DO level status field (DL<2:0>) also acts as a pointer to address the DO stack. After
the DO instruction is executed, the DO level status field (DL<2:0>) points to the next free entry.
The DOSTART, DOEND, and DCOUNT registers each have an associated hardware stack that
allows the DO loop hardware to support up to three levels of nesting. A conceptual representation
of the DO stack is shown in Figure 2-5.
Programmer’s
Model
Figure 2-5:
DO Stack Conceptual Diagram
DL<2:0>
DOSTART
DOEND
000
Empty
001
Level 1 Registers
010
Level 2 Registers
011
Level 3 Registers
DCOUNT
100
Note 1:
For DO register entries, DL<2:0> represents the value before the DO stack is executed.
2:
For DO instruction buffer entries, DL<2:0> represents the value after the DO stack is executed.
3:
If DL<2:0> = 0, no DO loops are active (DA = 0).
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
2
DS70157F-page 25
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Register 2-1:
SR: CPU STATUS Register (PIC24H, PIC24F and PIC24E Devices)
U-0
U-0
U-0
U-0
U-0
U-0
U-0
R/W-0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
DC
bit 15
bit 8
R/W-0
R/W-0
IPL2(1,2)
(1,2)
IPL1
R/W-0
IPL0
(1,2)
R-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
RA
N
OV
Z
C
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
C = Clearable bit
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
x = Bit is unknown
bit 15-9
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 8
DC: MCU ALU Half Carry/Borrow bit
1 = A carry-out from the 4th low order bit (for byte-sized data) or 8th low order bit (for word-sized data
of the result occurred
0 = No carry-out from the 4th low order bit (for byte-sized data) or 8th low order bit (for word-sized data
of the result occurred
bit 7-5
IPL<2:0>: CPU Interrupt Priority Level Status bits(1,2)
111 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 7 (15). User interrupts disabled
110 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 6 (14)
101 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 5 (13)
100 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 4 (12)
011 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 3 (11)
010 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 2 (10)
001 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 1 (9)
000 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 0 (8)
bit 4
RA: REPEAT Loop Active bit
1 = REPEAT loop in progress
0 = REPEAT loop not in progress
bit 3
N: MCU ALU Negative bit
1 = Result was negative
0 = Result was non-negative (zero or positive)
bit 2
OV: MCU ALU Overflow bit
This bit is used for signed arithmetic (2’s complement). It indicates an overflow of the magnitude that
causes the sign bit to change state.
1 = Overflow occurred for signed arithmetic (in this arithmetic operation)
0 = No overflow occurred
bit 1
Z: MCU ALU Zero bit
1 = An operation that affects the Z bit has set it at some time in the past
0 = The most recent operation that affects the Z bit has cleared it (i.e., a non-zero result)
bit 0
C: MCU ALU Carry/Borrow bit
1 = A carry-out from the MSb occurred
0 = No carry-out from the MSb occurred
Note 1:
2:
The IPL<2:0> bits are concatenated with the IPL3 bit (CORCON<3>) to form the CPU Interrupt Priority
Level. The value in parentheses indicates the IPL, if IPL3 = 1. User interrupts are disabled when
IPL<3> = 1.
The IPL<2:0> Status bits are read only when the NSTDIS bit (INTCON1<15>) = 1. Refer to the family
reference manual of the specific device family to see the associated interrupt register.
DS70157F-page 26
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 2. Programmer’s Model
Register 2-2:
SR: CPU STATUS Register (dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F Devices)
R-0
OA
R-0
R/C-0
R/C-0
OB
SA(1,2)
(1,2)
SB
R-0
OAB
R/C-0
SAB
(1,2,3)
R-0
R/W-0
(4)
DA
DC
bit 15
bit 8
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
(5)
(5)
(5)
RA
N
OV
Z
C
IPL1
IPL2
IPL0
bit 7
bit 0
2
Legend:
W = Writable bit
C = Clearable bit
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
x = Bit is unknown
bit 15
OA: Accumulator A Overflow bit
1 = Accumulator A overflowed
0 = Accumulator A has not overflowed
bit 14
OB: Accumulator B Overflow bit
1 = Accumulator B overflowed
0 = Accumulator B has not overflowed
bit 13
SA: Accumulator A Saturation bit(1, 2)
1 = Accumulator A is saturated or has been saturated since this bit was last cleared
0 = Accumulator A is not saturated
bit 12
SB: Accumulator B Saturation bit(1, 2)
1 = Accumulator B is saturated or has been saturated at since this bit was last cleared
0 = Accumulator B is not saturated
bit 11
OAB: OA || OB Combined Accumulator Overflow bit
1 = Accumulator A or B has overflowed
0 = Neither Accumulator A nor B has overflowed
bit 10
SAB: SA || SB Combined Accumulator bit(1, 2, 3)
1 = Accumulator A or B is saturated or has been saturated since this bit was last cleared
0 = Neither Accumulator A nor B is saturated
bit 9
DA: DO Loop Active bit(4)
1 = DO loop in progress
0 = DO loop not in progress
bit 8
DC: MCU ALU Half Carry bit
1 = A carry-out from the MSb of the lower nibble occurred
0 = No carry-out from the MSb of the lower nibble occurred
bit 7-5
IPL<2:0>: Interrupt Priority Level bits(5)
111 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 7 (15). User interrupts disabled
110 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 6 (14)
101 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 5 (13)
100 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 4 (12)
011 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 3 (11)
010 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 2 (10)
001 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 1 (9)
000 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 0 (8)
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
This bit may be read or cleared, but not set.
Once this bit is set, it must be cleared manually by software.
Clearing this bit will clear SA and SB.
This bit is read-only.
The IPL<2:0> bits are concatenated with the IPL3 bit (CORCON<3>) to form the CPU Interrupt Priority
Level. The value in parentheses indicates the IPL, if IPL3 = 1.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 27
Programmer’s
Model
R = Readable bit
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Register 2-2:
SR: CPU STATUS Register (dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F Devices) (Continued)
bit 4
RA: REPEAT Loop Active bit
1 = REPEAT loop in progress
0 = REPEAT loop not in progress
bit 3
N: MCU ALU Negative bit
1 = The result of the operation was negative
0 = The result of the operation was not negative
bit 2
OV: MCU ALU Overflow bit
1 = Overflow occurred
0 = No overflow occurred
bit 1
Z: MCU ALU Zero bit
1 = The result of the operation was zero
0 = The result of the operation was not zero
bit 0
C: MCU ALU Carry/Borrow bit
1 = A carry-out from the MSb occurred
0 = No carry-out from the MSb occurred
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
This bit may be read or cleared, but not set.
Once this bit is set, it must be cleared manually by software.
Clearing this bit will clear SA and SB.
This bit is read-only.
The IPL<2:0> bits are concatenated with the IPL3 bit (CORCON<3>) to form the CPU Interrupt Priority
Level. The value in parentheses indicates the IPL, if IPL3 = 1.
DS70157F-page 28
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 2. Programmer’s Model
Register 2-3:
SR: CPU STATUS Register (dsPIC33E Devices)
R/W-0
R/W-0
OA
OB
R/W-0
(3)
SA
R/W-0
(3)
SB
R/C-0
R/C-0
R -0
R/W-0
OAB
SAB
DA
DC
bit 15
bit 8
R/W-0
R/W-0
IPL2(1,2)
(1,2)
IPL1
R/W-0
IPL0
(1,2)
R-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
RA
N
OV
Z
C
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
2
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
W = Writable bit
C = Clearable bit
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
x = Bit is unknown
bit 15
OA: Accumulator A Overflow Status bit
1 = Accumulator A has overflowed
0 = Accumulator A has not overflowed
bit 14
OB: Accumulator B Overflow Status bit
1 = Accumulator B has overflowed
0 = Accumulator B has not overflowed
bit 13
SA: Accumulator A Saturation Status bit
1 = Accumulator A is saturated or has been saturated since this bit was last cleared
0 = Accumulator A is not saturated
bit 12
SB: Accumulator B Saturation Status bit
1 = Accumulator B is saturated or has been saturated since this bit was last cleared
0 = Accumulator B is not saturated
bit 11
OAB: OA || OB Combined Accumulator Overflow Status bit
1 = Accumulator A or B has overflowed
0 = Neither Accumulator A nor B has overflowed
bit 10
SAB: SA || SB Combined Accumulator Status bit
1 = Accumulator A or B is saturated or has been saturated since this bit was last cleared
0 = Neither Accumulator A nor B is saturated
bit 9
DA: DO Loop Active bit
1 = DO loop in progress
0 = DO loop not in progress
bit 8
DC: MCU ALU Half Carry/Borrow bit
1 = A carry-out from the 4th low order bit (for byte-sized data) or 8th low order bit (for word-sized data
of the result occurred
0 = No carry-out from the 4th low order bit (for byte-sized data) or 8th low order bit (for word-sized data
of the result occurred
Note 1:
2:
3:
The IPL<2:0> bits are concatenated with the IPL3 bit (CORCON<3>) to form the CPU Interrupt Priority
Level. The value in parentheses indicates the IPL, if IPL3 = 1. User interrupts are disabled when IPL3 = 1.
The IPL<2:0> Status bits are read only when NSTDIS bit (INTCON1<15>) = 1. Refer to the family
reference manual of the specific device family to see the associated interrupt register.
A data write to SR can modify the SA or SB bits by either a data write to SA and SB or by clearing the SAB
bit. To avoid a possible SA/SB bit write race-condition, the SA and SB bits should not be modified using bit
operations.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 29
Programmer’s
Model
R = Readable bit
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Register 2-3:
SR: CPU STATUS Register (dsPIC33E Devices) (Continued)
bit 7-5
IPL<2:0>: CPU Interrupt Priority Level Status bits(1,2)
111 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 7 (15). User interrupts disabled
110 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 6 (14)
101 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 5 (13)
100 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 4 (12)
011 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 3 (11)
010 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 2 (10)
001 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 1 (9)
000 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 0 (8)
bit 4
RA: REPEAT Loop Active bit
1 = REPEAT loop in progress
0 = REPEAT loop not in progress
bit 3
N: MCU ALU Negative bit
1 = Result was negative
0 = Result was non-negative (zero or positive)
bit 2
OV: MCU ALU Overflow bit
This bit is used for signed arithmetic (2’s complement). It indicates an overflow of the magnitude that
causes the sign bit to change state.
1 = Overflow occurred for signed arithmetic (in this arithmetic operation)
0 = No overflow occurred
bit 1
Z: MCU ALU Zero bit
1 = The result of the operation was zero
0 = The result of the operation was not zero
bit 0
C: MCU ALU Carry/Borrow bit
1 = A carry-out from the MSb of the result occurred
0 = No carry-out from the MSb of the result occurred
Note 1:
2:
3:
The IPL<2:0> bits are concatenated with the IPL3 bit (CORCON<3>) to form the CPU Interrupt Priority
Level. The value in parentheses indicates the IPL, if IPL3 = 1. User interrupts are disabled when IPL3 = 1.
The IPL<2:0> Status bits are read only when NSTDIS bit (INTCON1<15>) = 1. Refer to the family
reference manual of the specific device family to see the associated interrupt register.
A data write to SR can modify the SA or SB bits by either a data write to SA and SB or by clearing the SAB
bit. To avoid a possible SA/SB bit write race-condition, the SA and SB bits should not be modified using bit
operations.
DS70157F-page 30
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 2. Programmer’s Model
Register 2-4:
CORCON: Core Control Register (PIC24F and PIC24H Devices)
U-0
U-0
U-0
U-0
U-0
U-0
U-0
U-0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
bit 15
bit 8
U-0
U-0
—
U-0
—
—
U-0
—
R/C-0
IPL3
(1,2)
R/W-0
U-0
U-0
PSV
—
—
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
C = Clearable bit
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
x = Bit is unknown
Programmer’s
Model
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
bit 15-4
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 3
IPL3: Interrupt Priority Level 3 Status bit(1,2)
1 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 8 or greater (trap exception activated)
0 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 7 or less (no trap exception activated)
bit 2
PSV: Program Space Visibility in Data Space Enable bit
1 = Program space visible in data space
0 = Program space not visible in data space
bit 1-0
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
Note 1:
2:
This bit may be read or cleared, but not set.
This bit is concatenated with the IPL<2:0> bits (SR<7:5>) to form the CPU Interrupt Priority Level.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
2
DS70157F-page 31
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Register 2-5:
CORCON: Core Control Register (PIC24E Devices)
R/W-0
U-0
U-0
U-0
U-0
U-0
U-0
U-0
VAR
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
bit 15
bit 8
U-0
U-0
—
—
U-0
—
U-0
—
R/C-0
(1,2)
IPL3
R-0
U-0
U-0
SFA
—
—
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
x = Bit is unknown
bit 15
VAR: Variable Exception Processing Latency Control bit
1 = Variable (bounded deterministic) exception processing latency
0 = Fixed (fully deterministic) exception processing latency
bit 14-4
Unimplemented: Read as '0’
bit 3
IPL3: CPU Interrupt Priority Level Status bit 3(1)
1 = CPU interrupt priority level is greater than 7
0 = CPU interrupt priority level is 7 or less
bit 2
SFA: Stack Frame Active Status bit
1 = Stack frame is active. W14 and W15 address 0x0000 to 0xFFFF, regardless of DSRPAG and
DSWPAG values.
0 = Stack frame is not active. W14 and W15 address of EDS or Base Data Space
bit 1-0
Unimplemented: Read as '0’
Note 1:
2:
This bit may be read or cleared, but not set.
The IPL3 bit is concatenated with the IPL<2:0> bits (SR<7:5>) to form the CPU interrupt priority level.
DS70157F-page 32
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 2. Programmer’s Model
Register 2-6:
CORCON: Core Control Register (dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F Devices)
U-0
U-0
U-0
R/W-0
R(0)/W-0
—
—
—
US
EDT(1)
R-0
R-0
R-0
DL<2:0>(2,3)
bit 15
bit 8
R/W-0
R/W-0
SATA
SATB
R/W-1
SATDW
R/W-0
ACCSAT
R/C-0
(4,5)
IPL3
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
PSV
RND
IF
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
C = Clearable bit
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
x = Bit is unknown
Programmer’s
Model
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
bit 15-13
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 12
US: Unsigned or Signed Multiplier Mode Select bit
1 = Unsigned mode enabled for DSP multiply operations
0 = Signed mode enabled for DSP multiply operations
bit 11
EDT: Early DO Loop Termination Control bit(1)
1 = Terminate executing DO loop at end of current iteration
0 = No effect
bit 10-8
DL<2:0>: DO Loop Nesting Level Status bits(2, 3)
111 = DO looping is nested at 7 levels
110 = DO looping is nested at 6 levels
110 = DO looping is nested at 5 levels
110 = DO looping is nested at 4 levels
011 = DO looping is nested at 3 levels
010 = DO looping is nested at 2 levels
001 = DO looping is active, but not nested (just 1 level)
000 = DO looping is not active
bit 7
SATA: ACCA Saturation Enable bit
1 = Accumulator A saturation enabled
0 = Accumulator A saturation disabled
bit 6
SATB: ACCB Saturation Enable bit
1 = Accumulator B saturation enabled
0 = Accumulator B saturation disabled
bit 5
SATDW: Data Space Write from DSP Engine Saturation Enable bit
1 = Data space write saturation enabled
0 = Data space write saturation disabled
bit 4
ACCSAT: Accumulator Saturation Mode Select bit
1 = 9.31 saturation (Super Saturation)
0 = 1.31 saturation (Normal Saturation)
bit 3
IPL3: Interrupt Priority Level 3 Status bit(4, 5)
1 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 8 or greater (trap exception activated)
0 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 7 or less (no trap exception activated)
bit 2
PSV: Program Space Visibility in Data Space Enable bit
1 = Program space visible in data space
0 = Program space not visible in data space
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
This bit will always read ‘0’.
DL<2:1> are read-only.
The first two levels of DO loop nesting are handled by hardware.
This bit may be read or cleared, but not set.
This bit is concatenated with the IPL<2:0> bits (SR<7:5>) to form the CPU Interrupt Priority Level.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
2
DS70157F-page 33
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Register 2-6:
CORCON: Core Control Register (dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F Devices) (Continued)
bit 1
RND: Rounding Mode Select bit
1 = Biased (conventional) rounding enabled
0 = Unbiased (convergent) rounding enabled
bit 0
IF: Integer or Fractional Multiplier Mode Select bit
1 = Integer mode enabled for DSP multiply operations
0 = Fractional mode enabled for DSP multiply operations
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
This bit will always read ‘0’.
DL<2:1> are read-only.
The first two levels of DO loop nesting are handled by hardware.
This bit may be read or cleared, but not set.
This bit is concatenated with the IPL<2:0> bits (SR<7:5>) to form the CPU Interrupt Priority Level.
DS70157F-page 34
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 2. Programmer’s Model
Register 2-7:
CORCON: Core Control Register (dsPIC33E Devices)
R/W-0
U-0
VAR
R/W-0
—
R/W-0
R/W-0
US<1:0>
EDT
R-0
(1)
R-0
R-0
DL<2:0>
bit 15
bit 8
R/W-0
R/W-0
SATA
SATB
R/W-1
SATDW
R/W-0
R/C-0
R-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
ACCSAT
IPL3(2,3)
SFA
RND
IF
bit 7
bit 0
2
Legend:
W = Writable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
bit 15
VAR: Variable Exception Processing Latency Control bit
1 = Variable (bounded deterministic) exception processing latency
0 = Fixed (fully deterministic) exception processing latency
bit 14
Unimplemented: Read as '0’
bit 13-12
US<1:0>: DSP Multiply Unsigned/Signed Control bits
11 = Reserved
10 = DSP engine multiplies are mixed-sign
01 = DSP engine multiplies are unsigned
00 = DSP engine multiplies are signed
bit 11
EDT: Early DO Loop Termination Control bit(1)
1 = Terminate executing DO loop at end of current loop iteration
0 = No effect
bit 10-8
DL<2:0>: DO Loop Nesting Level Status bits
111 = 7 DO loops active
•
•
•
001 = 1 DO loop active
000 = 0 DO loops active
bit 7
SATA: ACCA Saturation Enable bit
1 = Accumulator A saturation enabled
0 = Accumulator A saturation disabled
bit 6
SATB: ACCB Saturation Enable bit
1 = Accumulator B saturation enabled
0 = Accumulator B saturation disabled
bit 5
SATDW: Data Space Write from DSP Engine Saturation Enable bit
1 = Data space write saturation enabled
0 = Data space write saturation disabled
bit 4
ACCSAT: Accumulator Saturation Mode Select bit
1 = 9.31 saturation (super saturation)
0 = 1.31 saturation (normal saturation)
bit 3
IPL3: CPU Interrupt Priority Level Status bit 3(2)
1 = CPU interrupt priority level is greater than 7
0 = CPU interrupt priority level is 7 or less
Note 1:
2:
3:
x = Bit is unknown
This bit always reads as ‘0’.
This bit may be read or cleared, but not set.
The IPL3 bit is concatenated with the IPL<2:0> bits (SR<7:5>) to form the CPU interrupt priority level.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 35
Programmer’s
Model
R = Readable bit
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Register 2-7:
CORCON: Core Control Register (dsPIC33E Devices) (Continued)
bit 2
SFA: Stack Frame Active Status bit
1 = Stack frame is active. W14 and W15 address 0x0000 to 0xFFFF, regardless of DSRPAG and
DSWPAG values.
0 = Stack frame is not active. W14 and W15 address of EDS or Base Data Space
bit 1
RND: Rounding Mode Select bit
1 = Biased (conventional) rounding enabled
0 = Unbiased (convergent) rounding enabled
bit 0
IF: Integer or Fractional Multiplier Mode Select bit
1 = Integer mode enabled for DSP multiply
0 = Fractional mode enabled for DSP multiply
Note 1:
2:
3:
This bit always reads as ‘0’.
This bit may be read or cleared, but not set.
The IPL3 bit is concatenated with the IPL<2:0> bits (SR<7:5>) to form the CPU interrupt priority level.
DS70157F-page 36
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 3. Instruction Set Overview
HIGHLIGHTS
This section of the manual contains the following major topics:
3.1
3.2
3.3
Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 38
Instruction Set Overview ................................................................................................. 38
Instruction Set Summary Tables ..................................................................................... 40
3
Instruction Set
Overview
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 37
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
3.1
INTRODUCTION
The 16-bit MCU and DSC instruction set provides a broad suite of instructions that support
traditional microcontroller applications, and a class of instructions that support math intensive
applications. Since almost all of the functionality of the 8-bit PIC MCU instruction set has been
maintained, this hybrid instruction set allows an easy 16-bit migration path for users already
familiar with the PIC microcontroller.
3.2
INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW
Depending on the device family, the 16-bit MCU and DSC instruction set contains up to 84
instructions, which can be grouped into the functional categories shown in Table 3-1. Table 1-2
defines the symbols used in the instruction summary tables, Table 3-2 through Table 3-11. These
tables define the syntax, description, storage and execution requirements for each instruction.
Storage requirements are represented in 24-bit instruction words and execution requirements
are represented in instruction cycles.
Table 3-1:
Instruction Groups
Functional Group
Summary Table
Page Number
Move Instructions
Table 3-2
40
Math Instructions
Table 3-3
41
Logic Instructions
Table 3-4
43
Rotate/Shift Instructions
Table 3-5
44
Bit Instructions
Table 3-6
45
Compare/Skip and Compare/Branch Instructions
Table 3-7
46
Program Flow Instructions
Table 3-8
47
Shadow/Stack Instructions
Table 3-9
49
Control Instructions
Table 3-10
49
DSP Instructions(1)
Table 3-11
50
Note 1:
DSP instructions are only available in the dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E
device families.
Most instructions have several different Addressing modes and execution flows, which require
different instruction variants. For instance, depending on the device family, there are up to six
unique ADD instructions and each instruction variant has its own instruction encoding. Instruction
format descriptions and specific instruction operation are provided in Section 5. “Instruction
Descriptions”. Additionally, a composite alphabetized instruction set table is provided in
Section 7. “Reference”.
DS70157F-page 38
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 3. Instruction Set Overview
3.2.1
Multi-Cycle Instructions
As the instruction summary tables show, most instructions execute in a single cycle, with the
following exceptions:
Note:
The DO and DIVF instructions are only available in the dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and
dsPIC33E device families.
• Instructions DO, MOV.D, POP.D, PUSH.D, TBLRDH, TBLRDL, TBLWTH and
TBLWTL require 2 cycles to execute
• Instructions DIV.S, DIV.U and DIVF are single-cycle instructions, which should be
executed 18 consecutive times as the target of a REPEAT instruction
• Instructions that change the program counter also require 2 cycles to execute, with the
extra cycle executed as a NOP. Compare-skip instructions, which skip over a 2-word
instruction, require 3 instruction cycles to execute, with 2 cycles executed as a NOP.
Compare-branch instructions (dsPIC33E/PIC24E devices only) require 5 instruction cycles
to execute when the branch is taken.
• The RETFIE, RETLW and RETURN are a special case of an instruction that changes the
program counter. These execute in 3 cycles, unless an exception is pending and then they
execute in 2 cycles.
Note 1: Instructions which access program memory as data, using Program Space Visibility
(PSV), will incur a one or two cycle delay for PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, and
dsPIC33F devices, whereas using PSV in dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices incurs a
4-cycle delay based on Flash memory access time. However, regardless of which
device is being used, when the target instruction of a REPEAT loop accesses
program memory as data, only the first execution of the target instruction is subject
to the delay. See the specific device family reference manual for details.
3: All read and read-modify-write operations (including bit operations) on non-CPU
Special Function Registers (e.g., I/O Port, peripheral control, or status registers;
interrupt flags, etc.) in PIC24E and dsPIC33E devices require 2 instruction cycles
to execute. However, all write operations on both CPU and non-CPU Special
Function Registers, and all read and read-modify-write operations on CPU Special
Function Registers require 1 instruction cycle.
3.2.2
Multi-Word Instructions
As defined by Table 3-2, almost all instructions consume one instruction word (24 bits), with the
exception of the CALL, DO and GOTO instructions, which are Program Flow Instructions, listed
in Table 3-8. These instructions require two words of memory because their opcodes embed
large literal operands.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 39
Instruction Set
Overview
2: All instructions may incur an additional delay on some device families, depending
on Flash memory access time. For example, PIC24E and dsPIC33E devices have
a 3-cycle Flash memory access time. However, instruction pipelining increases the
effective instruction execution throughput. Refer to Section 2. “CPU” of the
specific device family reference manual for details on instruction timing.
3
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
3.3
INSTRUCTION SET SUMMARY TABLES
Table 3-2:
Move Instructions
Words
Cycles
Page
Number
Swap Wns and Wnd
1
1
243
Move f to destination
1
1
279
Assembly Syntax
EXCH
Wns,Wnd
(1)
Description
MOV
f {,WREG}
MOV
WREG,f
Move WREG to f
1
1
280
MOV
f,Wnd
Move f to Wnd
1
1(4)
281
MOV
Wns,f
Move Wns to f
1
1
282
MOV.B
#lit8,Wnd
Move 8-bit literal to Wnd
1
1
283
MOV
#lit16,Wnd
Move 16-bit literal to Wnd
1
1
284
(4)
285
MOV
[Ws+Slit10],Wnd
Move [Ws + signed 10-bit offset] to Wnd
1
1
MOV
Wns,[Wd+Slit10]
Move Wns to [Wd + signed 10-bit offset]
1
1
286
MOV
Wso,Wdo
Move Wso to Wdo
1
1(4)
287
(4)
289
MOV.D
Ws,Wnd
Move double Ws to Wnd:Wnd + 1
1
MOV.D
Wns,Wd
Move double Wns:Wns + 1 to Wd
1
2
2
289
MOVPAG
#lit10,DSRPAG(2)
Move 10-bit literal to DSRPAG
1
1
291
MOVPAG
#lit9,DSWPAG(2)
Move 9-bit literal to DSWPAG
1
1
291
MOVPAG
#lit8,TBLPAG(2)
Move 8-bit literal to TBLPAG
1
1
291
MOVPAG Wn, DSRPAG(2)
Move Wn to DSRPAG
1
1
292
DSWPAG(2)
Move Wn to DSWPAG
1
1
292
MOVPAG Wn, TBLPAG(2)
Move Wn to TBLPAG
1
1
292
SWAP
Wn = byte or nibble swap Wn
1
1
426
1
2(3)
427
429
MOVPAG Wn,
Wn
TBLRDH
[Ws],Wd
Read high program word to Wd
TBLRDL
[Ws],Wd
Read low program word to Wd
1
2(3)
TBLWTH
Ws,[Wd]
Write Ws to high program word
1
2(4)
431
1
2(4)
433
TBLWTL
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
Ws,[Wd]
Write Ws to low program word
When the optional {,WREG} operand is specified, the destination of the instruction is WREG. When
{,WREG} is not specified, the destination of the instruction is the file register f.
The MOVPAG instruction is only available in dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, these instructions require 3 additional cycles – compared to dsPIC30F,
dsPIC33F, PIC24F and PIC24H devices.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, read and read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function
Registers require an additional cycle when compared to dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, PIC24F and PIC24H
devices.
DS70157F-page 40
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 3. Instruction Set Overview
Table 3-3:
Math Instructions
Assembly Syntax
Description
Words
Cycles
Page
Number
ADD
f {,WREG}(1)
Destination = f + WREG
1
1(5)
99
ADD
#lit10,Wn
Wn = lit10 + Wn
1
1
100
ADD
Wb,#lit5,Wd
Wd = Wb + lit5
1
1
101
ADD
Wb,Ws,Wd
Wd = Wb + Ws
1
1(5)
102
(5)
106
1
107
{,WREG}(1)
ADDC
f
Destination = f + WREG + (C)
1
ADDC
#lit10,Wn
Wn = lit10 + Wn + (C)
1
ADDC
Wb,#lit5,Wd
Wd = Wb + lit5 + (C)
1
1
108
ADDC
Wb,Ws,Wd
Wd = Wb + Ws + (C)
1
1(5)
110
DAW.B
Wn
Wn = decimal adjust Wn
1
1
216
DEC
f {,WREG}(1)
Destination = f – 1
1
1(5)
217
DEC
Ws,Wd
Wd = Ws – 1
1
1(5)
218
Destination = f – 2
1
1(5)
220
221
DEC2
f
{,WREG}(1)
1
DEC2
Ws,Wd
Wd = Ws – 2
1
1(5)
DIV.S
Wm, Wn
Signed 16/16-bit integer divide, Q →W0, R →W1
1
18(2)
224
224
Wm, Wn
Signed 32/16-bit integer divide, Q →W0, R →W1
1
DIV.U
Wm, Wn
Unsigned 16/16-bit integer divide, Q - W0, R →W1
1
18(2)
226
1
18(2)
226
1
18(2)
228
Destination = f + 1
1
1(5)
254
Wd = Ws + 1
1
1(5)
255
Destination = f + 2
1
1(5)
257
Wd = Ws + 2
1
1(5)
258
303
DIV.UD
DIVF
Wm, Wn
Wm, Wn
{,WREG}(1)
INC
f
INC
Ws,Wd
{,WREG}(1)
INC2
f
INC2
Ws,Wd
Unsigned 32/16-bit integer divide, Q - W0, R →W1
Signed 16/16-bit fractional divide, Q - W0, R →W1
MUL
f
W3:W2 = f * WREG
1
1(5)
MUL.SS
Wb,Ws,Wnd
{Wnd + 1,Wnd} = signed(Wb) * signed(Ws)
1
1(5)
305
MUL.SS
Wb,Ws,Acc(4)
Accumulator = signed(Wb) * signed(Ws)
1
1(5)
307
MUL.SU
Wb,#lit5,Wnd
{Wnd + 1, Wnd} = signed(Wb) * unsigned(lit5)
1
1
308
310
MUL.SU
Wb,Ws,Wnd
{Wnd + 1,Wnd} = signed(Wb) * unsigned(Ws)
1
1(5)
MUL.SU
Wb,Ws,Acc(4)
Accumulator = signed(Wb) * unsigned(Ws)
1
1(5)
312
MUL.SU
Wb,#lit5,Acc(4)
Accumulator = signed(Wb) * unsigned(lit5)
1
1
314
MUL.US
Wb,Ws,Wnd
{Wnd + 1,Wnd} = unsigned(Wb) * signed(Ws)
1
1(5)
315
MUL.US
Wb,Ws,Acc(4)
Accumulator = unsigned(Wb) * signed(Ws)
1
1(5)
317
MUL.UU
Wb,#lit5,Wnd
{Wnd + 1, Wnd} = unsigned(Wb) * unsigned(lit5)
1
1
319
320
MUL.UU
Wb,Ws,Wnd
{Wnd + 1,Wnd} = unsigned(Wb) * unsigned(Ws)
1
1(5)
MUL.UU
Wb,Ws,Acc(4)
Accumulator = unsigned(Wb) * unsigned(Ws)
1
1(5)
322
MUL.UU
Wb,#lit5,Acc(4)
Accumulator = unsigned(Wb) * unsigned(lit5)
1
1
323
MULW.SS
Wb,Ws,Wnd(3)
Wnd = signed(Wb) * signed(Ws)
1
1(5)
324
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
When the optional {,WREG} operand is specified, the destination of the instruction is WREG. When
{,WREG} is not specified, the destination of the instruction is the file register f.
The divide instructions must be preceded with a “REPEAT #17” instruction, such that they are executed
18 consecutive times.
These instructions are only available in dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices.
These instructions are only available in dsPIC33E devices.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, read and read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function
Registers require an additional cycle when compared to dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, PIC24F and PIC24H
devices.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 41
3
Instruction Set
Overview
DIV.SD
18(2)
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Table 3-3:
Math Instructions (Continued)
Words
Cycles
Page
Number
Wnd = signed(Wb) * unsigned(Ws)
1
1(5)
326
Assembly Syntax
MULW.SU
Description
Wb,Ws,Wnd(3)
(3)
MULW.SU
Wb,#lit5,Wnd
Wnd = signed(Wb) * unsigned(lit5)
1
1
328
MULW.US
Wb,Ws,Wnd(3)
Wnd = unsigned(Wb) * signed(Ws)
1
1(5)
329
MULW.UU
Wb,Ws,Wnd
(3)
Wnd = unsigned(Wb) * unsigned(Ws)
1
(5)
331
MULW.UU
Wb,#lit5,Wnd(3) Wnd = unsigned(Wb) * unsigned(lit5)
1
1
332
SE
Ws,Wnd
1
1(5)
393
(5)
405
Wnd = signed-extended Ws
(1)
1
SUB
f {,WREG}
Destination = f – WREG
1
SUB
#lit10,Wn
Wn = Wn – lit10
1
1
406
SUB
Wb,#lit5,Wd
Wd = Wb – lit5
1
1
407
1
1(5)
408
1
(5)
411
SUB
Wd = Wb – Ws
Wb,Ws,Wd
SUBB
f {,WREG}
(1)
Destination = f – WREG – (C)
1
1
SUBB
#lit10,Wn
Wn = Wn – lit10 – (C)
1
1
412
SUBB
Wb,#lit5,Wd
Wd = Wb – lit5 – (C)
1
1
413
1
1(5)
415
Destination = WREG – f – (C)
1
1(5)
417
SUBB
Wd = Wb – Ws – (C)
Wb,Ws,Wd
(1)
SUBBR
f {,WREG}
SUBBR
Wb,#lit5,Wd
Wd = lit5 – Wb – (C)
1
1
418
SUBBR
Wb,Ws,Wd
Wd = Ws – Wb – (C)
1
1(5)
420
SUBR
f {,WREG}(1)
Destination = WREG – f
1
1(5)
422
SUBR
Wb,#lit5,Wd
Wd = lit5 – Wb
1
1
423
424
442
SUBR
Wb,Ws,Wd
Wd = Ws – Wb
1
1(5)
ZE
Ws,Wnd
Wnd = zero-extended Ws
1
1(5)
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
When the optional {,WREG} operand is specified, the destination of the instruction is WREG. When
{,WREG} is not specified, the destination of the instruction is the file register f.
The divide instructions must be preceded with a “REPEAT #17” instruction, such that they are executed
18 consecutive times.
These instructions are only available in dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices.
These instructions are only available in dsPIC33E devices.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, read and read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function
Registers require an additional cycle when compared to dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, PIC24F and PIC24H
devices.
DS70157F-page 42
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 3. Instruction Set Overview
Table 3-4:
Logic Instructions
Assembly Syntax
Description
Words
Cycles
Page
Number
AND
f {,WREG}(1)
Destination = f .AND. WREG
1
1(2)
112
AND
#lit10,Wn
Wn = lit10 .AND. Wn
1
1
113
AND
Wb,#lit5,Wd
Wd = Wb .AND. lit5
1
1
114
(2)
115
AND
Wb,Ws,Wd
Wd = Wb .AND. Ws
1
CLR
f
f = 0x0000
1
1
184
CLR
WREG
WREG = 0x0000
1
1
184
CLR
Wd
Wd = 0x0000
1
1
185
COM
f {,WREG}(1)
Destination = f
1
1(2)
189
COM
Ws,Wd
Wd = Ws
1
1(2)
190
Destination = f .IOR. WREG
1
(2)
260
(1)
1
1
IOR
f {,WREG}
IOR
#lit10,Wn
Wn = lit10 .IOR. Wn
1
1
261
IOR
Wb,#lit5,Wd
Wd = Wb .IOR. lit5
1
1
262
(2)
Wb,Ws,Wd
Wd = Wb .IOR. Ws
1
1
263
NEG
f {,WREG}(1)
Destination = f + 1
1
1(2)
333
NEG
Ws,Wd
Wd = Ws + 1
1
1(2)
333
SETM
f
f = 0xFFFF
1
1
395
SETM
WREG
WREG = 0xFFFF
1
1
395
SETM
Wd
Wd = 0xFFFF
1
1
396
XOR
f {,WREG}(1)
Destination = f .XOR. WREG
1
1(2)
437
XOR
#lit10,Wn
Wn = lit10 .XOR. Wn
1
1
438
XOR
Wb,#lit5,Wd
Wd = Wb .XOR. lit5
1
1
439
1
1(2)
440
Wd = Wb .XOR. Ws
XOR
Wb,Ws,Wd
Note 1:
When the optional {,WREG} operand is specified, the destination of the instruction is WREG. When
{,WREG} is not specified, the destination of the instruction is the file register f.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, read and read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function
Registers require an additional cycle when compared to dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, PIC24F and PIC24H
devices.
2:
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 43
3
Instruction Set
Overview
IOR
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Table 3-5:
Rotate/Shift Instructions
Assembly Syntax
f {,WREG}(1)
ASR
Description
Destination = arithmetic right shift f, LSb →C
Words
Cycles
Page
Number
1
1(2)
117
(2)
119
ASR
Ws,Wd
Wd = arithmetic right shift Ws, LSb →C
1
ASR
Wb,#lit4,Wnd
Wnd = arithmetic right shift Wb by lit4, LSb →C
1
1
121
ASR
Wb,Wns,Wnd
Wnd = arithmetic right shift Wb by Wns,
LSb →C
1
1
122
LSR
f {,WREG}(1)
Destination = logical right shift f, LSb →C
1
1(2)
269
(2)
271
1
273
1
LSR
Ws,Wd
Wd = logical right shift Ws, LSb →C
1
LSR
Wb,#lit4,Wnd
Wnd = logical right shift Wb by lit4, LSb →C
1
LSR
Wb,Wns,Wnd
Wnd = logical right shift Wb by Wns, LSb →C
1
1
274
RLC
f {,WREG}(1)
Destination = rotate left through Carry f
1
1(2)
373
(2)
1
RLC
Ws,Wd
Wd = rotate left through Carry Ws
1
1
375
RLNC
f {,WREG}(1)
Destination = rotate left (no Carry) f
1
1(2)
377
379
RLNC
Ws,Wd
Wd = rotate left (no Carry) Ws
1
1(2)
RRC
f {,WREG}(1)
Destination = rotate right through Carry f
1
1(2)
381
383
RRC
Ws,Wd
Wd = rotate right through Carry Ws
1
1(2)
RRNC
f {,WREG}(1)
Destination = rotate right (no Carry) f
1
1(2)
385
387
RRNC
Ws,Wd
Wd = rotate right (no Carry) Ws
1
1(2)
SL
f {,WREG}(1)
Destination = left shift f, MSb →C
1
1(2)
399
401
SL
Ws,Wd
Wd = left shift Ws, MSb →C
1
1(2)
SL
Wb,#lit4,Wnd
Wnd = left shift Wb by lit4, MSb →C
1
1
403
SL
Wb,Wns,Wnd
Wnd = left shift Wb by Wns, MSb →C
1
1
404
Note 1:
When the optional {,WREG} operand is specified, the destination of the instruction is WREG. When
{,WREG} is not specified, the destination of the instruction is the file register f.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, read and read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function
Registers require an additional cycle when compared to dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, PIC24F and PIC24H
devices.
2:
DS70157F-page 44
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 3. Instruction Set Overview
Table 3-6:
Bit Instructions
Assembly Syntax
Description
Words
Cycles(1)
Page
Number
f,#bit4
Bit clear f
1
1
123
BCLR
Ws,#bit4
Bit clear Ws
1
1
124
BSET
f,#bit4
Bit set f
1
1
152
BSET
Ws,#bit4
Bit set Ws
1
1
153
BSW.C
Ws,Wb
Write C bit to Ws<Wb>
1
1
155
BSW.Z
Ws,Wb
Write Z bit to Ws<Wb>
1
1
155
BTG
f,#bit4
Bit toggle f
1
1
157
BTG
Ws,#bit4
Bit toggle Ws
1
1
158
BTST
f,#bit4
Bit test f to Z
1
1
168
BTST.C
Ws,#bit4
Bit test Ws to C
1
1
169
BTST.Z
Ws,#bit4
Bit test Ws to Z
1
1
169
BTST.C
Ws,Wb
Bit test Ws<Wb> to C
1
1
171
BTST.Z
Ws,Wb
Bit test Ws<Wb> to Z
1
1
171
BTSTS
f,#bit4
Bit test f to Z, then set f
1
1
173
BTSTS.C
Ws,#bit4
Bit test Ws to C then set Ws
1
1
175
BTSTS.Z
Ws,#bit4
Bit test Ws to Z then set Ws
1
1
175
FBCL
Ws,Wnd
Find bit change from left (MSb) side
1
1
244
FF1L
Ws,Wnd
Find first one from left (MSb) side
1
1
246
FF1R
Ws,Wnd
Find first one from right (LSb) side
1
1
248
Note 1:
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, read and read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function
Registers require an additional cycle when compared to dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, PIC24F and PIC24H
devices.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 45
3
Instruction Set
Overview
BCLR
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Table 3-7:
Compare/Skip and Compare/Branch Instructions
Assembly Syntax
Description
Words
Cycles(1)
Page
Number
BTSC
f,#bit4
Bit test f, skip if clear
1
1 (2 or 3)(5)
160
BTSC
Ws,#bit4
Bit test Ws, skip if clear
1
1 (2 or 3)(5)
162
BTSS
f,#bit4
Bit test f, skip if set
1
1 (2 or 3)(5)
164
3)(5)
166
BTSS
Ws,#bit4
Bit test Ws, skip if set
1
CP
f
Compare (f – WREG)
1
1(5)
191
Wb,#lit5
(2)
Compare (Wb – lit5)
1
1
192
CP
Wb,#lit8
(3)
Compare (Wb – lit8)
1
1
193
CP
Wb,Ws
Compare (Wb – Ws)
1
1(5)
194
(5)
196
CP
1 (2 or
CP0
f
Compare (f – 0x0000)
1
1
CP0
Ws
Compare (Ws – 0x0000)
1
1(5)
197
(5)
198
CPB
f
Compare with Borrow (f – WREG – C)
1
CPB
Wb,#lit5(2)
1
Compare with Borrow (Wb – lit5 – C)
1
1
199
CPB
Wb,#lit8(3)
Compare with Borrow (Wb – lit8 – C)
1
1
200
201
CPB
Wb,Ws
Compare with Borrow (Wb – Ws – C)
1
1(5)
CPBEQ
Wb,Wn,Expr(3)
Compare Wb with Wn, branch if =
1
1 (5)(4)
203
CPBGT
Wb,Wn,Expr(3)
Signed compare Wb with Wn, branch if >
1
1 (5)(4)
204
CPBLT
Wb,Wn,Expr(3) Signed compare Wb with Wn, branch if <
1
1 (5)(4)
205
CPBNE
Wb,Wn,Expr(3)
Compare Wb with Wn, branch if ≠
1
(5)(4)
204
CPSEQ
Wb, Wn
Compare (Wb – Wn), skip if =
1
1 (2 or 3)
207
CPSGT
Wb, Wn
Signed compare (Wb – Wn), skip if >
1
1 (2 or 3)
211
CPSLT
Wb, Wn
Signed compare (Wb – Wn), skip if <
1
1 (2 or 3)
212
CPSNE
Wb, Wn
Compare (Wb – Wn), skip if ≠
1
1 (2 or 3)
214
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
1
Conditional skip instructions execute in 1 cycle if the skip is not taken, 2 cycles if the skip is taken over a
one-word instruction and 3 cycles if the skip is taken over a two-word instruction.
This instruction is only available in PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, and dsPIC33F devices.
This instruction is only available in dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices.
Compare-branch instructions in dsPIC33E/PIC24E devices execute in 1 cycle if the branch is not taken
and 5 cycles if the branch is taken.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, read and read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function
Registers require an additional cycle when compared to dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, PIC24F and PIC24H
devices.
DS70157F-page 46
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 3. Instruction Set Overview
Table 3-8:
Program Flow Instructions
Assembly Syntax
Description
Words
Cycles
Page
Number
BRA
Expr
Branch unconditionally
1
2(8)
126
BRA
Wn
Computed branch
1
2(8)
128
1
(2)(1,8)
130
(1,8)
BRA
C,Expr
Branch if Carry (no Borrow)
1
BRA
GE,Expr
Branch if greater than or equal
1
1 (2)
132
BRA
GEU,Expr
Branch if unsigned greater than or equal
1
1 (2)(1,8)
134
(1,8)
BRA
GT,Expr
Branch if greater than
1
1 (2)
135
BRA
GTU,Expr
Branch if unsigned greater than
1
1 (2)(1,8)
136
BRA
LE,Expr
Branch if less than or equal
1
1 (2)(1,8)
137
(1,8)
138
BRA
LEU,Expr
Branch if unsigned less than or equal
1
1 (2)
BRA
LT,Expr
Branch if less than
1
1 (2)(1,8)
139
BRA
LTU,Expr
Branch if unsigned less than
1
1 (2)(1,8)
140
(2)(1,8)
141
BRA
N,Expr
Branch if Negative
1
1
BRA
NC,Expr
Branch if not Carry (Borrow)
1
1 (2)(1,8)
142
BRA
NN,Expr
Branch if not Negative
1
1 (2)(1,8)
143
(2)(1,8)
144
BRA
NOV,Expr
Branch if not Overflow
1
1
BRA
NZ,Expr
Branch if not Zero
1
1 (2)(1,8)
145
BRA
OA,Expr
Branch if Accumulator A Overflow
1
1 (2)(1,8)
146
(2)(1,8)
147
OB,Expr
Branch if Accumulator B Overflow
1
1
BRA
OV,Expr
Branch if Overflow
1
1 (2)(1,8)
148
BRA
SA,Expr
Branch if Accumulator A Saturate
1
1 (2)(1,8)
149
(2)(1,8)
150
BRA
SB,Expr
Branch if Accumulator B Saturate
1
1
BRA
Z,Expr
Branch if Zero
1
1 (2)(1,8)
151
CALL
Expr
Call subroutine
2
2(8)
177
Call indirect subroutine
1
2(8)
180
Call indirect subroutine (long address)
1
4
183
CALL
Wn
CALL.L Wn(4)
DO
#lit14,Expr(6) Do code through PC + Expr, (lit14 + 1) times
2
2
230
DO
#lit15,Expr(7)
Do code through PC + Expr, (lit15 + 1) times
2
2
233
DO
Wn,Expr(3)
Do code through PC + Expr, (Wn + 1) times
2
2
235
2
2(8)
250
251
GOTO
Expr
Go to address
Go to address indirectly
1
2(8)
GOTO.L Wn(4)
Go to indirect (long address)
1
4
253
RCALL
Relative call
1
2(8)
347
Computed call
1
2(8)
351
Repeat next instruction (lit14 + 1) times
1
1
355
GOTO
Wn
RCALL
Expr
Wn
REPEAT #lit14(5)
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
Conditional branch instructions execute in 1 cycle if the branch is not taken, or 2 cycles if the branch is
taken.
RETURN instructions execute in 3 cycles, but if an exception is pending, they execute in 2 cycles.
This instruction is only available in dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E devices.
This instruction is only available in dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices.
This instruction is only available in PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, and dsPIC33F devices.
This instruction is only available in dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F devices.
This instruction is only available in dsPIC33E devices.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, these instructions require 2 additional cycles (4 cycles overall) when
the branch is taken.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, these instructions require 3 additional cycles.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 47
Instruction Set
Overview
BRA
3
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Table 3-8:
Program Flow Instructions (Continued)
Assembly Syntax
REPEAT #lit15(4)
Description
Repeat next instruction (lit15 + 1) times
Words
Cycles
Page
Number
1
1
357
REPEAT Wn
Repeat next instruction (Wn + 1) times
1
1
359
RETFIE
Return from interrupt enable
1
3 (2)(2,9)
365
Return with lit10 in Wn
1
3 (2)
(2,9)
367
Return from subroutine
1
3 (2)(2,9)
371
RETLW
#lit10,Wn
RETURN
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
Conditional branch instructions execute in 1 cycle if the branch is not taken, or 2 cycles if the branch is
taken.
RETURN instructions execute in 3 cycles, but if an exception is pending, they execute in 2 cycles.
This instruction is only available in dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E devices.
This instruction is only available in dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices.
This instruction is only available in PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, and dsPIC33F devices.
This instruction is only available in dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F devices.
This instruction is only available in dsPIC33E devices.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, these instructions require 2 additional cycles (4 cycles overall) when
the branch is taken.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, these instructions require 3 additional cycles.
DS70157F-page 48
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 3. Instruction Set Overview
Table 3-9:
Shadow/Stack Instructions
Assembly Syntax
Description
Words
Cycles
Page
Number
LNK
#lit14
Link Frame Pointer
1
1
267
POP
f
POP TOS to f
1
1
337
POP
Wdo
POP TOS to Wdo
1
1
338
POP.D
Wnd
Double POP from TOS to Wnd:Wnd + 1
1
2
339
POP shadow registers
1
1
340
PUSH f to TOS
1
1(1)
341
(1)
342
POP.S
PUSH
f
PUSH
Wso
PUSH Wso to TOS
1
PUSH.D
Wns
PUSH double Wns:Wns + 1 to TOS
1
2
343
PUSH.S
PUSH shadow registers
1
1
345
ULNK
Unlink Frame Pointer
1
1
435
Note 1:
1
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, read and read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function
Registers require an additional cycle when compared to dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, PIC24F and PIC24H
devices.
Table 3-10:
Control Instructions
Cycles
Page
Number
Clear Watchdog Timer
1
1
188
Disable interrupts for (lit14 + 1) instruction cycles
1
1
223
NOP
No operation
1
1
336
NOPR
No operation
1
1
336
Enter Power-saving mode lit1
1
1
346
Software device Reset
1
1
363
CLRWDT
DISI
PWRSAV
RESET
#lit14
#lit1
Description
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 49
3
Instruction Set
Overview
Words
Assembly Syntax
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Table 3-11:
DSP Instructions (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F and dsPIC33E Devices)
Assembly Syntax
ADD
Acc
Description
Add accumulators
Words
Cycles
Page
Number
1
1
103
(1)
104
ADD
Wso,#Slit4,Acc
16-bit signed add to Acc
1
CLR
Acc,[Wx],Wxd,[Wy],Wyd,AWB
Clear Acc
1
1
186
ED
Wm*Wm,Acc,[Wx],[Wy],Wxd
Euclidean distance
(no accumulate)
1
1
239
EDAC
Wm*Wm,Acc,[Wx],[Wy],Wxd
Euclidean distance
1
1
241
1
(1)
265
Load Acc
1
1
LAC
Wso,#Slit4,Acc
MAC
Wm*Wn,Acc,[Wx],Wxd,[Wy],Wyd,AWB Multiply and accumulate
1
1
275
MAC
Wm*Wm,Acc,[Wx],Wxd,[Wy],Wyd
Square and accumulate
1
1
277
MOVSAC Acc,[Wx],Wxd,[Wy],Wyd,AWB
Move Wx to Wxd and Wy to Wyd
1
1
293
MPY
Wm*Wn,Acc,[Wx],Wxd,[Wy],Wyd
Multiply Wn by Wm to Acc
1
1
295
MPY
Wm*Wm,Acc,[Wx],Wxd,[Wy],Wyd
Square to Acc
1
1
297
MPY.N
Wm*Wn,Acc,[Wx],Wxd,[Wy],Wyd
-(Multiply Wn by Wm) to Acc
1
1
299
MSC
Wm*Wn,Acc,[Wx],Wxd,[Wy],Wyd,AWB Multiply and subtract from Acc
1
1
301
NEG
Acc
Negate Acc
1
1
335
SAC
Acc,#Slit4,Wdo
Store Acc
1
1
389
SAC.R
Acc,#Slit4,Wdo
Store rounded Acc
1
1
391
SFTAC
Acc,#Slit6
Arithmetic shift Acc by Slit6
1
1
397
SFTAC
Acc,Wn
Arithmetic shift Acc by (Wn)
1
1
398
SUB
Acc
Subtract accumulators
1
1
410
Note 1:
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, read and read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function
Registers require an additional cycle when compared to dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, PIC24F and PIC24H
devices.
DS70157F-page 50
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 4. Instruction Set Details
HIGHLIGHTS
This section of the manual contains the following major topics:
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
4.15
4.16
4.17
Data Addressing Modes.................................................................................................. 52
Program Addressing Modes ........................................................................................... 61
Instruction Stalls.............................................................................................................. 62
Byte Operations .............................................................................................................. 64
Word Move Operations ................................................................................................... 66
Using 10-bit Literal Operands ......................................................................................... 69
Software Stack Pointer and Frame Pointer ..................................................................... 70
Conditional Branch Instructions ...................................................................................... 76
Z Status Bit...................................................................................................................... 77
Assigned Working Register Usage ................................................................................. 78
DSP Data Formats (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F and dsPIC33E Devices) ............................... 81
Accumulator Usage (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F and dsPIC33E Devices).............................. 83
Accumulator Access (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F and dsPIC33E Devices) ............................ 84
DSP MAC Instructions (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F and dsPIC33E Devices) ......................... 84
DSP Accumulator Instructions (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F and dsPIC33E Devices) ............. 88
Scaling Data with the FBCL Instruction (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F and dsPIC33E Devices) 88
Normalizing the Accumulator with the FBCL Instruction (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F and
dsPIC33E Devices)......................................................................................................... 90
4
Instruction Set
Details
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 51
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
4.1
DATA ADDRESSING MODES
The 16-bit MCU and DSC devices support three native Addressing modes for accessing data
memory, along with several forms of immediate addressing. Data accesses may be performed
using file register addressing, register direct or indirect addressing, and immediate addressing,
allow a fixed value to be used by the instruction.
File register addressing provides the ability to operate on data stored in the lower 8K of data
memory (Near RAM), and also move data between the working registers and the entire 64K data
space. Register direct addressing is used to access the 16 memory mapped working registers,
W0:W15. Register indirect addressing is used to efficiently operate on data stored in the entire
64K data space (and also Extended Data Space, in the case of dsPIC33E/PIC24E), using the
contents of the working registers as an effective address. Immediate addressing does not access
data memory, but provides the ability to use a constant value as an instruction operand. The
address range of each mode is summarized in Table 4-1.
Table 4-1:
16-bit MCU and DSC Addressing Modes
Addressing Mode
File Register
0x0000-0x1FFF
Register Direct
0x0000-0x001F (working register array W0:W15)
Register Indirect
0x0000-0xFFFF
Immediate
N/A (constant value)
Note 1:
4.1.1
Address Range
(1)
The address range for the File Register MOV is 0x0000-0xFFFE.
File Register Addressing
File register addressing is used by instructions which use a predetermined data address as an
operand for the instruction. The majority of instructions that support file register addressing
provide access to the lower 8 Kbytes of data memory, which is called the Near RAM. However,
the MOV instruction provides access to all 64 Kbytes of memory using file register addressing.
This allows the loading of the data from any location in data memory to any working register, and
storing the contents of any working register to any location in data memory. It should be noted
that file register addressing supports both byte and word accesses of data memory, with the
exception of the MOV instruction, which accesses all 64K of memory as words. Examples of file
register addressing are shown in Example 4-1.
Most instructions, which support file register addressing, perform an operation on the specified
file register and the default working register WREG (see Section 2.4 “Default Working
Register (WREG)”). If only one operand is supplied in the instruction, WREG is an implied
operand and the operation results are stored back to the file register. In these cases, the
instruction is effectively a read-modify-write instruction. However, when both the file register and
the WREG register are specified in the instruction, the operation results are stored in the WREG
register and the contents of the file register are unchanged. Sample instructions that show the
interaction between the file register and the WREG register are shown in Example 4-2.
Note:
DS70157F-page 52
Instructions which support file register addressing use ‘f’ as an operand in the
instruction summary tables of Section 3. “Instruction Set Overview”.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 4. Instruction Set Details
Example 4-1:
DEC
File Register Addressing
0x1000
; decrement data stored at 0x1000
Before Instruction:
Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x5555
After Instruction:
Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x5554
MOV
0x27FE, W0
; move data stored at 0x27FE to W0
Before Instruction:
W0 = 0x5555
Data Memory 0x27FE = 0x1234
After Instruction:
W0 = 0x1234
Data Memory 0x27FE = 0x1234
Example 4-2:
AND
File Register Addressing and WREG
0x1000
; AND 0x1000 with WREG, store to 0x1000
Before Instruction:
W0 (WREG) = 0x332C
Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x5555
After Instruction:
W0 (WREG) = 0x332C
Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x1104
AND
0x1000, WREG
; AND 0x1000 with WREG, store to WREG
Before Instruction:
W0 (WREG) = 0x332C
Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x5555
After Instruction:
W0 (WREG) = 0x1104
Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x5555
4.1.2
4
Register Direct Addressing
Another feature of register direct addressing is that it provides the ability for dynamic flow control.
Since variants of the DO and REPEAT instruction support register direct addressing, flexible
looping constructs may be generated using these instructions.
Note:
Instructions which must use register direct addressing, use the symbols Wb, Wn,
Wns and Wnd in the summary tables of Section 3. “Instruction Set Overview”.
Commonly, register direct addressing may also be used when register indirect
addressing may be used. Instructions which use register indirect addressing, use
the symbols Wd and Ws in the summary tables of Section 3. “Instruction Set
Overview”.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 53
Instruction Set
Details
Register direct addressing is used to access the contents of the 16 working registers (W0:W15).
The Register Direct Addressing mode is fully orthogonal, which allows any working register to be
specified for any instruction that uses register direct addressing, and it supports both byte and
word accesses. Instructions which employ register direct addressing use the contents of the
specified working register as data to execute the instruction, therefore this Addressing mode is
useful only when data already resides in the working register core. Sample instructions which
utilize register direct addressing are shown in Example 4-3.
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 4-3:
EXCH
Register Direct Addressing
W2, W3
; Exchange W2 and W3
Before Instruction:
W2 = 0x3499
W3 = 0x003D
After Instruction:
W2 = 0x003D
W3 = 0x3499
IOR
#0x44, W0
; Inclusive-OR 0x44 and W0
Before Instruction:
W0 = 0x9C2E
After Instruction:
W0 = 0x9C6E
SL
W6, W7, W8
; Shift left W6 by W7, and store to W8
Before Instruction:
W6 = 0x000C
W7 = 0x0008
W8 = 0x1234
After Instruction:
W6 = 0x000C
W7 = 0x0008
W8 = 0x0C00
4.1.3
Register Indirect Addressing
Register indirect addressing is used to access any location in data memory by treating the
contents of a working register as an Effective Address (EA) to data memory. Essentially, the
contents of the working register become a pointer to the location in data memory which is to be
accessed by the instruction.
This Addressing mode is powerful, because it also allows one to modify the contents of the
working register, either before or after the data access is made, by incrementing or decrementing
the EA. By modifying the EA in the same cycle that an operation is being performed, register
indirect addressing allows for the efficient processing of data that is stored sequentially in
memory. The modes of indirect addressing supported by the 16-bit MCU and DSC devices are
shown in Table 4-2.
Table 4-2:
Indirect Addressing Modes
Indirect Mode
Syntax
Function
(Byte Instruction)
Function
(Word Instruction)
Description
No Modification
[Wn]
EA = [Wn]
EA = [Wn]
The contents of Wn forms the EA.
Pre-Increment
[++Wn]
EA = [Wn + = 1]
EA = [Wn + = 2]
Wn is pre-incremented to form the EA.
Pre-Decrement
[--Wn]
EA = [Wn – = 1]
EA = [Wn – = 2]
Wn is pre-decremented to form the EA.
Post-Increment
[Wn++]
EA = [Wn]+ = 1
EA = [Wn]+ = 2
The contents of Wn forms the EA, then
Wn is post-incremented.
EA = [Wn] – = 1
EA = [Wn] – = 2
The contents of Wn forms the EA, then
Wn is post-decremented.
EA = [Wn + Wb]
The sum of Wn and Wb forms the EA.
Wn and Wb are not modified.
Post-Decrement [Wn--]
Register Offset
DS70157F-page 54
[Wn+Wb] EA = [Wn + Wb]
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 4. Instruction Set Details
Table 4-2 shows that four Addressing modes modify the EA used in the instruction, and this
allows the following updates to be made to the working register: post-increment, post-decrement,
pre-increment and pre-decrement. Since all EAs must be given as byte addresses, support is
provided for Word mode instructions by scaling the EA update by 2. Namely, in Word mode,
pre/post-decrements subtract 2 from the EA stored in the working register, and
pre/post-increments add 2 to the EA. This feature ensures that after an EA modification is made,
the EA will point to the next adjacent word in memory. Example 4-4 shows how indirect
addressing may be used to update the EA.
Table 4-2 also shows that the Register Offset mode addresses data which is offset from a base
EA stored in a working register. This mode uses the contents of a second working register to form
the EA by adding the two specified working registers. This mode does not scale for Word mode
instructions, but offers the complete offset range of 64 Kbytes. Note that neither of the working
registers used to form the EA are modified. Example 4-5 shows how register offset indirect
addressing may be used to access data memory.
Note:
The MOV with offset instructions (see pages 285 and 286) provides a literal
addressing offset ability to be used with indirect addressing. In these instructions,
the EA is formed by adding the contents of a working register to a signed 10-bit
literal. Example 4-6 shows how these instructions may be used to move data to and
from the working register array.
Example 4-4:
MOV.B
Indirect Addressing with Effective Address Update
[W0++], [W13--]
; byte move [W0] to [W13]
; post-inc W0, post-dec W13
Before Instruction:
W0 = 0x2300
W13 = 0x2708
Data Memory 0x2300 = 0x7783
Data Memory 0x2708 = 0x904E
After Instruction:
W0 = 0x2301
W13 = 0x2707
Data Memory 0x2300 = 0x7783
Data Memory 0x2708 = 0x9083
ADD
W1, [--W5], [++W8]
; pre-dec W5, pre-inc W8
; add W1 to [W5], store in [W8]
4
Before Instruction:
Instruction Set
Details
W1 =
W5 =
W8 =
Data
Data
0x0800
0x2200
0x2400
Memory 0x21FE = 0x7783
Memory 0x2402 = 0xAACC
After Instruction:
W1 =
W5 =
W8 =
Data
Data
0x0800
0x21FE
0x2402
Memory 0x21FE = 0x7783
Memory 0x2402 = 0x7F83
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 55
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 4-5:
MOV.B
Indirect Addressing with Register Offset
[W0+W1], [W7++]
; byte move [W0+W1] to W7, post-inc W7
Before Instruction:
W0 =
W1 =
W7 =
Data
Data
0x2300
0x01FE
0x1000
Memory 0x24FE = 0x7783
Memory 0x1000 = 0x11DC
After Instruction:
W0 =
W1 =
W7 =
Data
Data
0x2300
0x01FE
0x1001
Memory 0x24FE = 0x7783
Memory 0x1000 = 0x1183
LAC
[W0+W8], A
; load ACCA with [W0+W8]
; (sign-extend and zero-backfill)
Before Instruction:
W0 =
W8 =
ACCA
Data
0x2344
0x0008
= 0x00 7877 9321
Memory 0x234C = 0xE290
After Instruction:
W0 =
W8 =
ACCA
Data
0x2344
0x0008
= 0xFF E290 0000
Memory 0x234C = 0xE290
Example 4-6:
MOV
Move with Literal Offset Instructions
[W0+0x20], W1
; move [W0+0x20] to W1
Before Instruction:
W0 = 0x1200
W1 = 0x01FE
Data Memory 0x1220 = 0xFD27
After Instruction:
W0 = 0x1200
W1 = 0xFD27
Data Memory 0x1220 = 0xFD27
MOV
W4, [W8-0x300]
; move W4 to [W8-0x300]
Before Instruction:
W4 = 0x3411
W8 = 0x2944
Data Memory 0x2644 = 0xCB98
After Instruction:
W4 = 0x3411
W8 = 0x2944
Data Memory 0x2644 = 0x3411
DS70157F-page 56
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 4. Instruction Set Details
4.1.3.1
REGISTER INDIRECT ADDRESSING AND THE INSTRUCTION SET
The Addressing modes presented in Table 4-2 demonstrate the Indirect Addressing mode
capability of the 16-bit MCU and DSC devices. Due to operation encoding and functional
considerations, not every instruction which supports indirect addressing supports all modes
shown in Table 4-2. The majority of instructions which use indirect addressing support the No
Modify, Pre-Increment, Pre-Decrement, Post-Increment and Post-Decrement Addressing
modes. The MOV instructions, and several accumulator-based DSP instructions (dsPIC30F,
dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E devices only), are also capable of using the Register Offset
Addressing mode.
Note:
Instructions which use register indirect addressing use the operand symbols Wd
and Ws in the summary tables of Section 3. “Instruction Set Overview”.
4.1.3.2
DSP MAC INDIRECT ADDRESSING MODES (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, AND
dsPIC33E DEVICES)
A special class of Indirect Addressing modes is utilized by the DSP MAC instructions. As is
described later in Section 4.14 “DSP MAC Instructions (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F and dsPIC33E
Devices)”, the DSP MAC class of instructions are capable of performing two fetches from
memory using effective addressing. Since DSP algorithms frequently demand a broader range
of address updates, the Addressing modes offered by the DSP MAC instructions provide greater
range in the size of the effective address update which may be made. Table 4-3 shows that both
X and Y prefetches support Post-Increment and Post-Decrement Addressing modes, with
updates of 2, 4 and 6 bytes. Since DSP instructions only execute in Word mode, no provisions
are made for odd sized EA updates.
Table 4-3:
DSP MAC Indirect Addressing Modes
Addressing Mode
X Memory
Y Memory
Indirect with no modification
EA = [Wx]
EA = [Wy]
Indirect with Post-Increment by 2
EA = [Wx] + = 2
EA = [Wy] + = 2
Indirect with Post-Increment by 4
EA = [Wx] + = 4
EA = [Wy] + = 4
Indirect with Post-Increment by 6
EA = [Wx] + = 6
EA = [Wy] + = 6
Indirect with Post-Decrement by 2
EA = [Wx] – = 2
EA = [Wy] – = 2
Indirect with Post-Decrement by 4
EA = [Wx] – = 4
EA = [Wy] – = 4
Indirect with Post-Decrement by 6
EA = [Wx] – = 6
EA = [Wy] – = 6
Indirect with Register Offset
EA = [W9 + W12]
EA = [W11 + W12]
4.1.3.3
As described in Section 4.14 “DSP MAC Instructions (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F and
dsPIC33E Devices)”, only W8 and W9 may be used to access X Memory, and only
W10 and W11 may be used to access Y Memory.
MODULO AND BIT-REVERSED ADDRESSING MODES (dsPIC30F,
dsPIC33F, AND dsPIC33E DEVICES)
The 16-bit DSC architecture provides support for two special Register Indirect Addressing
modes, which are commonly used to implement DSP algorithms. Modulo (or circular) addressing
provides an automated means to support circular data buffers in X and/or Y memory. Modulo
buffers remove the need for software to perform address boundary checks, which can improve
the performance of certain algorithms. Similarly, bit-reversed addressing allows one to access
the elements of a buffer in a nonlinear fashion. This Addressing mode simplifies data re-ordering
for radix-2 FFT algorithms and provides a significant reduction in FFT processing time.
Both of these Addressing modes are powerful features of the dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and
dsPIC33E architectures, which can be exploited by any instruction that uses indirect addressing.
Refer to the specific device family reference manual for details on using modulo and bit-reversed
addressing.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 57
Instruction Set
Details
Note:
4
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
4.1.4
Immediate Addressing
In immediate addressing, the instruction encoding contains a predefined constant operand,
which is used by the instruction. This Addressing mode may be used independently, but it is more
frequently combined with the File Register, Direct and Indirect Addressing modes. The size of
the immediate operand which may be used varies with the instruction type. Constants of size
1-bit (#lit1), 4-bit (#bit4, #lit4 and #Slit4), 5-bit (#lit5), 6-bit (#Slit6), 8-bit (#lit8), 10-bit (#lit10
and #Slit10), 14-bit (#lit14) and 16-bit (#lit16) may be used. Constants may be signed or
unsigned and the symbols #Slit4, #Slit6 and #Slit10 designate a signed constant. All other
immediate constants are unsigned. Table 4-4 shows the usage of each immediate operand in the
instruction set.
Note:
Table 4-4:
The 6-bit (#Slit6) operand is only available in dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E
devices.
Immediate Operands in the Instruction Set
Operand
Instruction Usage
#lit1
PWRSAV
#bit4
BCLR, BSET, BTG, BTSC, BTSS, BTST, BTST.C, BTST.Z, BTSTS,
BTSTS.C, BTSTS.Z
#lit4
ASR, LSR, SL
#Slit4
ADD, LAC, SAC, SAC.R
#lit5
ADD, ADDC, AND, CP(5), CPB(5), IOR, MUL.SU, MUL.UU, SUB,
SUBB, SUBBR, SUBR, XOR
#Slit6(1)
SFTAC
#lit8
MOV.B, CP(4), CPB(4)
#lit10
ADD, ADDC, AND, CP, CPB, IOR, RETLW, SUB, SUBB, XOR
#Slit10
MOV
#lit14
DISI, DO(2), LNK, REPEAT(5)
#lit15
DO(3), REPEAT(4)
#lit16
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
MOV
This operand or instruction is only available in dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E
devices.
This operand or instruction is only available in dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F devices.
This operand or instruction is only available in dsPIC33E devices.
This operand or instruction is only available in dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices.
This operand or instruction is only available in dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, PIC24F, and
PIC24H devices.
The syntax for immediate addressing requires that the number sign (#) must immediately
precede the constant operand value. The “#” symbol indicates to the assembler that the quantity
is a constant. If an out-of-range constant is used with an instruction, the assembler will generate
an error. Several examples of immediate addressing are shown in Example 4-7.
DS70157F-page 58
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 4. Instruction Set Details
Example 4-7:
Immediate Addressing
PWRSAV #1
; Enter IDLE mode
ADD.B
; Add 0x10 to W0 (byte mode)
#0x10, W0
Before Instruction:
W0 = 0x12A9
After Instruction:
W0 = 0x12B9
XOR
W0, #1, [W1++]
; Exclusive-OR W0 and 0x1
; Store the result to [W1]
; Post-increment W1
Before Instruction:
W0 = 0xFFFF
W1 = 0x0890
Data Memory 0x0890 = 0x0032
After Instruction:
W0 = 0xFFFF
W1 = 0x0892
Data Memory 0x0890 = 0xFFFE
4.1.5
Data Addressing Mode Tree
The Data Addressing modes of the PIC24F, PIC24H, and PIC24E families are summarized in
Figure 4-1.
Figure 4-1:
Data Addressing Mode Tree (PIC24F, PIC24H, and PIC24E)
Immediate
File Register
Data Addressing Modes
Direct
No Modification
Pre-Increment
4
Pre-Decrement
Indirect
Post-Increment
Literal Offset
Register Offset
The Data Addressing modes of the dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E are summarized in
Figure 4-2.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 59
Instruction Set
Details
Post-Decrement
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Figure 4-2:
Data Addressing Mode Tree (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E)
Immediate
File Register
Basic
Direct
No Modification
Pre-Increment
Pre-Decrement
Indirect
Post-Increment
Post-Decrement
Literal Offset
Data Addressing Modes
Register Offset
Direct
DSP MAC
No Modification
Post-Increment (2, 4 and 6)
Indirect
Post-Decrement (2, 4 and 6)
Register Offset
DS70157F-page 60
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 4. Instruction Set Details
4.2
PROGRAM ADDRESSING MODES
The 16-bit MCU and DSC devices have a 24-bit Program Counter (PC). The PC addresses the
24-bit wide program memory to fetch instructions for execution, and it may be loaded in several
ways. For byte compatibility with the table read and table write instructions, each instruction word
consumes two locations in program memory. This means that during serial execution, the PC is
loaded with PC + 2.
Several methods may be used to modify the PC in a non-sequential manner, and both absolute
and relative changes may be made to the PC. The change to the PC may be from an immediate
value encoded in the instruction, or a dynamic value contained in a working register. In dsPIC30F,
dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E devices, when DO looping is active, the PC is loaded with the address
stored in the DOSTART register, after the instruction at the DOEND address is executed. For
exception handling, the PC is loaded with the address of the exception handler, which is stored
in the interrupt vector table. When required, the software stack is used to return scope to the
foreground process from where the change in program flow occurred.
Table 4-5 summarizes the instructions which modify the PC. When performing function calls, it is
recommended that RCALL be used instead of CALL, since RCALL only consumes 1 word of
program memory.
Table 4-5:
Methods of Modifying Program Flow
Condition/Instruction
PC Modification
Software Stack Usage
Sequential Execution
PC = PC + 2
None
BRA Expr(1)
(Branch Unconditionally)
PC = PC + 2*Slit16
None
BRA Condition, Expr(1)
(Branch Conditionally)
PC = PC + 2 (condition false)
PC = PC + 2 * Slit16 (condition true)
None
CALL Expr(1)
(Call Subroutine)
PC = lit23
PC + 4 is PUSHed on the stack(2)
CALL Wn
(Call Subroutine Indirect)
PC = Wn
PC + 2 is PUSHed on the stack(2)
CALL.L Wn(5)
(Call Indirect Subroutine Long)
PC = {Wn+1:Wn}
None
GOTO Expr(1)
(Unconditional Jump)
PC = lit23
None
GOTO Wn
(Unconditional Indirect Jump)
PC = Wn
None
GOTO.L Wn(5)
(Unconditional Indirect Long Jump)
PC = {Wn+1:Wn}
None
RCALL Expr(1)
(Relative Call)
PC = PC + 2 * Slit16
PC + 2 is PUSHed on the stack(2)
RCALL Wn
(Computed Relative Call)
PC = PC + 2 * Wn
PC + 2 is PUSHed on the stack(2)
Exception Handling
PC = address of the exception handler PC + 2 is PUSHed on the stack(3)
(read from vector table)
PC = Target REPEAT instruction
(REPEAT Looping)
PC not modified (if REPEAT active)
None
PC = DOEND address(4)
(DO Looping)
PC = DOSTART (if DO active)
None
2:
3:
4:
5:
For BRA, CALL and GOTO, the Expr may be a label, absolute address, or expression, which is resolved by
the linker to a 16-bit or 23-bit value (Slit16 or lit23). See Section 5. “Instruction Descriptions” for details.
After CALL or RCALL is executed, RETURN or RETLW will POP the Top-of-Stack (TOS) back into the PC.
After an exception is processed, RETFIE will POP the Top-of-Stack (TOS) back into the PC.
This condition/instruction is only available in dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E devices.
This condition instruction is only available in dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 61
Instruction Set
Details
Note 1:
4
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
4.3
INSTRUCTION STALLS
In order to maximize the data space EA calculation and operand fetch time, the X data space
read and write accesses are partially pipelined. A consequence of this pipelining is that address
register data dependencies may arise between successive read and write operations using
common registers.
‘Read After Write’ (RAW) dependencies occur across instruction boundaries and are detected by
the hardware. An example of a RAW dependency would be a write operation that modifies W5,
followed by a read operation that uses W5 as an Address Pointer. The contents of W5 will not be
valid for the read operation until the earlier write completes. This problem is resolved by stalling
the instruction execution for one instruction cycle, which allows the write to complete before the
next read is started.
4.3.1
RAW Dependency Detection
During the instruction pre-decode, the core determines if any address register dependency is
imminent across an instruction boundary. The stall detection logic compares the W register
(if any) used for the destination EA of the instruction currently being executed with the W register
to be used by the source EA (if any) of the prefetched instruction. When a match between the
destination and source registers is identified, a set of rules are applied to decide whether or not
to stall the instruction by one cycle. Table 4-6 lists various RAW conditions which cause an
instruction execution stall.
Table 4-6:
Raw Dependency Rules (Detection By Hardware)
Destination
Address Mode
Using Wn
Examples(2)
(Wn = W2)
Stall
Required?
Direct
Direct
No Stall
ADD.W
MOV.W
W0, W1, W2
W2, W3
Indirect
Direct
No Stall
ADD.W
MOV.W
W0, W1, [W2]
W2, W3
Indirect
Indirect
No Stall
ADD.W
MOV.W
W0, W1, [W2]
[W2], W3
Indirect
Indirect with
pre/post-modification
No Stall
ADD.W
MOV.W
W0, W1, [W2]
[W2++], W3
Indirect with
pre/post-modification
Direct
No Stall
ADD.W
MOV.W
W0, W1, [W2++]
W2, W3
Direct
Indirect
Stall(1)
ADD.W
MOV.W
W0, W1, W2
[W2], W3
Direct
Indirect with
pre/post-modification
Stall(1)
ADD.W
MOV.W
W0, W1, W2
[W2++], W3
Indirect
Indirect
Stall(1)
ADD.W
MOV.W
W0, W1, [W2](2)
[W2], W3(2)
Indirect
Indirect with
pre/post-modification
Stall(1)
ADD.W W0, W1, [W2](2)
MOV.W [W2++], W3(2)
Indirect with
pre/post-modification
Indirect
Stall(1)
ADD.W
MOV.W
W0, W1, [W2++]
[W2], W3
Indirect with
pre/post-modification
Indirect with
pre/post-modification
Stall(1)
ADD.W
MOV.W
W0, W1, [W2++]
[W2++], W3
Note 1:
2:
DS70157F-page 62
Source Address
Mode
Using Wn
When stalls are detected, one cycle is added to the instruction execution time.
For these examples, the contents of W2 = the mapped address of W2 (0x0004).
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 4. Instruction Set Details
4.3.2
Instruction Stalls and Exceptions
In order to maintain deterministic operation, instruction stalls are allowed to happen, even if they
occur immediately prior to exception processing.
4.3.3
Instruction Stalls and Instructions that Change Program Flow
CALL and RCALL write to the stack using W15 and may, therefore, be subject to an instruction
stall if the source read of the subsequent instruction uses W15.
GOTO, RETFIE and RETURN instructions are never subject to an instruction stall because they
do not perform write operations to the working registers.
4.3.4
Instruction Stalls and DO/REPEAT Loops
Instructions operating in a DO or REPEAT loop are subject to instruction stalls, just like any other
instruction. Stalls may occur on loop entry, loop exit and also during loop processing.
Note:
4.3.5
DO loops are only available in dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E devices.
Instruction Stalls and PSV
Instructions operating in PSV address space are subject to instruction stalls, just like any other
instruction. Should a data dependency be detected in the instruction immediately following the
PSV data access, the second cycle of the instruction will initiate a stall. Should a data
dependency be detected in the instruction immediately before the PSV data access, the last
cycle of the previous instruction will initiate a stall.
Note:
Refer to the specific device family reference manual for more detailed information
about RAW instruction stalls.
4
Instruction Set
Details
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 63
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
4.4
BYTE OPERATIONS
Since the data memory is byte addressable, most of the base instructions may operate in either
Byte mode or Word mode. When these instructions operate in Byte mode, the following rules
apply:
• All direct working register references use the Least Significant Byte of the 16-bit working
register and leave the Most Significant Byte (MSB) unchanged
• All indirect working register references use the data byte specified by the 16-bit address
stored in the working register
• All file register references use the data byte specified by the byte address
• The STATUS Register is updated to reflect the result of the byte operation
It should be noted that data addresses are always represented as byte addresses. Additionally,
the native data format is little-endian, which means that words are stored with the Least
Significant Byte at the lower address, and the Most Significant Byte at the adjacent, higher
address (as shown in Figure 4-3). Example 4-8 shows sample byte move operations and
Example 4-9 shows sample byte math operations.
Note:
Instructions that operate in Byte mode must use the “.b” or “.B” instruction
extension to specify a byte instruction. For example, the following two instructions
are valid forms of a byte clear operation:
•
•
CLR.b W0
CLR.B W0
Example 4-8:
MOV.B
Sample Byte Move Operations
#0x30, W0
; move the literal byte 0x30 to W0
Before Instruction:
W0 = 0x5555
After Instruction:
W0 = 0x5530
MOV.B
0x1000, W0
; move the byte at 0x1000 to W0
Before Instruction:
W0 = 0x5555
Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x1234
After Instruction:
W0 = 0x5534
Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x1234
MOV.B
W0, 0x1001
; byte move W0 to address 0x1001
Before Instruction:
W0 = 0x1234
Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x5555
After Instruction:
W0 = 0x1234
Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x3455
MOV.B
W0, [W1++]
; byte move W0 to [W1], then post-inc W1
Before Instruction:
W0 = 0x1234
W1 = 0x1001
Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x5555
After Instruction:
W0 = 0x1234
W1 = 0x1002
Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x3455
DS70157F-page 64
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 4. Instruction Set Details
Example 4-9:
CLR.B
Sample Byte Math Operations
[W6--]
; byte clear [W6], then post-dec W6
Before Instruction:
W6 = 0x1001
Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x5555
After Instruction:
W6 = 0x1000
Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x0055
SUB.B
W0, #0x10, W1
; byte subtract literal 0x10 from W0
; and store to W1
Before Instruction:
W0 = 0x1234
W1 = 0xFFFF
After Instruction:
W0 = 0x1234
W1 = 0xFF24
ADD.B
W0, W1, [W2++]
; byte add W0 and W1, store to [W2]
; and post-inc W2
Before Instruction:
W0 =
W1 =
W2 =
Data
0x1234
0x5678
0x1000
Memory 0x1000 = 0x5555
After Instruction:
W0 =
W1 =
W2 =
Data
0x1234
0x5678
0x1001
Memory 0x1000 = 0x55AC
4
Instruction Set
Details
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 65
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
4.5
WORD MOVE OPERATIONS
Even though the data space is byte addressable, all move operations made in Word mode must
be word-aligned. This means that for all source and destination operands, the Least Significant
address bit must be ‘0’. If a word move is made to or from an odd address, an address error
exception is generated. Likewise, all double words must be word-aligned. Figure 4-3 shows how
bytes and words may be aligned in data memory. Example 4-10 contains several legal word
move operations.
When an exception is generated due to a misaligned access, the exception is taken after the
instruction executes. If the illegal access occurs from a data read, the operation will be allowed
to complete, but the Least Significant bit of the source address will be cleared to force word
alignment. If the illegal access occurs during a data write, the write will be inhibited. Example 4-11
contains several illegal word move operations.
Figure 4-3:
Data Alignment in Memory
0x1001
b0
0x1000
0x1003
b1
0x1005
b3
b2
0x1004
0x1007
b5
b4
0x1006
0x1009
b7
b6
0x1008
b8
0x100A
0x100B
0x1002
Legend:
b0 – byte stored at 0x1000
b1 – byte stored at 0x1003
b3:b2 – word stored at 0x1005:1004 (b2 is LSB)
b7:b4 – double word stored at 0x1009:0x1006 (b4 is LSB)
b8 – byte stored at 0x100A
Note:
Instructions that operate in Word mode are not required to use an instruction
extension. However, they may be specified with an optional “.w” or “.W” extension,
if desired. For example, the following instructions are valid forms of a word clear
operation:
•
•
•
DS70157F-page 66
CLR W0
CLR.w
W0
CLR.W
W0
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 4. Instruction Set Details
Example 4-10:
MOV
Legal Word Move Operations
#0x30, W0
; move the literal word 0x30 to W0
Before Instruction:
W0 = 0x5555
After Instruction:
W0 = 0x0030
MOV
0x1000, W0
; move the word at 0x1000 to W0
Before Instruction:
W0 = 0x5555
Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x1234
After Instruction:
W0 = 0x1234
Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x1234
MOV
[W0], [W1++]
; word move [W0] to [W1],
; then post-inc W1
Before Instruction:
W0 =
W1 =
Data
Data
0x1234
0x1000
Memory 0x1000 = 0x5555
Memory 0x1234 = 0xAAAA
After Instruction:
W0 =
W1 =
Data
Data
0x1234
0x1002
Memory 0x1000 = 0xAAAA
Memory 0x1234 = 0xAAAA
4
Instruction Set
Details
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 67
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 4-11:
MOV
Illegal Word Move Operations
0x1001, W0
; move the word at 0x1001 to W0
Before Instruction:
W0 = 0x5555
Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x1234
Data Memory 0x1002 = 0x5678
After Instruction:
W0 = 0x1234
Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x1234
Data Memory 0x1002 = 0x5678
ADDRESS ERROR TRAP GENERATED
(source address is misaligned, so MOV is performed)
MOV
W0, 0x1001
; move W0 to the word at 0x1001
Before Instruction:
W0 = 0x1234
Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x5555
Data Memory 0x1002 = 0x6666
After Instruction:
W0 = 0x1234
Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x5555
Data Memory 0x1002 = 0x6666
ADDRESS ERROR TRAP GENERATED
(destination address is misaligned, so MOV is not performed)
MOV
[W0], [W1++]
; word move [W0] to [W1],
; then post-inc W1
Before Instruction:
W0 =
W1 =
Data
Data
Data
0x1235
0x1000
Memory 0x1000 = 0x1234
Memory 0x1234 = 0xAAAA
Memory 0x1236 = 0xBBBB
After Instruction:
W0 =
W1 =
Data
Data
Data
0x1235
0x1002
Memory 0x1000 = 0xAAAA
Memory 0x1234 = 0xAAAA
Memory 0x1236 = 0xBBBB
ADDRESS ERROR TRAP GENERATED
(source address is misaligned, so MOV is performed)
DS70157F-page 68
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 4. Instruction Set Details
4.6
USING 10-BIT LITERAL OPERANDS
Several instructions that support Byte and Word mode have 10-bit operands. For byte
instructions, a 10-bit literal is too large to use. So when 10-bit literals are used in Byte mode, the
range of the operand must be reduced to 8 bits or the assembler will generate an error. Table 4-7
shows that the range of a 10-bit literal is 0:1023 in Word mode and 0:255 in Byte mode.
Instructions which employ 10-bit literals in Byte and Word mode are: ADD, ADDC, AND, IOR,
RETLW, SUB, SUBB, and XOR. Example 4-12 shows how positive and negative literals are used in
Byte mode for the ADD instruction.
Table 4-7:
10-bit Literal Coding
Literal Value
Word Mode
kk kkkk kkkk
Byte Mode
kkkk kkkk
0
00 0000 0000
0000 0000
1
00 0000 0001
0000 0001
2
00 0000 0010
0000 0010
127
00 0111 1111
0111 1111
128
00 1000 0000
1000 0000
255
00 1111 1111
1111 1111
256
01 0000 0000
N/A
512
10 0000 0000
N/A
1023
11 1111 1111
N/A
Example 4-12:
ADD.B
ADD.B
ADD.B
ADD.B
ADD.B
ADD.B
ADD.B
Note:
Using 10-bit Literals for Byte Operands
#0x80, W0
#0x380, W0
#0xFF, W0
#0x3FF, W0
#0xF, W0
#0x7F, W0
#0x100, W0
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
add 128 (or -128) to W0
ERROR... Illegal syntax for byte mode
add 255 (or -1) to W0
ERROR... Illegal syntax for byte mode
add 15 to W0
add 127 to W0
ERROR... Illegal syntax for byte mode
Using a literal value greater than 127 in Byte mode is functionally identical to using
the equivalent negative two’s complement value, since the Most Significant bit of the
byte is set. When operating in Byte mode, the Assembler will accept either a positive
or negative literal value (i.e., #-10).
4
Instruction Set
Details
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 69
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
4.7
SOFTWARE STACK POINTER AND FRAME POINTER
4.7.1
Software Stack Pointer
The 16-bit MCU and DSC devices feature a software stack which facilitates function calls and
exception handling. W15 is the default Stack Pointer (SP) and after any Reset, it is initialized to
0x0800 (0x1000 for PIC24E and dsPIC33E devices). This ensures that the SP will point to valid
RAM and permits stack availability for exceptions, which may occur before the SP is set by the
user software. The user may reprogram the SP during initialization to any location within data
space.
The SP always points to the first available free word (Top-of-Stack) and fills the software stack,
working from lower addresses towards higher addresses. It pre-decrements for a stack POP
(read) and post-increments for a stack PUSH (write).
The software stack is manipulated using the PUSH and POP instructions. The PUSH and POP
instructions are the equivalent of a MOV instruction, with W15 used as the destination pointer. For
example, the contents of W0 can be PUSHed onto the Top-of-Stack (TOS) by:
PUSH W0
This syntax is equivalent to:
MOV W0,[W15++]
The contents of the TOS can be returned to W0 by:
POP W0
This syntax is equivalent to:
MOV [--W15],W0
During any CALL instruction, the PC is PUSHed onto the stack, such that when the subroutine
completes execution, program flow may resume from the correct location. When the PC is
PUSHed onto the stack, PC<15:0> is PUSHed onto the first available stack word, then
PC<22:16> is PUSHed. When PC<22:16> is PUSHed, the Most Significant 7 bits of the PC are
zero-extended before the PUSH is made, as shown in Figure 4-4. During exception processing,
the Most Significant 7 bits of the PC are concatenated with the lower byte of the STATUS
register (SRL) and IPL<3>, CORCON<3>. This allows the primary STATUS register contents
and CPU Interrupt Priority Level to be automatically preserved during interrupts.
Note:
In order to protect against misaligned stack accesses, W15<0> is always clear.
Figure 4-4:
Stack Operation for CALL Instruction
0x0000
Stack Grows Towards
Higher Address
15
0
PC<15:0>
0x0
W15 (before CALL)
PC<22:16>
Top-of-Stack
W15 (after CALL)
0xFFFE
Note:
DS70157F-page 70
For exceptions, the upper nine bits of the second PUSHed word contains
the SRL and IPL<3>.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 4. Instruction Set Details
4.7.1.1
STACK POINTER EXAMPLE
Figure 4-5 through Figure 4-8 show how the software stack is modified for the code snippet
shown in Example 4-13. Figure 4-5 shows the software stack before the first PUSH has executed.
Note that the SP has the initialized value of 0x0800. Furthermore, the example loads 0x5A5A
and 0x3636 to W0 and W1, respectively. The stack is PUSHed for the first time in Figure 4-6 and
the value contained in W0 is copied to TOS. W15 is automatically updated to point to the next
available stack location, and the new TOS is 0x0802. In Figure 4-7, the contents of W1 are
PUSHed onto the stack, and the new TOS becomes 0x0804. In Figure 4-8, the stack is POPped,
which copies the last PUSHed value (W1) to W3. The SP is decremented during the POP
operation, and at the end of the example, the final TOS is 0x0802.
Example 4-13:
MOV
MOV
PUSH
PUSH
POP
Figure 4-5:
Stack Pointer Usage
#0x5A5A, W0
#0x3636, W1
W0
W1
W3
;
;
;
;
;
Load W0
Load W1
Push W0
Push W1
Pop TOS
with 0x5A5A
with 0x3636
to TOS (see Figure 4-5)
to TOS (see Figure 4-7)
to W3 (see Figure 4-8)
Stack Pointer Before The First PUSH
0x0000
0x0800
<TOS>
W15 (SP)
0xFFFE
W0 = 0x5A5A
W1 = 0x3636
W15 = 0x0800
Figure 4-6:
Stack Pointer After “PUSH W0” Instruction
0x0000
5A5A
<TOS>
4
W15 (SP)
Instruction Set
Details
0x0800
0x0802
0xFFFE
W0 = 0x5A5A
W1 = 0x3636
W15 = 0x0802
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 71
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Figure 4-7:
Stack Pointer After “PUSH W1” Instruction
0x0000
0x0800
0x0802
0x0804
5A5A
3636
<TOS>
W15 (SP)
0xFFFE
W0 = 0x5A5A
W1 = 0x3636
W15 = 0x0804
Figure 4-8:
Stack Pointer After “POP W3” Instruction
0x0000
0x0800
0x0802
0x0804
5A5A
<TOS>
W15 (SP)
0xFFFE
W0 = 0x5A5A
W1 = 0x3636
W3 = 0x3636
W15 = 0x0802
Note: The contents of 0x802, the new TOS, remain unchanged (0x3636).
4.7.2
Software Stack Frame Pointer
A Stack Frame is a user-defined section of memory residing in the software stack. It is used to
allocate memory for temporary variables which a function uses, and one Stack Frame may be
created for each function. W14 is the default Stack Frame Pointer (FP) and it is initialized to
0x0000 on any Reset. If the Stack Frame Pointer is not used, W14 may be used like any other
working register.
The link (LNK) and unlink (ULNK) instructions provide Stack Frame functionality. The LNK
instruction is used to create a Stack Frame. It is used during a call sequence to adjust the SP,
such that the stack may be used to store temporary variables utilized by the called function. After
the function completes execution, the ULNK instruction is used to remove the Stack Frame
created by the LNK instruction. The LNK and ULNK instructions must always be used together to
avoid stack overflow.
DS70157F-page 72
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 4. Instruction Set Details
4.7.2.1
STACK FRAME POINTER EXAMPLE
Figure 4-9 through Figure 4-11 show how a Stack Frame is created and removed for the code
snippet shown in Example 4-14. This example demonstrates how a Stack Frame operates and
is not indicative of the code generated by the compiler. Figure 4-9 shows the stack condition at
the beginning of the example, before any registers are pushed to the stack. Here, W15 points to
the first free stack location (TOS) and W14 points to a portion of stack memory allocated for the
routine that is currently executing.
Before calling the function “COMPUTE”, the parameters of the function (W0, W1 and W2) are
PUSHed on the stack. After the “CALL COMPUTE” instruction is executed, the PC changes to the
address of “COMPUTE” and the return address of the function “TASKA” is placed on the stack
(Figure 4-10). Function “COMPUTE” then uses the “LNK #4” instruction to PUSH the calling
routine’s Frame Pointer value onto the stack and the new Frame Pointer will be set to point to the
current Stack Pointer. Then, the literal 4 is added to the Stack Pointer address in W15, which
reserves memory for two words of temporary data (Figure 4-11).
Inside the function “COMPUTE”, the FP is used to access the function parameters and temporary
(local) variables. [W14 + n] will access the temporary variables used by the routine and [W14 – n]
is used to access the parameters. At the end of the function, the ULNK instruction is used to copy
the Frame Pointer address to the Stack Pointer and then POP the calling subroutine’s Frame
Pointer back to the W14 register. The ULNK instruction returns the stack back to the state shown
in Figure 4-10.
A RETURN instruction will return to the code that called the subroutine. The calling code is
responsible for removing the parameters from the stack. The RETURN and POP instructions
restore the stack to the state shown in Figure 4-9.
Example 4-14:
TASKA:
...
PUSH
PUSH
PUSH
CALL
POP
POP
POP
...
W0
W1
W2
COMPUTE
W2
W1
W0
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Push parameter 1
Push parameter 2
Push parameter 3
Call COMPUTE function
Pop parameter 3
Pop parameter 2
Pop parameter 1
; Stack FP, allocate 4 bytes for local variables
; Free allocated memory, restore original FP
; Return to TASKA
Stack at the Beginning of Example 4-14
0x0000
0x0800
Frame
of
TASKA
W14 (FP)
<TOS>
W15 (SP)
0xFFFE
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 73
4
Instruction Set
Details
COMPUTE:
LNK
#4
...
ULNK
RETURN
Figure 4-9:
Frame Pointer Usage
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Figure 4-10:
Stack After “CALL COMPUTE” Executes
0x0000
0x0800
Frame
of
TASKA
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
PC<15:0>(1)
0:PC<22:16>
<TOS>
W14 (FP)
W15 (SP)
0xFFFE
Note 1:
In dsPIC33E/PIC24E devices, the SFA bit is stacked instead of
PC<0>
Figure 4-11:
Stack After “LNK #4” Executes
0x0000
0x0800
Frame
of
TASKA
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
PC<15:0>(1)
0:PC<22:16>
FP of TASKA
Temp Word 1
Temp Word 2
<TOS>
W14 (FP)
W15 (SP)
0xFFFE
Note 1:
In dsPIC33E/PIC24E devices, the SFA bit is stacked instead of
PC<0>
4.7.3
Stack Pointer Overflow
There is a Stack Limit register (SPLIM) associated with the Stack Pointer that is reset to 0x0000.
SPLIM is a 16-bit register, but SPLIM<0> is fixed to ‘0’, because all stack operations must be
word-aligned.
The stack overflow check will not be enabled until a word write to SPLIM occurs, after which time
it can only be disabled by a device Reset. All effective addresses generated using W15 as a
source or destination are compared against the value in SPLIM. Should the effective address be
greater than the contents of SPLIM, then a stack error trap is generated.
If stack overflow checking has been enabled, a stack error trap will also occur if the W15 effective
address calculation wraps over the end of data space (0xFFFF).
Refer to the specific device family reference manual for more information on the stack error trap.
DS70157F-page 74
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 4. Instruction Set Details
4.7.4
Stack Pointer Underflow
The stack is initialized to 0x0800 during Reset (0x1000 for PIC24E and dsPIC33E devices). A
stack error trap will be initiated should the Stack Pointer address ever be less than 0x0800
(0x1000 for PIC24E and dsPIC33E devices).
Note:
4.7.5
Locations in data space between 0x0000 and 0x07FF (0x0FFF for PIC24E and
dsPIC33E devices) are, in general, reserved for core and peripheral Special
Function Registers (SFRs).
Stack Frame Active (SFA) Control (dsPIC33E and PIC24E
Devices)
W15 is never subject to paging and is therefore restricted to address range 0x000000 to
0x00FFFF. However, the Stack Frame Pointer (W14) for any user software function is only
dedicated to that function when a stack frame addressed by W14 is active (i.e., after a LNK
instruction). Therefore, it is desirable to have the ability to dynamically switch W14 between use
as a general purpose W register, and use as a Stack Frame Pointer. The SFA Status bit
(CORCON<2>) achieves this function without additional software overhead.
When the SFA bit is clear, W14 may be used with any page register. When SFA is set, W14 is
not subject to paging and is locked into the same address range as W15 (0x000000 to
0x00FFFF). Operation of the SFA register lock is as follows:
• The LNK instruction sets SFA (and creates a stack frame)
• The ULNK instruction clears SFA (and deletes the stack frame)
• The CALL, CALL.L, and RCALL instructions also stack the SFA bit (placing it in the LSb of
the stacked PC), and clear the SFA bit after the stacking operation is complete. The called
procedure is now free to either use W14 as a general purpose register, or create another
stack frame using the LNK instruction.
• The RETURN, RETLW and RETFIE instructions all restore the SFA bit from its previously
stacked value
The SFA bit is a read-only bit. It can only be set by execution of the LNK instruction, and cleared
by the ULNK, CALL, CALL.L, and RCALL instructions.
Note:
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the SFA bit is stacked instead of PC<0>.
4
Instruction Set
Details
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 75
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
4.8
CONDITIONAL BRANCH INSTRUCTIONS
Conditional branch instructions are used to direct program flow, based on the contents of the
STATUS register. These instructions are generally used in conjunction with a Compare class
instruction, but they may be employed effectively after any operation that modifies the STATUS
register.
The compare instructions CP,
CP0 and CPB, perform a subtract operation
(minuend – subtrahend), but do not actually store the result of the subtraction. Instead, compare
instructions just update the flags in the STATUS register, such that an ensuing conditional branch
instruction may change program flow by testing the contents of the updated STATUS register. If
the result of the STATUS register test is true, the branch is taken. If the result of the STATUS
register test is false, the branch is not taken.
The conditional branch instructions supported by the dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E
devices are shown in Table 4-8. This table identifies the condition in the STATUS register which
must be true for the branch to be taken. In some cases, just a single bit is tested (as in BRA C),
while in other cases, a complex logic operation is performed (as in BRA GT). For dsPIC30F,
dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E devices, it is worth noting that both signed and unsigned conditional
tests are supported, and that support is provided for DSP algorithms with the OA, OB, SA and
SB condition mnemonics.
Table 4-8:
Conditional Branch Instructions
Condition
Mnemonic(1)
Status Test
C
Carry (not Borrow)
C
GE
Signed greater than or equal
(N&&OV) || (N&&OV)
GEU(2)
Unsigned greater than or equal
C
GT
Signed greater than
(Z&&N&&OV) || (Z&&N&&OV)
GTU
Unsigned greater than
C&&Z
LE
Signed less than or equal
Z || (N&&OV) || (N&&OV)
LEU
Unsigned less than or equal
C || Z
LT
Signed less than
(N&&OV) || (N&&OV)
LTU(3)
Unsigned less than
C
N
Negative
N
NC
Not Carry (Borrow)
C
NN
Not Negative
N
NOV
Not Overflow
OV
NZ
Not Zero
Z
(4)
OA
Accumulator A overflow
OA
OB(4)
Accumulator B overflow
OB
OV
Overflow
OV
(4)
Accumulator A saturate
SA
(4)
SB
Accumulator B saturate
SB
Z
Zero
Z
SA
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
Note:
DS70157F-page 76
Description
Instructions are of the form: BRA mnemonic, Expr.
GEU is identical to C and will reverse assemble to BRA C, Expr.
LTU is identical to NC and will reverse assemble to BRA NC, Expr.
This condition is only available in dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E devices.
The “Compare and Skip” instructions (CPBEQ, CPBGT, CPBLT, CPBNE, CPSEQ,
CPSGT, CPSLT, and CPSNE) do not modify the STATUS register.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 4. Instruction Set Details
4.9
Z STATUS BIT
The Z Status bit is a special zero Status bit that is useful for extended precision arithmetic. The
Z bit functions like a normal Z flag for all instructions, except those that use the Carry/Borrow
input (ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR). For the ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR instructions, the
Z bit can only be cleared and never set. If the result of one of these instructions is non-zero, the
Z bit will be cleared and will remain cleared, regardless of the result of subsequent ADDC, CPB,
SUBB or SUBBR operations. This allows the Z bit to be used for performing a simple zero check
on the result of a series of extended precision operations.
A sequence of instructions working on multi-precision data (starting with an instruction with no
Carry/Borrow input), will automatically logically AND the successive results of the zero test. All
results must be zero for the Z flag to remain set at the end of the sequence of operations. If the
result of the ADDC, CPB, SUBB or SUBBR instruction is non-zero, the Z bit will be cleared and
remain cleared for all subsequent ADDC, CPB, SUBB or SUBBR instructions. Example 4-15
shows how the Z bit operates for a 32-bit addition. It shows how the Z bit is affected for a 32-bit
addition implemented with an ADD/ADDC instruction sequence. The first example generates a
zero result for only the most significant word, and the second example generates a zero result
for both the least significant word and most significant word.
Example 4-15:
‘Z’ Status bit Operation for 32-bit Addition
; Add two doubles (W0:W1 and W2:W3)
; Store the result in W5:W4
ADD
W0, W2, W4
; Add LSWord and store to W4
ADDC
W1, W3, W5
; Add MSWord and store to W5
Before 32-bit Addition (zero result for the most significant word):
W0
W1
W2
W3
W4
W5
SR
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
0x2342
0xFFF0
0x39AA
0x0010
0x0000
0x0000
0x0000
After 32-bit Addition:
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
0x2342
0xFFF0
0x39AA
0x0010
0x5CEC
0x0000
0x0201 (DC,C=1)
4
Before 32-bit Addition (zero result for the least significant word and most significant word):
W0
W1
W2
W3
W4
W5
SR
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
0xB76E
0xFB7B
0x4892
0x0484
0x0000
0x0000
0x0000
After 32-bit Addition:
W0
W1
W2
W3
W4
W5
SR
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
0xB76E
0xFB7B
0x4892
0x0485
0x0000
0x0000
0x0103 (DC,Z,C=1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 77
Instruction Set
Details
W0
W1
W2
W3
W4
W5
SR
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
4.10
ASSIGNED WORKING REGISTER USAGE
The 16 working registers of the 16-bit MCU and DSC devices provide a large register set for
efficient code generation and algorithm implementation. In an effort to maintain an instruction set
that provides advanced capability, a stable run-time environment and backwards compatibility
with earlier Microchip processor cores, some working registers have a preassigned usage.
Table 4-9 summarizes these working register assignments. For the dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and
dsPIC33E, additional details are provided in subsections Section 4.10.1 “Implied DSP
Operands (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F and dsPIC33E Devices)” through Section 4.10.3 “PIC®
Microcontroller Compatibility”.
Table 4-9:
Special Working Register Assignments
Register
Special Assignment
W0
Default WREG, Divide Quotient
W1
Divide Remainder
W2
“MUL f” Product least significant word
W3
“MUL f” Product most significant word
W4
MAC Operand(1)
W5
MAC Operand(1)
W6
MAC Operand(1)
W7
MAC Operand(1)
W8
MAC Prefetch Address (X Memory)(1)
W9
MAC Prefetch Address (X Memory)(1)
W10
MAC Prefetch Address (Y Memory)(1)
W11
MAC Prefetch Address (Y Memory)(1)
W12
MAC Prefetch Offset(1)
W13
MAC Write Back Destination(1)
W14
Frame Pointer
W15
Stack Pointer
Note 1:
4.10.1
This assignment is only applicable in dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E devices.
Implied DSP Operands (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F and dsPIC33E
Devices)
To assist instruction encoding and maintain uniformity among the DSP class of instructions,
some working registers have pre-assigned functionality. For all DSP instructions which have
prefetch ability, the following 10 register assignments must be adhered to:
•
•
•
•
W4-W7 are used for arithmetic operands
W8-W11 are used for prefetch addresses (pointers)
W12 is used for the prefetch register offset index
W13 is used for the accumulator Write Back destination
These restrictions only apply to the DSP MAC class of instructions, which utilize working
registers and have prefetch ability (described in Section 4.15 “DSP Accumulator Instructions
(dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F and dsPIC33E Devices)”). These instructions are CLR, ED, EDAC, MAC,
MOVSAC, MPY, MPY.N and MSC.
In dsPIC33E devices, mixed-sign DSP multiplication operations are supported without the need
to dynamically modify the US<1:0> bits. In this mode (US<1:0> = ‘10’), each input operand is
treated as unsigned or signed based on which register is being used for that operand. W4 and
W6 are always unsigned operand, whereas W5 and W7 are always signed operands. This
feature can be used to efficiently execute extended-precision DSP multiplications.
The DSP Accumulator class of instructions (described in Section 4.15 “DSP Accumulator
Instructions (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F and dsPIC33E Devices)”) are not required to follow the
working register assignments in Table 4-9 and may freely use any working register when required.
DS70157F-page 78
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 4. Instruction Set Details
4.10.2
Implied Frame and Stack Pointer
To accommodate software stack usage, W14 is the implied Frame Pointer (used by the LNK and
ULNK instructions) and W15 is the implied Stack Pointer (used by the CALL, LNK, POP, PUSH,
RCALL, RETFIE, RETLW, RETURN, TRAP and ULNK instructions). Even though W14 and
W15 have this implied usage, they may still be used as generic operands in any instruction, with
the exceptions outlined in Section 4.10.1 “Implied DSP Operands (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F and
dsPIC33E Devices)”. If W14 and W15 must be used for other purposes (it is strongly advised
that they remain reserved for the Frame and Stack Pointer), extreme care must be taken such
that the run-time environment is not corrupted.
4.10.3
PIC® Microcontroller Compatibility
4.10.3.1
DEFAULT WORKING REGISTER WREG
To ease the migration path for users of the Microchip 8-bit PIC MCU families, the 16-bit MCU and
DSC devices have matched the functionality of the PIC MCU instruction sets as closely as
possible. One major difference between the 16-bit MCU and DSC and the 8-bit PIC MCU
processors is the number of working registers provided. The 8-bit PIC MCU families only provide
one 8-bit working register, while the 16-bit MCU and DSC families provide sixteen, 16-bit working
registers. To accommodate for the one working register of the 8-bit PIC MCU, the 16-bit MCU
and DSC device instruction set has designated one working register to be the default working
register for all legacy file register instructions. The default working register is set to W0, and it is
used by all instructions which use file register addressing.
Additionally, the syntax used by the 16-bit MCU and DSC device assembler to specify the default
working register is similar to that used by the 8-bit PIC MCU assembler. As shown in the detailed
instruction descriptions in Section 5. “Instruction Descriptions”, “WREG” must be used to
specify the default working register. Example 4-16 shows several instructions that use WREG.
Example 4-16:
ADD
ASR
CLR.B
DEC
MOV
SETM
XOR
4.10.3.2
Using the Default Working Register WREG
RAM100
RAM100, WREG
WREG
RAM100, WREG
WREG, RAM100
WREG
RAM100
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
add RAM100 and WREG, store in RAM100
shift RAM100 right, store in WREG
clear the WREG LS Byte
decrement RAM100, store in WREG
move WREG to RAM100
set all bits in the WREG
XOR RAM100 and WREG, store in RAM100
4
PRODH:PRODL REGISTER PAIR
Despite this architectural difference, the 16-bit MCU and DSC devices still support the legacy file
register multiply instruction (MULWF) with the “MUL{.B} f” instruction (described on page 303).
Supporting the legacy MULWF instruction has been accomplished by mapping the
PRODH:PRODL registers to the working register pair W3:W2. This means that when “MUL{.B}
f” is executed in Word mode, the multiply generates a 32-bit product which is stored in W3:W2,
where W3 has the most significant word of the product and W2 has the least significant word of
the product. When “MUL{.B} f” is executed in Byte mode, the 16-bit product is stored in W2,
and W3 is unaffected. Examples of this instruction are shown in Example 4-17.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 79
Instruction Set
Details
Another significant difference between the Microchip 8-bit PIC MCU and 16-bit MCU and DSC
architectures is the multiplier. Some PIC MCU families support an 8-bit x 8-bit multiplier, which
places the multiply product in the PRODH:PRODL register pair. The 16-bit MCU and DSC
devices have a 17-bit x 17-bit multiplier, which may place the result into any two successive
working registers (starting with an even register), or an accumulator.
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 4-17:
MUL.B
Unsigned f and WREG Multiply (Legacy MULWF Instruction)
0x100
; (0x100)*WREG (byte mode), store to W2
Before Instruction:
W0 (WREG) = 0x7705
W2 = 0x1235
W3 = 0x1000
Data Memory 0x0100 = 0x1255
After Instruction:
W0 (WREG) = 0x7705
W2 = 0x01A9
W3 = 0x1000
Data Memory 0x0100 = 0x1255
MUL
0x100
; (0x100)*WREG (word mode), store to W3:W2
Before Instruction:
W0 (WREG) = 0x7705
W2 = 0x1235
W3 = 0x1000
Data Memory 0x0100 = 0x1255
After Instruction:
W0 (WREG) = 0x7705
W2 = 0xDEA9
W3 = 0x0885
Data Memory 0x0100 = 0x1255
4.10.3.3
MOVING DATA WITH WREG
The “MOV{.B} f {,WREG}” instruction (described on page 279) and “MOV{.B} WREG, f”
instruction (described on page 280) allow for byte or word data to be moved between file register
memory and the WREG (working register W0). These instructions provide equivalent
functionality to the legacy Microchip PIC MCU MOVF and MOVWF instructions.
The “MOV{.B} f {,WREG}” and “MOV{.B} WREG, f” instructions are the only MOV instructions
which support moves of byte data to and from file register memory. Example 4-18 shows several
MOV instruction examples using the WREG.
Note:
When moving word data between file register memory and the working register
array, the “MOV Wns, f” and “MOV f, Wnd” instructions allow any working register
(W0:W15) to be used as the source or destination register, not just WREG.
Example 4-18:
MOV.B
MOV
MOV.B
MOV
DS70157F-page 80
Moving Data with WREG
0x1001, WREG
0x1000, WREG
WREG, TBLPAG
WREG, 0x804
;
;
;
;
move
move
move
move
the
the
the
the
byte
word
byte
word
stored
stored
stored
stored
at
at
at
at
location 0x1001 to W0
location 0x1000 to W0
W0 to the TBLPAG register
W0 to location 0x804
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 4. Instruction Set Details
4.11
DSP DATA FORMATS (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F AND dsPIC33E DEVICES)
4.11.1
Integer and Fractional Data
The dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E devices support both integer and fractional data types.
Integer data is inherently represented as a signed two’s complement value, where the Most
Significant bit is defined as a sign bit. Generally speaking, the range of an N-bit two’s complement
integer is -2N-1 to 2N-1 – 1. For a 16-bit integer, the data range is -32768 (0x8000) to 32767
(0x7FFF), including ‘0’. For a 32-bit integer, the data range is -2,147,483,648 (0x8000 0000) to
2,147,483,647 (0x7FFF FFFF).
Fractional data is represented as a two’s complement number, where the Most Significant bit is
defined as a sign bit, and the radix point is implied to lie just after the sign bit. This format is
commonly referred to as 1.15 (or Q15) format, where 1 is the number of bits used to represent
the integer portion of the number, and 15 is the number of bits used to represent the fractional
portion. The range of an N-bit two’s complement fraction with this implied radix point is -1.0 to
(1 – 21-N). For a 16-bit fraction, the 1.15 data range is -1.0 (0x8000) to 0.999969482 (0x7FFF),
including 0.0 and it has a precision of 3.05176x10-5. In Normal Saturation mode, the 32-bit
accumulators use a 1.31 format, which enhances the precision to 4.6566x10-10.
The dynamic range of the accumulators can be expanded by using the 8 bits of the Upper
Accumulator register (ACCxU) as guard bits. Guard bits are used if the value stored in the
accumulator overflows beyond the 32nd bit, and they are useful for implementing DSP
algorithms. This mode is enabled when the ACCSAT bit (CORCON<4>) is set to ‘1’ and it
expands the accumulators to 40 bits. The guard bits are also used when the accumulator
saturation is disabled. The accumulators then support an integer range of -5.498x1011 (0x80
0000 0000) to 5.498x1011 (0x7F FFFF FFFF). In Fractional mode, the guard bits of the
accumulator do not modify the location of the radix point and the 40-bit accumulators use a 9.31
fractional format. Note that all fractional operation results are stored in the 40-bit Accumulator,
justified with a 1.31 radix point. As in Integer mode, the guard bits merely increase the dynamic
range of the accumulator. 9.31 fractions have a range of -256.0 (0x80 0000 0000) to
(256.0 – 4.65661x10-10) (0x7F FFFF FFFF). Table 4-10 identifies the range and precision of
integers and fractions on the dsPIC30F/33F/33E devices for 16-bit, 32-bit and 40-bit registers.
Table 4-10:
dsPIC30F/33F/33E Data Ranges
Register Size
16-bit
Integer Range
-32768 to 32767
Fraction Range
-1.0 to (1.0 – 2-15)
2-31)
32-bit
-2,147,483,648 to
2,147,483,647
-1.0 to (1.0 –
40-bit
-549,755,813,888 to
549,755,813,887
-256.0 to (256.0 – 2-31)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Fraction Resolution
3.052 x 10-5
4.657 x 10-10
4.657 x 10-10
DS70157F-page 81
4
Instruction Set
Details
It should be noted that, with the exception of DSP multiplies, the ALU operates identically on
integer and fractional data. Namely, an addition of two integers will yield the same result (binary
number) as the addition of two fractional numbers. The only difference is how the result is
interpreted by the user. However, multiplies performed by DSP operations are different. In these
instructions, data format selection is made by the IF bit (CORCON<0>), and it must be set
accordingly (‘0’ for Fractional mode, ‘1’ for Integer mode). This is required because of the implied
radix point used by dsPIC30F/33F/33E fractional numbers. In Integer mode, multiplying two
16-bit integers produces a 32-bit integer result. However, multiplying two 1.15 values generates
a 2.30 result. Since the dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E devices use a 1.31 format for the
accumulators, a DSP multiply in Fractional mode also includes a left shift of one bit to keep the
radix point properly aligned. This feature reduces the resolution of the DSP multiplier to 2-30, but
has no other effect on the computation (e.g., 0.5 x 0.5 = 0.25).
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
4.11.2
Integer and Fractional Data Representation
Having a working knowledge of how integer and fractional data are represented on the
dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E is fundamental to working with the device. Both integer and
fractional data treat the Most Significant bit as a sign bit, and the binary exponent decreases by
one as the bit position advances toward the Least Significant bit. The binary exponent for an N-bit
integer starts at (N-1) for the Most Significant bit, and ends at ‘0’ for the Least Significant bit. For
an N-bit fraction, the binary exponent starts at ‘0’ for the Most Significant bit, and ends at (1-N)
for the Least Significant bit (as shown in Figure 4-12 for a positive value and in Figure 4-13 for a
negative value).
Conversion between integer and fractional representations can be performed using simple
division and multiplication. To go from an N-bit integer to a fraction, divide the integer value by
2N-1. Similarly, to convert an N-bit fraction to an integer, multiply the fractional value by 2N-1.
Figure 4-12:
Different Representations of 0x4001
Integer:
0
1
-215 214
0
213
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
212 . . . . . .
1
20
0x4001 = 214 + 20 = 16384 + 1 = 16385
1.15 Fractional:
0
1
-20 . 2-1
0
2-2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2-3 . . . . . .
1
2-15
Implied Radix Point
0x4001 = 2-1 + 2-15 = 0.5 + .000030518 = 0.500030518
Figure 4-13:
Different Representations of 0xC002
Integer:
1
1
-215 214
0
213
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
212 . . . . . .
0
20
0xC002 = -215 + 214 + 21= -32768 + 16384 + 2 = -16382
1.15 Fractional:
1
1
-20 . 2-1
0
2-2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2-3 . . . . . .
0
1
0
2-15
Implied Radix Point
0xC002 = -20 + 2-1 + 2-14 = -1.0 + 0.5 + 0.000061035 = -0.499938965
DS70157F-page 82
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 4. Instruction Set Details
4.12
ACCUMULATOR USAGE (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F AND dsPIC33E DEVICES)
Accumulators A and B are utilized by DSP instructions to perform mathematical and shifting
operations. Since the accumulators are 40 bits wide and the X and Y data paths are only 16 bits,
the method to load and store the accumulators must be understood.
Item A in Figure 4-14 shows that each 40-bit Accumulator (ACCA and ACCB) consists of an 8-bit
Upper register (ACCxU), a 16-bit High register (ACCxH) and a 16-bit Low register (ACCxL). To
address the bus alignment requirement and provide the ability for 1.31 math, ACCxH is used as
a destination register for loading the accumulator (with the LAC instruction), and also as a source
register for storing the accumulator (with the SAC.R instruction). This is represented by Item B,
Figure 4-14, where the upper and lower portions of the accumulator are shaded. In reality, during
accumulator loads, ACCxL is zero backfilled and ACCxU is sign-extended to represent the sign
of the value loaded in ACCxH.
When Normal (31-bit) Saturation is enabled, DSP operations (such as ADD, MAC, MSC, etc.)
utilize solely ACCxH:ACCxL (Item C in Figure 4-14) and ACCxU is only used to maintain the sign
of the value stored in ACCxH:ACCxL. For instance, when a MPY instruction is executed, the
result is stored in ACCxH:ACCxL, and the sign of the result is extended through ACCxU.
When Super Saturation is enabled, or when saturation is disabled, all registers of the
accumulator may be used (Item D in Figure 4-14) and the results of DSP operations are stored
in ACCxU:ACCxH:ACCxL. The benefit of ACCxU is that it increases the dynamic range of the
accumulator, as described in Section 4.11.1 “Integer and Fractional Data”. Refer to Table 4-10
to see the range of values which may be stored in the accumulator when in Normal and Super
Saturation modes.
Figure 4-14:
Accumulator Alignment and Usage
A)
ACCxL
ACCxH
ACCxU
39
.
32 31 30
16
15
0
Implied Radix Point (between bits 31 and 30)
B)
4
C)
Instruction Set
Details
D)
A)
B)
C)
D)
40-bit Accumulator consists of ACCxU:ACCxH:ACCxL
Load and Store operations
Operations in Normal Saturation mode
Operations in Super Saturation mode or with saturation disabled
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 83
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
4.13
ACCUMULATOR ACCESS (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F AND dsPIC33E DEVICES)
The six registers of Accumulator A and Accumulator B are memory mapped like any other
Special Function Register. This feature allows them to be accessed with file register or indirect
addressing, using any instruction which supports such addressing. However, it is recommended
that the DSP instructions LAC, SAC and SAC.R be used to load and store the accumulators,
since they provide sign-extension, shifting and rounding capabilities. LAC, SAC and SAC.R
instruction details are provided in Section 5. “Instruction Descriptions”.
Note 1: For convenience, ACCAU and ACCBU are sign-extended to 16 bits. This provides
the flexibility to access these registers using either Byte or Word mode (when file
register or indirect addressing is used).
2: The OA, OB, SA or SB bit cannot be set by writing overflowed values to the memory
mapped accumulators using MOV instructions, as these status bits are only affected
by DSP operations.
4.14
DSP MAC INSTRUCTIONS (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F AND dsPIC33E DEVICES)
The DSP Multiply and Accumulate (MAC) operations are a special suite of instructions which
provide the most efficient use of the dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E architectures. The DSP
MAC instructions, shown in Table 4-11, utilize both the X and Y data paths of the CPU core, which
enables these instructions to perform the following operations all in one cycle:
• two reads from data memory using prefetch working registers (MAC Prefetches)
• two updates to prefetch working registers (MAC Prefetch Register Updates)
• one mathematical operation with an accumulator (MAC Operations)
In addition, four of the ten DSP MAC instructions are also capable of performing an operation with
one accumulator, while storing out the rounded contents of the alternate accumulator. This
feature is called accumulator Write Back (WB) and it provides flexibility for the software
developer. For instance, the accumulator WB may be used to run two algorithms concurrently, or
efficiently process complex numbers, among other things.
Table 4-11:
DSP MAC Instructions
Instruction
Description
Accumulator WB?
CLR
Clear accumulator
Yes
ED
Euclidean distance (no accumulate)
No
EDAC
Euclidean distance
No
MAC
Multiply and accumulate
Yes
MAC
Square and accumulate
No
MOVSAC
Move from X and Y bus
Yes
MPY
Multiply to accumulator
No
MPY
Square to accumulator
No
MPY.N
Negative multiply to accumulator
No
MSC
Multiply and subtract
Yes
4.14.1
MAC Prefetches
Prefetches (or data reads) are made using the effective address stored in the working register.
The two prefetches from data memory must be specified using the working register assignments
shown in Table 4-9. One read must occur from the X data bus using W8 or W9, and one read
must occur from the Y data bus using W10 or W11. The allowed destination registers for both
prefetches are W4-W7.
As shown in Table 4-3, one special Addressing mode exists for the MAC class of instructions. This
mode is the Register Offset Addressing mode and utilizes W12. In this mode, the prefetch is
made using the effective address of the specified working register, plus the 16-bit signed value
stored in W12. Register Offset Addressing may only be used in the X space with W9, and in the
Y-space with W11.
DS70157F-page 84
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 4. Instruction Set Details
4.14.2
MAC Prefetch Register Updates
After the MAC prefetches are made, the effective address stored in each prefetch working register
may be modified. This feature enables efficient single-cycle processing for data stored
sequentially in X and Y memory. Since all DSP instructions execute in Word mode, only even
numbered updates may be made to the effective address stored in the working register.
Allowable address modifications to each prefetch register are -6, -4, -2, 0 (no update), +2, +4 and
+6. This means that effective address updates may be made up to 3 words in either direction.
When the Register Offset Addressing mode is used, no update is made to the base prefetch
register (W9 or W11), or the offset register (W12).
4.14.3
MAC Operations
The mathematical operations performed by the MAC class of DSP instructions center around
multiplying the contents of two working registers and either adding or storing the result to either
Accumulator A or Accumulator B. This is the operation of the MAC, MPY, MPY.N and MSC
instructions. Table 4-9 shows that W4-W7 must be used for data source operands in the MAC
class of instructions. W4-W7 may be combined in any fashion, and when the same working
register is specified for both operands, a square or square and accumulate operation is
performed.
For the ED and EDAC instructions, the same multiplicand operand must be specified by the
instruction, because this is the definition of the Euclidean Distance operation. Another unique
feature about this instruction is that the values prefetched from X and Y memory are not actually
stored in W4-W7. Instead, only the difference of the prefetched data words is stored in W4-W7.
The two remaining MAC class instructions, CLR and MOVSAC, are useful for initiating or completing
a series of MAC or EDAC instructions and do not use the multiplier. CLR has the ability to clear
Accumulator A or B, prefetch two values from data memory and store the contents of the other
accumulator. Similarly, MOVSAC has the ability to prefetch two values from data memory and store
the contents of either accumulator.
4.14.4
MAC Write Back
The write back ability of the MAC class of DSP instructions facilitates efficient processing of
algorithms. This feature allows one mathematical operation to be performed with one
accumulator, and the rounded contents of the other accumulator to be stored in the same cycle.
As indicated in Table 4-9, register W13 is assigned for performing the write back, and two
Addressing modes are supported: Direct and Indirect with Post-Increment.
4.14.5
MAC Syntax
The syntax of the MAC class of instructions can have several formats, which depend on the
instruction type and the operation it is performing, with respect to prefetches and accumulator
Write Back. With the exception of the CLR and MOVSAC instructions, all MAC class instructions
must specify a target accumulator along with two multiplicands, as shown in Example 4-19.
Example 4-19:
Base MAC Syntax
; MAC with no prefetch
MAC W4*W5, A
; MAC with no prefetch
MAC W7*W7, B
Multiply W7*W7, Accumulate to ACCB
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 85
4
Instruction Set
Details
The CLR, MOVSAC and MSC instructions support accumulator Write Back, while the ED, EDAC,
MPY and MPY.N instructions do not support accumulator Write Back. The MAC instruction, which
multiplies two working registers which are not the same, also supports accumulator Write Back.
However, the square and accumulate MAC instruction does not support accumulator Write Back
(see Table 4-11).
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
If a prefetch is used in the instruction, the assembler is capable of discriminating between the X
or Y data prefetch based on the register used for the effective address. [W8] or [W9] specifies
the X prefetch and [W10] or [W11] specifies the Y prefetch. Brackets around the working register
are required in the syntax, and they designate that indirect addressing is used to perform the
prefetch. When address modification is used, it must be specified using a minus-equals or
plus-equals “C”-like syntax (i.e., “[W8] – = 2” or “[W8] + = 6”). When Register Offset Addressing
is used for the prefetch, W12 is placed inside the brackets ([W9 + W12] for X prefetches and [W11
+ W12] for Y prefetches). Each prefetch operation must also specify a prefetch destination
register (W4-W7). In the instruction syntax, the destination register appears before the prefetch
register. Legal forms of prefetch are shown in Example 4-20.
Example 4-20:
MAC Prefetch Syntax
; MAC with X only prefetch
MAC W5*W6, A, [W8]+=2, W5
ACCA=ACCA+W5*W6
X([W8]+=2)→W5
; MAC with Y only prefetch
MAC W5*W5, B, [W11+W12], W5
ACCB=ACCB+W5*W5
Y([W11+W12])→W5
; MAC with X/Y prefetch
MAC W6*W7, B, [W9], W6,
[W10]+=4, W7
ACCB=ACCB+W6*W7
X([W9])→W6
Y([W10]+=4)→W7
If an accumulator Write Back is used in the instruction, it is specified last. The Write Back must
use the W13 register, and allowable forms for the Write Back are “W13” for direct addressing and
“[W13] + = 2” for indirect addressing with post-increment. By definition, the accumulator not used
in the mathematical operation is stored, so the Write Back accumulator is not specified in the
instruction. Legal forms of accumulator Write Back (WB) are shown in Example 4-21.
DS70157F-page 86
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 4. Instruction Set Details
Example 4-21:
MAC Accumulator WB Syntax
; CLR with direct WB of ACCB
CLR A,
W13
0 →ACCA
ACCB →W13
; MAC with indirect WB of ACCB
MAC W4*W5, A
[W13]+=2
ACCA=ACCA+W4*W5
ACCB →[W13]+=2
; MAC with Y prefetch, direct WB of ACCA
MAC W4*W5, B,
[W10]+=2, W4,
W13
ACCB=ACCB+W4*W5
Y([W10]+=2)→W4
ACCA →W13
Putting it all together, an MSC instruction which performs two prefetches and a write back is
shown in Example 4-22.
Example 4-22:
MSC Instruction with Two Prefetches and Accumulator Write Back
; MSC with X/Y prefetch, indirect WB of ACCA
MSC W6*W7, B, [W8]+=2, W6, [W10]-=6, W7 [W13]+=2
ACCB=ACCB-W6*W7
X([W8]+=2)→W6
ACCA→[W13]+=2
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 87
Instruction Set
Details
Y([W10]-=6)→W7
4
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
4.15
DSP ACCUMULATOR INSTRUCTIONS (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F AND
dsPIC33E DEVICES)
The DSP Accumulator instructions do not have prefetch or accumulator WB ability, but they do
provide the ability to add, negate, shift, load and store the contents of either 40-bit Accumulator.
In addition, the ADD and SUB instructions allow the two accumulators to be added or subtracted
from each other. DSP Accumulator instructions are shown in Table 4-12 and instruction details
are provided in Section 5. “Instruction Descriptions”.
Table 4-12:
Instruction
4.16
DSP Accumulator Instructions
Description
Accumulator WB?
ADD
Add accumulators
No
ADD
16-bit signed accumulator add
No
LAC
Load accumulator
No
NEG
Negate accumulator
No
SAC
Store accumulator
No
SAC.R
Store rounded accumulator
No
SFTAC
Arithmetic shift accumulator by Literal
No
SFTAC
Arithmetic shift accumulator by (Wn)
No
SUB
Subtract accumulators
No
SCALING DATA WITH THE FBCL INSTRUCTION (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F AND
dsPIC33E DEVICES)
To minimize quantization errors that are associated with data processing using DSP instructions,
it is important to utilize the complete numerical result of the operations. This may require scaling
data up to avoid underflow (i.e., when processing data from a 12-bit ADC), or scaling data down
to avoid overflow (i.e., when sending data to a 10-bit DAC). The scaling, which must be
performed to minimize quantization error, depends on the dynamic range of the input data which
is operated on, and the required dynamic range of the output data. At times, these conditions
may be known beforehand and fixed scaling may be employed. In other cases, scaling conditions
may not be fixed or known, and then dynamic scaling must be used to process data.
The FBCL instruction (Find First Bit Change Left) can efficiently be used to perform dynamic
scaling, because it determines the exponent of a value. A fixed point or integer value’s exponent
represents the amount which the value may be shifted before overflowing. This information is
valuable, because it may be used to bring the data value to “full scale”, meaning that its numeric
representation utilizes all the bits of the register it is stored in.
The FBCL instruction determines the exponent of a word by detecting the first bit change starting
from the value’s sign bit and working towards the LSB. Since the dsPIC DSC device’s barrel
shifter uses negative values to specify a left shift, the FBCL instruction returns the negated
exponent of a value. If the value is being scaled up, this allows the ensuing shift to be performed
immediately with the value returned by FBCL. Additionally, since the FBCL instruction only
operates on signed quantities, FBCL produces results in the range of -15:0. When the FBCL
instruction returns ‘0’, it indicates that the value is already at full scale. When the instruction
returns -15, it indicates that the value cannot be scaled (as is the case with 0x0 and 0xFFFF).
Table 4-13 shows word data with various dynamic ranges, their exponents, and the value after
scaling each data to maximize the dynamic range. Example 4-23 shows how the FBCL
instruction may be used for block processing.
DS70157F-page 88
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 4. Instruction Set Details
Table 4-13:
Scaling Examples
Word Value
Exponent
Full Scale Value
(Word Value << Exponent)
0x0001
14
0x4000
0x0002
13
0x4000
0x0004
12
0x4000
0x0100
6
0x4000
0x01FF
6
0x7FC0
0x0806
3
0x4030
0x2007
1
0x400E
0x4800
0
0x4800
0x7000
0
0x7000
0x8000
0
0x8000
0x900A
0
0x900A
0xE001
2
0x8004
0xFF07
7
0x8380
Note:
For the word values 0x0000 and 0xFFFF, the FBCL instruction returns -15.
As a practical example, assume that block processing is performed on a sequence of data with
very low dynamic range stored in 1.15 fractional format. To minimize quantization errors, the data
may be scaled up to prevent any quantization loss which may occur as it is processed. The FBCL
instruction can be executed on the sample with the largest magnitude to determine the optimal
scaling value for processing the data. Note that scaling the data up is performed by left shifting
the data. This is demonstrated with the code snippet below.
Example 4-23:
Scaling with FBCL
; assume W0 contains the largest absolute value of the data block
; assume W4 points to the beginning of the data block
; assume the block of data contains BLOCK_SIZE words
; determine the exponent to use for scaling
FBCL
W0, W2
; store exponent in W2
the entire data block before processing
#(BLOCK_SIZE-1), SCALE
[W4], A
; move the next data sample to ACCA
A, W2
; shift ACCA by W2 bits
A, [W4++]
; store scaled input (overwrite original)
; now process the data
; (processing block goes here)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 89
4
Instruction Set
Details
; scale
DO
LAC
SFTAC
SCALE:
SAC
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
4.17
NORMALIZING THE ACCUMULATOR WITH THE FBCL INSTRUCTION
(dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F AND dsPIC33E DEVICES)
The process of scaling a quantized value for its maximum dynamic range is known as
normalization (the data in the third column in Table 4-13 contains normalized data). Accumulator
normalization is a technique used to ensure that the accumulator is properly aligned before
storing data from the accumulator, and the FBCL instruction facilitates this function.
The two 40-bit accumulators each have 8 guard bits from the ACCxU register, which expands the
dynamic range of the accumulators from 1.31 to 9.31, when operating in Super Saturation mode
(see Section 4.11.1 “Integer and Fractional Data”). However, even in Super Saturation mode,
the Store Rounded Accumulator (SAC.R) instruction only stores 16-bit data (in 1.15 format) from
ACCxH, as described in Section 4.12 “Accumulator Usage (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F and
dsPIC33E Devices)”. Under certain conditions, this may pose a problem.
Proper data alignment for storing the contents of the accumulator may be achieved by scaling
the accumulator down if ACCxU is in use, or scaling the accumulator up if all of the ACCxH bits
are not being used. To perform such scaling, the FBCL instruction must operate on the ACCxU
byte and it must operate on the ACCxH word. If a shift is required, the ALU’s 40-bit shifter is
employed, using the SFTAC instruction to perform the scaling. Example 4-24 contains a code
snippet for accumulator normalization.
Example 4-24:
Normalizing with FBCL
; assume an operation in ACCA has just completed (SR intact)
; assume the processor is in super saturation mode
; assume ACCAH is defined to be the address of ACCAH (0x24)
MOV
#ACCAH, W5
BRA
OA, FBCL_GUARD
FBCL_HI:
FBCL
[W5], W0
BRA
SHIFT_ACC
FBCL_GUARD:
FBCL
[++W5], W0
ADD.B
W0, #15, W0
SHIFT_ACC:
SFTAC
A, W0
DS70157F-page 90
; W5 points to ACCAH
; if overflow we right shift
; extract exponent for left shift
; branch to the shift
; extract exponent for right shift
; adjust the sign for right shift
; shift ACCA to normalize
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 4. Instruction Set Details
4.18
EXTENDED-PRECISON ARITHMETIC USING MIXED-SIGN
MULTIPLICATIONS (dsPIC33E ONLY)
Many DSP algorithms utilize extended-precision arithmetic operations (operations with 32-bit or
64-bit operands and results) to enhance the resolution and accuracy of computations. These can
be implemented using 16-bit signed or unsigned multiplications; however, this would require
some additional processing and shifting of the data to obtain the correct results. To enable such
extended-precision algorithms to be computed faster, dsPIC33E devices support an optional
implicit mixed-sign multiplication mode, which is selected by setting US<1:0>
(CORCON<13:12>) = '10'.
In this mode, mixed-sign (unsigned x signed and signed x unsigned) multiplications can be
performed without the need to dynamically reconfigure the US<1:0> bits and shift data to account
for the difference in operand formats. Moreover, signed x signed and unsigned x unsigned
multiplications can also be performed without changing the multiplication mode. Each input
operand is implicitly treated as an unsigned number if the working register being used to specify
the operand is either W4 or W6. Similarly, an operand is treated as a signed number if the register
used is either W5 or W7. The DSP Engine selects the type of multiplication to be performed
based on the operand registers used, thereby eliminating the need for the user software to
modify the US<1:0> bits.
The execution time reductions provided by the implicit mixed-sign multiplication feature is
illustrated in the following code example, where the instruction cycle count for performing a 32-bit
multiplication is reduced from 7 cycles to 4 cycles when the mixed-sign multiplication mode is
enabled.
Example 4-25:
32-bit Signed Multiplication using Implicit Mixed-Sign Mode
Case A - Mixed-Sign Multiplication Mode Not Enabled
MUL.SU
MUL.US
CLR
ADD
ADD
SFTAC
MAC
W5, W6, W0; Word1 (signed) x Word2 (unsigned)
W4, W7, W2; Word0 (unsigned) x Word3 (signed)
B
; Clear Accumulator B
W1, B
W3, B
B, #15
; Shift right by 15 bits to align for Q31 format
W5*W7, B; Word1 (signed) x Word 3 (signed)
Case B - Mixed-Sign Multiplication Mode Enabled
MPY
MAC
SFTAC
W5*W6, B; Word1 (signed) x Word2 (unsigned)
W4*W7, B; Word0 (unsigned) x Word3 (signed)
B, #15
; Shift right by 15 bits to align for Q31 format
MAC
W5*W7, B; Word1 (signed) x Word 3 (signed)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 91
Instruction Set
Details
Besides DSP instructions, MCU multiplication (MUL) instructions can also utilize Accumulator A
or Accumulator B as a result destination, which enables faster extended-precision arithmetic
even when not using DSP multiplication instructions such as MPY or MAC.
4
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
DS70157F-page 92
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
HIGHLIGHTS
This section of the manual contains the following major topics:
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
Instruction Symbols......................................................................................................... 94
Instruction Encoding Field Descriptors Introduction........................................................ 94
Instruction Description Example ..................................................................................... 98
Instruction Descriptions................................................................................................... 99
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 93
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
5.1
INSTRUCTION SYMBOLS
All the symbols used in Section 5.4 “Instruction Descriptions” are listed in Table 1-2.
5.2
INSTRUCTION ENCODING FIELD DESCRIPTORS INTRODUCTION
All instruction encoding field descriptors used in Section 5.4 “Instruction Descriptions” are
shown in Table 5-2 through Table 5-12.
Table 5-1:
Instruction Encoding Field Descriptors
Field
Description
A
(1)
aa
(1)
B
bbbb
D
dddd
f ffff ffff ffff
fff ffff ffff ffff
ffff ffff ffff ffff
ggg
hhh
iiii(1)
kk
kk kkkk
kkkk kkkk
nnnn nnnn
jjjj(1)
k
kkkk
kk kkkk
kkkk kkkk
kkkk kkkk
kkkk kkkk
kkkk kkkk
mm
mmm
nnnn nnn0
nnn nnnn
nnnn nnnn
ppp
qqq
rrrr
ssss
tttt
vvvv
W
Accumulator selection bit: 0 = ACCA; 1 = CCB
Accumulator Write Back mode (see Table 5-12)
Byte mode selection bit: 0 = word operation; 1 = byte operation
4-bit bit position select: 0000 = LSB; 1111 = MSB
Destination address bit: 0 = result stored in WREG;
1 = result stored in file register
Wd destination register select: 0000 = W0; 1111 = W15
13-bit register file address (0x0000 to 0x1FFF)
15-bit register file word address (implied 0 LSB)
(0x0000 to 0xFFFE)
16-bit register file byte address (0x0000 to 0xFFFF)
Register Offset Addressing mode for Ws source register (see Table 5-4)
Register Offset Addressing mode for Wd destination register (see Table 5-5)
Prefetch X Operation (see Table 5-6)
Prefetch Y Operation (see Table 5-8)
1-bit literal field, constant data or expression
4-bit literal field, constant data or expression
6-bit literal field, constant data or expression
8-bit literal field, constant data or expression
10-bit literal field, constant data or expression
14-bit literal field, constant data or expression
16-bit literal field, constant data or expression
Multiplier source select with same working registers (see Table 5-10)
Multiplier source select with different working registers (see Table 5-11)
23-bit program address for CALL and GOTO instructions
16-bit program offset field for relative branch/call instructions
Addressing mode for Ws source register (see Table 5-2)
Addressing mode for Wd destination register (see Table 5-3)
Barrel shift count
Ws source register select: 0000 = W0; 1111 = W15
Dividend select, most significant word
Dividend select, least significant word
Double Word mode selection bit: 0 = word operation;
1 = double word operation
wwww
Wb base register select: 0000 = W0; 1111 = W15
xx(1)
Prefetch X Destination (see Table 5-7)
xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx
16-bit unused field (don’t care)
yy(1)
Prefetch Y Destination (see Table 5-9)
z
Bit test destination: 0 = C flag bit; 1 = Z flag bit
Note 1: This field is only available in dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E devices.
nnnn nnnn
DS70157F-page 94
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Table 5-2:
Addressing Modes for Ws Source Register
Addressing Mode
ppp
Source Operand
000
Register Direct
Ws
001
Indirect
[Ws]
010
Indirect with Post-Decrement
[Ws--]
011
Indirect with Post-Increment
[Ws++]
100
Indirect with Pre-Decrement
[--Ws]
101
Indirect with Pre-Increment
[++Ws]
11x
Unused
Table 5-3:
Addressing Modes for Wd Destination Register
Addressing Mode
qqq
Destination Operand
000
Register Direct
Wd
001
Indirect
[Wd]
010
Indirect with Post-Decrement
[Wd--]
011
Indirect with Post-Increment
[Wd++]
100
Indirect with Pre-Decrement
[--Wd]
101
Indirect with Pre-Increment
[++Wd]
11x
Unused (an attempt to use this Addressing mode will force a RESET instruction)
Table 5-4:
Offset Addressing Modes for Ws Source Register (with Register Offset)
Addressing Mode
ggg
Source Operand
000
Register Direct
Ws
001
Indirect
[Ws]
010
Indirect with Post-Decrement
[Ws--]
011
Indirect with Post-Increment
[Ws++]
100
Indirect with Pre-Decrement
[--Ws]
101
Indirect with Pre-Increment
[++Ws]
11x
Indirect with Register Offset
[Ws+Wb]
Table 5-5:
Offset Addressing Modes for Wd Destination Register
(with Register Offset)
Addressing Mode
hhh
Source Operand
Register Direct
Wd
001
Indirect
[Wd]
010
Indirect with Post-Decrement
[Wd--]
011
Indirect with Post-Increment
[Wd++]
100
Indirect with Pre-Decrement
[--Wd]
101
Indirect with Pre-Increment
[++Wd]
11x
Indirect with Register Offset
[Wd+Wb]
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
5
Instruction
Descriptions
000
DS70157F-page 95
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Table 5-6:
X Data Space Prefetch Operation (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F and dsPIC33E)
Operation
iiii
0000
Wxd = [W8]
0001
Wxd = [W8], W8 = W8 + 2
0010
Wxd = [W8], W8 = W8 + 4
0011
Wxd = [W8], W8 = W8 + 6
0100
No Prefetch for X Data Space
0101
Wxd = [W8], W8 = W8 – 6
0110
Wxd = [W8], W8 = W8 – 4
0111
Wxd = [W8], W8 = W8 – 2
1000
Wxd = [W9]
1001
Wxd = [W9], W9 = W9 + 2
1010
Wxd = [W9], W9 = W9 + 4
1011
Wxd = [W9], W9 = W9 + 6
1100
Wxd = [W9 + W12]
1101
Wxd = [W9], W9 = W9 – 6
1110
Wxd = [W9], W9 = W9 – 4
1111
Wxd = [W9], W9 = W9 – 2
Table 5-7:
X Data Space Prefetch Destination (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F and dsPIC33E)
Wxd
xx
00
W4
01
W5
10
W6
11
W7
Table 5-8:
Y Data Space Prefetch Operation (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F and dsPIC33E)
Operation
jjjj
DS70157F-page 96
0000
Wyd = [W10]
0001
Wyd = [W10], W10 = W10 + 2
0010
Wyd = [W10], W10 = W10 + 4
0011
Wyd = [W10], W10 = W10 + 6
0100
No Prefetch for Y Data Space
0101
Wyd = [W10], W10 = W10 – 6
0110
Wyd = [W10], W10 = W10 – 4
0111
Wyd = [W10], W10 = W10 – 2
1000
Wyd = [W11]
1001
Wyd = [W11], W11 = W11 + 2
1010
Wyd = [W11], W11 = W11 + 4
1011
Wyd = [W11], W11 = W11 + 6
1100
Wyd = [W11 + W12]
1101
Wyd = [W11], W11 = W11 – 6
1110
Wyd = [W11], W11 = W11 – 4
1111
Wyd = [W11], W11 = W11 – 2
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Table 5-9:
Y Data Space Prefetch Destination (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F and dsPIC33E)
Wyd
yy
00
W4
01
W5
10
W6
11
W7
Table 5-10:
MAC or MPY Source Operands (Same Working Register) (dsPIC30F,
dsPIC33F and dsPIC33E)
Multiplicands
mm
00
W4 * W4
01
W5 * W5
10
W6 * W6
11
W7 * W7
Table 5-11:
MAC or MPY Source Operands (Different Working Register) (dsPIC30F,
dsPIC33F and dsPIC33E)
Multiplicands
mmm
000
W4 * W5
001
W4 * W6
010
W4 * W7
011
Invalid
100
W5 * W6
101
W5 * W7
110
W6 * W7
111
Invalid
Table 5-12:
MAC Accumulator Write Back Selection (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F and
dsPIC33E)
Write Back Selection
aa
00
W13 = Other Accumulator (Direct Addressing)
01
[W13] + = 2 = Other Accumulator (Indirect Addressing with Post-Increment)
10
No Write Back
11
Invalid
Table 5-13:
MOVPAG Destination Selection
PP
Target Page Register
00
DSRPAG
01
DSWPAG
10
TBLPAG
11
Reserved – do not use
Table 5-14:
5
Accumulator Selection
Target Accumulator
0
Accumulator A
1
Accumulator B
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Instruction
Descriptions
A
DS70157F-page 97
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
5.3
INSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION EXAMPLE
The example description below is for the fictitious instruction FOO. The following example
instruction was created to demonstrate how the table fields (syntax, operands, operation, etc.)
are used to describe the instructions presented in Section 5.4 “Instruction Descriptions”.
FOO
Implemented in:
The Header field summarizes what the instruction does
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
Cells marked with an ‘X’ indicate the instruction is implemented for that
device family.
DS70157F-page 98
Syntax:
The Syntax field consists of an optional label, the instruction mnemonic, any
optional extensions which exist for the instruction and the operands for the
instruction. Most instructions support more than one operand variant to
support the various Addressing modes. In these circumstances, all possible
instruction operands are listed beneath each other and are enclosed in
braces.
Operands:
The Operands field describes the set of values which each of the operands
may take. Operands may be accumulator registers, file registers, literal
constants (signed or unsigned), or working registers.
Operation:
The Operation field summarizes the operation performed by the instruction.
Status Affected:
The Status Affected field describes which bits of the STATUS Register are
affected by the instruction. Status bits are listed by bit position in
descending order.
Encoding:
The Encoding field shows how the instruction is bit encoded. Individual bit
fields are explained in the Description field, and complete encoding details
are provided in Table 5.2.
Description:
The Description field describes in detail the operation performed by the
instruction. A key for the encoding bits is also provided.
Words:
The Words field contains the number of program words that are used to
store the instruction in memory.
Cycles:
The Cycles field contains the number of instruction cycles that are required
to execute the instruction.
Examples:
The Examples field contains examples that demonstrate how the instruction
operates. “Before” and “After” register snapshots are provided, which allow
the user to clearly understand what operation the instruction performs.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
5.4
INSTRUCTION DESCRIPTIONS
ADD
Add f to WREG
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
f ∈ [0 ... 8191]
Operation:
(f) + (WREG) →destination designated by D
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
ADD{.B}
1011
Description:
0100
f
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
ffff
ffff
{,WREG}
0BDf
ffff
Add the contents of the default working register WREG to the contents of
the file register, and place the result in the destination register. The
optional WREG operand determines the destination register. If WREG is
specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not specified, the
result is stored in the file register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘D’ bit selects the destination (‘0’ for WREG, ‘1’ for file register).
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
The WREG is set to working register W0.
2:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
ADD.B
RAM100
Before
Instruction
WREG CC80
RAM100 FFC0
SR
0000
Example 2:
ADD
After
Instruction
WREG CC80
RAM100 FF40
SR
0005 (OV, C = 1)
RAM200, WREG
; Add RAM200 to WREG (Word mode)
After
Instruction
WREG CC40
RAM200 FFC0
SR 0001 (C = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
Before
Instruction
WREG CC80
RAM200 FFC0
SR 0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
; Add WREG to RAM100 (Byte mode)
DS70157F-page 99
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
ADD
Add Literal to Wn
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F
dsPIC33E
X
X
X
X
X
X
kkkk
kkkk
dddd
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
lit10 ∈ [0 ... 255] for byte operation
lit10 ∈ [0 ... 1023] for word operation
Wn ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
lit10 + (Wn) →Wn
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
Description:
ADD{.B}
1011
0000
#lit10,
Wn
0Bkk
Add the 10-bit unsigned literal operand to the contents of the working
register Wn, and place the result back into the working register Wn.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘k’ bits specify the literal operand.
The ‘d’ bits select the address of the working register.
Note 1:
2:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
For byte operations, the literal must be specified as an unsigned
value [0:255]. See Section 4.6 “Using 10-bit Literal Operands”
for information on using 10-bit literal operands in Byte mode.
ADD.B
#0xFF, W7
Before
Instruction
W7 12C0
SR
0000
Example 2:
ADD
Before
Instruction
W1 12C0
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 100
; Add -1 to W7 (Byte mode)
After
Instruction
W7 12BF
SR 0009 (N, C = 1)
#0xFF, W1
; Add 255 to W1 (Word mode)
After
Instruction
W1 13BF
SR 0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
ADD
Add Wb to Short Literal
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
ADD{.B}
Wb,
#lit5,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
Wd
[Wd]
[Wd++]
[Wd--]
[++Wd]
[--Wd]
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
lit5 ∈ [0 ... 31]
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Wb) + lit5 →Wd
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
Description:
0100
0www
wBqq
qddd
d11k
kkkk
Add the contents of the base register Wb to the 5-bit unsigned short literal
operand, and place the result in the destination register Wd. Register
direct addressing must be used for Wb. Either register direct or indirect
addressing may be used for Wd.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘q’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘k’ bits provide the literal operand, a five-bit integer number.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
ADD.B
Before
Instruction
W0
2290
W7 12C0
SR
0000
W0, #0x1F, W7
; Add W0 and 31 (Byte mode)
; Store the result in W7
After
Instruction
W0 2290
W7 12AF
SR 0008 (N = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 101
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 2:
ADD
W3, #0x6, [--W4]
Before
Instruction
W3
6006
W4
1000
Data 0FFE DDEE
Data 1000 DDEE
SR
0000
ADD
; Add W3 and 6 (Word mode)
; Store the result in [--W4]
After
Instruction
W3 6006
W4 0FFE
Data 0FFE 600C
Data 1000 DDEE
SR 0000
Add Wb to Ws
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
ADD{.B}
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Wb) + (Ws) →Wd
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
0100
Description:
0www
Wb,
wBqq
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Ws,
Wd
[Ws],
[Wd]
[Ws++],
[Wd++]
[Ws--],
[Wd--]
[++Ws],
[++Wd]
[--Ws],
[--Wd]
qddd
dppp
X
ssss
Add the contents of the source register Ws and the contents of the base
register Wb, and place the result in the destination register Wd. Register
direct addressing must be used for Wb. Either register direct or indirect
addressing may be used for Ws and Wd.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘q’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
DS70157F-page 102
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rathjer than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 1:
ADD.B
W5, W6, W7
Before
Instruction
W5
AB00
W6
0030
W7
FFFF
SR
0000
Example 2:
ADD
; Add W5 to W6, store result in W7
; (Byte mode)
After
Instruction
W5
AB00
W6
0030
W7
FF30
SR
0000
W5, W6, W7
Before
Instruction
W5
AB00
W6
0030
W7
FFFF
SR
0000
; Add W5 to W6, store result in W7
; (Word mode)
After
Instruction
W5
AB00
W6
0030
W7
AB30
SR
0008 (N = 1)
ADD
Add Accumulators
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Acc ∈ [A,B]
Operation:
If (Acc = A):
(ACCA) + (ACCB) →ACCA
Else:
(ACCA) + (ACCB) →ACCB
Status Affected:
OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB
Encoding:
ADD
PIC24E
1100
Description:
1011
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
X
0000
0000
0000
Acc
A000
Add the contents of Accumulator A to the contents of Accumulator B and
place the result in the selected accumulator. This instruction performs a
40-bit addition.
The ‘A’ bit specifies the destination accumulator.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
ADD
; Add ACCB to ACCA
5
Before
Instruction
00 0022 3300
00 1833 4558
0000
ACCA
ACCB
SR
After
Instruction
00 1855 7858
00 1833 4558
0000
Instruction
Descriptions
ACCA
ACCB
SR
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
A
DS70157F-page 103
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 2:
ADD
ACCA
ACCB
SR
B
Before
Instruction
00 E111 2222
00 7654 3210
0000
ADD
Implemented in:
Syntax:
; Add ACCA to ACCB
; Assume Super Saturation mode enabled
; (ACCSAT = 1, SATA = 1, SATB = 1)
ACCA
ACCB
SR
After
Instruction
00 E111 2222
01 5765 5432
4800 (OB, OAB = 1)
16-bit Signed Add to Accumulator
PIC24F
{label:}
PIC24H
ADD
PIC24E
Ws,
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F
dsPIC33E
X
X
X
rggg
ssss
{#Slit4,}
Acc
[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[--Ws],
[++Ws],
[Ws+Wb],
Operands:
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Slit4 ∈ [-8 ... +7]
Acc ∈ [A,B]
Operation:
ShiftSlit4(Extend(Ws)) + (Acc) →Acc
Status Affected: OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB
Encoding:
Description:
1100
1001
Awww
wrrr
Add a 16-bit value specified by the source working register to the most
significant word of the selected accumulator. The source operand may
specify the direct contents of a working register or an effective address. The
value specified is added to the most significant word of the accumulator by
sign-extending and zero backfilling the source operand prior to the operation.
The value added to the accumulator may also be shifted by a 4-bit signed
literal before the addition is made.
The ‘A’ bit specifies the destination accumulator.
The ‘w’ bits specify the offset register Wb.
The ‘r’ bits encode the optional shift.
The ‘g’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits specify the source register Ws.
Note:
DS70157F-page 104
Positive values of operand Slit4 represent an arithmetic shift right
and negative values of operand Slit4 represent an arithmetic shift
left. The contents of the source register are not affected by Slit4.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
ADD
16-bit Signed Add to Accumulator
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
ADD
W0
ACCA
SR
Example 2:
ADD
W5
ACCA
Data 2000
SR
W0, #2, A
Before
Instruction
8000
00 7000 0000
0000
[W5++], A
Before
Instruction
2000
00 0067 2345
5000
0000
; Add W0 right-shifted by 2 to ACCA
W0
ACCA
SR
After
Instruction
8000
00 5000 0000
0000
; Add the effective value of W5 to ACCA
; Post-increment W5
W5
ACCA
Data 2000
SR
After
Instruction
2002
00 5067 2345
5000
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 105
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
ADDC
Add f to WREG with Carry
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
f ∈ [0 ... 8191]
Operation:
(f) + (WREG) + (C) →destination designated by D
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
1011
Description:
ADDC{.B} f
dsPIC30F dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
0100
X
X
ffff
ffff
{,WREG}
1BDf
ffff
Add the contents of the default working register WREG, the contents of
the file register and the Carry bit and place the result in the destination
register. The optional WREG operand determines the destination
register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is
not specified, the result is stored in the file register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘D’ bit selects the destination (‘0’ for WREG, ‘1’ for file register).
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1:
2:
3:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
The WREG is set to working register W0.
The Z flag is “sticky” for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR. These
instructions can only clear Z.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
ADDC.B
RAM100
; Add WREG and C bit to RAM100
; (Byte mode)
Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
WREG CC60
WREG CC60
RAM100
8006
RAM100 8067
SR
0001 (C=1)
SR 0000
Example 2:
ADDC
RAM200, WREG
; Add RAM200 and C bit to the WREG
; (Word mode)
Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
WREG
5600
WREG 8A01
RAM200
3400
RAM200 3400
SR
0001 (C=1)
SR 000C (N, OV = 1)
DS70157F-page 106
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
ADDC
Add Literal to Wn with Carry
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
kkkk
kkkk
dddd
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
lit10 ∈ [0 ... 255] for byte operation
lit10 ∈ [0 ... 1023] for word operation
Wn ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
lit10 + (Wn) + (C) →Wn
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
Description:
1011
ADDC{.B}
0000
#lit10,
1Bkk
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
Wn
Add the 10-bit unsigned literal operand, the contents of the working
register Wn and the Carry bit, and place the result back into the working
register Wn.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘k’ bits specify the literal operand.
The ‘d’ bits select the address of the working register.
Note 1:
2:
3:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
ADDC.B
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
For byte operations, the literal must be specified as an
unsigned value [0:255]. See Section 4.6 “Using 10-bit Literal
Operands” for information on using 10-bit literal operands in
Byte mode.
The Z flag is “sticky” for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR.
These instructions can only clear Z.
#0xFF, W7
Before
Instruction
W7 12C0
SR
0000 (C = 0)
Example 2:
ADDC
#0xFF, W1
Before
Instruction
W1 12C0
SR
0001 (C = 1)
; Add -1 and C bit to W7 (Byte mode)
After
Instruction
W7 12BF
SR 0009 (N,C = 1)
; Add 255 and C bit to W1 (Word mode)
After
Instruction
W1 13C0
SR 0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 107
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
ADDC
Add Wb to Short Literal with Carry
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
ADDC{.B}
Wb,
#lit5,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
Wd
[Wd]
[Wd++]
[Wd--]
[++Wd]
[--Wd]
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
lit5 ∈ [0 ... 31]
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Wb) + lit5 + (C) →Wd
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
Description:
0100
1www
wBqq
qddd
d11k
kkkk
Add the contents of the base register Wb, the 5-bit unsigned short literal
operand and the Carry bit, and place the result in the destination register
Wd. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb. Register direct or
indirect addressing may be used for Wd.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘q’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘k’ bits provide the literal operand, a five-bit integer number.
Note 1:
2:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
ADDC.B
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
The Z flag is “sticky” for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR. These
instructions can only clear Z.
W0, #0x1F, [W7]
Before
Instruction
W0 CC80
W7
12C0
Data 12C0
B000
SR
0000 (C = 0)
DS70157F-page 108
; Add W0, 31 and C bit (Byte mode)
; Store the result in [W7]
After
Instruction
W0 CC80
W7 12C0
Data 12C0 B09F
SR
0008 (N = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 2:
ADDC
W3, #0x6, [--W4]
Before
Instruction
W3 6006
W4 1000
Data 0FFE DDEE
Data 1000 DDEE
SR 0001 (C = 1)
W3
W4
Data 0FFE
Data 1000
SR
; Add W3, 6 and C bit (Word mode)
; Store the result in [--W4]
After
Instruction
6006
0FFE
600D
DDEE
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 109
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
ADDC
Add Wb to Ws with Carry
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
ADDC{.B}
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Wb) + (Ws) + (C) →Wd
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
0100
Description:
1www
Wb,
wBqq
Ws,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Wd
[Ws],
[Wd]
[Ws++],
[Wd++]
[Ws--],
[Wd--]
[++Ws],
[++Wd]
[--Ws],
[--Wd]
qddd
X
dppp
ssss
Add the contents of the source register Ws, the contents of the base
register Wb and the Carry bit, and place the result in the destination
register Wd. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb. Either
register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws and Wd.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘q’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note 1:
2:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
DS70157F-page 110
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
The Z flag is “sticky” for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR. These
instructions can only clear Z.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 1:
ADDC.B
W0,[W1++],[W2++]
; Add W0, [W1] and C bit (Byte mode)
; Store the result in [W2]
; Post-increment W1, W2
Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
W0 CC20
W0 CC20
W1 0800
W1 0801
W2 1000
W2 1001
Data 0800 AB25
Data 0800 AB25
Data 1000 FFFF
Data 1000 FF46
SR 0001 (C = 1)
SR 0000
Example 2:
ADDC
W3,[W2++],[W1++]
; Add W3, [W2] and C bit (Word mode)
; Store the result in [W1]
; Post-increment W1, W2
Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
W1 1000
W1
1002
W2 2000
W2
2002
W3 0180
W3
0180
Data 1000 8000
Data 1000
2681
Data 2000 2500
Data 2000
2500
SR 0001 (C = 1)
SR
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 111
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
AND
AND f and WREG
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
f ∈ [0 ... 8191]
Operation:
(f).AND.(WREG) →destination designated by D
Status Affected:
N, Z
Encoding:
AND{.B}
1011
Description:
0110
f
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
ffff
ffff
{,WREG}
0BDf
ffff
Compute the logical AND operation of the contents of the default working
register WREG and the contents of the file register, and place the result in
the destination register. The optional WREG operand determines the
destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG.
If WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘D’ bit selects the destination (‘0’ for WREG, ‘1’ for file register).
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1:
2:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
The WREG is set to working register W0.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
AND.B
RAM100
Before
Instruction
WREG CC80
RAM100 FFC0
SR
0000
Example 2:
AND
RAM200, WREG
Before
Instruction
WREG CC80
RAM200 12C0
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 112
; AND WREG to RAM100 (Byte mode)
After
Instruction
WREG CC80
RAM100 FF80
SR 0008 (N = 1)
; AND RAM200 to WREG (Word mode)
After
Instruction
WREG 0080
RAM200 12C0
SR 0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
AND
AND Literal and Wn
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
kkkk
kkkk
dddd
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
lit10 ∈ [0 ... 255] for byte operation
lit10 ∈ [0 ... 1023] for word operation
Wn ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
lit10.AND.(Wn) →Wn
Status Affected:
N, Z
Encoding:
Description:
AND{.B}
1011
0010
#lit10,
0Bkk
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
Wn
Compute the logical AND operation of the 10-bit literal operand and the
contents of the working register Wn and place the result back into the
working register Wn. Register direct addressing must be used for Wn.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘k’ bits specify the literal operand.
The ‘d’ bits select the address of the working register.
Note 1:
2:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
AND.B
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
For byte operations, the literal must be specified as an
unsigned value [0:255]. See Section 4.6 “Using 10-bit Literal
Operands” for information on using 10-bit literal operands in
Byte mode.
#0x83, W7
Before
Instruction
W7 12C0
SR
0000
Example 2:
AND
#0x333, W1
Before
Instruction
W1 12D0
SR
0000
; AND 0x83 to W7 (Byte mode)
After
Instruction
W7
1280
SR
0008 (N = 1)
; AND 0x333 to W1 (Word mode)
After
Instruction
W1
0210
SR
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 113
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
AND
AND Wb and Short Literal
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
AND{.B}
Wb,
#lit5,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
Wd
[Wd]
[Wd++]
[Wd--]
[++Wd]
[--Wd]
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
lit5 ∈ [0 ... 31]
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Wb).AND.lit5 →Wd
Status Affected:
N, Z
Encoding:
0110
Description:
0www
wBqq
qddd
d11k
kkkk
Compute the logical AND operation of the contents of the base register
Wb and the 5-bit literal and place the result in the destination register Wd.
Register direct addressing must be used for Wb. Either register direct or
indirect addressing may be used for Wd.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘q’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘k’ bits provide the literal operand, a five-bit integer number.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
AND.B
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
W0,#0x3,[W1++]
Before
Instruction
W0 23A5
W1
2211
Data 2210
9999
SR
0000
Example 2:
AND
Before
Instruction
W0
6723
W1
7878
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 114
; AND W0 and 0x3 (Byte mode)
; Store to [W1]
; Post-increment W1
After
Instruction
W0 23A5
W1 2212
Data 2210 0199
SR 0000
W0,#0x1F,W1
; AND W0 and 0x1F (Word mode)
; Store to W1
After
Instruction
W0 6723
W1 0003
SR 0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
AND
And Wb and Ws
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
AND{.B}
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Wb).AND.(Ws) →Wd
Status Affected:
N, Z
Encoding:
0110
Description:
0www
Wb,
wBqq
Ws,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Wd
[Ws],
[Wd]
[Ws++],
[Wd++]
[Ws--],
[Wd--]
[++Ws],
[++Wd]
[--Ws],
[--Wd]
qddd
X
dppp
ssss
Compute the logical AND operation of the contents of the source register
Ws and the contents of the base register Wb, and place the result in the
destination register Wd. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb.
Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws and Wd.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘q’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 115
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 1:
AND.B
W0, W1 [W2++]
Before
Instruction
W0 AA55
W1
2211
W2
1001
Data 1000 FFFF
SR
0000
Example 2:
AND
After
Instruction
W0 AA55
W1
2211
W2
1002
Data 1000
11FF
SR
0000
W0, [W1++], W2 ; AND W0 and [W1], and
; store to W2 (Word mode)
; Post-increment W1
Before
Instruction
W0
AA55
W1
1000
W2
55AA
Data 1000
2634
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 116
; AND W0 and W1, and
; store to [W2] (Byte mode)
; Post-increment W2
After
Instruction
W0
AA55
W1
1002
W2
2214
Data 1000
2634
SR
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
ASR
Arithmetic Shift Right f
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
ASR{.B}
f
Operands:
f ∈ [0 ... 8191]
Operation:
For byte operation:
(f<7>) →Dest<7>
(f<7>) →Dest<6>
(f<6:1>) →Dest<5:0>
(f<0>) →C
For word operation:
(f<15>) →Dest<15>
(f<15>) →Dest<14>
(f<14:1>) →Dest<13:0>
(f<0>) →C
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
ffff
ffff
{,WREG}
C
Status Affected:
N, Z, C
Encoding:
1101
Description:
0101
1BDf
ffff
Shift the contents of the file register one bit to the right and place the result
in the destination register. The Least Significant bit of the file register is
shifted into the Carry bit of the STATUS Register. After the shift is
performed, the result is sign-extended. The optional WREG operand
determines the destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is
stored in WREG. If WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file
register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ’1’ for byte).
The ‘D’ bit selects the destination (‘0’ for WREG, ‘1’ for file register).
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1:
2:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
The WREG is set to working register W0.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 117
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 1:
ASR.B
RAM400, WREG
Before
Instruction
WREG
0600
RAM400
0823
SR
0000
Example 2:
ASR
RAM200
Before
Instruction
RAM200
8009
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 118
; ASR RAM400 and store to WREG
; (Byte mode)
After
Instruction
WREG
0611
RAM400
0823
SR
0001 (C = 1)
; ASR RAM200 (Word mode)
After
Instruction
RAM200 C004
SR
0009 (N, C = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
ASR
Arithmetic Shift Right Ws
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
ASR{.B}
Ws,
[Wd]
[Ws++],
[Wd++]
[Ws--],
[Wd--]
[++Ws],
[++Wd]
[--Ws],
[--Wd]
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
For byte operation:
(Ws<7>) →Wd<7>
(Ws<7>) →Wd<6>
(Ws<6:1>) →Wd<5:0>
(Ws<0>) →C
For word operation:
(Ws<15>) →Wd<15>
(Ws<15>) →Wd<14>
(Ws<14:1>) →Wd<13:0>
(Ws<0>) →C
X
X
dppp
ssss
Wd
[Ws],
Operands:
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
C
Status Affected:
N, Z, C
Encoding:
1101
Description:
0001
1Bqq
qddd
Shift the contents of the source register Ws one bit to the right and place the
result in the destination register Wd. The Least Significant bit of Ws is
shifted into the Carry bit of the STATUS register. After the shift is performed,
the result is sign-extended. Either register direct or indirect addressing may
be used for Ws and Wd.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘q’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
5
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 119
Instruction
Descriptions
Note 1:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 1:
ASR.B
[W0++], [W1++]
Before
Instruction
W0
0600
W1
0801
Data 600
2366
Data 800
FFC0
SR
0000
Example 2:
ASR
W12, W13
Before
Instruction
W12 AB01
W13
0322
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 120
; ASR [W0] and store to [W1]
(Byte mode)
; Post-increment W0 and W1
After
Instruction
W0
0601
W1
0802
Data 600
2366
Data 800 33C0
SR
0000
; ASR W12 and store to W13
(Word mode)
After
Instruction
W12 AB01
W13 D580
SR 0009 (N, C = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
ASR
Arithmetic Shift Right by Short Literal
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
lit4 ∈ [0...15]
Wnd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
lit4<3:0> →Shift_Val
Wb<15> →Wnd<15:15-Shift_Val + 1>
Wb<15:Shift_Val> →Wnd<15-Shift_Val:0>
Status Affected:
N, Z
Encoding:
1101
Description:
ASR
1110
Wb,
1www
#lit4,
wddd
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
d100
kkkk
Wnd
Arithmetic shift right the contents of the source register Wb by the 4-bit
unsigned literal, and store the result in the destination register Wnd. After
the shift is performed, the result is sign-extended. Direct addressing must
be used for Wb and Wnd.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘k’ bits provide the literal operand.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
ASR
This instruction operates in Word mode only.
W0, #0x4, W1
Before
Instruction
W0
060F
W1
1234
SR
0000
Example 2:
ASR
W0, #0x6, W1
Before
Instruction
W0
80FF
W1
0060
SR
0000
Example 3:
ASR
W0, #0xF, W1
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
After
Instruction
W0 060F
W1
0060
SR
0000
; ASR W0 by 6 and store to W1
After
Instruction
W0 80FF
W1 FE03
SR
0008 (N = 1)
; ASR W0 by 15 and store to W1
After
Instruction
W0
70FF
W1
0000
SR
0002 (Z = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
Before
Instruction
W0
70FF
W1 CC26
SR
0000
; ASR W0 by 4 and store to W1
DS70157F-page 121
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
ASR
Arithmetic Shift Right by Wns
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wns ∈ [W0 ...W15]
Wnd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
Wns<3:0> →Shift_Val
Wb<15> →Wnd<15:15-Shift_Val + 1>
Wb<15:Shift_Val> →Wnd<15-Shift_Val:0>
Status Affected:
N, Z
Encoding:
Description:
1101
1110
1
Cycles:
1
ASR
W0, W5, W6
Before
Instruction
W0
80FF
W5
0004
W6
2633
SR
0000
Example 2:
ASR
W0, W5, W6
Before
Instruction
W0
6688
W5
000A
W6
FF00
SR
0000
Example 3:
ASR
W11, W12, W13
Before
Instruction
W11
8765
W12
88E4
W13
A5A5
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 122
Wb,
Wns,
1www
wddd
X
X
d000
ssss
Wnd
Arithmetic shift right the contents of the source register Wb by the 4 Least
Significant bits of Wns (up to 15 positions) and store the result in the
destination register Wnd. After the shift is performed, the result is
sign-extended. Direct addressing must be used for Wb, Wns and Wnd.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note 1: This instruction operates in Word mode only.
2: If Wns is greater than 15, Wnd = 0x0 if Wb is positive, and
Wnd = 0xFFFF if Wb is negative.
Words:
Example 1:
ASR
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
; ASR W0 by W5 and store to W6
After
Instruction
W0
80FF
W5
0004
W6
F80F
SR
0000
; ASR W0 by W5 and store to W6
After
Instruction
W0
6688
W5
000A
W6
0019
SR
0000
; ASR W11 by W12 and store to W13
After
Instruction
W11
8765
W12
88E4
W13
F876
SR
0008 (N = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
BCLR
Bit Clear f
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
f ∈ [0 ... 8191] for byte operation
f ∈ [0 ... 8190] (even only) for word operation
bit4 ∈ [0 ... 7] for byte operation
bit4 ∈ [0 ... 15] for byte operation
Operation:
0 →f<bit4>
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1010
Description:
BCLR{.B}
1001
f,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
ffff
fffb
#bit4
bbbf
ffff
Clear the bit in the file register f specified by ‘bit4’. Bit numbering begins
with the Least Significant bit (bit 0) and advances to the Most Significant
bit (bit 7 for byte operations, bit 15 for word operations).
The ‘b’ bits select value bit4 of the bit position to be cleared.
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1:
2:
3:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
When this instruction operates in Word mode, the file register
address must be word-aligned.
When this instruction operates in Byte mode, ‘bit4’ must be
between 0 and 7.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
BCLR.B 0x800, #0x7
Before
Instruction
Data 0800
66EF
SR
0000
Example 2:
BCLR
; Clear bit 9 in 0x400
After
Instruction
Data 0400
A855
SR
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
After
Instruction
Data 0800
666F
SR
0000
0x400, #0x9
Before
Instruction
Data 0400
AA55
SR
0000
; Clear bit 7 in 0x800
DS70157F-page 123
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
BCLR
Bit Clear in Ws
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
0B00
0ppp
ssss
{label:}
BCLR{.B}
Ws,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
#bit4
[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
bit4 ∈ [0 ... 7] for byte operation
bit4 ∈ [0 ... 15] for word operation
Operation:
0 →Ws<bit4>
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1010
Description:
0001
bbbb
Clear the bit in register Ws specified by ‘bit4’. Bit numbering begins with
the Least Significant bit (bit 0) and advances to the Most Significant bit (bit
7 for byte operations, bit 15 for word operations). Register direct or
indirect addressing may be used for Ws.
The ‘b’ bits select value bit4 of the bit position to be cleared.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘s’ bits select the source/destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
DS70157F-page 124
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
When this instruction operates in Word mode, the source
register address must be word-aligned.
When this instruction operates in Byte mode, ‘bit4’ must be
between 0 and 7.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, this instruction uses the
DSRPAG register for indirect address generation in Extended
Data Space.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 1:
BCLR.B W2, #0x2
; Clear bit 3 in W2
Before
Instruction
W2
F234
SR
0000
Example 2:
BCLR
After
Instruction
W2
F230
SR
0000
[W0++], #0x0
Before
Instruction
W0
2300
Data 2300
5607
SR
0000
; Clear bit 0 in [W0]
; Post-increment W0
After
Instruction
W0
2302
Data 2300
5606
SR
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 125
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
BRA
Branch Unconditionally
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.
Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where Slit16 ∈ [-32768 ... +32767].
Operation:
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 →PC
NOP →Instruction Register
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
BRA
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
0011
Expr
0111
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
Description:
The program will branch unconditionally, relative to the next PC. The offset
of the branch is the two’s complement number ‘2 * Slit16’, which supports
branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The Slit16 value is
resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute address or
expression. After the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 *
Slit16, since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction.
The ‘n’ bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of program words
offset from (PC + 2).
Words:
1
Cycles:
2 (PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F)
4 (PIC24E, dsPIC33E)
Example 1:
002000 HERE:
002002
002004
002006
002008
00200A THERE:
00200C
PC
SR
Example 2:
DS70157F-page 126
THERE
.
.
.
.
.
.
Before
Instruction
00 2000
0000
002000 HERE:
002002
002004
002006
002008
00200A THERE:
00200C
PC
SR
BRA
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
Before
Instruction
00 2000
0000
; Branch to THERE
After
Instruction
PC
00 200A
SR
0000
BRA
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
THERE+0x2
.
.
.
.
.
.
; Branch to THERE+0x2
After
Instruction
PC
00 200C
SR
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 3:
002000 HERE:
002002
002004
PC
SR
Before
Instruction
00 2000
0000
BRA 0x1366
. . .
. . .
; Branch to 0x1366
After
Instruction
PC
00 1366
SR
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 127
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
BRA
Computed Branch
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wn ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(PC + 2) + (2 * Wn) →PC
NOP →Instruction Register
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
BRA
PIC24E
0000
Description:
0001
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
0000
0000
Wn
0110
ssss
The program branches unconditionally, relative to the next PC. The offset
of the branch is the sign-extended 17-bit value (2 * Wn), which supports
branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. After this instruction
executes, the new PC will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Wn, since the PC will have
incremented to fetch the next instruction.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Words:
1
Cycles:
2
Example 1:
002000 HERE:
002002
...
...
002108
00210A TABLE7:
00210C
PC
W7
SR
DS70157F-page 128
Before
Instruction
00 2000
0084
0000
.
.
.
.
.
.
BRA W7
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
; Branch forward (2+2*W7)
After
Instruction
PC
00 210A
W7
0084
SR
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
BRA
Computed Branch
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wn ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(PC + 2) + (2 * Wn) →PC
NOP →Instruction Register
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
BRA
0000
Description:
0001
X
Wn
0000
0110
0000
ssss
The program branches unconditionally, relative to the next PC. The offset
of the branch is the sign-extended 17-bit value (2 * Wn), which supports
branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. After this instruction
executes, the new PC will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Wn, since the PC will have
incremented to fetch the next instruction.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Words:
1
Cycles:
4
Example 1:
002000 HERE:
002002
...
...
002108
00210A TABLE7:
00210C
PC
W7
SR
Before
Instruction
00 2000
0084
0000
BRA W7
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
; Branch forward (2+2*W7)
After
Instruction
PC
00 210A
W7
0084
SR
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 129
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
BRA C
Branch if Carry
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
{label:}
Operands:
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.
Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where Slit16 ∈ [-32768 ... +32767].
Operation:
Condition = C
If (Condition)
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 →PC
NOP →Instruction Register
Status Affected:
None
Description:
0011
0001
C,
X
Syntax:
Encoding:
BRA
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
Expr
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
If the Carry flag bit is ‘1’, then the program will branch relative to the next PC.
The offset of the branch is the two’s complement number ‘2 * Slit16’, which
supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The Slit16
value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute address or
expression.
If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since the
PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction then
becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second cycle.
The ‘n’ bits are a 16-bit signed literal that specify the offset from (PC + 2) in
instruction words.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1 (2 if branch taken) – PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F
1 (4 if branch taken) – PIC24E, dsPIC33E
Example 1:
002000
002002
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C
00200E
PC
SR
DS70157F-page 130
HERE:
NO_C:
CARRY:
THERE:
BRA C, CARRY
. . .
. . .
GOTO THERE
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
Before
Instruction
00 2000
0001 (C = 1)
; If C is set, branch to CARRY
; Otherwise... continue
PC
SR
After
Instruction
00 2008
0001 (C = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 2:
002000
002002
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C
00200E
PC
SR
Example 3:
Example 4:
CARRY:
THERE:
HERE:
NO_C:
CARRY:
THERE:
PC
SR
PC
SR
BRA C, CARRY
...
...
GOTO THERE
...
...
...
...
Before
Instruction
00 6230
0001 (C = 1)
006230 START:
006232
006234 CARRY:
006236
006238
00623A
00623C HERE:
00623E
; If C is set, branch to CARRY
; Otherwise... continue
BRA C, CARRY
...
...
GOTO THERE
...
...
...
...
Before
Instruction
00 2000
0000
006230
006232
006234
006236
006238
00623A
00623C
00623E
PC
SR
HERE:
NO_C:
; If C is set, branch to CARRY
; Otherwise... continue
PC
SR
...
...
...
...
...
...
BRA C, CARRY
...
Before
Instruction
00 623C
0001 (C = 1)
After
Instruction
00 2002
0000
After
Instruction
00 6238
0001 (C = 1)
; If C is set, branch to CARRY
; Otherwise... continue
PC
SR
After
Instruction
00 6234
0001 (C = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 131
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
BRA GE
Branch if Signed Greater Than or Equal
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.
Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where
Slit16 ∈ [-32768 ... +32767].
Operation:
Condition = (N&&OV)||(!N&&!OV)
If (Condition)
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 →PC
NOP →Instruction Register
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
0011
Description:
BRA
GE,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
1101
X
X
nnnn
nnnn
Expr
nnnn
nnnn
If the logical expression (N&&OV)||(!N&&!OV) is true, then the program
will branch relative to the next PC. The offset of the branch is the two’s
complement number ‘2 * Slit16’, which supports branches up to 32K
instructions forward or backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the
linker from the supplied label, absolute address or expression.
If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since
the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction
then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second
cycle.
The ‘n’ bits are a 16-bit signed literal that specify the offset from (PC + 2)
in instruction words.
Note:
The assembler will convert the specified label into the offset to
be used.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1 (2 if branch taken) – PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F
1 (4 if branch taken) – PIC24E, dsPIC33E
Example 1:
007600 LOOP:
007602
007604
007606
007608 HERE:
00760A NO_GE:
PC
SR
DS70157F-page 132
Before
Instruction
00 7608
0000
. .
. .
. .
. .
BRA
. .
.
.
.
.
GE, LOOP
.
; If GE, branch to LOOP
; Otherwise... continue
After
Instruction
PC
00 7600
SR
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 2:
007600 LOOP:
007602
007604
007606
007608 HERE:
00760A NO_GE:
PC
SR
. .
. .
. .
. .
BRA
. .
.
.
.
.
GE, LOOP
.
Before
Instruction
00 7608
0008 (N = 1)
; If GE, branch to LOOP
; Otherwise... continue
After
Instruction
PC
00 760A
SR
0008 (N = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 133
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
BRA GEU
Branch if Unsigned Greater Than or Equal
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
{label:}
Operands:
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.
Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16 offset that supports an offset
range of [-32768 ... +32767] program words.
Operation:
Condition = C
If (Condition)
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 →PC
NOP →Instruction Register
Status Affected:
None
0011
Description:
0001
GEU,
X
Syntax:
Encoding:
BRA
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
nnnn
Expr
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
If the Carry flag is ‘1’, then the program will branch relative to the next
PC. The offset of the branch is the two’s complement number ‘2 *
Slit16’, which supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or
backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the supplied
label, absolute address or expression.
If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16,
since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The
instruction then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed
in the second cycle.
The ‘n’ bits are a 16-bit signed literal that specify the offset from
(PC + 2) in instruction words.
Note:
This instruction is identical to the BRA C, Expr (Branch if
Carry) instruction and has the same encoding. It will reverse
assemble as BRA C, Slit16.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1 (2 if branch taken) – PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F
1 (4 if branch taken) – PIC24E, dsPIC33E
Example 1:
002000 HERE:
002002 NO_GEU:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C BYPASS:
00200E
PC
SR
DS70157F-page 134
BRA GEU, BYPASS
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
GOTO THERE
. . .
. . .
Before
Instruction
00 2000
0001 (C = 1)
PC
SR
; If C is set, branch
; to BYPASS
; Otherwise... continue
After
Instruction
00 200C
0001 (C = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
BRA GT
Branch if Signed Greater Than
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.
Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where
Slit16 ∈ [-32768 ... +32767].
Operation:
Condition = (!Z&&N&&OV)||(!Z&&!N&&!OV)
If (Condition)
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 →PC
NOP →Instruction Register
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
0011
Description:
BRA
1100
GT,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
nnnn
nnnn
Expr
nnnn
nnnn
If the logical expression (!Z&&N&&OV)||(!Z&&!N&&!OV) is true, then the
program will branch relative to the next PC. The offset of the branch is the
two’s complement number ‘2 * Slit16’, which supports branches up to 32K
instructions forward or backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the
linker from the supplied label, absolute address or expression.
If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since
the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction
then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second
cycle.
The ‘n’ bits are a 16-bit signed literal that specify the offset from (PC + 2)
in instruction words.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1 (2 if branch taken) – PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F
1 (4 if branch taken) – PIC24E, dsPIC33E
Example 1:
002000 HERE:
002002 NO_GT:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C BYPASS:
00200E
PC
SR
BRA GT, BYPASS
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
GOTO THERE
. . .
. . .
Before
Instruction
00 2000
0001 (C = 1)
PC
SR
; If GT, branch to BYPASS
; Otherwise... continue
After
Instruction
00 200C
0001 (C = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 135
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
BRA GTU
Branch if Unsigned Greater Than
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.
Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where
Slit16 ∈ [-32768 ... +32767].
Operation:
Condition = (C&&!Z)
If (Condition)
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 →PC
NOP →Instruction Register
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
0011
Description:
BRA
1110
GTU,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
nnnn
nnnn
Expr
nnnn
nnnn
If the logical expression (C&&!Z) is true, then the program will branch
relative to the next PC. The offset of the branch is the two’s complement
number ‘2 * Slit16’, which supports branches up to 32K instructions
forward or backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the
supplied label, absolute address or expression.
If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since
the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction
then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second
cycle.
The ‘n’ bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions
offset from (PC + 2).
Words:
1
Cycles:
1 (2 if branch taken) – PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F
1 (4 if branch taken) – PIC24E, dsPIC33E
Example 1:
002000 HERE:
002002 NO_GTU:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C BYPASS:
00200E
PC
SR
DS70157F-page 136
BRA GTU, BYPASS
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
GOTO THERE
. . .
. . .
Before
Instruction
00 2000
0001 (C = 1)
PC
SR
; If GTU, branch to BYPASS
; Otherwise... continue
After
Instruction
00 200C
0001 (C = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
BRA LE
Branch if Signed Less Than or Equal
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.
Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where
Slit16 ∈ [-32768 ... +32767].
Operation:
Condition = Z||(N&&!OV)||(!N&&OV)
If (Condition)
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 →PC
NOP →Instruction Register
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
0011
Description:
BRA
0100
LE,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
nnnn
nnnn
Expr
nnnn
nnnn
If the logical expression (Z||(N&&!OV)||(!N&&OV)) is true, then the
program will branch relative to the next PC. The offset of the branch is the
two’s complement number ‘2 * Slit16’, which supports branches up to 32K
instructions forward or backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the linker
from the supplied label, absolute address or expression.
If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since
the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction
then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second
cycle.
The ‘n’ bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions
offset from (PC + 2).
Words:
1
Cycles:
1 (2 if branch taken) – PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F
1 (4 if branch taken) – PIC24E, dsPIC33E
Example 1:
002000 HERE:
002002 NO_LE:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C BYPASS:
00200E
PC
SR
BRA LE, BYPASS
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
GOTO THERE
. . .
. . .
Before
Instruction
00 2000
0001 (C = 1)
PC
SR
; If LE, branch to BYPASS
; Otherwise... continue
After
Instruction
00 2002
0001 (C = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 137
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
BRA LEU
Branch if Unsigned Less Than or Equal
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.
Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where
Slit16 ∈ [-32768 ... +32767].
Operation:
Condition = !C||Z
If (Condition)
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 →PC
NOP →Instruction Register
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
0011
Description:
BRA
0110
LEU,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
nnnn
X
X
nnnn
nnnn
Expr
nnnn
If the logical expression (!C||Z) is true, then the program will branch
relative to the next PC. The offset of the branch is the two’s complement
number ‘2 * Slit16’, which supports branches up to 32K instructions
forward or backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the
supplied label, absolute address or expression.
If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since
the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction
then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second
cycle.
The ‘n’ bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions
offset from (PC + 2).
Words:
1
Cycles:
1 (2 if branch taken) – PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F
1 (4 if branch taken) – PIC24E, dsPIC33E
Example 1:
002000 HERE:
002002 NO_LEU:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C BYPASS:
00200E
PC
SR
DS70157F-page 138
BRA LEU, BYPASS
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
GOTO THERE
. . .
. . .
Before
Instruction
00 2000
0001 (C = 1)
PC
SR
; If LEU, branch to BYPASS
; Otherwise... continue
After
Instruction
00 200C
0001 (C = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
BRA LT
Branch if Signed Less Than
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.
Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where
Slit16 ∈ [-32768 ... +32767].
Operation:
Condition = (N&&!OV)||(!N&&OV)
If (Condition)
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 →PC
NOP →Instruction Register
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
0011
Description:
BRA
0101
LT,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
nnnn
nnnn
Expr
nnnn
nnnn
If the logical expression ( (N&&!OV)||(!N&&OV) ) is true, then the program
will branch relative to the next PC. The offset of the branch is the two’s
complement number ‘2 * Slit16’, which supports branches up to 32K
instructions forward or backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the
linker from the supplied label, absolute address or expression.
If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since
the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction
then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second
cycle.
The ‘n’ bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions
offset from (PC + 2).
Words:
1
Cycles:
1 (2 if branch taken) – PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F
1 (4 if branch taken) – PIC24E, dsPIC33E
Example 1:
002000 HERE:
002002 NO_LT:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C BYPASS:
00200E
PC
SR
BRA LT, BYPASS
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
GOTO THERE
. . .
. . .
Before
Instruction
00 2000
0001 (C = 1)
; If LT, branch to BYPASS
; Otherwise... continue
After
Instruction
PC
00 2002
SR
0001 (C = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 139
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
BRA LTU
Branch if Unsigned Less Than
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.
Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where
Slit16 ∈ [-32768 ... +32767].
Operation:
Condition = !C
If (Condition)
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 →PC
NOP →Instruction Register
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
0011
Description:
BRA
1001
LTU,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
nnnn
X
X
nnnn
nnnn
Expr
nnnn
If the Carry flag is ‘0’, then the program will branch relative to the next PC.
The offset of the branch is the two’s complement number ‘2 * Slit16’,
which supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The
Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute
address or expression.
If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since
the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction
then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second
cycle.
The ‘n’ bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions
offset from (PC + 2).
Note :
This instruction is identical to the BRA NC, Expr (Branch if Not
Carry) instruction and has the same encoding. It will reverse
assemble as BRA NC, Slit16.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1 (2 if branch taken) – PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F
1 (4 if branch taken) – PIC24E, dsPIC33E
Example 1:
002000 HERE:
002002 NO_LTU:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C BYPASS:
00200E
PC
SR
DS70157F-page 140
BRA LTU, BYPASS
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
GOTO THERE
. . .
. . .
Before
Instruction
00 2000
0001 (C = 1)
PC
SR
; If LTU, branch to BYPASS
; Otherwise... continue
After
Instruction
00 2002
0001 (C = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
BRA N
Branch if Negative
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.
Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where
Slit16 ∈ [-32768 ... +32767].
Operation:
Condition = N
If (Condition)
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 →PC
NOP →Instruction Register.
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
0011
Description:
BRA
0011
N,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
nnnn
nnnn
Expr
nnnn
nnnn
If the Negative flag is ‘1’, then the program will branch relative to the next
PC. The offset of the branch is the two’s complement number ‘2 * Slit16’,
which supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The
Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute
address or expression.
If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since
the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction
then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second
cycle.
The ‘n’ bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions
offset from (PC + 2).
Words:
1
Cycles:
1 (2 if branch taken) – PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F
1 (4 if branch taken) – PIC24E, dsPIC33E
Example 1:
002000 HERE:
002002 NO_N:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C BYPASS:
00200E
PC
SR
BRA N, BYPASS
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
GOTO THERE
. . .
. . .
Before
Instruction
00 2000
0008 (N = 1)
PC
SR
; If N, branch to BYPASS
; Otherwise... continue
After
Instruction
00 200C
0008 (N = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 141
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
BRA NC
Branch if Not Carry
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.
Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where
Slit16 ∈ [-32768 ... +32767].
Operation:
Condition = !C
If (Condition)
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 →PC
NOP →Instruction Register
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
0011
Description:
BRA
1001
NC,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
nnnn
X
X
nnnn
nnnn
Expr
nnnn
If the Carry flag is ‘0’, then the program will branch relative to the next PC.
The offset of the branch is the two’s complement number ‘2 * Slit16’, which
supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The Slit16
value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute address or
expression.
If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since
the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction
then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second
cycle.
The ‘n’ bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions
offset from (PC + 2).
Words:
1
Cycles:
1 (2 if branch taken) – PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F
1 (4 if branch taken) – PIC24E, dsPIC33E
Example 1:
002000 HERE:
002002 NO_NC:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C BYPASS:
00200E
PC
SR
DS70157F-page 142
BRA NC, BYPASS
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
GOTO THERE
. . .
. . .
Before
Instruction
00 2000
0001 (C = 1)
PC
SR
; If NC, branch to BYPASS
; Otherwise... continue
After
Instruction
00 2002
0001 (C = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
BRA NN
Branch if Not Negative
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.
Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where
Slit16 ∈ [-32768 ... +32767].
Operation:
Condition = !N
If (Condition)
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 →PC
NOP →Instruction Register
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
0011
Description:
BRA
1011
NN,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
nnnn
nnnn
Expr
nnnn
nnnn
If the Negative flag is ‘0’, then the program will branch relative to the next
PC. The offset of the branch is the two’s complement number ‘2 * Slit16’,
which supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The
Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute
address or expression.
If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since
the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction
then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second
cycle.
The ‘n’ bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions
offset from (PC + 2).
Words:
1
Cycles:
1 (2 if branch taken) – PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F
1 (4 if branch taken) – PIC24E, dsPIC33E
Example 1:
002000 HERE:
002002 NO_NN:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C BYPASS:
00200E
PC
SR
Before
Instruction
00 2000
0000
BRA NN, BYPASS
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
GOTO THERE
. . .
. . .
PC
SR
; If NN, branch to BYPASS
; Otherwise... continue
After
Instruction
00 200C
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 143
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
BRA NOV
Branch if Not Overflow
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.
Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where
Slit16 ∈ [-32768 ... +32767].
Operation:
Condition = !OV
If (Condition)
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 →PC
NOP →Instruction Register
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
0011
Description:
BRA
1000
NOV,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
nnnn
X
X
nnnn
nnnn
Expr
nnnn
If the Overflow flag is ‘0’, then the program will branch relative to the next
PC. The offset of the branch is the two’s complement number ‘2 * Slit16’,
which supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The
Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute
address or expression.
If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since
the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction
then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second
cycle.
The ‘n’ bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions
offset from (PC + 2).
Words:
1
Cycles:
1 (2 if branch taken) – PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F
1 (4 if branch taken) – PIC24E, dsPIC33E
Example 1:
002000 HERE:
002002 NO_NOV:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C BYPASS:
00200E
PC
SR
DS70157F-page 144
BRA NOV, BYPASS
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
GOTO THERE
. . .
. . .
Before
Instruction
00 2000
0008 (N = 1)
PC
SR
; If NOV, branch to BYPASS
; Otherwise... continue
After
Instruction
00 200C
0008 (N = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
BRA NZ
Branch if Not Zero
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.
Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where
Slit16 ∈ [-32768 ... +32767].
Operation:
Condition = !Z
If (Condition)
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 →PC
NOP →Instruction Register
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
0011
Description:
BRA
1010
NZ,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
nnnn
nnnn
Expr
nnnn
nnnn
If the Z flag is ‘0’, then the program will branch relative to the next PC. The
offset of the branch is the two’s complement number ‘2 * Slit16’, which
supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The Slit16
value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute address or
expression.
If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since
the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction
then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second
cycle.
The ‘n’ bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions
offset from (PC + 2).
Words:
1
Cycles:
1 (2 if branch taken) – PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F
1 (4 if branch taken) – PIC24E, dsPIC33E
Example 1:
002000 HERE:
002002 NO_NZ:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C BYPASS:
00200E
PC
SR
BRA NZ, BYPASS
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
GOTO THERE
. . .
. . .
Before
Instruction
00 2000
0002 (Z = 1)
PC
SR
; If NZ, branch to BYPASS
; Otherwise... continue
After
Instruction
00 2002
0002 (Z = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 145
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
BRA OA
Branch if Overflow Accumulator A
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.
Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where
Slit16 ∈ [-32768 ... +32767].
Operation:
Condition = OA
If (Condition)
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 →PC
NOP →Instruction Register
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
0000
Description:
BRA
1100
OA,
nnnn
X
X
nnnn
nnnn
Expr
nnnn
If the Overflow Accumulator A flag is ‘1’, then the program will branch
relative to the next PC. The offset of the branch is the two’s complement
number ‘2 * Slit16’, which supports branches up to 32K instructions
forward or backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the
supplied label, absolute address or expression.
If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since
the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction
then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second
cycle.
The ‘n’ bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions
offset from (PC + 2).
Note:
The assembler will convert the specified label into the offset to
be used.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1 (2 if branch taken) – dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F
1 (4 if branch taken) – dsPIC33E
Example 1:
002000 HERE:
002002 NO_OA:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C BYPASS:
00200E
PC
SR
DS70157F-page 146
BRA OA, BYPASS
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
GOTO THERE
. . .
. . .
Before
Instruction
00 2000
PC
8800 (OA, OAB = 1) SR
; If OA, branch to BYPASS
; Otherwise... continue
After
Instruction
00 200C
8800 (OA, OAB = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
BRA OB
Branch if Overflow Accumulator B
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.
Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where
Slit16 ∈ [-32768 ... +32767].
Operation:
Condition = OB
If (Condition)
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 →PC
NOP →Instruction Register
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
0000
Description:
BRA
1101
OB,
nnnn
X
X
nnnn
nnnn
Expr
nnnn
If the Overflow Accumulator B flag is ‘1’, then the program will branch
relative to the next PC. The offset of the branch is the two’s complement
number ‘2 * Slit16’, which supports branches up to 32K instructions
forward or backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the
supplied label, absolute address or expression.
If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since
the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction
then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second
cycle.
The ‘n’ bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions
offset from (PC + 2).
Words:
1
Cycles:
1 (2 if branch taken) – dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F
1 (4 if branch taken) – dsPIC33E
Example 1:
002000 HERE:
002002 NO_OB:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C BYPASS:
00200E
PC
SR
BRA OB, BYPASS
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
GOTO THERE
. . .
. . .
Before
Instruction
00 2000
PC
8800 (OA, OAB = 1) SR
; If OB, branch to BYPASS
; Otherwise... continue
After
Instruction
00 2002
8800 (OA, OAB = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 147
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
BRA OV
Branch if Overflow
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.
Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where
Slit16 ∈ [-32768 ... +32767].
Operation:
Condition = OV
If (Condition)
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 →PC
NOP →Instruction Register
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
0011
Description:
BRA
0000
OV,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
nnnn
X
X
nnnn
nnnn
Expr
nnnn
If the Overflow flag is ‘1’, then the program will branch relative to the next
PC. The offset of the branch is the two’s complement number ‘2 * Slit16’,
which supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The
Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute
address or expression.
If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since
the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction
then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second
cycle.
The ‘n’ bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions
offset from (PC + 2).
Words:
1
Cycles:
1 (2 if branch taken) – PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F
1 (4 if branch taken) – PIC24E, dsPIC33E
Example 1:
002000 HERE:
002002 NO_OV
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C BYPASS:
00200E
PC
SR
DS70157F-page 148
BRA OV, BYPASS
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
GOTO THERE
. . .
. . .
Before
Instruction
00 2000
0002 (Z = 1)
PC
SR
; If OV, branch to BYPASS
; Otherwise... continue
After
Instruction
00 2002
0002 (Z = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
BRA SA
Branch if Saturation Accumulator A
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.
Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where
Slit16 ∈ [-32768 ... +32767].
Operation:
Condition = SA
If (Condition)
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 →PC
NOP →Instruction Register
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
0000
Description:
BRA
1110
SA,
nnnn
X
X
nnnn
nnnn
Expr
nnnn
If the Saturation Accumulator A flag is ‘1’, then the program will branch
relative to the next PC. The offset of the branch is the two’s complement
number ‘2 * Slit16’, which supports branches up to 32K instructions
forward or backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the
supplied label, absolute address or expression.
If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since
the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction
then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second
cycle.
The ‘n’ bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions
offset from (PC + 2).
Words:
1
Cycles:
1 (2 if branch taken) – dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F
1 (4 if branch taken) – dsPIC33E
Example 1:
002000 HERE:
002002 NO_SA:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C BYPASS:
00200E
PC
SR
BRA SA, BYPASS
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
GOTO THERE
. . .
. . .
Before
Instruction
00 2000
PC
2400 (SA, SAB = 1) SR
; If SA, branch to BYPASS
; Otherwise... continue
After
Instruction
00 200C
2400 (SA, SAB = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 149
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
BRA SB
Branch if Saturation Accumulator B
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.
Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where
Slit16 ∈ [-32768 ... +32767].
Operation:
Condition = SB
if (Condition)
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16→PC
NOP →Instruction Register
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
0000
Description:
BRA
1111
SB,
X
X
nnnn
nnnn
Expr
nnnn
nnnn
If the Saturation Accumulator B flag is ‘1’, then the program will branch
relative to the next PC. The offset of the branch is the two’s complement
number ‘2 * Slit16’, which supports branches up to 32K instructions
forward or backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the
supplied label, absolute address or expression.
If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since
the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction
then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second
cycle.
The ‘n’ bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions
offset from (PC + 2).
Words:
1
Cycles:
1 (2 if branch taken) – dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F
1 (4 if branch taken) – dsPIC33E
Example 1:
002000 HERE:
002002 NO_SB:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C BYPASS:
00200E
PC
SR
DS70157F-page 150
Before
Instruction
00 2000
0000
BRA SB, BYPASS
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
GOTO THERE
. . .
. . .
PC
SR
; If SB, branch to BYPASS
; Otherwise... continue
After
Instruction
00 2002
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
BRA Z
Branch if Zero
Implemented in:
PIC24F
X
PIC24H
X
dsPIC33F
X
dsPIC33E
X
{label:}
Operands:
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.
Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where
Slit16 ∈ [-32768 ... +32767].
Condition = Z
if (Condition)
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 →PC
NOP →Instruction Register
None
0011
0010
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
If the Zero flag is ‘1’, then the program will branch relative to the next PC.
The offset of the branch is the two’s complement number ‘2 * Slit16’, which
supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The Slit16
value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute address or
expression.
Status Affected:
Encoding:
Description:
Z,
dsPIC30F
X
Syntax:
Operation:
BRA
PIC24E
X
Expr
If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since
the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction
then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second
cycle.
The ‘n’ bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions
offset from (PC + 2).
1
1 (2 if branch taken) – PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F
1 (4 if branch taken) – PIC24E, dsPIC33E
Words:
Cycles:
Example 1:
002000 HERE:
002002 NO_Z:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C BYPASS:
00200E
PC
SR
BRA Z, BYPASS
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
GOTO THERE
. . .
. . .
Before
Instruction
00 2000
0002 (Z = 1)
PC
SR
; If Z, branch to BYPASS
; Otherwise... continue
After
Instruction
00 200C
0002 (Z = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 151
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
BSET
Bit Set f
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
f ∈ [0 ... 8191] for byte operation
f ∈ [0 ... 8190] (even only) for word operation
bit4 ∈ [0 ... 7] for byte operation
bit4 ∈ [0 ... 15] for word operation
Operation:
1 →f<bit4>
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1010
Description:
BSET{.B}
1000
f,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
ffff
fffb
#bit4
bbbf
ffff
Set the bit in the file register ‘f’ specified by ‘bit4’. Bit numbering begins
with the Least Significant bit (bit 0) and advances to the Most Significant
bit (bit 7 for byte operations, bit 15 for word operations).
The ‘b’ bits select value bit4 of the bit position to be set.
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1:
2:
3:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
BSET.B
0x601, #0x3
Before
Instruction
Data 0600
F234
SR
0000
Example 2:
BSET
; Set bit 3 in 0x601
After
Instruction
Data 0600 FA34
SR 0000
0x444, #0xF
Before
Instruction
Data 0444
5604
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 152
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
When this instruction operates in Word mode, the file register
address must be word-aligned.
When this instruction operates in Byte mode, ‘bit4’ must be
between 0 and 7.
; Set bit 15 in 0x444
After
Instruction
Data 0444 D604
SR 0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
BSET
Bit Set in Ws
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
0B00
0ppp
ssss
{label:}
BSET{.B}
Ws,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
#bit4
[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
bit4 ∈ [0 ... 7] for byte operation
bit4 ∈ [0 ... 15] for word operation
Operation:
1 →Ws<bit4>
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1010
Description:
0000
bbbb
Set the bit in register Ws specified by ‘bit4’. Bit numbering begins with the
Least Significant bit (bit 0) and advances to the Most Significant bit (bit 7
for byte operations, bit 15 for word operations). Register direct or indirect
addressing may be used for Ws.
The ‘b’ bits select value bit4 of the bit position to be cleared.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source/destination register.
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
When this instruction operates in Word mode, the source
register address must be word-aligned.
When this instruction operates in Byte mode, ‘bit4’ must be
between 0 and 7.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, this instruction uses the
DSRPAG register for indirect address generation in Extended
Data Space.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 153
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 1:
BSET.B W3, #0x7
; Set bit 7 in W3
Before
Instruction
W3
0026
SR
0000
Example 2:
BSET
[W4++], #0x0
Before
Instruction
W4
6700
Data 6700
1734
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 154
After
Instruction
W3 00A6
SR
0000
; Set bit 0 in [W4]
; Post-increment W4
After
Instruction
W4
6702
Data 6700
1735
SR
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
BSW
Bit Write in Ws
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
{label:}
BSW.C
w000
0ppp
ssss
BSW.Z
Ws,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
Wb
[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
For “.C” operation:
C →Ws<(Wb)>
For “.Z” operation (default):
Z →Ws<(Wb)>
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1010
Description:
1101
Zwww
The (Wb) bit in register Ws is written with the value of the C or Z flag from
the STATUS register. Bit numbering begins with the Least Significant bit
(bit 0) and advances to the Most Significant bit (bit 15) of the working
register. Only the four Least Significant bits of Wb are used to determine
the destination bit number. Register direct addressing must be used for
Wb, and either register direct, or indirect addressing may be used for Ws.
The ‘Z’ bit selects the C or Z flag as source.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the bit select register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
This instruction only operates in Word mode. If no extension is
provided, the “.Z” operation is assumed.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
BSW.C
W2, W3
; Set bit W3 in W2 to the value
; of the C bit
5
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Instruction
Descriptions
Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
W2
F234
W2 7234
W3
111F
W3
111F
SR
0002 (Z = 1, C = 0) SR 0002 (Z = 1, C = 0)
DS70157F-page 155
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 2:
BSW.Z
W2, W3
; Set bit W3 in W2 to the complement
; of the Z bit
Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
W2
E235
W2
E234
W3
0550
W3
0550
SR
0002 (Z = 1, C = 0) SR
0002 (Z = 1, C = 0)
Example 3:
BSW.C
[++W0], W6
; Set bit W6 in [W0++] to the value
; of the C bit
Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
W0
1000
W0
1002
W6
34A3
W6 34A3
Data 1002
2380
Data 1002
2388
SR
0001 (Z = 0, C = 1) SR
0001 (Z = 0, C = 1)
Example 4:
BSW.Z [W1--], W5
; Set bit W5 in [W1] to the
; complement of the Z bit
; Post-decrement W1
Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
W1
1000
W1 0FFE
W5
888B
W5 888B
Data 1000 C4DD
Data 1000 CCDD
SR
0001 (C = 1)
SR
0001 (C = 1)
DS70157F-page 156
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
BTG
Bit Toggle f
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
f ∈ [0 ... 8191] for byte operation
f ∈ [0 ... 8190] (even only) for word operation
bit4 ∈ [0 ... 7] for byte operation
bit4 ∈ [0 ... 15] for word operation
Operation:
(f)<bit4> →(f)<bit4>
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1010
Description:
BTG{.B}
1010
f,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
ffff
fffb
#bit4
bbbf
ffff
Bit ‘bit4’ in file register ‘f’ is toggled (complemented). For the bit4
operand, bit numbering begins with the Least Significant bit (bit 0) and
advances to the Most Significant bit (bit 7 for byte operation, bit 15 for
word operation) of the byte.
The ‘b’ bits select value bit4, the bit position to toggle.
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1:
2:
3:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
When this instruction operates in Word mode, the file register
address must be word-aligned.
When this instruction operates in Byte mode, ‘bit4’ must be
between 0 and 7.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
BTG.B
0x1001, #0x4
Before
Instruction
Data 1000
F234
SR
0000
Example 2:
BTG
; Toggle bit 8 in RAM660
5
After
Instruction
Data 1660
5706
SR
0000
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
After
Instruction
Data 1000 E234
SR
0000
0x1660, #0x8
Before
Instruction
Data 1660
5606
SR
0000
; Toggle bit 4 in 0x1001
DS70157F-page 157
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
BTG
Bit Toggle in Ws
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
0B00
0ppp
ssss
{label:}
BTG{.B}
Ws,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
#bit4
[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
bit4 ∈ [0 ... 7] for byte operation
bit4 ∈ [0 ... 15] for word operation
Operation:
(Ws)<bit4> →Ws<bit4>
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1010
Description:
0010
bbbb
Bit ‘bit4’ in register Ws is toggled (complemented). For the bit4 operand,
bit numbering begins with the Least Significant bit (bit 0) and advances to
the Most Significant bit (bit 7 for byte operations, bit 15 for word
operations). Register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws.
The ‘b’ bits select value bit4, the bit position to test.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘s’ bits select the source/destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
BTG
W2, #0x0
Before
Instruction
W2
F234
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 158
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
When this instruction operates in Word mode, the source
register address must be word-aligned.
When this instruction operates in Byte mode, ‘bit4’ must be
between 0 and 7.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, this instruction uses the
DSRPAG register for indirect address generation in Extended
Data Space.
; Toggle bit 0 in W2
After
Instruction
W2
F235
SR
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 2:
BTG
[W0++], #0x0
Before
Instruction
W0
2300
Data 2300
5606
SR
0000
; Toggle bit 0 in [W0]
; Post-increment W0
After
Instruction
W0
2302
Data 2300
5607
SR
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 159
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
BTSC
Bit Test f, Skip if Clear
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
f ∈ [0 ... 8191] for byte operation
f ∈ [0 ... 8190] (even only) for word operation
bit4 ∈ [0 ... 7] for byte operation
bit4 ∈ [0 ... 15] for word operation
Operation:
Test (f)<bit4>, skip if clear
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
BTSC{.B}
1010
Description:
1111
f,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
ffff
fffb
#bit4
bbbf
ffff
Bit ‘bit4’ in the file register is tested. If the tested bit is ‘0’, the next
instruction (fetched during the current instruction execution) is discarded
and on the next cycle, a NOP is executed instead. If the tested bit is ‘1’,
the next instruction is executed as normal. In either case, the contents of
the file register are not changed. For the bit4 operand, bit numbering
begins with the Least Significant bit (bit 0) and advances to the Most
Significant bit (bit 7 for byte operations, bit 15 for word operations).
The ‘b’ bits select value bit4, the bit position to test.
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1:
2:
3:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1 (2 or 3)(1)
Note 1:
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
002000 HERE:
002002
002004
002006
002008 BYPASS:
00200A
PC
Data 1200
SR
DS70157F-page 160
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
When this instruction operates in Word mode, the file register
address must be word-aligned.
When this instruction operates in Byte mode, ‘bit4’ must be
between 0 and 7.
Before
Instruction
00 2000
264F
0000
BTSC.B
GOTO
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
0x1201, #2
BYPASS
; If bit 2 of 0x1201 is 0,
; skip the GOTO
After
Instruction
PC
00 2002
Data 1200
264F
SR
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 2:
002000 HERE:
002002
002004
002006
002008 BYPASS:
00200A
PC
Data 0804
SR
Before
Instruction
00 2000
2647
0000
BTSC
GOTO
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
0x804, #14
BYPASS
; If bit 14 of 0x804 is 0,
; skip the GOTO
After
Instruction
PC
00 2006
Data 0804
2647
SR
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 161
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
BTSC
Bit Test Ws, Skip if Clear
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
0000
0ppp
ssss
{label:}
BTSC
Ws,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
#bit4
[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
bit4 ∈ [0 ... 15]
Operands:
Operation:
Test (Ws)<bit4>, skip if clear
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1010
Description:
0111
bbbb
Bit ‘bit4’ in Ws is tested. If the tested bit is ‘0’, the next instruction (fetched
during the current instruction execution) is discarded and on the next
cycle, a NOP is executed instead. If the tested bit is ‘1’, the next instruction
is executed as normal. In either case, the contents of Ws are not changed.
For the bit4 operand, bit numbering begins with the Least Significant bit
(bit 0) and advances to the Most Significant bit (bit 15) of the word. Either
register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws.
The ‘b’ bits select value bit4, the bit position to test.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1 (2 or 3 if the next instruction is skipped)(1)
Note 1:
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
002000 HERE:
002002
002004
002006
002008 BYPASS:
00200A
PC
W0
SR
DS70157F-page 162
This instruction operates in Word mode only.
Before
Instruction
00 2000
264F
0000
BTSC
GOTO
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
W0, #0x0
BYPASS
; If bit 0 of W0 is 0,
; skip the GOTO
After
Instruction
PC
00 2002
W0
264F
SR
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 2:
002000 HERE:
002002
002004
002006
002008 BYPASS:
00200A
PC
W6
SR
Example 3:
Before
Instruction
00 2000
264F
0000
003400 HERE:
003402
003404
003406
003408 BYPASS:
00340A
PC
W6
Data 1800
SR
BTSC
GOTO
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
Before
Instruction
00 3400
1800
1000
0000
PC
W6
SR
BTSC
GOTO
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
; If bit 15 of W6 is 0,
; skip the GOTO
W6, #0xF
BYPASS
After
Instruction
00 2006
264F
0000
[W6++], #0xC
BYPASS
PC
W6
Data 1800
SR
; If bit 12 of [W6] is 0,
; skip the GOTO
; Post-increment W6
After
Instruction
00 3402
1802
1000
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 163
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
BTSS
Bit Test f, Skip if Set
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
f ∈ [0 ... 8191] for byte operation
f ∈ [0 ... 8190] (even only) for word operation
bit4 ∈ [0 ... 7] for byte operation
bit4 ∈ [0 ... 15] for word operation
Operation:
Test (f)<bit4>, skip if set
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1010
Description:
BTSS{.B}
1110
f,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
ffff
fffb
#bit4
bbbf
ffff
Bit ‘bit4’ in the file register ‘f’ is tested. If the tested bit is ‘1’, the next
instruction (fetched during the current instruction execution) is discarded
and on the next cycle, a NOP is executed instead. If the tested bit is ‘0’, the
next instruction is executed as normal. In either case, the contents of the
file register are not changed. For the bit4 operand, bit numbering begins
with the Least Significant bit (bit 0) and advances to the Most Significant
bit (bit 7 for byte operation, bit 15 for word operation).
The ‘b’ bits select value bit4, the bit position to test.
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1:
2:
3:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1 (2 or 3 if the next instruction is skipped)(1)
Note 1:
DS70157F-page 164
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
When this instruction operates in Word mode, the file register
address must be word-aligned.
When this instruction operates in Byte mode, ‘bit4’ must be
between 0 and 7.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 1:
007100 HERE:
007102
007104
PC
Data 1400
SR
Example 2:
Before
Instruction
00 7100
0280
0000
007100 HERE:
007102
007104
007106 BYPASS:
PC
Data 0890
SR
BTSS.B
CLR
. . .
Before
Instruction
00 7100
00FE
0000
0x1401, #0x1
WREG
PC
Data 1400
SR
BTSS
GOTO
. . .
. . .
; If bit 1 of 0x1401 is 1,
; don’t clear WREG
After
Instruction
00 7104
0280
0000
0x890, #0x9
BYPASS
; If bit 9 of 0x890 is 1,
; skip the GOTO
After
Instruction
PC
00 7102
Data 0890
00FE
SR
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 165
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
BTSS
Bit Test Ws, Skip if Set
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
0000
0ppp
ssss
{label:}
BTSS
Ws,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
#bit4
[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
bit4 ∈ [0 ... 15]
Operation:
Test (Ws)<bit4>, skip if set.
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1010
Description:
0110
bbbb
Bit ‘bit4’ in Ws is tested. If the tested bit is ‘1’, the next instruction (fetched
during the current instruction execution) is discarded and on the next
cycle, a NOP is executed instead. If the tested bit is ‘0’, the next instruction
is executed as normal. In either case, the contents of Ws are not changed.
For the bit4 operand, bit numbering begins with the Least Significant bit
(bit 0) and advances to the Most Significant bit (bit 15) of the word. Either
register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws.
The ‘b’ bits select the value bit4, the bit position to test.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1 (2 or 3 if the next instruction is skipped)(1)
Note 1:
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
002000 HERE:
002002
002004
002006
002008 BYPASS:
00200A
PC
W0
SR
DS70157F-page 166
This instruction operates in Word mode only.
Before
Instruction
00 2000
264F
0000
BTSS
GOTO
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
W0, #0x0
BYPASS
; If bit 0 of W0 is 1,
; skip the GOTO
After
Instruction
PC
00 2006
W0
264F
SR
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 2:
002000 HERE:
002002
002004
002006
002008 BYPASS:
00200A
PC
W6
SR
Example 3:
Before
Instruction
00 2000
264F
0000
003400 HERE:
003402
003404
003406
003408 BYPASS:
00340A
PC
W6
Data 1800
SR
BTSS
GOTO
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
Before
Instruction
00 3400
1800
1000
0000
PC
W6
SR
BTSS
GOTO
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
; If bit 15 of W6 is 1,
; skip the GOTO
W6, #0xF
BYPASS
After
Instruction
00 2002
264F
0000
[W6++], 0xC
BYPASS
PC
W6
Data 1800
SR
; If bit 12 of [W6] is 1,
; skip the GOTO
; Post-increment W6
After
Instruction
00 3406
1802
1000
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 167
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
BTST
Bit Test f
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
f ∈ [0 ... 8191] for byte operation
f ∈ [0 ... 8190] (even only) for word operation
bit4 ∈ [0 ... 7] for byte operation
bit4 ∈ [0 ... 15] for word operation
Operation:
(f)<bit4> →Z
Status Affected:
Z
Encoding:
1010
Description:
BTST{.B}
1011
f,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
ffff
fffb
#bit4
bbbf
ffff
Bit ‘bit4’ in file register ‘f’ is tested and the complement of the tested bit is
stored to the Z flag in the STATUS register. The contents of the file
register are not changed. For the bit4 operand, bit numbering begins with
the Least Significant bit (bit 0) and advances to the Most Significant bit
(bit 7 for byte operation, bit 15 for word operation).
The ‘b’ bits select value bit4, the bit position to be tested.
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1:
2:
3:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
When this instruction operates in Word mode, the file register
address must be word-aligned.
When this instruction operates in Byte mode, ‘bit4’ must be
between 0 and 7.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
BTST.B
0x1201, #0x3
Before
Instruction
Data 1200
F7FF
SR
0000
Example 2:
BTST
; Set Z = complement of
; bit 3 in 0x1201
After
Instruction
Data 1200 F7FF
SR
0002 (Z = 1)
0x1302, #0x7
; Set Z = complement of
; bit 7 in 0x1302
Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
Data 1302
F7FF
Data 1302 F7FF
SR
0002 (Z = 1)
SR 0000
DS70157F-page 168
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
BTST
Bit Test in Ws
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
Z000
0ppp
ssss
{label:}
BTST.C
Ws,
BTST.Z
[Ws],
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
#bit4
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
bit4 ∈ [0 ... 15]
Operation:
For “.C” operation:
(Ws)<bit4> →C
For “.Z” operation (default):
(Ws)<bit4> →Z
Status Affected:
Z or C
Encoding:
1010
Description:
0011
bbbb
Bit ‘bit4’ in register Ws is tested. If the “.Z” option of the instruction is
specified, the complement of the tested bit is stored to the Zero flag in the
STATUS register. If the “.C” option of the instruction is specified, the value
of the tested bit is stored to the Carry flag in the STATUS register. In either
case, the contents of Ws are not changed.
For the bit4 operand, bit numbering begins with the Least Significant bit
(bit 0) and advances to the Most Significant bit (bit 15) of the word. Either
register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws.
The ‘b’ bits select value bit4, the bit position to test.
The ‘Z’ bit selects the C or Z flag as destination.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
This instruction only operates in Word mode. If no extension is
provided, the “.Z” operation is assumed.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 169
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 1:
BTST.C
[W0++], #0x3
; Set C = bit 3 in [W0]
; Post-increment W0
Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
W0
1200
W0
1202
Data 1200
FFF7
Data 1200 FFF7
SR
0001 (C = 1)
SR
0000
Example 2:
BTST.Z
W0, #0x7
Before
Instruction
W0
F234
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 170
; Set Z = complement of bit 7 in W0
After
Instruction
W0
F234
SR
0002 (Z = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
BTST
Bit Test in Ws
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
w000
0ppp
ssss
{label:}
BTST.C
BTST.Z
Ws,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
Wb
[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
For “.C” operation:
(Ws)<(Wb)> →C
For “.Z” operation (default):
(Ws)<(Wb)> →Z
Status Affected:
Z or C
Encoding:
1010
Description:
0101
Zwww
The (Wb) bit in register Ws is tested. If the “.C” option of the instruction is
specified, the value of the tested bit is stored to the Carry flag in the
STATUS register. If the “.Z” option of the instruction is specified, the
complement of the tested bit is stored to the Zero flag in the STATUS
register. In either case, the contents of Ws are not changed.
Only the four Least Significant bits of Wb are used to determine the bit
number. Bit numbering begins with the Least Significant bit (bit 0) and
advances to the Most Significant bit (bit 15) of the working register.
Register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws.
The ‘Z’ bit selects the C or Z flag as destination.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the bit select register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
This instruction only operates in Word mode. If no extension is
provided, the “.Z” operation is assumed.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 171
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 1:
BTST.C
W2, W3
Before
Instruction
W2
F234
W3
2368
SR
0001 (C = 1)
Example 2:
BTST.Z
[W0++], W1
; Set C = bit W3 of W2
After
Instruction
W2 F234
W3 2368
SR 0000
; Set Z = complement of
; bit W1 in [W0],
; Post-increment W0
Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
W0
1200
W0 1202
W1 CCC0
W1 CCC0
Data 1200
6243
Data 1200 6243
SR
0002 (Z = 1)
SR 0000
DS70157F-page 172
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
BTSTS
Bit Test/Set f
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
f ∈ [0 ... 8191] for byte operation
f ∈ [0 ... 8190] (even only) for word operation
bit4 ∈ [0 ... 7] for byte operation
bit4 ∈ [0 ... 15] for word operation
Operation:
(f)<bit4> →Z
1 →(f)<bit4>
Status Affected:
Z
Encoding:
1010
Description:
BTSTS{.B} f,
1100
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
ffff
fffb
#bit4
bbbf
ffff
Bit ‘bit4’ in file register ‘f’ is tested and the complement of the tested bit is
stored to the Zero flag in the STATUS register. The tested bit is then set
to ‘1’ in the file register. For the bit4 operand, bit numbering begins with
the Least Significant bit (bit 0) and advances to the Most Significant bit
(bit 7 for byte operations, bit 15 for word operations).
The ‘b’ bits select value bit4, the bit position to test/set.
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
When this instruction operates in Word mode, the file register
address must be word-aligned.
When this instruction operates in Byte mode, ‘bit4’ must be
between 0 and 7.
The file register ‘f’ must not be the CPU Status register (SR).
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 173
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 1:
BTSTS.B
0x1201, #0x3 ; Set Z = complement of bit 3 in 0x1201,
; then set bit 3 of 0x1201 = 1
Before
Instruction
Data 1200
F7FF
SR
0000
Example 2:
BTSTS
After
Instruction
Data 1200 FFFF
SR
0002 (Z = 1)
0x808, #15
; Set Z = complement of bit 15 in 0x808,
; then set bit 15 of 0x808 = 1
Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
RAM300
8050
RAM300
8050
SR
0002 (Z = 1)
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 174
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
BTSTS
Bit Test/Set in Ws
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
Z000
0ppp
ssss
{label:}
BTSTS.C
BTSTS.Z
Ws,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
#bit4
[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
bit4 ∈ [0 ... 15]
Operation:
For “.C” operation:
(Ws)<bit4> →C
1 →Ws<bit4>
For “.Z” operation (default):
(Ws)<bit4> →Z
1 →Ws<bit4>
Status Affected:
Z or C
Encoding:
1010
Description:
0100
bbbb
Bit ‘bit4’ in register Ws is tested. If the “.Z” option of the instruction is
specified, the complement of the tested bit is stored to the Zero flag in the
STATUS register. If the “.C” option of the instruction is specified, the value
of the tested bit is stored to the Carry flag in the STATUS register. In both
cases, the tested bit in Ws is set to ‘1’.
The ‘b’ bits select the value bit4, the bit position to test/set.
The ‘Z’ bit selects the C or Z flag as destination.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note 1: This instruction only operates in Word mode. If no extension is
provided, the “.Z” operation is assumed.
2: If Ws is used as a pointer, it must not contain the address of the
CPU Status register (SR).
3: In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, this instruction uses the
DSRPAG register for indirect address generation in Extended
Data Space.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 175
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 1:
BTSTS.C
[W0++], #0x3
; Set C = bit 3 in [W0]
; Set bit 3 in [W0] = 1
; Post-increment W0
Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
W0
1200
W0
1202
Data 1200
FFF7
Data 1200
FFFF
SR
0001 (C = 1)
SR
0000
Example 2:
BTSTS.Z
W0, #0x7
Before
Instruction
W0
F234
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 176
; Set Z = complement of bit 7
; in W0, and set bit 7 in W0 = 1
After
Instruction
W0 F2BC
SR
0002 (Z = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
CALL
Call Subroutine
Implemented in:
PIC24F
X
PIC24H
X
dsPIC30F
X
dsPIC33F
X
dsPIC33E
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Expr may be a label or expression (but not a literal).
Expr is resolved by the linker to a lit23, where lit23 ∈ [0 ... 8388606].
(PC) + 4 →PC
(PC<15:0>) →(TOS)
(W15) + 2 →W15
(PC<23:16>) →(TOS)
(W15) + 2 →W15
lit23 →PC
NOP →Instruction Register
None
Operation:
Status Affected:
Encoding:
1st word
2nd word
Description:
CALL
PIC24E
Expr
0000
0010
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
nnn0
0000
0000
0000
0000
0nnn
nnnn
Direct subroutine call over the entire 4-Mbyte instruction program
memory range. Before the CALL is made, the 24-bit return address
(PC + 4) is PUSHed onto the stack. After the return address is
stacked, the 23-bit value ‘lit23’ is loaded into the PC.
The ‘n’ bits form the target address.
Note:
Words:
Cycles:
The linker will resolve the specified expression into the lit23 to
be used.
2
2
Example 1:
026000
026004
.
.
026844 _FIR:
026846
PC
W15
Data A268
Data A26A
SR
Before
Instruction
02 6000
A268
FFFF
FFFF
0000
CALL
MOV
...
...
MOV
...
_FIR
W0, W1
#0x400, W2
PC
W15
Data A268
Data A26A
SR
; Call _FIR subroutine
; _FIR subroutine start
After
Instruction
02 6844
A26C
6004
0002
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 177
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 2:
072000
072004
.
077A28 _G66:
077A2A
077A2C
PC
W15
Data 9004
Data 9006
SR
CALL
MOV
...
INC
...
Before
Instruction
07 2000
9004
FFFF
FFFF
0000
CALL
_G66
W0, W1
; call routine _G66
W6, [W7++]
; routine start
PC
W15
Data 9004
Data 9006
SR
After
Instruction
07 7A28
9008
2004
0007
0000
Call Subroutine
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F
dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Expr may be a label or expression (but not a literal).
Expr is resolved by the linker to a lit23, where lit23 ∈ [0 ... 8388606].
(PC) + 4 →PC
(PC<15:1>) →TOS<15:1>, SFA bit →TOS<0>
(W15) + 2 →W15
(PC<23:16>) →TOS
(W15) + 2 →W15
0 →SFA bit
lit23 →PC
NOP →Instruction Register
SFA
Operation:
Status Affected:
Encoding:
1st word
2nd word
Description:
CALL
PIC24E
X
Expr
0000
0010
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
nnn0
0000
0000
0000
0000
0nnn
nnnn
Direct subroutine call over the entire 4-Mbyte instruction program
memory range. Before the CALL is made, the 24-bit return address
(PC + 4) is PUSHed onto the stack. After the return address is
stacked, the 23-bit value ‘lit23’ is loaded into the PC.
The ‘n’ bits form the target address.
Note:
Words:
Cycles:
DS70157F-page 178
The linker will resolve the specified expression into the lit23 to
be used.
2
4
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 1:
026000
026004
.
.
026844 _FIR:
026846
PC
W15
Data A268
Data A26A
SR
Example 2:
Before
Instruction
02 6000
A268
FFFF
FFFF
0000
072000
072004
.
077A28 _G66:
077A2A
077A2C
PC
W15
Data 9004
Data 9006
SR
CALL
MOV
...
...
MOV
...
Before
Instruction
07 2000
9004
FFFF
FFFF
0000
_FIR
W0, W1
#0x400, W2
PC
W15
Data A268
Data A26A
SR
CALL
MOV
...
INC
...
; Call _FIR subroutine
; _FIR subroutine start
After
Instruction
02 6844
A26C
6004
0002
0000
_G66
W0, W1
; call routine _G66
W6, [W7++]
; routine start
PC
W15
Data 9004
Data 9006
SR
After
Instruction
07 7A28
9008
2004
0007
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 179
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
CALL
Call Indirect Subroutine
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wn ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(PC) + 2 →PC
(PC<15:0>) →TOS
(W15) + 2 →W15
(PC<23:16>) →TOS
(W15) + 2 →W15
0 →PC<22:16>
(Wn<15:1>) →PC<15:1>
NOP →Instruction Register
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
0000
Description:
CALL
PIC24E
0001
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
0000
0000
Wn
0000
ssss
Indirect subroutine call over the first 32K instructions of program memory.
Before the CALL is made, the 24-bit return address (PC + 2) is PUSHed
onto the stack. After the return address is stacked, Wn<15:1> is loaded
into PC<15:1> and PC<22:16> is cleared. Since PC<0> is always ‘0’,
Wn<0> is ignored.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Words:
1
Cycles:
2
Example 1:
001002
001004
.
001600 _BOOT:
001602
.
PC
W0
W15
Data 6F00
Data 6F02
SR
DS70157F-page 180
Before
Instruction
00 1002
1600
6F00
FFFF
FFFF
0000
CALL W0
...
...
MOV #0x400, W2
MOV #0x300, W6
...
PC
W0
W15
Data 6F00
Data 6F02
SR
; Call BOOT subroutine indirectly
; using W0
; _BOOT starts here
After
Instruction
00 1600
1600
6F04
1004
0000
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 2:
004200
004202
.
005500 _TEST:
005502
.
PC
W7
W15
Data 6F00
Data 6F02
SR
CALL
...
...
INC
DEC
...
W7
; Call TEST subroutine indirectly
; using W7
W1, W2
W1, W3
; _TEST starts here
;
Before
Instruction
00 4200
5500
6F00
FFFF
FFFF
0000
CALL
PC
W7
W15
Data 6F00
Data 6F02
SR
After
Instruction
00 5500
5500
6F04
4202
0000
0000
Call Indirect Subroutine
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wn ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(PC) + 2 →PC
(PC<15:1>) →TOS, SFA bit →TOS<0>
(W15) + 2 →W15
(PC<23:16>) →TOS
(W15) + 2 →W15
0 →SFA bit
0 →PC<22:16>
(Wn<15:1>) →PC<15:1>
NOP →Instruction Register
Status Affected:
SFA
Encoding:
Description:
0000
CALL
0001
X
Wn
0000
0000
0000
ssss
Indirect subroutine call over the first 32K instructions of program memory.
Before the CALL is made, the 24-bit return address (PC + 2) is PUSHed
onto the stack. After the return address is stacked, Wn<15:1> is loaded
into PC<15:1> and PC<22:16> is cleared. Since PC<0> is always ‘0’,
Wn<0> is ignored.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Words:
1
Cycles:
4
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 181
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 1:
001002
001004
.
001600 _BOOT:
001602
.
PC
W0
W15
Data 6F00
Data 6F02
SR
Example 2:
DS70157F-page 182
Before
Instruction
00 1002
1600
6F00
FFFF
FFFF
0000
004200
004202
.
005500 _TEST:
005502
.
PC
W7
W15
Data 6F00
Data 6F02
SR
CALL W0
...
...
MOV #0x400, W2
MOV #0x300, W6
...
Before
Instruction
00 4200
5500
6F00
FFFF
FFFF
0000
; Call BOOT subroutine indirectly
; using W0
; _BOOT starts here
PC
W0
W15
Data 6F00
Data 6F02
SR
CALL
...
...
INC
DEC
...
After
Instruction
00 1600
1600
6F04
1004
0000
0000
W7
; Call TEST subroutine indirectly
; using W7
W1, W2
W1, W3
; _TEST starts here
;
PC
W7
W15
Data 6F00
Data 6F02
SR
After
Instruction
00 5500
5500
6F04
4202
0000
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
CALL.L
Call Indirect Subroutine Long
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F
dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Operation:
Wn ∈ [W0, W2, W4, W6, W8, W10, W12]
(PC) +2 →PC,
(PC<15:1>) →TOS<15:1>, SFA bit →TOS<0>
(W15)+2 →W15
(PC<23:16>) →TOS,
(W15)+2 →W15
0 →SFA bit,
PC<23> →PC<23> (see text); (Wn+1)<6:0> →PC<22:16>; (Wn) →
PC<15:0>
NOP →Instruction Register
SFA
0000
0001
1www
w000
0000
ssss
Indirect subroutine call to any User program memory address. First, return
address (PC+2) and the state of the Stack Frame Active bit (SFA) is
pushed onto the system stack, after which the SFA bit is cleared.
Then, the LS 7-bits of (Wn+1) are loaded in PC<22:16>, and the 16-bit
value (Wn) is loaded into PC<15:0>.
PC<23> is not modified by this instruction.
The contents of (Wn+1)<15:7> are ignored.
The value of Wn<0> is also ignored and PC<0> is always set to 0.
The ‘s’ bits specify the address of the Wn source register.
The ‘w’ bits specify the address of the Wn+1 source register.
Status Affected:
Encoding:
Description:
Words:
Cycles:
CALL.L
PIC24E
X
Wn
1
4
Example 1:
026000
026004
.
.
026844 _FIR:
026846
PC
W4
W5
W15
Data A268
Data A26A
SR
Before
Instruction
02 6000
6844
0002
A268
FFFF
FFFF
0000
CALL.L W4
MOV
W0, W1
...
...
MOV
#0x400, W2
...
PC
W4
W5
W15
Data A268
Data A26A
SR
; Call _FIR subroutine
; _FIR subroutine start
After
Instruction
02 6844
6844
0002
A26C
6004
0002
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 183
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
CLR
Clear f or WREG
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
ffff
ffff
ffff
{label:}
CLR{.B}
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
f
WREG
Operands:
f ∈ [0 ... 8191]
Operation:
0 →destination designated by D
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
Description:
1110
1111
0BDf
Clear the contents of a file register or the default working register WREG.
If WREG is specified, the WREG is cleared. Otherwise, the specified file
register ‘f’ is cleared.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘D’ bit selects the destination (‘0’ for WREG, ‘1’ for file register).
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1:
2:
Words:
Cycles:
Example 1:
1
1
CLR.B
RAM200
Before
Instruction
RAM200 8009
SR 0000
Example 2:
CLR
WREG
Before
Instruction
WREG
0600
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 184
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
The WREG is set to working register W0.
; Clear RAM200 (Byte mode)
After
Instruction
RAM200 8000
SR 0000
; Clear WREG (Word mode)
After
Instruction
WREG
0000
SR
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
CLR
Clear Wd
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
qddd
d000
0000
{label:}
CLR{.B}
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
Wd
[Wd]
[Wd++]
[Wd--]
[++Wd]
[--Wd]
Operands:
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
0 →Wd
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1110
Description:
1011
0Bqq
Clear the contents of register Wd. Either register direct or indirect
addressing may be used for Wd.
The ‘B’ bit select byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘q’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
CLR.B
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
W2
Before
Instruction
W2 3333
SR 0000
Example 2:
CLR
[W0++]
Before
Instruction
W0
2300
Data 2300
5607
SR
0000
; Clear W2 (Byte mode)
After
Instruction
W2 3300
SR 0000
; Clear [W0]
; Post-increment W0
After
Instruction
W0
2302
Data 2300
0000
SR
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 185
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
CLR
Clear Accumulator, Prefetch Operands
Implemented in:
Syntax:
{label:}
PIC24F
CLR
PIC24H
Acc
PIC24E
{,[Wx],Wxd}
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F
dsPIC33E
X
X
X
{,[Wy],Wyd}
{,AWB}
{,[Wx] + = kx,Wxd} {,[Wy] + = ky,Wyd}
{,[Wx] – = kx,Wxd} {,[Wy] – = ky,Wyd}
{,[W9 + W12],Wxd} {,[W11 + W12],Wyd}
Operands:
Acc ∈ [A,B]
Wx ∈ [W8, W9]; kx ∈ [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wxd ∈ [W4 ... W7]
Wy ∈ [W10, W11]; ky ∈ [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wyd ∈ [W4 ... W7]
AWB ∈ [W13, [W13] + = 2]
Operation:
0 →Acc(A or B)
([Wx]) →Wxd; (Wx) +/– kx →Wx
([Wy]) →Wyd; (Wy) +/– ky →Wy
(Acc(B or A)) rounded →AWB
Status Affected:
OA, OB, SA, SB
Encoding:
Description:
1100
0011
A0xx
yyii
iijj
jjaa
Clear all 40 bits of the specified accumulator, optionally prefetch
operands in preparation for a MAC type instruction and optionally store
the non-specified accumulator results. This instruction clears the
respective overflow and saturate flags (either OA, SA or OB, SB).
Operands Wx, Wxd, Wy and Wyd specify optional prefetch operations,
which support indirect and register offset addressing, as described in
Section 4.14.1 “MAC Prefetches”. Operand AWB specifies the optional
register direct or indirect store of the convergently rounded contents of
the “other” accumulator, as described in Section 4.14.4 “MAC Write
Back”.
The ‘A’ bit selects the other accumulator used for write back.
The ‘x’ bits select the prefetch Wxd destination.
The ‘y’ bits select the prefetch Wyd destination.
The ‘i’ bits select the Wx prefetch operation.
The ‘j’ bits select the Wy prefetch operation.
The ‘a’ bits select the accumulator Write Back destination.
DS70157F-page 186
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 1:
CLR
W4
W8
W13
ACCA
ACCB
Data 2000
SR
Example 2:
CLR
W6
W7
W8
W10
W13
ACCA
ACCB
Data 2000
Data 3000
Data 4000
SR
A, [W8]+=2, W4, W13
Before
Instruction
F001
2000
C623
00 0067 2345
00 5420 3BDD
1221
0000
; Clear ACCA
; Load W4 with [W8], post-inc W8
; Store ACCB to W13
W4
W8
W13
ACCA
ACCB
Data 2000
SR
After
Instruction
1221
2002
5420
00 0000 0000
00 5420 3BDD
1221
0000
B, [W8]+=2, W6, [W10]+=2, W7, [W13]+=2
Before
Instruction
F001
C783
2000
3000
4000
00 0067 2345
00 5420 ABDD
1221
FF80
FFC3
0000
W6
W7
W8
W10
W13
ACCA
ACCB
Data 2000
Data 3000
Data 4000
SR
;
;
;
;
;
Clear ACCB
Load W6 with [W8]
Load W7 with [W10]
Save ACCA to [W13]
Post-inc W8,W10,W13
After
Instruction
1221
FF80
2002
3002
4002
00 0067 2345
00 0000 0000
1221
FF80
0067
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 187
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
CLRWDT
Clear Watchdog Timer
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
0110
0000
0000
0000
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
None
Operation:
0 →WDT count register
0 →WDT prescaler A count
0 →WDT prescaler B count
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
CLRWDT
1111
1110
Description:
Clear the contents of the Watchdog Timer count register and the
prescaler count registers. The Watchdog Prescaler A and Prescaler B
settings, set by configuration fuses in the FWDT, are not changed.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
CLRWDT
; Clear Watchdog Timer
Before
Instruction
SR 0000
DS70157F-page 188
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
After
Instruction
SR 0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
COM
Complement f
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
f ∈ [0 ... 8191]
Operation:
(f) →destination designated by D
Status Affected:
N, Z
Encoding:
1110
Description:
1110
f
X
X
ffff
ffff
{,WREG}
1BDf
ffff
Compute the 1’s complement of the contents of the file register and place
the result in the destination register. The optional WREG operand
determines the destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is
stored in WREG. If WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file
register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘D’ bit selects the destination (‘0’ for WREG, ‘1’ for file register).
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1:
2:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
COM{.B}
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
The WREG is set to working register W0.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
COM.b
RAM200
Before
Instruction
RAM200 80FF
SR 0000
Example 2:
COM
; COM RAM200 (Byte mode)
After
Instruction
RAM200 8000
SR 0002 (Z)
RAM400, WREG
Before
Instruction
WREG
1211
RAM400
0823
SR
0000
; COM RAM400 and store to WREG
; (Word mode)
After
Instruction
WREG F7DC
RAM400
0823
SR
0008 (N = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 189
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
COM
Complement Ws
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
COM{.B}
Operands:
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Ws) →Wd
Status Affected:
N, Z
Encoding:
1110
Description:
1010
Ws,
X
X
dppp
ssss
Wd
[Ws],
[Wd]
[Ws++],
[Wd++]
[Ws--],
[Wd--]
[++Ws],
[++Wd]
[--Ws],
[--Wd]
1Bqq
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
qddd
Compute the 1’s complement of the contents of the source register Ws
and place the result in the destination register Wd. Either register direct or
indirect addressing may be used for both Ws and Wd.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘q’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
COM.B
[W0++], [W1++]
Before
Instruction
W0
2301
W1
2400
Data 2300
5607
Data 2400 ABCD
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 190
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
; COM [W0] and store to [W1] (Byte mode)
; Post-increment W0, W1
After
Instruction
W0
2302
W1
2401
Data 2300
5607
Data 2400
ABA9
SR
0008 (N = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 2:
COM
W0, [W1++]
Before
Instruction
W0
D004
W1
1000
Data 1000
ABA9
SR
0000
CP
; COM W0 and store to [W1] (Word mode)
; Post-increment W1
After
Instruction
W0
D004
W1
1002
Data 1000
2FFB
SR
0000
Compare f with WREG, Set Status Flags
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
0B0f
ffff
ffff
ffff
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
f ∈ [0 ...8191]
Operation:
(f) – (WREG)
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
CP{.B}
1110
Description:
0011
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
f
Compute (f) – (WREG) and update the STATUS register. This instruction
is equivalent to the SUBWF instruction, but the result of the subtraction is
not stored.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1:
2:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
The WREG is set to working register W0.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
CP.B
RAM400
Before
Instruction
WREG
8823
RAM400
0823
SR
0000
Example 2:
CP
0x1200
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
After
Instruction
WREG
8823
RAM400
0823
SR
0003 (C = 1)
5
; Compare (0x1200) with WREG (Word mode)
Instruction
Descriptions
Before
Instruction
WREG
2377
Data 1200
2277
SR
0000
; Compare RAM400 with WREG (Byte mode)
After
Instruction
WREG
2377
Data 1200
2277
SR
0008 (N = 1)
DS70157F-page 191
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
CP
Compare Wb with lit5, Set Status Flags
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
lit5 ∈ [ 0 ... 31]
Operation:
(Wb) – lit5
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
CP{.B}
1110
Description:
0001
PIC24E
Wb,
0www
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
wB00
011k
#lit5
kkkk
Compute (Wb) – lit5, and update the STATUS register. This instruction is
equivalent to the SUB instruction, but the result of the subtraction is not
stored. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the Wb base register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘k’ bits provide the literal operand, a five-bit integer number.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
CP.B
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
W4, #0x12
Before
Instruction
W4
7711
SR
0000
Example 2:
CP
W4, #0x12
Before
Instruction
W4
7713
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 192
; Compare W4 with 0x12 (Byte mode)
After
Instruction
W4
7711
SR
0008 (N = 1)
; Compare W4 with 0x12 (Word mode)
After
Instruction
W4
7713
SR
0001 (C = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
CP
Compare Wb with lit8, Set Status Flags
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
lit8 ∈ [ 0 ... 255]
Operation:
(Wb) – lit8
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
CP{.B}
1110
Description:
0001
Wb,
0www
X
#lit8
wBkk
k11k
kkkk
Compute (Wb) – lit8, and update the STATUS register. This instruction is
equivalent to the SUB instruction, but the result of the subtraction is not
stored. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the Wb base register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘k’ bits provide the literal operand, a five-bit integer number.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
CP.B
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
W4, #0x12
Before
Instruction
W4
7711
SR
0000
Example 2:
CP
W4, #0x12
Before
Instruction
W4
7713
SR
0000
; Compare W4 with 0x12 (Byte mode)
After
Instruction
W4
7711
SR
0009 (N, C = 1)
; Compare W4 with 0x12 (Word mode)
After
Instruction
W4
7713
SR
0001 (C = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 193
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
CP
Compare Wb with Ws, Set Status Flags
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
CP{.B}
Wb,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
0ppp
ssss
Ws
[Ws]
[Ws++]
[Ws--]
[++Ws]
[--Ws]
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operands:
Operation:
(Wb) – (Ws)
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
1110
Description:
0001
0www
wB00
Compute (Wb) – (Ws), and update the STATUS register. This instruction is
equivalent to the SUB instruction, but the result of the subtraction is not
stored. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb. Register direct or
indirect addressing may be used for Ws.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the Wb source register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the address of the Ws source register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
CP.B
W0, [W1++]
Before
Instruction
W0 ABA9
W1
2000
Data 2000
D004
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 194
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
; Compare [W1] with W0 (Byte mode)
; Post-increment W1
After
Instruction
W0 ABA9
W1
2001
Data 2000
D004
SR
0009 (N, C = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 2:
CP
W5, W6
Before
Instruction
W5
2334
W6
8001
SR
0000
; Compare W6 with W5 (Word mode)
After
Instruction
W5
2334
W6
8001
SR
000C (N, OV = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 195
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
CP0
Compare f with 0x0, Set Status Flags
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
0B0f
ffff
ffff
ffff
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
f ∈ [0 ... 8191]
Operation:
(f) – 0x0
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
CP0{.B}
1110
Description:
0010
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
f
Compute (f) – 0x0 and update the STATUS register. The result of the
subtraction is not stored.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
CP0.B
RAM100
Before
Instruction
RAM100
44C3
SR
0000
Example 2:
CP0
0x1FFE
Before
Instruction
Data 1FFE
0001
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 196
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
; Compare RAM100 with 0x0 (Byte mode)
After
Instruction
RAM100
44C3
SR
0009 (N, C = 1)
; Compare (0x1FFE) with 0x0 (Word mode)
After
Instruction
Data 1FFE
0001
SR
0001 (C = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
CP0
Compare Ws with 0x0, Set Status Flags
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
0B00
0ppp
ssss
{label:}
CP0{.B}
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
Ws
[Ws]
[Ws++]
[Ws--]
[++Ws]
[--Ws]
Operands:
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Ws) – 0x0000
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
1110
Description:
0000
0000
Compute (Ws) – 0x0000 and update the STATUS register. The result of
the subtraction is not stored. Register direct or indirect addressing may be
used for Ws.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the address of the Ws source register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
CP0.B
[W4--]
Before
Instruction
W4
1001
Data 1000
0034
SR
0000
Example 2:
CP0
[--W5]
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
After
Instruction
W4
1000
Data 1000
0034
SR
0001 (C = 1)
; Compare [--W5] with 0 (Word mode)
After
Instruction
W5
23FE
Data 23FE
9000
SR
0009 (N, C = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
Before
Instruction
W5
2400
Data 23FE
9000
SR
0000
; Compare [W4] with 0 (Byte mode)
; Post-decrement W4
DS70157F-page 197
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
CPB
Compare f with WREG using Borrow, Set Status Flags
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
1B0f
ffff
ffff
ffff
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
f ∈ [0 ...8191]
Operation:
(f) – (WREG) – (C)
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
CPB{.B}
1110
0011
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
f
Compute (f) – (WREG) – (C), and update the STATUS register. This
instruction is equivalent to the SUBB instruction, but the result of the
subtraction is not stored.
Description:
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1:
2:
3:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
The WREG is set to working register W0.
The Z flag is “sticky” for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR.
These instructions can only clear Z.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
CPB.B
RAM400
Before
Instruction
WREG
8823
RAM400
0823
SR
0000
Example 2:
CPB
0x1200
; Compare RAM400 with WREG using C (Byte mode)
After
Instruction
WREG
8823
RAM400
0823
SR
0008 (N = 1)
; Compare (0x1200) with WREG using C (Word mode)
Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
WREG
2377
WREG
2377
Data 1200
2377
Data 1200
2377
SR
0001 (C = 1)
SR
0001 (C = 1)
DS70157F-page 198
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
CPB
Compare Wb with lit5 using Borrow, Set Status Flags
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
lit5 ∈ [ 0 ... 31]
Operation:
(Wb) – lit5 – (C)
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
CPB{.B}
1110
Description:
PIC24E
Wb,
0001
1www
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
wB00
011k
#lit5
kkkk
Compute (Wb) – lit5 – (C), and update the STATUS register. This
instruction is equivalent to the SUBB instruction, but the result of the
subtraction is not stored. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the Wb source register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘k’ bits provide the literal operand, a five bit integer number.
Note 1:
2:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
CPB.B
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
The Z flag is “sticky” for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR. These
instructions can only clear Z.
W4, #0x12
Before
Instruction
W4
7711
SR
0001 (C = 1)
Example 2:
CPB.B
W4, #0x12
Before
Instruction
W4
7711
SR
0000
Example 3:
CPB
W12, #0x1F
Before
Instruction
W12
0020
SR
0002 (Z = 1)
CPB
W12, #0x1F
Before
Instruction
W12
0020
SR
0003 (Z, C = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
After
Instruction
W4
7711
SR
0008 (N = 1)
; Compare W4 with 0x12 using C (Byte mode)
After
Instruction
W4
7711
SR
0008 (N = 1)
; Compare W12 with 0x1F using C (Word mode)
After
Instruction
W12
0020
SR
0003 (Z, C = 1)
5
; Compare W12 with 0x1F using C (Word mode)
After
Instruction
W12
0020
SR
0001 (C = 1)
DS70157F-page 199
Instruction
Descriptions
Example 4:
; Compare W4 with 0x12 using C (Byte mode)
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
CPB
Compare Wb with lit8 using Borrow, Set Status Flags
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
lit8 ∈ [ 0 ... 255]
Operation:
(Wb) – lit8 – (C)
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
CPB{.B}
1110
Description:
Wb,
0001
1www
X
#lit8
wBkk
k11k
kkkk
Compute (Wb) – lit8 – (C), and update the STATUS register. This
instruction is equivalent to the SUBB instruction, but the result of the
subtraction is not stored. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the Wb source register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘k’ bits provide the literal operand, a five bit integer number.
Note 1:
2:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
CPB.B
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
The Z flag is “sticky” for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR. These
instructions can only clear Z.
W4, #0x12
Before
Instruction
W4
7711
SR
0001 (C = 1)
Example 2:
CPB.B
W4, #0x12
Before
Instruction
W4
7711
SR
0000
Example 3:
CPB
W12, #0x1F
Before
Instruction
W12
0020
SR
0002 (Z = 1)
Example 4:
CPB
W12, #0x1F
Before
Instruction
W12
0020
SR
0003 (Z, C = 1)
DS70157F-page 200
; Compare W4 with 0x12 using C (Byte mode)
After
Instruction
W4
7711
SR
0008 (N = 1)
; Compare W4 with 0x12 using C (Byte mode)
After
Instruction
W4
7711
SR
0008 (N = 1)
; Compare W12 with 0x1F using C (Word mode)
After
Instruction
W12
0020
SR
0003 (Z, C = 1)
; Compare W12 with 0x1F using C (Word mode)
After
Instruction
W12
0020
SR
0001 (C = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
CPB
Compare Ws with Wb using Borrow, Set Status Flags
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
CPB{.B}
Wb,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
0ppp
ssss
Ws
[Ws]
[Ws++]
[Ws--]
[++Ws]
[--Ws]
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Wb) – (Ws) – (C)
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
1110
Description:
0001
1www
wB00
Compute (Wb) – (Ws) – (C), and update the STATUS register. This
instruction is equivalent to the SUBB instruction, but the result of the
subtraction is not stored. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb.
Register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the Wb source register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the address of the Ws source register.
Note 1:
2:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
The Z flag is “sticky” for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR. These
instructions can only clear Z.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
CPB.B
W0, [W1++]
; Compare [W1] with W0 using C (Byte mode)
; Post-increment W1
Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
W0 ABA9
W0 ABA9
W1
1000
W1
1001
Data 1000 D0A9
Data 1000 D0A9
SR
0002 (Z = 1)
SR
0008 (N = 1)
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
5
DS70157F-page 201
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 2:
CPB.B
W0, [W1++]
; Compare [W1] with W0 using C (Byte mode)
; Post-increment W1
Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
W0 ABA9
W0 ABA9
W1
1000
W1
1001
Data 1000
D0A9
Data 1000
D0A9
SR
0001 (C = 1)
SR
0001 (C = 1)
Example 3:
CPB
W4, W5
Before
Instruction
W4
4000
W5
3000
SR
0001 (C = 1)
DS70157F-page 202
; Compare W5 with W4 using C (Word mode)
After
Instruction
W4
4000
W5
3000
SR
0001 (C = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
CPBEQ
Compare Wb with Wn, Branch if Equal (Wb = Wn)
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wn ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Wb) – (Wn)
If (Wb) = (Wn), [(PC+2) + 2 * Expr] →PC and NOP →Instruction Register
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
CPBEQ{.B}
1110
Description:
0111
Wb,
X
1www
Wn, Expr
wBnn
nnnn
ssss
Compare the contents of Wb with the contents of Wn by performing the
subtraction (Wb) – (Wn), but do not store the result. If (Wb) = (Wn), the
next instruction (fetched during the current instruction execution) is
discarded, the PC is recalculated based on the 6-bit signed offset
specified by Expr, and on the next cycle, a NOP is executed instead. If
(Wb) ≠ (Wn), the next instruction is executed as normal (branch is not
taken).
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the Wb source register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘s’ bits select the address of the Wn source register.
The ‘n’ bits select the offset of the branch destination.
Note:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1 (5 if branch taken)
Example 1:
002000 HERE:CPBEQ.B W0, W1, BYPASS; If W0 = W1 (Byte mode),
002002 ADD W2, W3, W4; Perform branch to BYPASS
002004
. . .
002006
. . .
002008 BYPASS: . . .
00200A
. . .
PC
W0
W1
SR
Before
Instruction
00 2000
1000
1000
0000
PC
W0
W1
SR
After
Instruction
00 2008
1000
1000
0002 (z = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 203
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
CPBGT
Signed Compare Wb with Wn, Branch if Greater Than (Wb > Wn)
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wn ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Wb) – (Wn)
If (Wb) = (Wn), [(PC+2) + 2 * Expr] →PC and NOP →Instruction Register
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
CPBGT{.B}
1110
Description:
0110
Wb,
X
0www
Wn, Expr
wBnn
nnnn
ssss
Compare the contents of Wb with the contents of Wn by performing the
subtraction (Wb) – (Wn), but do not store the result. If (Wb) = (Wn), the
next instruction (fetched during the current instruction execution) is
discarded, the PC is recalculated based on the 6-bit signed offset
specified by Expr, and on the next cycle, a NOP is executed instead. If
(Wb) ≠ (Wn), the next instruction is executed as normal (branch is not
taken).
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the Wb source register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘s’ bits select the address of the Wn source register.
The ‘n’ bits select the offset of the branch destination.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1 (5 if branch taken)
Example 1:
002000 HERE: CPBGT.B W0, W1, BYPASS ; If W0 > W1 (Byte mode),
002002
ADD
W2, W3, W4
; Perform branch to BYPASS
002004
. . .
002006
. . .
002008 BYPASS . . .
00200A
. . .
PC
W0
W1
SR
DS70157F-page 204
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
Before
Instruction
00 2000
30FF
26FE
0000
PC
W0
W1
SR
After
Instruction
00 2008
00FF
26FE
0000 (N, C = 0)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
CPBLT
Signed Compare Wb with Wn, Branch if Less Than (Wb < Wn)
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wn ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Wb) – (Wn)
If (Wb) = (Wn), [(PC+2) + 2 * Expr] →PC and NOP →Instruction Register
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
CPBLT{.B}
1110
Description:
0110
Wb,
X
1www
Wn, Expr
wBnn
nnnn
ssss
Compare the contents of Wb with the contents of Wn by performing the
subtraction (Wb) – (Wn), but do not store the result. If (Wb) = (Wn), the
next instruction (fetched during the current instruction execution) is
discarded, the PC is recalculated based on the 6-bit signed offset specified
by Expr, and on the next cycle, a NOP is executed instead. If (Wb) ≠ (Wn),
the next instruction is executed as normal (branch is not taken).
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the Wb source register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘s’ bits select the address of the Wn source register.
The ‘n’ bits select the offset of the branch destination.
Note:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1 (5 if branch taken)
Example 1:
002000 HERE:
002002
002004
002006
002008 BYPASS:
00200A
PC
W8
W9
SR
Before
Instruction
00 2000
00FF
26FE
0000
CPBLT.B W8, W9, BYPASS; If W8 < W9 (Byte mode),
ADD W2, W3, W4; Perform branch to BYPASS
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
PC
W8
W9
SR
After
Instruction
00 2008
00FF
26FE
0008 (N = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 205
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
CPBNE
Compare Wb with Wn, Branch if Not Equal (Wb ≠ Wn)
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wn ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Wb) – (Wn)
If (Wb) = (Wn), [(PC+2) + 2 * Expr] →PC and NOP →Instruction Register
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
CPBNE{.B}
1110
Description:
0111
Wb,
X
0www
Wn, Expr
wBnn
nnnn
ssss
Compare the contents of Wb with the contents of Wn by performing the
subtraction (Wb) – (Wn), but do not store the result. If (Wb) = (Wn), the next
instruction (fetched during the current instruction execution) is discarded,
the PC is recalculated based on the 6-bit signed offset specified by Expr,
and on the next cycle, a NOP is executed instead. If (Wb) ≠ (Wn), the next
instruction is executed as normal (branch is not taken).
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the Wb source register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘s’ bits select the address of the Wn source register.
The ‘n’ bits select the offset of the branch destination.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1 (5 if branch taken)
Example 1:
002000 HERE:
002002
002004
002006
002008 BYPASS:
00200A
PC
W2
W3
SR
DS70157F-page 206
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
Before
Instruction
00 2000
00FF
26FE
0000
CPBNE.B W2, W3, BYPASS ; If W2 != W3 (Byte mode),
ADD W2, W3, W4 ; Perform branch to BYPASS
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
PC
W2
W3
SR
After
Instruction
00 200A
00FF
26FE
0001 (C = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
CPSEQ
Compare Wb with Wn, Skip if Equal (Wb = Wn)
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wn ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Wb) – (Wn)
Skip if (Wb) = (Wn)
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
CPSEQ{.B}
1110
Description:
0111
PIC24E
Wb,
1www
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
wB00
0000
Wn
ssss
Compare the contents of Wb with the contents of Wn by performing the
subtraction (Wb) – (Wn), but do not store the result. If (Wb) = (Wn), the
next instruction (fetched during the current instruction execution) is
discarded and on the next cycle, a NOP is executed instead. If
(Wb) ≠ (Wn), the next instruction is executed as normal.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the Wb source register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘s’ bits select the address of the Wn source register.
Note:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1 (2 or 3 if skip taken)
Example 1:
002000 HERE:CPSEQ.BW0, W1; If W0 = W1 (Byte mode),
002002GOTOBYPASS; skip the GOTO
002004
. . .
002006
. . .
002008 BYPASS: . . .
00200A
. . .
PC
W0
W1
SR
Example 2:
018000 HERE:
018002
018006
018008
PC
W0
W1
SR
CPSEQ
CALL
...
...
Before
Instruction
01 8000
3344
3344
0002 (Z = 1)
After
Instruction
00 2002
1001
1000
0000
W4, W8; If W4 = W8 (Word mode),
_FIR; skip the subroutine call
5
PC
W4
W8
SR
After
Instruction
01 8006
3344
3344
0002 (Z = 1)
Instruction
Descriptions
PC
W4
W8
SR
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Before
Instruction
00 2000
1001
1000
0000
DS70157F-page 207
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
CPSEQ
Compare Wb with Wn, Skip if Equal (Wb = Wn)
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wn ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Wb) – (Wn)
Skip if (Wb) = (Wn)
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
CPSEQ{.B}
1110
Description:
0111
Wb,
1www
X
Wn
wB00
0001
ssss
Compare the contents of Wb with the contents of Wn by performing the
subtraction (Wb) – (Wn), but do not store the result. If (Wb) = (Wn), the
next instruction (fetched during the current instruction execution) is
discarded and on the next cycle, a NOP is executed instead. If
(Wb) ≠ (Wn), the next instruction is executed as normal.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the Wb source register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘s’ bits select the address of the Wn source register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1 (2 or 3 if skip taken)
Example 1:
002000 HERE:CPSEQ.BW0, W1; If W0 = W1 (Byte mode),
002002GOTOBYPASS; skip the GOTO
002004
. . .
002006
. . .
002008 BYPASS: . . .
00200A
. . .
PC
W0
W1
SR
DS70157F-page 208
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
Before
Instruction
00 2000
1001
1000
0000
PC
W0
W1
SR
After
Instruction
00 2002
1001
1000
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 2:
018000 HERE:
018002
018006
018008
PC
W4
W8
SR
CPSEQ
CALL
...
...
Before
Instruction
01 8000
3344
3344
0002 (Z = 1)
W4, W8; If W4 = W8 (Word mode),
_FIR; skip the subroutine call
PC
W4
W8
SR
After
Instruction
01 8006
3344
3344
0002 (Z = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 209
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
CPSGT
Signed Compare Wb with Wn, Skip if Greater Than (Wb > Wn)
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wn ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Wb) – (Wn)
Skip if (Wb) > (Wn)
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
CPSGT{.B}
1110
Description:
PIC24E
Wb,
0110
0www
dsPIC30F dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
wB00
0000
Wn
ssss
Compare the contents of Wb with the contents of Wn by performing the
subtraction (Wb) – (Wn), but do not store the result. If (Wb) > (Wn), the
next instruction (fetched during the current instruction execution) is
discarded and on the next cycle, a NOP is executed instead. Otherwise,
the next instruction is executed as normal.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the Wb source register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘s’ bits select the address of the Wn source register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1 (2 or 3 if skip taken)
Example 1:
002000 HERE:
002002
002006
002008
00200A BYPASS
00200C
PC
W0
W1
SR
Example 2:
CPSGT.B
GOTO
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
W0, W1; If W0 > W1 (Byte mode),
BYPASS; skip the GOTO
Before
Instruction
00 2000
00FF
26FE
0009 (N, C = 1)
018000 HERE:
018002
018006
018008
PC
W4
W5
SR
DS70157F-page 210
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
CPSGT
CALL
...
...
Before
Instruction
01 8000
2600
2600
0004 (OV = 1)
PC
W0
W1
SR
After
Instruction
00 2006
00FF
26FE
0009 (N, C = 1)
W4, W5; If W4 > W5 (Word mode),
_FIR; skip the subroutine call
PC
W4
W5
SR
After
Instruction
01 8002
2600
2600
0004 (OV = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
CPSGT
Signed Compare Wb with Wn, Skip if Greater Than (Wb > Wn)
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wn ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Wb) – (Wn)
Skip if (Wb) > (Wn)
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
CPSGT{.B}
1110
Description:
Wb,
0110
0www
X
Wn
wB00
0001
ssss
Compare the contents of Wb with the contents of Wn by performing the
subtraction (Wb) – (Wn), but do not store the result. If (Wb) > (Wn), the
next instruction (fetched during the current instruction execution) is
discarded and on the next cycle, a NOP is executed instead. Otherwise,
the next instruction is executed as normal.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the Wb source register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘s’ bits select the address of the Wn source register.
Note:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1 (2 or 3 if skip taken)
Example 1:
002000 HERE:
002002
002006
002008
00200A BYPASS
00200C
PC
W0
W1
SR
Example 2:
CPSGT
CALL
...
...
Before
Instruction
01 8000
2600
2600
0004 (OV = 1)
PC
W0
W1
SR
After
Instruction
00 2006
00FF
26FE
0009 (N, C = 1)
W4, W5; If W4 > W5 (Word mode),
_FIR; skip the subroutine call
5
PC
W4
W5
SR
After
Instruction
01 8002
2600
2600
0004 (OV = 1)
DS70157F-page 211
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
W0, W1; If W0 > W1 (Byte mode),
BYPASS; skip the GOTO
Before
Instruction
00 2000
00FF
26FE
0009 (N, C = 1)
018000 HERE:
018002
018006
018008
PC
W4
W5
SR
CPSGT.B
GOTO
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
CPSLT
Signed Compare Wb with Wn, Skip if Less Than (Wb < Wn)
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wn ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Wb) – (Wn)
Skip if (Wb) < (Wn)
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
CPSLT{.B}
1110
Description:
0110
PIC24E
Wb,
1www
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
wB00
0000
Wn
ssss
Compare the contents of Wb with the contents of Wn by performing the
subtraction (Wb) – (Wn), but do not store the result. If (Wb) < (Wn), the
next instruction (fetched during the current instruction execution) is
discarded and on the next cycle, a NOP is executed instead. Otherwise, the
next instruction is executed as normal.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the Wb source register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘s’ bits select the address of the Wn source register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1 (2 or 3 if skip taken)
Example 1:
002000 HERE:
002002
002006
002008
00200A BYPASS:
00200C
PC
W8
W9
SR
Example 2:
CPSLT.B
GOTO
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
Before
Instruction
00 2000
00FF
26FE
0008 (N = 1)
018000 HERE:
018002
018006
018008
PC
W3
W6
SR
DS70157F-page 212
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
CPSLT
CALL
. . .
. . .
Before
Instruction
01 8000
2600
3000
0000
W8, W9; If W8 < W9 (Byte mode),
BYPASS; skip the GOTO
PC
W8
W9
SR
After
Instruction
00 2002
00FF
26FE
0008 (N = 1)
W3, W6; If W3 < W6 (Word mode),
_FIR; skip the subroutine call
PC
W3
W6
SR
After
Instruction
01 8006
2600
3000
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
CPSLT
Signed Compare Wb with Wn, Skip if Less Than (Wb < Wn)
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wn ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Wb) – (Wn)
Skip if (Wb) < (Wn)
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
CPSLT{.B}
1110
Description:
0110
X
Wb,
1www
Wn
wB00
0001
ssss
Compare the contents of Wb with the contents of Wn by performing the
subtraction (Wb) – (Wn), but do not store the result. If (Wb) < (Wn), the
next instruction (fetched during the current instruction execution) is
discarded and on the next cycle, a NOP is executed instead. Otherwise, the
next instruction is executed as normal.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the Wb source register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘s’ bits select the address of the Wn source register.
Note:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1 (2 or 3 if skip taken)
Example 1:
002000 HERE:
002002
002006
002008
00200A BYPASS:
00200C
PC
W8
W9
SR
Example 2:
CPSLT
CALL
. . .
. . .
Before
Instruction
01 8000
2600
3000
0000
W8, W9; If W8 < W9 (Byte mode),
BYPASS; skip the GOTO
PC
W8
W9
SR
After
Instruction
00 2002
00FF
26FE
0008 (N = 1)
W3, W6; If W3 < W6 (Word mode),
_FIR; skip the subroutine call
5
PC
W3
W6
SR
After
Instruction
01 8006
2600
3000
0000
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Before
Instruction
00 2000
00FF
26FE
0008 (N = 1)
018000 HERE:
018002
018006
018008
PC
W3
W6
SR
CPSLT.B
GOTO
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
DS70157F-page 213
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
CPSNE
Signed Compare Wb with Wn, Skip if Not Equal (Wb ≠ Wn)
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wn ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Wb) – (Wn)
Skip if (Wb) ≠ (Wn)
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
CPSNE{.B}
1110
Description:
PIC24E
0111
Wb,
0www
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
wB00
0000
Wn
ssss
Compare the contents of Wb with the contents of Wn by performing the
subtraction (Wb) – (Wn), but do not store the result. If (Wb) ≠ (Wn), the next
instruction (fetched during the current instruction execution) is discarded
and on the next cycle, a NOP is executed instead. Otherwise, the next
instruction is executed as normal.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the Wb source register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘s’ bits select the address of the Wn source register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1 (2 or 3 if skip taken)
Example 1:
002000 HERE:
002002
002006
002008
00200A BYPASS:
00200C
PC
W2
W3
SR
Example 2:
CPSNE.B
GOTO
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
Before
Instruction
00 2000
00FF
26FE
0001 (C = 1)
018000 HERE:
018002
018006
018008
PC
W0
W8
SR
DS70157F-page 214
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
Before
Instruction
01 8000
3000
3000
0000
CPSNE
CALL
...
...
W2, W3 ; If W2 != W3 (Byte mode),
BYPASS ; skip the GOTO
PC
W2
W3
SR
After
Instruction
00 2006
00FF
26FE
0001 (C = 1)
W0, W8 ; If W0 != W8 (Word mode),
_FIR ; skip the subroutine call
PC
W0
W8
SR
After
Instruction
01 8002
3000
3000
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
CPSNE
Signed Compare Wb with Wn, Skip if Not Equal (Wb ≠ Wn)
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wn ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Wb) – (Wn)
Skip if (Wb) ≠ (Wn)
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
CPSNE{.B}
1110
Description:
0111
Wb,
0www
X
Wn
wB00
0001
ssss
Compare the contents of Wb with the contents of Wn by performing the
subtraction (Wb) – (Wn), but do not store the result. If (Wb) ≠ (Wn), the next
instruction (fetched during the current instruction execution) is discarded
and on the next cycle, a NOP is executed instead. Otherwise, the next
instruction is executed as normal.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the Wb source register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘s’ bits select the address of the Wn source register.
Note:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1 (2 or 3 if skip taken)
Example 1:
002000 HERE:
002002
002006
002008
00200A BYPASS:
00200C
PC
W2
W3
SR
Example 2:
Before
Instruction
01 8000
3000
3000
0000
CPSNE
CALL
...
...
W2, W3 ; If W2 != W3 (Byte mode),
BYPASS ; skip the GOTO
PC
W2
W3
SR
After
Instruction
00 2006
00FF
26FE
0001 (C = 1)
W0, W8 ; If W0 != W8 (Word mode),
_FIR ; skip the subroutine call
5
PC
W0
W8
SR
After
Instruction
01 8002
3000
3000
0000
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Before
Instruction
00 2000
00FF
26FE
0001 (C = 1)
018000 HERE:
018002
018006
018008
PC
W0
W8
SR
CPSNE.B
GOTO
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
DS70157F-page 215
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
DAW.B
Decimal Adjust Wn
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
0100
0000
0000
ssss
Syntax:
{label:}
DAW.B
Operands:
Wn ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
If (Wn<3:0> > 9) or (DC = 1)
(Wn<3:0>) + 6 →Wn<3:0>
Else
(Wn<3:0>) →Wn<3:0>
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
Wn
If (Wn<7:4> > 9) or (C = 1)
(Wn<7:4>) + 6 →Wn<7:4>
Else
(Wn<7:4>) →Wn<7:4>
Status Affected:
C
Encoding:
Description:
1111
1101
Adjust the Least Significant Byte in Wn to produce a binary coded decimal
(BCD) result. The Most Significant Byte of Wn is not changed, and the
Carry flag is used to indicate any decimal rollover. Register direct
addressing must be used for Wn.
The ‘s’ bits select the source/destination register.
Note 1:
2:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
DAW.B
W0
This instruction is used to correct the data format after two
packed BCD bytes have been added.
This instruction operates in Byte mode only and the .B
extension must be included with the opcode.
; Decimal adjust W0
Before
Instruction
W0 771A
SR
0002 (DC = 1)
Example 2:
DAW.B
W3
Before
Instruction
W3 77AA
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 216
After
Instruction
W0
7720
SR
0002 (DC = 1)
; Decimal adjust W3
After
Instruction
W3
7710
SR
0001 (C = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
DEC
Decrement f
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
f ∈ [0 ... 8191]
Operation:
(f) – 1 →destination designated by D
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
DEC{.B}
1110
Description:
1101
f
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
ffff
ffff
{,WREG}
0BDf
ffff
Subtract one from the contents of the file register and place the result in the
destination register. The optional WREG operand determines the
destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If
WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘D’ bit selects the destination (‘0’ for WREG, ‘1’ for file register).
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1:
2:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
The WREG is set to working register W0.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
DEC.B
0x200
Before
Instruction
Data 200 80FF
SR
0000
Example 2:
DEC
; Decrement (0x200) (Byte mode)
After
Instruction
Data 200 80FE
SR
0009 (N, C = 1)
RAM400, WREG
Before
Instruction
WREG
1211
RAM400
0823
SR
0000
; Decrement RAM400 and store to WREG
; (Word mode)
After
Instruction
WREG
0822
RAM400
0823
SR
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 217
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
DEC
Decrement Ws
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
DEC{.B}
Ws,
Wd
[Ws],
[Wd]
[Ws++],
[Wd++]
[Ws--],
[Wd--]
[++Ws],
[++Wd]
[--Ws],
[--Wd]
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
dppp
ssss
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operands:
Operation:
(Ws) – 1 →Wd
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
1110
Description:
1001
0Bqq
qddd
Subtract one from the contents of the source register Ws and place the
result in the destination register Wd. Either register direct or indirect
addressing may be used by Ws and Wd.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘q’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
DEC.B
[W7++], [W8++]
Before
Instruction
W7
2301
W8
2400
Data 2300
5607
Data 2400 ABCD
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 218
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
; DEC [W7] and store to [W8] (Byte mode)
; Post-increment W7, W8
After
Instruction
W7
2302
W8
2401
Data 2300
5607
Data 2400
AB55
SR
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 2:
DEC
W5, [W6++]
Before
Instruction
W5
D004
W6
2000
Data 2000 ABA9
SR
0000
; Decrement W5 and store to [W6] (Word mode)
; Post-increment W6
After
Instruction
W5
D004
W6
2002
Data 2000
D003
SR
0009 (N, C = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 219
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
DEC2
Decrement f by 2
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
f ∈ [0 ... 8191]
Operation:
(f) – 2 →destination designated by D
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
DEC2{.B}
1110
Description:
1101
f
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
ffff
ffff
{,WREG}
1BDf
ffff
Subtract two from the contents of the file register and place the result in the
destination register. The optional WREG operand determines the
destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If
WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘D’ bit selects the destination (‘0’ for WREG, ‘1’ for file register).
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
DEC2.B
0x200
Before
Instruction
Data 200 80FF
SR
0000
Example 2:
DEC2
; Decrement (0x200) by 2 (Byte mode)
After
Instruction
Data 200 80FD
SR
0009 (N, C = 1)
RAM400, WREG
Before
Instruction
WREG
1211
RAM400
0823
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 220
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
; Decrement RAM400 by 2 and
; store to WREG (Word mode)
After
Instruction
WREG
0821
RAM400
0823
SR
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
DEC2
Decrement Ws by 2
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
DEC2{.B}
Operands:
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Ws) – 2 →Wd
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
1110
Description:
1001
Ws,
X
X
dppp
ssss
Wd
[Ws],
[Wd]
[Ws++],
[Wd++]
[Ws--],
[Wd--]
[++Ws],
[++Wd]
[--Ws],
[--Wd]
1Bqq
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
qddd
Subtract two from the contents of the source register Ws and place the
result in the destination register Wd. Either register direct or indirect
addressing may be used by Ws and Wd.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘q’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
DEC2.B [W7--], [W8--]; DEC [W7] by 2, store to [W8] (Byte mode)
; Post-decrement W7, W8
Before
Instruction
W7
2301
W8
2400
Data 2300
0107
Data 2400 ABCD
SR
0000
After
Instruction
W7
2300
W8
23FF
Data 2300
0107
Data 2400
ABFF
SR
0008 (N = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 221
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 2:
DEC2
W5, [W6++]
Before
Instruction
W5
D004
W6
1000
Data 1000 ABA9
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 222
; DEC W5 by 2, store to [W6] (Word mode)
; Post-increment W6
After
Instruction
W5
D004
W6
1002
Data 1000
D002
SR
0009 (N, C = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
DISI
Disable Interrupts Temporarily
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
kkkk
kkkk
kkkk
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
lit14 ∈ [ 0 ... 16383]
Operation:
lit14 →DISICNT
1 →DISI
Disable interrupts for (lit14 + 1) cycles
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1111
DISI
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
#lit14
1100
00kk
Description:
Disable interrupts of priority 0 through priority 6 for (lit14 + 1) instruction
cycles. Priority 0 through priority 6 interrupts are disabled starting in the
cycle that DISI executes, and remain disabled for the next (lit 14) cycles.
The lit14 value is written to the DISICNT register, and the DISI flag
(INTCON2<14>) is set to ‘1’. This instruction can be used before
executing time critical code, to limit the effects of interrupts.
Note 1: This instruction does not prevent priority 7 interrupts and traps
from running. See the specific device family reference manual
for details.
2: This instruction does not prevent any interrupts when the
device is in Sleep mode.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
002000 HERE:
002002
002004
PC
DISICNT
INTCON2
SR
Before
Instruction
00 2000
0000
0000
0000
DISI
#100
; Disable interrupts for 101 cycles
; next 100 cycles protected by DISI
. . .
PC
DISICNT
INTCON2
SR
After
Instruction
00 2002
0100
4000 (DISI = 1)
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 223
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
DIV.S
Implemented in:
Syntax:
Signed Integer Divide
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
DIV.S{W}
Wm, Wn
DIV.SD
Wm, Wn
Operands:
Wm ∈ [ W0 ... W15] for word operation
Wm ∈ [ W0, W2, W4 ... W14] for double operation
Wn ∈ [ W2 ... W15]
Operation:
For word operation (default):
Wm →W0
If (Wm<15> = 1):
0xFFFF →W1
Else:
0x0 →W1
W1:W0 / Wn →W0
Remainder →W1
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
vW00
ssss
For double operation (DIV.SD):
Wm + 1:Wm →W1:W0
W1:W0 / Wn →W0
Remainder →W1
Status Affected:
Encoding:
Description:
DS70157F-page 224
N, OV, Z, C
1101
1000
0ttt
tvvv
Iterative, signed integer divide, where the dividend is stored in Wm (for a
16-bit by 16-bit divide) or Wm + 1:Wm (for a 32-bit by 16-bit divide) and
the divisor is stored in Wn. In the default word operation, Wm is first
copied to W0 and sign-extended through W1 to perform the operation. In
the double operation, Wm + 1:Wm is first copied to W1:W0. The 16-bit
quotient of the divide operation is stored in W0, and the 16-bit remainder
is stored in W1.
This instruction must be executed 18 times using the REPEAT instruction
(with an iteration count of 17) to generate the correct quotient and
remainder. The N flag will be set if the remainder is negative and cleared
otherwise. The OV flag will be set if the divide operation resulted in an
overflow and cleared otherwise. The Z flag will be set if the remainder is
‘0’ and cleared otherwise. The C flag is used to implement the divide
algorithm and its final value should not be used.
The ‘t’ bits select the most significant word of the dividend for the double
operation. These bits are clear for the word operation.
The ‘v’ bits select the least significant word of the dividend.
The ‘W’ bit selects the dividend size (‘0’ for 16-bit, ‘1’ for 32-bit).
The ‘s’ bits select the divisor register.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
The extension .D in the instruction denotes a double word
(32-bit) dividend rather than a word dividend. You may use a
.W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.
Unexpected results will occur if the quotient can not be
represented in 16 bits. When this occurs for the double
operation (DIV.SD), the OV Status bit will be set and the
quotient and remainder should not be used. For the word
operation (DIV.S), only one type of overflow may occur
(0x8000/0xFFFF = + 32768 or 0x00008000), which allows the
OV Status bit to interpret the result.
Dividing by zero will initiate an arithmetic error trap during the
first cycle of execution.
This instruction is interruptible on each instruction cycle
boundary.
Words:
1
Cycles:
18 (plus 1 for REPEAT execution)
Example 1:
REPEAT #17
DIV.S W3, W4
Before
Instruction
W0
5555
W1
1234
W3
3000
W4
0027
SR
0000
Example 2:
REPEAT
DIV.SD
#17
W0, W12
Before
Instruction
W0
2500
W1
FF42
W12
2200
SR
0000
; Execute DIV.S 18 times
; Divide W3 by W4
; Store quotient to W0, remainder to W1
After
Instruction
W0
013B
W1
0003
W3
3000
W4
0027
SR
0000
; Execute DIV.SD 18 times
; Divide W1:W0 by W12
; Store quotient to W0, remainder to W1
After
Instruction
W0
FA6B
W1
EF00
W12
2200
SR
0008 (N = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 225
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
DIV.U
Unsigned Integer Divide
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
DIV.U{W}
Wm, Wn
DIV.UD
Wm, Wn
Operands:
Wm ∈ [ W0 ... W15] for word operation
Wm ∈ [ W0, W2, W4 ... W14] for double operation
Wn ∈ [ W2 ... W15]
Operation:
For word operation (default):
Wm →W0
0x0 →W1
W1:W0/Wn →W0
Remainder →W1
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
vW00
ssss
For double operation (DIV.UD):
Wm + 1:Wm →W1:W0
W1:W0/Wns →W0
Remainder →W1
Status Affected:
N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
Description:
1101
1ttt
tvvv
Iterative, unsigned integer divide, where the dividend is stored in Wm (for
a 16-bit by 16-bit divide), or Wm + 1:Wm (for a 32-bit by 16-bit divide) and
the divisor is stored in Wn. In the word operation, Wm is first copied to W0
and W1 is cleared to perform the divide. In the double operation,
Wm + 1:Wm is first copied to W1:W0. The 16-bit quotient of the divide
operation is stored in W0, and the 16-bit remainder is stored in W1.
This instruction must be executed 18 times using the REPEAT instruction
(with an iteration count of 17) to generate the correct quotient and
remainder. The N flag will always be cleared. The OV flag will be set if the
divide operation resulted in an overflow and cleared otherwise. The Z flag
will be set if the remainder is ‘0’ and cleared otherwise. The C flag is used
to implement the divide algorithm and its final value should not be used.
The ‘t’ bits select the most significant word of the dividend for the double
operation. These bits are clear for the word operation.
The ‘v’ bits select the least significant word of the dividend.
The ‘W’ bit selects the dividend size (‘0’ for 16-bit, ‘1’ for 32-bit).
The ‘s’ bits select the divisor register.
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
DS70157F-page 226
1000
The extension .D in the instruction denotes a double word
(32-bit) dividend rather than a word dividend. You may use a
.W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.
Unexpected results will occur if the quotient can not be
represented in 16 bits. This may only occur for the double
operation (DIV.UD). When an overflow occurs, the OV Status
bit will be set and the quotient and remainder should not be
used.
Dividing by zero will initiate an arithmetic error trap during the
first cycle of execution.
This instruction is interruptible on each instruction cycle
boundary.
Words:
1
Cycles:
18 (plus 1 for REPEAT execution)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 1:
REPEAT #17
DIV.U W2, W4
Before
Instruction
W0
5555
W1
1234
W2
8000
W4
0200
SR
0000
Example 2:
REPEAT
DIV.UD
#17
W10, W12
Before
Instruction
W0
5555
W1
1234
W10
2500
W11
0042
W12
2200
SR
0000
; Execute DIV.U 18 times
; Divide W2 by W4
; Store quotient to W0, remainder to W1
After
Instruction
W0
0040
W1
0000
W2
8000
W4
0200
SR
0002 (Z = 1)
; Execute DIV.UD 18 times
; Divide W11:W10 by W12
; Store quotient to W0, remainder to W1
After
Instruction
W0
01F2
W1
0100
W10
2500
W11
0042
W12
2200
SR
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 227
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
DIVF
Fractional Divide
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wm ∈ [ W0 ... W15]
Wn ∈ [ W2 ... W15]
Operation:
0x0 →W0
Wm →W1
W1:W0/Wn →W0
Remainder →W1
Status Affected:
N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
Description:
1101
DIVF
1001
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
X
t000
0000
ssss
Wm, Wn
0ttt
Iterative, signed fractional 16-bit by 16-bit divide, where the dividend is
stored in Wm and the divisor is stored in Wn. To perform the operation,
W0 is first cleared and Wm is copied to W1. The 16-bit quotient of the
divide operation is stored in W0, and the 16-bit remainder is stored in W1.
The sign of the remainder will be the same as the sign of the dividend.
This instruction must be executed 18 times using the REPEAT instruction
(with an iteration count of 17) to generate the correct quotient and
remainder. The N flag will be set if the remainder is negative and cleared
otherwise. The OV flag will be set if the divide operation resulted in an
overflow and cleared otherwise. The Z flag will be set if the remainder is
‘0’ and cleared otherwise. The C flag is used to implement the divide
algorithm and its final value should not be used.
The ‘t’ bits select the dividend register.
The ‘s’ bits select the divisor register.
Note 1:
2:
3:
DS70157F-page 228
For the fractional divide to be effective, Wm must be less than
Wn. If Wm is greater than or equal to Wn, unexpected results
will occur because the fractional result will be greater than or
equal to 1.0. When this occurs, the OV Status bit will be set and
the quotient and remainder should not be used.
Dividing by zero will initiate an arithmetic error trap during the
first cycle of execution.
This instruction is interruptible on each instruction cycle
boundary.
Words:
1
Cycles:
18 (plus 1 for REPEAT execution)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 1:
REPEAT
DIVF
#17
W8, W9
Before
Instruction
W0
8000
W1
1234
W8
1000
W9
4000
SR
0000
Example 2:
REPEAT #17
DIVF
W8, W9
Before
Instruction
W0
8000
W1
1234
W8
1000
W9
8000
SR
0000
Example 3:
REPEAT #17
DIVF
W0, W1
Before
Instruction
W0
8002
W1
8001
SR
0000
; Execute DIVF 18 times
; Divide W8 by W9
; Store quotient to W0, remainder to W1
After
Instruction
W0
2000
W1
0000
W8
1000
W9
4000
SR
0002 (Z = 1)
; Execute DIVF 18 times
; Divide W8 by W9
; Store quotient to W0, remainder to W1
After
Instruction
W0
F000
W1
0000
W8
1000
W9
8000
SR
0002 (Z = 1)
; Execute DIVF 18 times
; Divide W0 by W1
; Store quotient to W0, remainder to W1
After
Instruction
W0
7FFE
W1
8002
SR
0008 (N = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 229
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
DO
Implemented in:
Initialize Hardware Loop Literal
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
lit14 ∈ [0 ... 16383]
Expr may be an absolute address, label or expression.
Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where Slit16 ∈ [-32768 ... +32767].
Operation:
PUSH DO shadows (DCOUNT, DOEND, DOSTART)
(lit14) →DCOUNT
(PC) + 4 →PC
(PC) →DOSTART
(PC) + (2 * Slit16) →DOEND
Increment DL<2:0> (CORCON<10:8>)
Status Affected:
DA
Encoding:
DS70157F-page 230
DO
#lit14,
X
Expr
0000
1000
00kk
kkkk
kkkk
kkkk
0000
0000
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Description:
Initiate a no overhead hardware DO loop, which is executed (lit14 + 1)
times. The DO loop begins at the address following the DO instruction, and
ends at the address 2 * Slit16 instruction words away. The 14-bit count
value (lit14) supports a maximum loop count value of 16384, and the 16-bit
offset value (Slit16) supports offsets of 32K instruction words in both
directions.
When this instruction executes, DCOUNT, DOSTART and DOEND are first
PUSHed into their respective shadow registers, and then updated with the
new DO loop parameters specified by the instruction. The DO level count,
DL<2:0> (CORCON<8:10>), is then incremented. After the DO loop
completes execution, the PUSHed DCOUNT, DOSTART and DOEND
registers are restored, and DL<2:0> is decremented.
The ‘k’ bits specify the loop count.
The ‘n’ bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions that
are offset from the PC to the last instruction executed in the loop.
Special Features, Restrictions:
The following features and restrictions apply to the DO instruction.
1. Using a loop count of ‘0’ will result in the loop being executed one
time.
2. Using a loop size of -2, -1 or 0 is invalid. Unexpected results may
occur if these offsets are used.
3. The very last two instructions of the DO loop cannot be:
• an instruction which changes program control flow
• a DO or REPEAT instruction
Unexpected results may occur if any of these instructions are used.
4.
If a hard trap occurs in the second to last instruction or third to last
instruction of a DO loop, the loop will not function properly. The hard
trap includes exceptions of priority level 13 through level 15,
inclusive.
Note 1: The DO instruction is interruptible and supports 1 level of
hardware nesting. Nesting up to an additional 5 levels may be
provided in software by the user. See the specific device family
reference manual for details.
2: The linker will convert the specified expression into the offset to
be used.
Words:
2
Cycles:
2
Example 1:
002000 LOOP6:
002004
002006
002008
00200A END6:
00200C
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Before
Instruction
00 2000
0000
FF FFFF
FF FFFF
0000
0001 (C = 1)
PC
DCOUNT
DOSTART
DOEND
CORCON
SR
After
Instruction
00 2004
0005
00 2004
00 200A
0100 (DL = 1)
0201 (DA, C = 1)
DS70157F-page 231
5
Instruction
Descriptions
PC
DCOUNT
DOSTART
DOEND
CORCON
SR
DO
#5, END6; Initiate DO loop (6 reps)
ADD
W1, W2, W3; First instruction in loop
. . .
. . .
SUB
W2, W3, W4; Last instruction in loop
. . .
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 2:
01C000 LOOP12: DO #0x160, END12; Init DO loop (353 reps)
01C004
DEC W1, W2; First instruction in loop
01C006
. . .
01C008
. . .
01C00A
. . .
01C00C
. . .
01C00E
CALL _FIR88; Call the FIR88 subroutine
01C012
NOP
01C014 END12: NOP; Last instruction in loop
; (Required NOP filler)
PC
DCOUNT
DOSTART
DOEND
CORCON
SR
DS70157F-page 232
Before
Instruction
01 C000
0000
FF FFFF
FF FFFF
0000
0008 (N = 1)
PC
DCOUNT
DOSTART
DOEND
CORCON
SR
After
Instruction
01 C004
0160
01 C004
01 C014
0100 (DL = 1)
0208 (DA, N = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
DO
Implemented in:
Initialize Hardware Loop Literal
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F
dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
lit15 ∈ [0 ... 32767]
Expr may be an absolute address, label or expression.
Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where Slit16 ∈ [-32768 ... +32767].
Operation:
PUSH DO shadows (DCOUNT, DOEND, DOSTART)
(lit15) →DCOUNT
(PC) + 4 →PC
(PC) →DOSTART
(PC) + (2 * Slit16) →DOEND
Increment DL<2:0> (CORCON<10:8>)
Status Affected:
DA
Encoding:
Description:
DO
#lit15,
Expr
0000
1000
0kkk
kkkk
kkkk
kkkk
0000
0000
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
Initiate a no overhead hardware DO loop, which is executed (lit15 + 1) times.
The DO loop begins at the address following the DO instruction, and ends at
the address 2 * Slit16 instruction words away. The 15-bit count value (lit15)
supports a maximum loop count value of 32768, and the 16-bit offset value
(Slit16) supports offsets of 32K instruction words in both directions.
When this instruction executes, DCOUNT, DOSTART and DOEND are first
PUSHed into their respective shadow registers, and then updated with the
new DO loop parameters specified by the instruction. The DO level count,
DL<2:0> bits (CORCON<8:10>), is then incremented. After the DO loop
completes execution, the PUSHed DCOUNT, DOSTART and DOEND
registers are restored, and DL<2:0> is decremented.
The ‘k’ bits specify the loop count.
The ‘n’ bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions that
are offset from the PC to the last instruction executed in the loop.
Special Features, Restrictions:
The following features and restrictions apply to the DO instruction.
1. Using a loop count of ‘0’ will result in the loop being executed one time.
2. Using a loop size of -2, -1 or 0 is invalid. Unexpected results may
occur if these offsets are used.
3. The very last two instructions of the DO loop cannot be:
• an instruction which changes program control flow
• a DO or REPEAT instruction
Unexpected results may occur if any of these instructions are used.
4.
5.
If a hard trap occurs in the second to last instruction or third to last
instruction of a DO loop, the loop will not function properly. The hard
trap includes exceptions of priority level 13 through level 15, inclusive.
The first instruction of the DO loop cannot be a PSV read or Table read.
2:
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
The DO instruction is interruptible and supports 1 level of
hardware nesting. Nesting up to an additional 5 levels may be
provided in software by the user. See the specific device family
reference manual for details.
The linker will convert the specified expression into the offset to
be used.
DS70157F-page 233
Instruction
Descriptions
Note 1:
5
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Words:
2
Cycles:
2
Example 1:
002000 LOOP6:
002004
002006
002008
00200A END6:
00200C
PC
DCOUNT
DOSTART
DOEND
CORCON
SR
Example 2:
Before
Instruction
00 2000
0000
FF FFFF
FF FFFF
0000
0001 (C = 1)
PC
DCOUNT
DOSTART
DOEND
CORCON
SR
After
Instruction
00 2004
0005
00 2004
00 200A
0100 (DL = 1)
0201 (DA, C = 1)
01C000 LOOP12: DO #0x160, END12; Init DO loop (353 reps)
01C004
DEC W1, W2; First instruction in loop
01C006
. . .
01C008
. . .
01C00A
. . .
01C00C
. . .
01C00E
CALL _FIR88; Call the FIR88 subroutine
01C012
NOP
01C014 END12: NOP; Last instruction in loop
; (Required NOP filler)
PC
DCOUNT
DOSTART
DOEND
CORCON
SR
DS70157F-page 234
DO
#5, END6; Initiate DO loop (6 reps)
ADD
W1, W2, W3; First instruction in loop
. . .
. . .
SUB
W2, W3, W4; Last instruction in loop
. . .
Before
Instruction
01 C000
0000
FF FFFF
FF FFFF
0000
0008 (N = 1)
PC
DCOUNT
DOSTART
DOEND
CORCON
SR
After
Instruction
01 C004
0160
01 C004
01 C014
0100 (DL = 1)
0208 (DA, N = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
DO
Initialize Hardware Loop Wn
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
dsPIC33F
X
X
dsPIC33E
{label:}
Operands:
Wn ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Expr may be an absolute address, label or expression.
Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where Slit16 ∈ [-32768 ... +32767].
Operation:
PUSH Shadows (DCOUNT, DOEND, DOSTART)
(Wn<13:0>) →DCOUNT
(PC) + 4 →PC
(PC) →DOSTART
(PC) + (2 * Slit16) →DOEND
Increment DL<2:0> (CORCON<10:8>)
Status Affected:
DA
Description:
Wn,
dsPIC30F
Syntax:
Encoding:
DO
PIC24E
Expr
0000
1000
1000
0000
0000
ssss
0000
0000
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
Initiate a no overhead hardware DO loop, which is executed (Wn + 1) times.
The DO loop begins at the address following the DO instruction, and ends at
the address 2 * Slit16 instruction words away. The lower 14 bits of Wn
support a maximum count value of 16384, and the 16-bit offset value
(Slit16) supports offsets of 32K instruction words in both directions.
When this instruction executes, DCOUNT, DOSTART and DOEND are first
PUSHed into their respective shadow registers, and then updated with the
new DO loop parameters specified by the instruction. The DO level count,
DL<2:0> (CORCON<8:10>), is then incremented. After the DO loop
completes execution, the PUSHed DCOUNT, DOSTART and DOEND
registers are restored, and DL<2:0> is decremented.
The ‘s’ bits specify the register Wn that contains the loop count.
The ‘n’ bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions that
are offset from (PC + 4), which is the last instruction executed in the loop.
Special Features, Restrictions:
The following features and restrictions apply to the DO instruction.
1. Using a loop count of ‘0’ will result in the loop being executed one
time.
2. Using an offset of -2, -1 or 0 is invalid. Unexpected results may occur
if these offsets are used.
3. The very last two instructions of the DO loop cannot be:
• an instruction which changes program control flow
• a DO or REPEAT instruction
Unexpected results may occur if these last instructions are used.
Note 1:
Words:
2
Cycles:
2
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 235
5
Instruction
Descriptions
2:
The DO instruction is interruptible and supports 1 level of nesting.
Nesting up to an additional 5 levels may be provided in software
by the user. See the specific device family reference manual for
details.
The linker will convert the specified expression into the offset to
be used.
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 1:
002000 LOOP6:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C
00200E
002010 END6:
PC
W0
DCOUNT
DOSTART
DOEND
CORCON
SR
Example 2:
DS70157F-page 236
Before
Instruction
00 2000
0012
0000
FF FFFF
FF FFFF
0000
0000
002000 LOOPA:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
002010 ENDA:
PC
W7
DCOUNT
DOSTART
DOEND
CORCON
SR
DO
ADD
. . .
. . .
. . .
REPEAT
SUB
NOP
Before
Instruction
00 2000
E00F
0000
FF FFFF
FF FFFF
0000
0000
W0, END6
; Initiate DO loop (W0 reps)
W1, W2, W3 ; First instruction in loop
#6
W2, W3, W4
; Last instruction in loop
; (Required NOP filler)
PC
W0
DCOUNT
DOSTART
DOEND
CORCON
SR
DO
SWAP
. . .
. . .
. . .
MOV
W7, ENDA
W0
After
Instruction
00 2004
0012
0012
00 2004
00 2010
0100 (DL = 1)
0080 (DA = 1)
; Initiate DO loop (W7 reps)
; First instruction in loop
W1, [W2++] ; Last instruction in loop
PC
W7
DCOUNT
DOSTART
DOEND
CORCON
SR
After
Instruction
00 2004
E00F
200F
00 2004
00 2010
0100 (DL = 1)
0080 (DA = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
DO
Initialize Hardware Loop Wn
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F
dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wn ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Expr may be an absolute address, label or expression.
Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where Slit16 ∈ [-32768 ... +32767].
Operation:
PUSH Shadows (DCOUNT, DOEND, DOSTART)
(Wn) →DCOUNT
(PC) + 4 →PC
(PC) →DOSTART
(PC) + (2 * Slit16) →DOEND
Increment DL<2:0> (CORCON<10:8>)
Status Affected:
DA
Encoding:
Description:
DO
Wn,
Expr
0000
1000
1000
0000
0000
ssss
0000
0000
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
Initiate a no overhead hardware DO loop, which is executed (Wn + 1) times.
The DO loop begins at the address following the DO instruction, and ends at
the address 2 * Slit16 instruction words away. The 16 bits of Wn support a
maximum count value of 65536, and the 16-bit offset value (Slit16) supports
offsets of 32K instruction words in both directions.
When this instruction executes, DCOUNT, DOSTART and DOEND are first
PUSHed into their respective shadow registers, and then updated with the
new DO loop parameters specified by the instruction. The DO level count,
DL<2:0> (CORCON<8:10>), is then incremented. After the DO loop
completes execution, the PUSHed DCOUNT, DOSTART and DOEND
registers are restored, and DL<2:0> is decremented.
The ‘s’ bits specify the register Wn that contains the loop count.
The ‘n’ bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions that
are offset from (PC + 4), which is the last instruction executed in the loop.
Special Features, Restrictions:
The following features and restrictions apply to the DO instruction.
1. Using a loop count of ‘0’ will result in the loop being executed one
time.
2. Using an offset of -2, -1 or 0 is invalid. Unexpected results may occur
if these offsets are used.
3. The very last two instructions of the DO loop cannot be:
• an instruction which changes program control flow
• a DO or REPEAT instruction
Unexpected results may occur if these last instructions are used.
Words:
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
2
DS70157F-page 237
5
Instruction
Descriptions
4. The first instruction of the DO loop cannot be a PSV read or Table read.
Note 1: The DO instruction is interruptible and supports 1 level of nesting.
Nesting up to an additional 5 levels may be provided in software
by the user. See the specific device family reference manual for
details.
2: The linker will convert the specified expression into the offset to
be used.
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
DO
Initialize Hardware Loop Wn
Cycles:
2
Example 1:
002000 LOOP6:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C
00200E
002010 END6:
PC
W0
DCOUNT
DOSTART
DOEND
CORCON
SR
Example 2:
DS70157F-page 238
Before
Instruction
00 2000
0012
0000
FF FFFF
FF FFFF
0000
0000
002000 LOOPA:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
002010 ENDA:
PC
W7
DCOUNT
DOSTART
DOEND
CORCON
SR
DO
ADD
. . .
. . .
. . .
REPEAT
SUB
NOP
Before
Instruction
00 2000
E00F
0000
FF FFFF
FF FFFF
0000
0000
W0, END6
; Initiate DO loop (W0 reps)
W1, W2, W3 ; First instruction in loop
#6
W2, W3, W4
; Last instruction in loop
; (Required NOP filler)
PC
W0
DCOUNT
DOSTART
DOEND
CORCON
SR
DO
SWAP
. . .
. . .
. . .
MOV
W7, ENDA
W0
After
Instruction
00 2004
0012
0012
00 2004
00 2010
0100 (DL = 1)
0080 (DA = 1)
; Initiate DO loop (W7 reps)
; First instruction in loop
W1, [W2++] ; Last instruction in loop
PC
W7
DCOUNT
DOSTART
DOEND
CORCON
SR
After
Instruction
00 2004
E00F
200F
00 2004
00 2010
0100 (DL = 1)
0080 (DA = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
ED
Euclidean Distance (No Accumulate)
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
{label:} ED
PIC24H
PIC24E
Wm * Wm, Acc,
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F
dsPIC33E
X
X
X
[Wx],
[Wy],
Wxd
[Wx] + = kx, [Wy] + = ky,
[Wx] – = kx, [Wy] – = ky,
[W9 +
W12],
[W11 +
W12],
Operands:
Acc ∈ [A,B]
Wm * Wm ∈ [W4 * W4, W5 * W5, W6 * W6, W7 * W7]
Wx ∈ [W8, W9]; kx ∈ [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]
Wy ∈ [W10, W11]; ky ∈ [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]
Wxd ∈ [W4 ... W7]
Operation:
(Wm) * (Wm) →Acc(A or B)
([Wx] – [Wy]) →Wxd
(Wx) + kx →Wx
(Wy) + ky →Wy
Status Affected:
OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB
Encoding:
1111
Description:
00mm
A1xx
00ii
iijj
jj11
Compute the square of Wm, and compute the difference of the prefetch
values specified by [Wx] and [Wy]. The results of Wm * Wm are
sign-extended to 40 bits and stored in the specified accumulator. The
results of [Wx] – [Wy] are stored in Wxd, which may be the same as Wm.
Operands Wx, Wxd and Wyd specify the prefetch operations which
support indirect and register offset addressing as described in
Section 4.14.1 “MAC Prefetches”.
The ‘m’ bits select the operand register Wm for the square.
The ‘A’ bit selects the accumulator for the result.
The ‘x’ bits select the prefetch difference Wxd destination.
The ‘i’ bits select the Wx prefetch operation.
The ‘j’ bits select the Wy prefetch operation.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
ED
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Before
Instruction
009A
1100
2300
00 3D0A 0000
007F
0028
0000
W4
W8
W10
ACCA
Data 1100
Data 2300
SR
;
;
;
;
Square W4 to ACCA
[W8]-[W10] to W4
Post-increment W8
Post-decrement W10
After
Instruction
0057
1102
22FE
00 0000 5CA4
007F
0028
0000
DS70157F-page 239
5
Instruction
Descriptions
W4
W8
W10
ACCA
Data 1100
Data 2300
SR
W4*W4, A, [W8]+=2, [W10]-=2, W4
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 2:
ED
W5
W9
W11
W12
ACCB
Data 1200
Data 2508
SR
DS70157F-page 240
W5*W5, B, [W9]+=2, [W11+W12], W5 ; Square W5 to ACCB
; [W9]-[W11+W12] to W5
; Post-increment W9
Before
Instruction
43C2
1200
2500
0008
00 28E3 F14C
6A7C
2B3D
0000
W5
W9
W11
W12
ACCB
Data 1200
Data 2508
SR
After
Instruction
3F3F
1202
2500
0008
00 11EF 1F04
6A7C
2B3D
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
EDAC
Euclidean Distance
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
{label:} EDAC
PIC24H
PIC24E
Wm * Wm, Acc,
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F
dsPIC33E
X
X
X
[Wx],
[Wy],
[Wx] + =
kx,
[Wy] + = ky,
Wxd
[Wx] – = kx, [Wy] – = ky,
[W9 +
W12],
[W11 +
W12],
Operands:
Acc ∈ [A,B]
Wm * Wm ∈ [W4 * W4, W5 * W5, W6 * W6, W7 * W7]
Wx ∈ [W8, W9]; kx ∈ [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]
Wy ∈ [W10, W11]; ky ∈ [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]
Wxd ∈ [W4 ... W7]
Operation:
(Acc(A or B)) + (Wm) * (Wm) →Acc(A or B)
([Wx] – [Wy]) →Wxd
(Wx) + kx →Wx
(Wy) + ky →Wy
Status Affected:
OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB
Encoding:
1111
Description:
00mm
A1xx
00ii
iijj
jj10
Compute the square of Wm, and also the difference of the prefetch
values specified by [Wx] and [Wy]. The results of Wm * Wm are
sign-extended to 40 bits and added to the specified accumulator. The
results of [Wx] – [Wy] are stored in Wxd, which may be the same as Wm.
Operands Wx, Wxd and Wyd specify the prefetch operations which
support indirect and register offset addressing as described in
Section 4.14.1 “MAC Prefetches”.
The ‘m’ bits select the operand register Wm for the square.
The ‘A’ bit selects the accumulator for the result.
The ‘x’ bits select the prefetch difference Wxd destination.
The ‘i’ bits select the Wx prefetch operation.
The ‘j’ bits select the Wy prefetch operation.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
EDAC
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Before
Instruction
009A
1100
2300
00 3D0A 3D0A
007F
0028
0000
W4
W8
W10
ACCA
Data 1100
Data 2300
SR
;
;
;
;
;
Square W4 and
add to ACCA
[W8]-[W10] to W4
Post-increment W8
Post-decrement W10
After
Instruction
0057
1102
22FE
00 3D0A 99AE
007F
0028
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
W4
W8
W10
ACCA
Data 1100
Data 2300
SR
W4*W4, A, [W8]+=2, [w10]-=2, W4
DS70157F-page 241
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 2:
EDAC W5*W5, B, [w9]+=2, [W11+W12], W5
W5
W9
W11
W12
ACCB
Data 1200
Data 2508
SR
DS70157F-page 242
Before
Instruction
43C2
1200
2500
0008
00 28E3 F14C
6A7C
2B3D
0000
W5
W9
W11
W12
ACCB
Data 1200
Data 2508
SR
;
;
;
;
Square W5 and
add to ACCB
[W9]-[W11+W12] to W5
Post-increment W9
After
Instruction
3F3F
1202
2500
0008
00 3AD3 1050
6A7C
2B3D
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
EXCH
Exchange Wns and Wnd
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
0ddd
d000
ssss
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wns ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wnd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Wns) ↔ (Wnd)
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
EXCH
1111
Description:
1101
Wns,
0000
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
Wnd
Exchange the word contents of two working registers. Register direct
addressing must be used for Wns and Wnd.
The ‘d’ bits select the address of the first register.
The ‘s’ bits select the address of the second register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
EXCH
W1
W9
SR
Example 2:
EXCH
W4
W5
SR
This instruction only executes in Word mode.
W1, W9
Before
Instruction
55FF
A3A3
0000
W4, W5
Before
Instruction
ABCD
4321
0000
; Exchange the contents of W1 and W9
After
Instruction
W1
A3A3
W9
55FF
SR
0000
; Exchange the contents of W4 and W5
After
Instruction
W4
4321
W5
ABCD
SR
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 243
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
FBCL
Find First Bit Change from Left
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
X
X
X
{label:}
FBCL
Ws,
dsPIC30F dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
X
Wnd
[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wnd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
Max_Shift = 15
Sign = (Ws) & 0x8000
Temp = (Ws) << 1
Shift = 0
While ( (Shift < Max_Shift) && ( (Temp & 0x8000) == Sign) )
Temp = Temp << 1
Shift = Shift + 1
-Shift →(Wnd)
Status Affected:
C
Encoding:
1101
Description:
1111
0000
0ddd
dppp
ssss
Find the first occurrence of a one (for a positive value), or zero (for a
negative value), starting from the Most Significant bit after the sign bit of
Ws and working towards the Least Significant bit of the word operand. The
bit number result is sign-extended to 16 bits and placed in Wnd.
The next Most Significant bit after the sign bit is allocated bit number 0 and
the Least Significant bit is allocated bit number -14. This bit ordering
allows for the immediate use of Wd with the SFTAC instruction for scaling
values up. If a bit change is not found, a result of -15 is returned and the C
flag is set. When a bit change is found, the C flag is cleared.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
DS70157F-page 244
This instruction operates in Word mode only.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 1:
Example 2:
FBCL
W1, W9
Before
Instruction
W1
55FF
W9
FFFF
SR
0000
After
Instruction
W1
55FF
W9
0000
SR
0000
FBCL
; Find 1st bit change from left in W1
; and store result to W9
W1, W9
Before
Instruction
W1 FFFF
W9 BBBB
SR
0000
Example 3:
; Find 1st bit change from left in W1
; and store result to W9
FBCL
[W1++], W9
Before
Instruction
W1
2000
W9 BBBB
Data 2000
FF0A
SR
0000
After
Instruction
W1 FFFF
W9 FFF1
SR 0001 (C = 1)
; Find 1st bit change from left in [W1]
; and store result to W9
; Post-increment W1
After
Instruction
W1 2002
W9 FFF9
Data 2000 FF0A
SR 0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 245
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
FF1L
Find First One from Left
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
FF1L
Ws,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
dppp
ssss
Wnd
[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wnd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
Max_Shift = 17
Temp = (Ws)
Shift = 1
While ( (Shift < Max_Shift) && !(Temp & 0x8000) )
Temp = Temp << 1
Shift = Shift + 1
If (Shift == Max_Shift)
0 →(Wnd)
Else
Shift →(Wnd)
Status Affected:
C
Encoding:
1100
Description:
1111
1000
0ddd
Finds the first occurrence of a ‘1’ starting from the Most Significant bit of
Ws and working towards the Least Significant bit of the word operand.
The bit number result is zero-extended to 16 bits and placed in Wnd.
Bit numbering begins with the Most Significant bit (allocated number 1)
and advances to the Least Significant bit (allocated number 16). A result
of zero indicates a ‘1’ was not found, and the C flag will be set. If a ‘1’ is
found, the C flag is cleared.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
DS70157F-page 246
This instruction operates in Word mode only.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 1:
FF1L
W2, W5
Before
Instruction
W2
000A
W5 BBBB
SR
0000
Example 2:
FF1L
[W2++], W5
Before
Instruction
W2
2000
W5 BBBB
Data 2000
0000
SR
0000
; Find the 1st one from the left in W2
; and store result to W5
After
Instruction
W2
000A
W5
000D
SR
0000
; Find the 1st one from the left in [W2]
; and store the result to W5
; Post-increment W2
After
Instruction
W2
2002
W5
0000
Data 2000
0000
SR
0001 (C = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 247
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
FF1R
Find First One from Right
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
FF1R
Ws,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
dppp
ssss
Wnd
[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wnd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
Max_Shift = 17
Temp = (Ws)
Shift = 1
While ( (Shift < Max_Shift) && !(Temp & 0x1) )
Temp = Temp >> 1
Shift = Shift + 1
If (Shift == Max_Shift)
0 →(Wnd)
Else
Shift →(Wnd)
Status Affected:
C
Encoding:
1100
Description:
1111
0000
0ddd
Finds the first occurrence of a ‘1’ starting from the Least Significant bit of
Ws and working towards the Most Significant bit of the word operand. The
bit number result is zero-extended to 16 bits and placed in Wnd.
Bit numbering begins with the Least Significant bit (allocated number 1)
and advances to the Most Significant bit (allocated number 16). A result of
zero indicates a ‘1’ was not found, and the C flag will be set. If a ‘1’ is
found, the C flag is cleared.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
DS70157F-page 248
This instruction operates in Word mode only.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 1:
FF1R
W1, W9
; Find the 1st one from the right in W1
; and store the result to W9
Before
Instruction
W1
000A
W9 BBBB
SR
0000
Example 2:
FF1R
[W1++], W9
Before
Instruction
W1
2000
W9 BBBB
Data 2000
8000
SR
0000
After
Instruction
W1
000A
W9
0002
SR
0000
; Find the 1st one from the right in [W1]
; and store the result to W9
; Post-increment W1
After
Instruction
W1
2002
W9
0010
Data 2000
8000
SR
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 249
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
GOTO
Unconditional Jump
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F
dsPIC33E
X
X
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
GOTO
Operands:
Expr may be label or expression (but not a literal).
Expr is resolved by the linker to a lit23, where lit23 ∈ [0 ... 8388606].
Operation:
lit23 →PC
NOP →Instruction Register
Status Affected:
None
Expr
Encoding:
1st word
0000
0100
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
nnn0
2nd word
0000
0000
0000
0000
0nnn
nnnn
Description:
Unconditional jump to anywhere within the 4M instruction word program
memory range. The PC is loaded with the 23-bit literal specified in the
instruction. Since the PC must always reside on an even address boundary,
lit23<0> is ignored.
The ‘n’ bits form the target address.
Note:
Words:
2
Cycles:
2 (PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F)
4 (PIC24E, dsPIC33E)
Example 1:
026000
GOTO
026004
MOV
.
...
.
...
027844 _THERE: MOV
027846
...
PC
SR
Example 2:
_THERE
W0, W1
Before
Instruction
02 6000
0000
; Jump to _THERE
#0x400, W2
Before
Instruction
02 6000
0000
000100 _code:
.
026000
026004
PC
SR
DS70157F-page 250
The linker will resolve the specified expression into the lit23 to be
used.
PC
SR
...
...
GOTO
...
; Code execution
; resumes here
After
Instruction
02 7844
0000
; start of code
_code+2
; Jump to _code+2
PC
SR
After
Instruction
00 0102
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
GOTO
Unconditional Indirect Jump
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
X
X
PIC24E
{label:}
GOTO
Operands:
Wn ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
0 →PC<22:16>
(Wn<15:1>) →PC<15:1>
0 →PC<0>
NOP →Instruction Register
Status Affected:
None
0000
Description:
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
Encoding:
dsPIC30F
X
Wn
0001
0100
0000
0000
ssss
Unconditional indirect jump within the first 32K words of program memory.
Zero is loaded into PC<22:16> and the value specified in (Wn) is loaded
into PC<15:1>. Since the PC must always reside on an even address
boundary, Wn<0> is ignored.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Words:
1
Cycles:
2
Example 1:
006000
GOTO
006002
MOV
.
...
.
...
007844 _THERE: MOV
007846
...
W4
PC
SR
Before
Instruction
7844
00 6000
0000
W4
W0, W1
; Jump unconditionally
; to 16-bit value in W4
#0x400, W2
W4
PC
SR
; Code execution
; resumes here
After
Instruction
7844
00 7844
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 251
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
GOTO
Unconditional Indirect Jump
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wn ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
0 →PC<22:16>
(Wn<15:1>) →PC<15:1>
0 →PC<0>
NOP →Instruction Register
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
GOTO
0000
Description:
X
Wn
0001
0000
0100
0000
ssss
Unconditional indirect jump within the first 32K words of program memory.
Zero is loaded into PC<22:16> and the value specified in (Wn) is loaded
into PC<15:1>. Since the PC must always reside on an even address
boundary, Wn<0> is ignored.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Words:
1
Cycles:
4
Example 1:
006000
GOTO
006002
MOV
.
...
.
...
007844 _THERE: MOV
007846
...
W4
PC
SR
DS70157F-page 252
Before
Instruction
7844
00 6000
0000
W4
W0, W1
; Jump unconditionally
; to 16-bit value in W4
#0x400, W2
W4
PC
SR
; Code execution
; resumes here
After
Instruction
7844
00 7844
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
GOTO.L
Unconditional Indirect Jump Long
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wn ∈ [W0, W2, W4, W6, W8, W10, W12]
Operation:
PC<23> →PC<23> (see text); (Wn+1)<6:0> →PC<22:16>; (Wn) →
PC<15:0>r
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
0000
Description:
GOTO.L
X
0001
Wn
1www
w100
0000
ssss
Unconditional indirect jump to any user program memory address.
The LS 7-bits of (Wn+1) are loaded in PC<22:16>, and the 16-bit value
(Wn) is loaded into PC<15:0>.
PC<23> is not modified by this instruction.
The contents of (Wn+1)<15:7> are ignored.
The value of Wn<0> is also ignored and PC<0> is always set to 0.
GOTO is a two-cycle instruction.
The ‘s’ bits select the address of the Wn source register.
The ‘w’ bits specify the address of the Wn+1 source register.
Words:
1
Cycles:
4
Example 1:
026000
026004
.
.
026844 _FIR:
026846
PC
W4
W5
W15
Data A268
Data A26A
SR
Before
Instruction
02 6000
6844
0002
A268
FFFF
FFFF
0000
GOTO.L W4
MOV
W0, W1
...
...
MOV
#0x400, W2
...
PC
W4
W5
W15
Data A268
Data A26A
SR
; Call _FIR subroutine
; _FIR subroutine start
After
Instruction
02 6844
6844
0002
A26C
6004
0002
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 253
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
INC
Increment f
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
f ∈ [0 ... 8191]
Operation:
(f) + 1 →destination designated by D
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
INC{.B}
1110
Description:
1100
f
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
ffff
ffff
{,WREG}
0BDf
ffff
Add one to the contents of the file register, and place the result in the
destination register. The optional WREG operand determines the
destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If
WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘D’ bit selects the destination (‘0’ for WREG, ‘1’ for file register).
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1:
2:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
The WREG is set to working register W0.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
INC.B
0x1000
; Increment 0x1000 (Byte mode)
Before
Instruction
Data 1000
8FFF
SR
0000
Example 2:
INC
0x1000, WREG
Before
Instruction
WREG ABCD
Data 1000 8FFF
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 254
After
Instruction
Data 1000
8F00
SR
0101 (DC, C = 1)
; Increment 0x1000 and store to WREG
; (Word mode)
After
Instruction
WREG
9000
Data 1000
8FFF
SR
0108 (DC, N = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
INC
Increment Ws
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
INC{.B}
Operands:
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Ws) + 1 →Wd
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
1110
Description:
1000
Ws,
X
X
dppp
ssss
Wd
[Ws],
[Wd]
[Ws++],
[Wd++]
[Ws--],
[Wd--]
[++Ws],
[++Wd]
[--Ws],
[--Wd]
0Bqq
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
qddd
Add 1 to the contents of the source register Ws and place the result in the
destination register Wd. Register direct or indirect addressing may be
used for Ws and Wd.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘q’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
INC.B
W1, [++W2]
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
After
Instruction
W1
FF7F
W2
2001
Data 2000
80CD
SR
010C (DC, N, OV = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
Before
Instruction
W1
FF7F
W2
2000
Data 2000 ABCD
SR
0000
; Pre-increment W2
; Increment W1 and store to W2
; (Byte mode)
DS70157F-page 255
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 2:
INC
W1, W2
Before
Instruction
W1
FF7F
W2
2000
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 256
; Increment W1 and store to W2
; (Word mode)
After
Instruction
W1
FF7F
W2
FF80
SR
0108 (DC, N = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
INC2
Increment f by 2
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
f ∈ [0 ... 8191]
Operation:
(f) + 2 →destination designated by D
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
INC2{.B}
1110
Description:
1100
f
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
ffff
ffff
{,WREG}
1BDf
ffff
Add 2 to the contents of the file register and place the result in the
destination register. The optional WREG operand determines the
destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If
WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘D’ bit selects the destination (‘0’ for WREG, ‘1’ for file register).
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
INC2.B
0x1000
Before
Instruction
Data 1000
8FFF
SR
0000
Example 2:
INC2
; Increment 0x1000 by 2
; (Byte mode)
After
Instruction
Data 1000
8F01
SR
0101 (DC, C = 1)
0x1000, WREG
Before
Instruction
WREG ABCD
Data 1000
8FFF
SR
0000
; Increment 0x1000 by 2 and store to WREG
; (Word mode)
After
Instruction
WREG
9001
Data 1000
8FFF
SR
0108 (DC, N = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 257
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
INC2
Increment Ws by 2
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
INC2{.B}
Operands:
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Ws) + 2 →Wd
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
1110
Description:
1000
Ws,
X
X
dppp
ssss
Wd
[Ws],
[Wd]
[Ws++],
[Wd++]
[Ws--],
[Wd--]
[++Ws],
[++Wd]
[--Ws],
[--Wd]
1Bqq
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
qddd
Add 2 to the contents of the source register Ws and place the result in the
destination register Wd. Register direct or indirect addressing may be used
for Ws and Wd.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘q’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
INC2.B
W1, [++W2]
Before
Instruction
W1
FF7F
W2
2000
Data 2000 ABCD
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 258
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
; Pre-increment W2
; Increment by 2 and store to W1
; (Byte mode)
After
Instruction
W1
FF7F
W2
2001
Data 2000
81CD
SR
010C (DC, N, OV = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 2:
INC2
W1, W2
Before
Instruction
W1
FF7F
W2
2000
SR
0000
; Increment W1 by 2 and store to W2
; (word mode)
After
Instruction
W1
FF7F
W2
FF81
SR
0108 (DC, N = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 259
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
IOR
Inclusive OR f and WREG
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
f ∈ [0 ... 8191]
Operation:
(f).IOR.(WREG) →destination designated by D
Status Affected:
N, Z
Encoding:
IOR{.B}
1011
Description:
f
0111
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
ffff
ffff
{,WREG}
0BDf
ffff
Compute the logical inclusive OR operation of the contents of the working
register WREG and the contents of the file register and place the result in
the destination register. The optional WREG operand determines the
destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If
WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘D’ bit selects the destination (‘0’ for WREG, ‘1’ for file register).
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1:
2:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
The WREG is set to working register W0.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
IOR.B
0x1000
Before
Instruction
WREG
1234
Data 1000
FF00
SR
0000
Example 2:
IOR
0x1000, WREG
; IOR WREG to (0x1000) (Byte mode)
; (Byte mode)
After
Instruction
WREG
1234
Data 1000
FF34
SR
0000
; IOR (0x1000) to WREG
; (Word mode)
Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
WREG
1234
WREG
1FBF
Data 1000
0FAB
Data 1000
0FAB
SR
0008 (N = 1)
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 260
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
IOR
Inclusive OR Literal and Wn
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
kkkk
kkkk
dddd
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
lit10 ∈ [0 ... 255] for byte operation
lit10 ∈ [0 ... 1023] for word operation
Wn ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
lit10.IOR.(Wn) →Wn
Status Affected:
N, Z
Encoding:
IOR{.B}
1011
Description:
0011
#lit10,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
Wn
0Bkk
Compute the logical inclusive OR operation of the 10-bit literal operand
and the contents of the working register Wn and place the result back into
the working register Wn.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘k’ bits specify the literal operand.
The ‘d’ bits select the address of the working register.
Note 1:
2:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
For byte operations, the literal must be specified as an
unsigned value [0:255]. See Section 4.6 “Using 10-bit Literal
Operands” for information on using 10-bit literal operands in
Byte mode.
IOR.B #0xAA, W9
Before
Instruction
W9
1234
SR
0000
Example 2:
IOR
#0x2AA, W4
Before
Instruction
W4
A34D
SR
0000
; IOR 0xAA to W9
; (Byte mode)
After
Instruction
W9
12BE
SR
0008 (N = 1)
; IOR 0x2AA to W4
; (Word mode)
After
Instruction
W4
A3EF
SR
0008 (N = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 261
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
IOR
Inclusive OR Wb and Short Literal
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
IOR{.B}
Wb,
#lit5,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
Wd
[Wd]
[Wd++]
[Wd--]
[++Wd]
[--Wd]
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
lit5 ∈ [0 ... 31]
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Wb).IOR.lit5 →Wd
Status Affected:
N, Z
Encoding:
Description:
0111
0www
wBqq
qddd
d11k
kkkk
Compute the logical inclusive OR operation of the contents of the base
register Wb and the 5-bit literal operand and place the result in the
destination register Wd. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb.
Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Wd.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘q’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘k’ bits provide the literal operand, a five-bit integer number.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
IOR.B
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
W1, #0x5, [W9++]
Before
Instruction
W1 AAAA
W9
2000
Data 2000
0000
SR
0000
Example 2:
IOR
W1, #0x0, W9
Before
Instruction
W1
0000
W9
A34D
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 262
; IOR W1 and 0x5 (Byte mode)
; Store to [W9]
; Post-increment W9
After
Instruction
W1 AAAA
W9
2001
Data 2000
00AF
SR
0008 (N = 1)
; IOR W1 with 0x0 (Word mode)
; Store to W9
After
Instruction
W1
0000
W9
0000
SR
0002 (Z = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
IOR
Inclusive OR Wb and Ws
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F
dsPIC33E
X
X
X
X
X
X
{label:}
IOR{.B}
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Wb).IOR.(Ws) →Wd
Status Affected:
N, Z
Encoding:
0111
Description:
Wb,
0www
Ws,
wBqq
Wd
[Ws],
[Wd]
[Ws++],
[Wd++]
[Ws--],
[Wd--]
[++Ws],
[++Wd]
[--Ws],
[--Wd]
qddd
dppp
ssss
Compute the logical inclusive OR operation of the contents of the source
register Ws and the contents of the base register Wb, and place the result in
the destination register Wd. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb.
Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws and Wd.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘q’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
IOR.B
W1, [W5++], [W9++]
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
5
After
Instruction
W1 AAAA
W5
2001
W9
2401
Data 2000
1155
Data 2400
00FF
SR
0008 (N = 1)
Instruction
Descriptions
Before
Instruction
W1 AAAA
W5
2000
W9
2400
Data 2000
1155
Data 2400
0000
SR
0000
; IOR W1 and [W5] (Byte mode)
; Store result to [W9]
; Post-increment W5 and W9
DS70157F-page 263
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 2:
IOR
W1
W5
W9
SR
DS70157F-page 264
W1, W5, W9
Before
Instruction
AAAA
5555
A34D
0000
; IOR W1 and W5 (Word mode)
; Store the result to W9
After
Instruction
W1 AAAA
W5
5555
W9
FFFF
SR
0008 (N = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
LAC
Load Accumulator
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
{label:}
PIC24H
LAC
PIC24E
Ws,
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F
dsPIC33E
X
X
X
rggg
ssss
{#Slit4,}
Acc
[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[--Ws],
[++Ws],
[Ws+Wb],
Operands:
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Slit4 ∈ [-8 ... +7]
Acc ∈ [A,B]
Operation:
ShiftSlit4(Extend(Ws)) →Acc(A or B)
Status Affected:
OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB
Encoding:
1100
Description:
1010
Awww
wrrr
Read the contents of the source register, optionally perform a signed 4-bit
shift and store the result in the specified accumulator. The shift range is -8:7,
where a negative operand indicates an arithmetic left shift and a positive
operand indicates an arithmetic right shift. The data stored in the source
register is assumed to be 1.15 fractional data and is automatically
sign-extended (through bit 39) and zero-backfilled (bits [15:0]), prior to
shifting.
The ‘A’ bit specifies the destination accumulator.
The ‘w’ bits specify the offset register Wb.
The ‘r’ bits encode the accumulator pre-shift.
The ‘g’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits specify the source register Ws.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
If the operation moves more than sign-extension data into the
upper Accumulator register (AccxU), or causes a saturation, the
appropriate overflow and saturation bits will be set.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 265
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 1:
LAC
W4
ACCB
Data 2000
SR
Example 2:
DS70157F-page 266
[W4++], #-3, B
;
;
;
;
;
Before
Instruction
2000
00 5125 ABCD
1221
0000
LAC
[--W2], #7, A
W2
ACCA
Data 4000
Data 4002
SR
Before
Instruction
4002
00 5125 ABCD
9108
1221
0000
Load ACCB with [W4] << 3
Contents of [W4] do not change
Post increment W4
Assume saturation disabled
(SATB = 0)
W4
ACCB
Data 2000
SR
;
;
;
;
;
After
Instruction
2002
FF 9108 0000
1221
4800 (OB, OAB = 1)
Pre-decrement W2
Load ACCA with [W2] >> 7
Contents of [W2] do not change
Assume saturation disabled
(SATA = 0)
W2
ACCA
Data 4000
Data 4002
SR
After
Instruction
4000
FF FF22 1000
9108
1221
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
LNK
Allocate Stack Frame
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
lit14 ∈ [0 ... 16382]
Operation:
(W14) →(TOS)
(W15) + 2 →W15
(W15) →W14
(W15) + lit14 →W15
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1111
Description:
LNK
1010
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
kkkk
kkkk
#lit14
00kk
kkk0
This instruction allocates a Stack Frame of size lit14 bytes for a
subroutine calling sequence. The Stack Frame is allocated by PUSHing
the contents of the Frame Pointer (W14) onto the stack, storing the
updated Stack Pointer (W15) to the Frame Pointer and then incrementing
the Stack Pointer by the unsigned 14-bit literal operand. This instruction
supports a maximum Stack Frame of 16382 bytes.
The ‘k’ bits specify the size of the Stack Frame.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
LNK
W14
W15
Data 2000
SR
#0xA0
Since the Stack Pointer can only reside on a word boundary,
lit14 must be even.
; Allocate a stack frame of 160 bytes
Before
Instruction
2000
2000
0000
0000
W14
W15
Data 2000
SR
After
Instruction
2002
20A2
2000
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 267
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
LNK
Allocate Stack Frame
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
lit14 ∈ [0 ... 16382]
Operation:
(W14) →(TOS)
(W15) + 2 →W15
(W15) →W14
1 →SFA bit
(W15) + lit14 →W15
Status Affected:
SFA
Encoding:
1111
Description:
LNK
1010
X
#lit14
00kk
kkkk
kkkk
kkk0
This instruction allocates a Stack Frame of size lit14 bytes for a
subroutine calling sequence. The Stack Frame is allocated by PUSHing
the contents of the Frame Pointer (W14) onto the stack, storing the
updated Stack Pointer (W15) to the Frame Pointer and then incrementing
the Stack Pointer by the unsigned 14-bit literal operand. This instruction
supports a maximum Stack Frame of 16382 bytes.
The ‘k’ bits specify the size of the Stack Frame.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
LNK
W14
W15
Data 2000
SR
CORCON
DS70157F-page 268
#0xA0
Since the Stack Pointer can only reside on a word boundary,
lit14 must be even.
; Allocate a stack frame of 160 bytes
Before
Instruction
2000
2000
0000
0000
0000
W14
W15
Data 2000
SR
CORCON
After
Instruction
2002
20A2
2000
0000
0004
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
LSR
Logical Shift Right f
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
LSR{.B}
f
Operands:
f ∈ [0 ... 8191]
Operation:
For byte operation:
0 →Dest<7>
(f<7:1>) →Dest<6:0>
(f<0>) →C
For word operation:
0 →Dest<15>
(f<15:1>) →Dest<14:0>
(f<0>) →C
X
ffff
ffff
{,WREG}
N, Z, C
Encoding:
1101
Description:
X
C
0
Status Affected:
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
0101
0BDf
ffff
Shift the contents of the file register one bit to the right and place the result
in the destination register. The Least Significant bit of the file register is
shifted into the Carry bit of the STATUS register. Zero is shifted into the
Most Significant bit of the destination register.
The optional WREG operand determines the destination register. If WREG
is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not specified, the
result is stored in the file register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘D’ bit selects the destination (‘0’ for WREG, ‘1’ for file register).
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The WREG is set to working register W0.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
LSR.B
0x600
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
After
Instruction
Data 600
557F
SR
0001 (C = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
Before
Instruction
Data 600
55FF
SR
0000
; Logically shift right (0x600) by one
; (Byte mode)
DS70157F-page 269
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 2:
LSR
0x600, WREG
Before
Instruction
Data 600
55FF
WREG
0000
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 270
; Logically shift right (0x600) by one
; Store to WREG
; (Word mode)
After
Instruction
Data 600
55FF
WREG
2AFF
SR
0001 (C = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
LSR
Logical Shift Right Ws
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
LSR{.B}
Ws,
[Wd]
[Ws++],
[Wd++]
[Ws--],
[Wd--]
[++Ws],
[++Wd]
[--Ws],
[--Wd]
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
For byte operation:
0 →Wd<7>
(Ws<7:1>) →Wd<6:0>
(Ws<0>) →C
For word operation:
0 →Wd<15>
(Ws<15:1>) →Wd<14:0>
(Ws<0>) →C
dppp
ssss
N, Z, C
Encoding:
1101
Description:
X
C
0
Status Affected:
X
Wd
[Ws],
Operands:
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
0001
0Bqq
qddd
Shift the contents of the source register Ws one bit to the right, and place
the result in the destination register Wd. The Least Significant bit of Ws is
shifted into the Carry bit of the STATUS register. Zero is shifted into the
Most Significant bit of Wd. Either register direct or indirect addressing
may be used for Ws and Wd.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘q’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 271
5
Instruction
Descriptions
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 1:
LSR.B
W0, W1
Before
Instruction
W0
FF03
W1
2378
SR
0000
Example 2:
LSR
W0, W1
Before
Instruction
W0
8000
W1
2378
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 272
; LSR W0 (Byte mode)
; Store result to W1
After
Instruction
W0
FF03
W1
2301
SR
0001 (C = 1)
; LSR W0 (Word mode)
; Store the result to W1
After
Instruction
W0
8000
W1
4000
SR
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
LSR
Logical Shift Right by Short Literal
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
lit4 ∈ [0 ... 15]
Wnd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
lit4<3:0> →Shift_Val
0 →Wnd<15:15-Shift_Val + 1>
Wb<15:Shift_Val> →Wnd<15-Shift_Val:0>
Status Affected:
N, Z
Encoding:
1101
Description:
LSR
1110
Wb,
0www
#lit4,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
d100
kkkk
Wnd
wddd
Logical shift right the contents of the source register Wb by the 4-bit
unsigned literal and store the result in the destination register Wnd. Direct
addressing must be used for Wb and Wnd.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘k’ bits provide the literal operand.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
LSR
This instruction operates in Word mode only.
W4, #14, W5
Before
Instruction
W4
C800
W5
1200
SR
0000
Example 2:
LSR
W4, #1, W5
Before
Instruction
W4
0505
W5
F000
SR
0000
; LSR W4 by 14
; Store result to W5
After
Instruction
W4
C800
W5
0003
SR
0000
; LSR W4 by 1
; Store result to W5
After
Instruction
W4
0505
W5
0282
SR
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 273
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
LSR
Logical Shift Right by Wns
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wns ∈ [W0 ...W15]
Wnd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
Wns<4:0> →Shift_Val
0 →Wnd<15:15-Shift_Val + 1>
Wb<15:Shift_Val> →Wnd<15 - Shift_Val:0>
Status Affected:
N, Z
Encoding:
1101
Description:
LSR
1110
Wb,
0www
Wns,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
d000
ssss
Wnd
wddd
Logical shift right the contents of the source register Wb by the 5 Least
Significant bits of Wns (only up to 15 positions) and store the result in the
destination register Wnd. Direct addressing must be used for Wb and
Wnd.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note 1:
2:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
LSR
This instruction operates in Word mode only.
If Wns is greater than 15, Wnd will be loaded with 0x0.
W0, W1, W2
Before
Instruction
W0
C00C
W1
0001
W2
2390
SR
0000
Example 2:
LSR
W5, W4, W3
Before
Instruction
W3
DD43
W4
000C
W5
0800
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 274
; LSR W0 by W1
; Store result to W2
After
Instruction
W0
C00C
W1
0001
W2
6006
SR
0000
; LSR W5 by W4
; Store result to W3
After
Instruction
W3
0000
W4
000C
W5
0800
SR
0002 (Z = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
MAC
Multiply and Accumulate
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
{label:} MAC
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F
dsPIC33E
X
X
X
{,[Wy], Wyd}
{,AWB}
Wm*Wn, Acc {,[Wx], Wxd}
{,[Wx] + = kx, Wxd}
{,[Wy] + = ky, Wyd}
{,[Wx] – = kx, Wxd}
{,[Wy] – = ky, Wyd}
{,[W9 + W12], Wxd}
{,[W11 + W12], Wyd}
Operands:
Wm * Wn ∈ [W4 * W5, W4 * W6, W4 * W7, W5 * W6, W5 * W7, W6 * W7]
Acc ∈ [A,B]
Wx ∈ [W8, W9]; kx ∈ [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wxd ∈ [W4 ... W7]
Wy ∈ [W10, W11]; ky ∈ [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wyd ∈ [W4 ... W7]
AWB ∈ [W13, [W13] + = 2]
Operation:
(Acc(A or B)) +(Wm) * (Wn) →Acc(A or B)
([Wx]) →Wxd; (Wx) + kx →Wx
([Wy]) →Wyd; (Wy) + ky →Wy
(Acc(B or A)) rounded →AWB
Status Affected:
OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB
Encoding:
Description:
1100
0mmm
A0xx
yyii
iijj
jjaa
Multiply the contents of two working registers, optionally prefetch operands
in preparation for another MAC type instruction and optionally store the
unspecified accumulator results. The 32-bit result of the signed multiply is
sign-extended to 40 bits and added to the specified accumulator.
Operands Wx, Wxd, Wy and Wyd specify optional prefetch operations,
which support indirect and register offset addressing, as described in
Section 4.14.1 “MAC Prefetches”. Operand AWB specifies the optional
store of the “other” accumulator, as described in
Section 4.14.4 “MAC Write Back”.
The ‘m’ bits select the operand registers Wm and Wn for the multiply.
The ‘A’ bit selects the accumulator for the result.
The ‘x’ bits select the prefetch Wxd destination.
The ‘y’ bits select the prefetch Wyd destination.
The ‘i’ bits select the Wx prefetch operation.
The ‘j’ bits select the Wy prefetch operation.
The ‘a’ bits select the accumulator Write Back destination.
Note 1: The IF bit (CORCON<0>), determines if the multiply is
fractional or an integer.
2: The US<1:0> bits (CORCON<13:12> in dsPIC33E, CORCON<12> in dsPIC30F/dsPIC33F) determine if the multiply is
unsigned, signed, or mixed-sign. Only dsPIC33E devices support
mixed-sign multiplication.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 275
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 1:
MAC W4*W5, A, [W8]+=6, W4, [W10]+=2, W5
; Multiply W4*W5 and add to ACCA
; Fetch [W8] to W4, Post-increment W8 by 6
; Fetch [W10] to W5, Post-increment W10 by 2
; CORCON = 0x00C0 (fractional multiply, normal saturation)
W4
W5
W8
W10
ACCA
Data 0A00
Data 1800
CORCON
SR
Example 2:
W4
W5
W8
W10
ACCA
Data 0A00
Data 1800
CORCON
SR
After
Instruction
2567
909C
0A06
1802
00 472D 2400
2567
909C
00C0
0000
MAC W4*W5, A, [W8]-=2, W4, [W10]+=2, W5, W13
; Multiply W4*W5 and add to ACCA
; Fetch [W8] to W4, Post-decrement W8 by 2
; Fetch [W10] to W5, Post-increment W10 by 2
; Write Back ACCB to W13
; CORCON = 0x00D0 (fractional multiply, super saturation)
W4
W5
W8
W10
W13
ACCA
ACCB
Data 0A00
Data 1800
CORCON
SR
DS70157F-page 276
Before
Instruction
A022
B900
0A00
1800
00 1200 0000
2567
909C
00C0
0000
Before
Instruction
1000
3000
0A00
1800
2000
23 5000 2000
00 0000 8F4C
5BBE
C967
00D0
0000
W4
W5
W8
W10
W13
ACCA
ACCB
Data 0A00
Data 1800
CORCON
SR
After
Instruction
5BBE
C967
09FE
1802
0001
23 5600 2000
00 0000 1F4C
5BBE
C967
00D0
8800 (OA, OAB = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
MAC
Square and Accumulate
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
{label:} MAC
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F
dsPIC33E
X
X
X
Wm*Wm, Acc {,[Wx], Wxd}
{,[Wy], Wyd}
{,[Wx] + = kx, Wxd}
{,[Wy] + = ky, Wyd}
{,[Wx] – = kx, Wxd}
{,[Wy] – = ky, Wyd}
{,[W9 + W12], Wxd}
{,[W11 + W12], Wyd}
Operands:
Wm * Wm ∈ [W4 * W4, W5 * W5, W6 * W6, W7 * W7]
Acc ∈ [A,B]
Wx ∈ [W8, W9]; kx ∈ [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wxd ∈ [W4 ... W7]
Wy ∈ [W10, W11]; ky ∈ [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wyd ∈ [W4 ... W7]
Operation:
(Acc(A or B)) +(Wm) * (Wm) →Acc(A or B)
([Wx]) →Wxd; (Wx) + kx →Wx
([Wy]) →Wyd; (Wy) + ky →Wy
Status Affected:
OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB
Encoding:
Description:
1111
00mm
A0xx
yyii
iijj
jj00
Square the contents of a working register, optionally prefetch operands in
preparation for another MAC type instruction. The 32-bit result of the
signed multiply is sign-extended to 40 bits and added to the specified
accumulator.
Operands Wx, Wxd, Wy and Wyd specify optional prefetch operations,
which support indirect and register offset addressing, as described in
Section 4.14.1 “MAC Prefetches”.
The ‘m’ bits select the operand register Wm for the square.
The ‘A’ bit selects the accumulator for the result.
The ‘x’ bits select the prefetch Wxd destination.
The ‘y’ bits select the prefetch Wyd destination.
The ‘i’ bits select the Wx prefetch operation.
The ‘j’ bits select the Wy prefetch operation.
Note 1: The IF bit (CORCON<0>), determines if the multiply is fractional or an integer.
2: The US<1:0> bits (CORCON<13:12> in dsPIC33E,
CORCON<12> in dsPIC30F/dsPIC33F) determine if the
multiply is unsigned, signed, or mixed-sign. Only dsPIC33E
devices support mixed-sign multiplication.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 277
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 1:
MAC W4*W4, B, [W9+W12], W4, [W10]-=2, W5
; Square W4 and add to ACCB
; Fetch [W9+W12] to W4
; Fetch [W10] to W5, Post-decrement W10 by 2
; CORCON = 0x00C0 (fractional multiply, normal saturation)
W4
W5
W9
W10
W12
ACCB
Data 0C20
Data 1900
CORCON
SR
Example 2:
W4
W5
W9
W10
W12
ACCB
Data 0C20
Data 1900
CORCON
SR
After
Instruction
A230
650B
0C00
18FE
0020
00 67CD 0908
A230
650B
00C0
0000
MAC W7*W7, A, [W11]-=2, W7
; Square W7 and add to ACCA
; Fetch [W11] to W7, Post-decrement W11 by 2
; CORCON = 0x00D0 (fractional multiply, super saturation)
W7
W11
ACCA
Data 2000
CORCON
SR
DS70157F-page 278
Before
Instruction
A022
B200
0C00
1900
0020
00 2000 0000
A230
650B
00C0
0000
Before
Instruction
76AE
2000
FE 9834 4500
23FF
00D0
0000
W7
W11
ACCA
Data 2000
CORCON
SR
After
Instruction
23FF
1FFE
FF 063E 0188
23FF
00D0
8800 (OA, OAB = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
MOV
Move f to Destination
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F
dsPIC33E
X
X
X
X
X
X
ffff
ffff
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
f ∈ [0 ... 8191]
Operation:
(f) →destination designated by D
Status Affected:
N, Z
Encoding:
1011
Description:
MOV{.B}
1111
f
{,WREG}
1BDf
ffff
Move the contents of the specified file register to the destination register.
The optional WREG operand determines the destination register. If
WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not
specified, the result is stored back to the file register and the only effect is
to modify the STATUS register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘D’ bit selects the destination (‘0’ for WREG, ‘1’ for file register).
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1:
2:
3:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
The WREG is set to working register W0.
When moving word data from file register memory, the “MOV f
to Wnd” (page 281) instruction allows any working register
(W0:W15) to be the destination register.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
MOV.B
TMR0, WREG
Before
Instruction
WREG (W0)
9080
TMR0
2355
SR
0000
Example 2:
MOV
0x800
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
After
Instruction
WREG (W0)
9055
TMR0
2355
SR
0000
; update SR based on (0x800) (Word mode)
5
After
Instruction
Data 0800 B29F
SR
0008 (N = 1)
Instruction
Descriptions
Before
Instruction
Data 0800 B29F
SR
0000
; move (TMR0) to WREG (Byte mode)
DS70157F-page 279
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
MOV
Move WREG to f
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
ffff
ffff
ffff
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
f ∈ [0 ... 8191]
Operation:
(WREG) →f
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1011
Description:
MOV{.B}
0111
WREG,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
f
1B1f
Move the contents of the default working register WREG into the
specified file register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1:
2:
3:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
MOV.B
WREG, 0x801
Before
Instruction
WREG (W0)
98F3
Data 0800
4509
SR
0000
Example 2:
MOV
; move WREG to 0x801 (Byte mode)
After
Instruction
WREG (W0)
98F3
Data 0800
F309
SR
0008 (N = 1)
WREG, DISICNT
Before
Instruction
WREG (W0)
00A0
DISICNT
0000
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 280
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte move rather
than a word move. You may use a .W extension to denote a
word move, but it is not required.
The WREG is set to working register W0.
When moving word data from the working register array to file
register memory, the “MOV Wns to f” (page 282) instruction
allows any working register (W0:W15) to be the source register.
; move WREG to DISICNT
After
Instruction
WREG (W0)
00A0
DISICNT
00A0
SR
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
MOV
Move f to Wnd
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
ffff
ffff
dddd
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
f ∈ [0 ... 65534]
Wnd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(f) →Wnd
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1000
Description:
MOV
f,
0fff
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
Wnd
ffff
Move the word contents of the specified file register to Wnd. The file
register may reside anywhere in the 32K words of data memory, but must
be word-aligned. Register direct addressing must be used for Wnd.
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
Note 1:
2:
3:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
This instruction operates on word operands only.
Since the file register address must be word-aligned, only the
upper 15 bits of the file register address are encoded (bit 0 is
assumed to be ‘0’).
To move a byte of data from file register memory, the “MOV f
to Destination” instruction (page 279) may be used.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
MOV
CORCON, W12
Before
Instruction
W12
78FA
CORCON
00F0
SR
0000
Example 2:
MOV
After
Instruction
W12
00F0
CORCON
00F0
SR
0000
0x27FE, W3
Before
Instruction
W3
0035
Data 27FE ABCD
SR
0000
; move CORCON to W12
; move (0x27FE) to W3
After
Instruction
W3 ABCD
Data 27FE ABCD
SR
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 281
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
MOV
Move Wns to f
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
ffff
ffff
ssss
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
f ∈ [0 ... 65534]
Wns ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Wns) →f
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1000
Description:
MOV
1fff
Wns,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
f
ffff
Move the word contents of the working register Wns to the specified file
register. The file register may reside anywhere in the 32K words of data
memory, but must be word-aligned. Register direct addressing must be
used for Wn.
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note 1:
2:
3:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
MOV
W4, XMDOSRT
Before
Instruction
W4
1200
XMODSRT
1340
SR
0000
Example 2:
MOV
; move W4 to XMODSRT
After
Instruction
W4
1200
XMODSRT
1200
SR
0000
W8, 0x1222
Before
Instruction
W8
F200
Data 1222
FD88
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 282
This instruction operates on word operands only.
Since the file register address must be word-aligned, only the
upper 15 bits of the file register address are encoded (bit 0 is
assumed to be ‘0’).
To move a byte of data to file register memory, the “MOV WREG
to f” instruction (page 280) may be used.
; move W8 to data address 0x1222
After
Instruction
W8
F200
Data 1222
F200
SR
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
MOV.B
Move 8-bit Literal to Wnd
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
MOV.B
Operands:
lit8 ∈ [0 ... 255]
Wnd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
lit8 →Wnd
Status Affected:
None
kkkk
kkkk
dddd
Encoding:
Description:
1011
0011
#lit8,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
Wnd
1100
The unsigned 8-bit literal ‘k’ is loaded into the lower byte of Wnd. The
upper byte of Wnd is not changed. Register direct addressing must be
used for Wnd.
The ‘k’ bits specify the value of the literal.
The ‘d’ bits select the address of the working register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
MOV.B
This instruction operates in Byte mode and the .B extension
must be provided.
#0x17, W5
Before
Instruction
W5
7899
SR
0000
Example 2:
MOV.B
#0xFE, W9
Before
Instruction
W9
AB23
SR
0000
; load W5 with #0x17 (Byte mode)
After
Instruction
W5
7817
SR
0000
; load W9 with #0xFE (Byte mode)
After
Instruction
W9
ABFE
SR
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 283
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
MOV
Move 16-bit Literal to Wnd
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
kkkk
kkkk
dddd
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
lit16 ∈ [-32768 ... 65535]
Wnd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
lit16 →Wnd
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
MOV
0010
Description:
kkkk
#lit16,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
Wnd
kkkk
The 16-bit literal ‘k’ is loaded into Wnd. Register direct addressing must
be used for Wnd.
The ‘k’ bits specify the value of the literal.
The ‘d’ bits select the address of the working register.
Note 1:
2:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
MOV
This instruction operates only in Word mode.
The literal may be specified as a signed value [-32768:32767],
or unsigned value [0:65535].
#0x4231, W13
Before
Instruction
W13
091B
SR
0000
Example 2:
Example 3:
MOV
#0x4, W2
After
Instruction
W13
4231
SR
0000
; load W2 with #0x4
Before
Instruction
W2
B004
SR
0000
After
Instruction
W2
0004
SR
0000
MOV
; load W8 with #-1000
#-1000, W8
Before
Instruction
W8
23FF
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 284
; load W13 with #0x4231
After
Instruction
W8
FC18
SR
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
MOV
Move [Ws with offset] to Wnd
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
X
X
X
X
X
X
dkkk
ssss
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Slit10 ∈ [-512 ... 511] for byte operation
Slit10 ∈ [-1024 ... 1022] (even only) for word operation
Wnd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
[Ws + Slit10] →Wnd
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1001
Description:
MOV{.B}
dsPIC30F dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
0kkk
[Ws + Slit10], Wnd
kBkk
kddd
The contents of [Ws + Slit10] are loaded into Wnd. In Word mode, the
range of Slit10 is increased to [-1024 ... 1022] and Slit10 must be even to
maintain word address alignment. Register indirect addressing must be
used for the source, and direct addressing must be used for Wnd.
The ‘k’ bits specify the value of the literal.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note 1:
2:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte move rather
than a word move. You may use a .W extension to denote a
word move, but it is not required.
In Byte mode, the range of Slit10 is not reduced as specified in
Section 4.6 “Using 10-bit Literal Operands”, since the literal
represents an address offset from Ws.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
MOV.B
[W8+0x13], W10
Before
Instruction
W8
1008
W10
4009
Data 101A
3312
SR
0000
; load W10 with [W8+0x13]
; (Byte mode)
After
Instruction
W8
1008
W10
4033
Data 101A
3312
SR
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 285
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 2:
MOV
[W4+0x3E8], W2
Before
Instruction
W2
9088
W4
0800
Data 0BE8
5634
SR
0000
MOV
; load W2 with [W4+0x3E8]
; (Word mode)
After
Instruction
W2
5634
W4
0800
Data 0BE8
5634
SR
0000
Move Wns to [Wd with offset]
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wns ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Slit10 ∈ [-512 ... 511] in Byte mode
Slit10 ∈ [-1024 ... 1022] (even only) in Word mode
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Wns) →[Wd + Slit10]
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
Description:
1001
MOV{.B}
1kkk
Wns,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
dkkk
ssss
[Wd + Slit10]
kBkk
kddd
The contents of Wns are stored to [Wd + Slit10]. In Word mode, the range
of Slit10 is increased to [-1024 ... 1022] and Slit10 must be even to
maintain word address alignment. Register direct addressing must be
used for Wns, and indirect addressing must be used for the destination.
The ‘k’ bits specify the value of the literal.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note 1:
2:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
MOV.B
W0, [W1+0x7]
Before
Instruction
W0
9015
W1
1800
Data 1806
2345
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 286
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte move rather
than a word move. You may use a .W extension to denote a
word move, but it is not required.
In Byte mode, the range of Slit10 is not reduced as specified in
Section 4.6 “Using 10-bit Literal Operands”, since the literal
represents an address offset from Wd.
; store W0 to [W1+0x7]
; (Byte mode)
After
Instruction
W0
9015
W1
1800
Data 1806
1545
SR
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 2:
MOV
W11, [W1-0x400]
Before
Instruction
W1
1000
W11
8813
Data 0C00
FFEA
SR
0000
After
Instruction
W1
1000
W11
8813
Data 0C00
8813
SR
0000
MOV
Implemented in:
Syntax:
; store W11 to [W1-0x400]
; (Word mode)
Move Ws to Wd
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
MOV{.B}
Ws,
Wd
[Ws],
[Wd]
[Ws++],
[Wd++]
[Ws--],
[Wd--]
[--Ws],
[--Wd]
[++Ws],
[++Wd]
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
dggg
ssss
[Ws + Wb], [Wd + Wb]
Operands:
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Ws) →Wd
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
Description:
0111
1www
wBhh
hddd
Move the contents of the source register into the destination register.
Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws and Wd.
The ‘w’ bits define the offset register Wb.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘h’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘g’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note 1:
2:
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 287
5
Instruction
Descriptions
3:
4:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte move rather
than a word move. You may use a .W extension to denote a
word move, but it is not required.
When Register Offset Addressing mode is used for both the
source and destination, the offset must be the same because
the ‘w’ encoding bits are shared by Ws and Wd.
The instruction “PUSH Ws” translates to MOV Ws, [W15++].
The instruction “POP Wd” translates to MOV [--W15], Wd.
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
MOV
Move Ws to Wd
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
MOV.B
[W0--], W4
Before
Instruction
W0
0A01
W4
2976
Data 0A00
8988
SR
0000
Example 2:
MOV
DS70157F-page 288
After
Instruction
W0
0A00
W4
2989
Data 0A00
8988
SR
0000
[W6++], [W2+W3]
Before
Instruction
W2
0800
W3
0040
W6
1228
Data 0840
9870
Data 1228
0690
SR
0000
; Move [W0] to W4 (Byte mode)
; Post-decrement W0
; Move [W6] to [W2+W3] (Word mode)
; Post-increment W6
After
Instruction
W2
0800
W3
0040
W6
122A
Data 0840
0690
Data 1228
0690
SR
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
MOV.D
Double Word Move from Source to Wnd
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
{label:}
MOV.D
0ddd
0ppp
ssss
Wns,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
Wnd
[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:
Wns ∈ [W0, W2, W4 ... W14]
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wnd ∈ [W0, W2, W4 ... W14]
Operation:
For direct addressing of source:
Wns →Wnd
Wns + 1 →Wnd + 1
For indirect addressing of source:
See Description
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1011
Description:
1110
0000
Move the double word specified by the source to a destination working
register pair (Wnd:Wnd + 1). If register direct addressing is used for the
source, the contents of two successive working registers (Wns:Wns + 1)
are moved to Wnd:Wnd + 1. If indirect addressing is used for the source,
Ws specifies the effective address for the least significant word of the
double word. Any pre/post-increment or pre/post-decrement will adjust Ws
by 4 bytes to accommodate for the double word.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the address of the first source register.
Note 1:
2:
3:
Words:
1
Cycles:
2(1)
Note 1:
This instruction only operates on double words. See Figure 4-3
for information on how double words are aligned in memory.
Wnd must be an even working register.
The instruction “POP.D Wnd” translates to MOV.D [--W15],
Wnd.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 289
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 1:
MOV.D
W2, W6
Before
Instruction
W2
12FB
W3
9877
W6
9833
W7
FCC6
SR
0000
Example 2:
MOV.D
[W7--], W4
Before
Instruction
W4
B012
W5
FD89
W7
0900
Data 0900
A319
Data 0902
9927
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 290
; Move W2 to W6 (Double mode)
After
Instruction
W2
12FB
W3
9877
W6
12FB
W7
9877
SR
0000
; Move [W7] to W4 (Double mode)
; Post-decrement W7
After
Instruction
W4
A319
W5
9927
W7
08FC
Data 0900
A319
Data 0902
9927
SR
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
MOVPAG
Move Literal to Page Register
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
MOVPAG
X
#lit10,
DSRPAG
#lit9,
DSWPAG
#lit8,
TBLPAG
Operands:
lit10 ∈ [0 ... 1023], lit9 ∈ [0 ... 511], lit8 ∈ [0 ... 255]
Operation:
lit10 →DSRPAG or lit9 →DSWPAG or lit8 →TBLPAG
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1111
Description:
1110
1100
PPkk
kkkk
kkkk
The appropriate number of bits from the unsigned literal ‘k’ are loaded
into the DSRPAG, DSWPAG, or TBLPAG register. The assembler
restricts the literal to a 9-bit unsigned value when the destination is
DSWPAG, and an 8-bit unsigned value when the destination is TBLPAG.
The ‘P’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘k’ bits specify the value of the literal.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
This instruction operates in word mode only.
MOVPAG #0x02, DSRPAG
Before
Instruction
DSRPAG
0000
After
Instruction
DSRPAG
0002
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 291
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
MOVPAG
Move Ws to Page Register
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
MOVPAG
Wn,
X
DSRPAG
DSWPAG
TBLPAG
Operands:
Wn ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
Wn<9:0> →DSRPAG or Wn<8:0> →DSWPAG or Wn<7:0> →TBLPAG
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1111
Description:
1110
1101
PP00
0000
ssss
The appropriate number of bits from the register Ws are loaded into the
DSRPAG, DSWPAG, or TBLPAG register. The assembler restricts the
literal to a 9-bit unsigned value when the destination is DSWPAG, and an
8-bit unsigned value when the destination is TBLPAG.
The ‘P’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘s’ bits specify the source register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
MOVPAG W2, DSRPAG
Before
Instruction
DSRPAG
0000
W2
0002
DS70157F-page 292
This instruction operates in word mode only.
After
Instruction
DSRPAG
0002
W2
0002
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
MOVSAC
Prefetch Operands and Store Accumulator
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
{label:} MOVSAC Acc {,[Wx], Wxd}
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F
dsPIC33E
X
X
X
{,[Wy], Wyd}
{,AWB}
{,[Wx] + = kx, Wxd}
{,[Wy] + = ky, Wyd}
{,[Wx] – = kx, Wxd}
{,[Wy] – = ky, Wyd}
{,[W9 + W12], Wxd}
{,[W11 + W12], Wyd}
Operands:
Acc ∈ [A,B]
Wx ∈ [W8, W9]; kx ∈ [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wxd ∈ [W4 ... W7]
Wy ∈ [W10, W11]; ky ∈ [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wyd ∈ [W4 ... W7]
AWB ∈ [W13, [W13] + = 2]
Operation:
([Wx]) →Wxd; (Wx) + kx →Wx
([Wy]) →Wyd; (Wy) + ky →Wy
(Acc(B or A)) rounded →AWB
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
Description:
1100
0111
A0xx
yyii
iijj
jjaa
Optionally prefetch operands in preparation for another MAC type
instruction and optionally store the unspecified accumulator results. Even
though an accumulator operation is not performed in this instruction, an
accumulator must be specified to designate which accumulator to write
back.
Operands Wx, Wxd, Wy and Wyd specify optional prefetch operations
which support indirect and register offset addressing, as described in
Section 4.14.1 “MAC Prefetches”. Operand AWB specifies the optional
store of the “other” accumulator, as described in
Section 4.14.4 “MAC Write Back”.
The ‘A’ bit selects the other accumulator used for write back.
The ‘x’ bits select the prefetch Wxd destination.
The ‘y’ bits select the prefetch Wyd destination.
The ‘i’ bits select the Wx prefetch operation.
The ‘j’ bits select the Wy prefetch operation.
The ‘a’ bits select the accumulator Write Back destination.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 293
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 1:
MOVSAC
; Fetch
; Fetch
; Store
W6
W7
W9
W11
W13
ACCA
Data 0800
Data 1900
SR
Example 2:
DS70157F-page 294
Before
Instruction
A022
B200
0800
1900
0020
00 3290 5968
7811
B2AF
0000
MOVSAC
; Fetch
; Fetch
; Store
W4
W6
W9
W11
W12
W13
ACCB
Data 1200
Data 2024
Data 2300
SR
B, [W9], W6, [W11]+=4, W7, W13
[W9] to W6
[W11] to W7, Post-increment W11 by 4
ACCA to W13
W6
W7
W9
W11
W13
ACCA
Data 0800
Data 1900
SR
After
Instruction
7811
B2AF
0800
1904
3290
00 3290 5968
7811
B2AF
0000
A, [W9]-=2, W4, [W11+W12], W6, [W13]+=2
[W9] to W4, Post-decrement W9 by 2
[W11+W12] to W6
ACCB to [W13], Post-increment W13 by 2
Before
Instruction
76AE
2000
1200
2000
0024
2300
00 9834 4500
BB00
52CE
23FF
0000
W4
W6
W9
W11
W12
W13
ACCB
Data 1200
Data 2024
Data 2300
SR
After
Instruction
BB00
52CE
11FE
2000
0024
2302
00 9834 4500
BB00
52CE
9834
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
MPY
Multiply Wm by Wn to Accumulator
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
{label:} MPY
PIC24H
Wm * Wn, Acc
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F
dsPIC33E
X
X
X
{,[Wx], Wxd}
{,[Wy], Wyd}
{,[Wx] + = kx, Wxd}
{,[Wy] + = ky, Wyd}
{,[Wx] – = kx, Wxd}
{,[Wy] – = ky, Wyd}
{,[W9 + W12], Wxd}
{,[W11 + W12], Wyd}
Operands:
Wm * Wn ∈ [W4 * W5, W4 * W6, W4 * W7, W5 * W6, W5 * W7, W6 * W7]
Acc ∈ [A,B]
Wx ∈ [W8, W9]; kx ∈ [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wxd ∈ [W4 ... W7]
Wy ∈ [W10, W11]; ky ∈ [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wyd ∈ [W4 ... W7]
AWB ∈ [W13], [W13] + = 2
Operation:
(Wm) * (Wn) →Acc(A or B)
([Wx]) →Wxd; (Wx) + kx →Wx
([Wy]) →Wyd; (Wy) + ky →Wy
Status Affected:
OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB
Encoding:
Description:
1100
0mmm
A0xx
yyii
iijj
jj11
Multiply the contents of two working registers, optionally prefetch
operands in preparation for another MAC type instruction. The 32-bit result
of the signed multiply is sign-extended to 40 bits and stored to the
specified accumulator.
Operands Wx, Wxd, Wy and Wyd specify optional prefetch operations
which support indirect and register offset addressing, as described in
Section 4.14.1 “MAC Prefetches”.
The ‘m’ bits select the operand registers Wm and Wn for the multiply:
The ‘A’ bit selects the accumulator for the result.
The ‘x’ bits select the prefetch Wxd destination.
The ‘y’ bits select the prefetch Wyd destination.
The ‘i’ bits select the Wx prefetch operation.
The ‘j’ bits select the Wy prefetch operation.
Note 1: The IF bit, CORCON<0>, determines if the multiply is
fractional or an integer.
2: The US<1:0> bits (CORCON<13:12> in dsPIC33E,
CORCON<12> in dsPIC30F/dsPIC33F) determine if the
multiply is unsigned, signed, or mixed-sign. Only dsPIC33E
devices support mixed-sign multiplication.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 295
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 1:
MPY
;
;
;
;
W4
W5
W6
W7
W8
W10
ACCA
Data 1780
Data 2400
CORCON
SR
Example 2:
Before
Instruction
C000
9000
0800
B200
1780
2400
FF F780 2087
671F
E3DC
0000
0000
W4
W5
W6
W7
W8
W10
ACCA
Data 1780
Data 2400
CORCON
SR
After
Instruction
C000
9000
671F
E3DC
1782
23FE
00 3800 0000
671F
E3DC
0000
0000
MPY W6*W7, B, [W8]+=2, W4, [W10]-=2, W5
; Multiply W6*W7 and store to ACCB
; Fetch [W8] to W4, Post-increment W8 by 2
; Fetch [W10] to W5, Post-decrement W10 by 2
; CORCON = 0x0000 (fractional multiply, no saturation)
W4
W5
W6
W7
W8
W10
ACCB
Data 1782
Data 23FE
CORCON
SR
DS70157F-page 296
W4*W5, A, [W8]+=2, W6, [W10]-=2, W7
Multiply W4*W5 and store to ACCA
Fetch [W8] to W6, Post-increment W8 by 2
Fetch [W10] to W7, Post-decrement W10 by 2
CORCON = 0x0000 (fractional multiply, no saturation)
Before
Instruction
C000
9000
671F
E3DC
1782
23FE
00 9834 4500
8FDC
0078
0000
0000
W4
W5
W6
W7
W8
W10
ACCB
Data 1782
Data 23FE
CORCON
SR
After
Instruction
8FDC
0078
671F
E3DC
1784
23FC
FF E954 3748
8FDC
0078
0000
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
MPY
Square to Accumulator
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
{label:} MPY Wm * Wm, Acc
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F
dsPIC33E
X
X
X
{,[Wx], Wxd}
{,[Wy], Wyd}
{,[Wx] + = kx, Wxd}
{,[Wy] + = ky, Wyd}
{,[Wx] – = kx, Wxd}
{,[Wy] – = ky, Wyd}
{,[W9 + W12], Wxd}
{,[W11 + W12], Wyd}
Operands:
Wm * Wm ∈ [W4 * W4, W5 * W5, W6 * W6, W7 * W7]
Acc ∈ [A,B]
Wx ∈ [W8, W9]; kx ∈ [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wxd ∈ [W4 ... W7]
Wy ∈ [W10, W11]; ky ∈ [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wyd ∈ [W4 ... W7]
Operation:
(Wm) * (Wm) →Acc(A or B)
([Wx]) →Wxd; (Wx) + kx →Wx
([Wy]) →Wyd; (Wy) + ky →Wy
Status Affected:
OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB
Encoding:
Description:
1111
00mm
A0xx
yyii
iijj
jj01
Square the contents of a working register, optionally prefetch operands in
preparation for another MAC type instruction. The 32-bit result of the
signed multiply is sign-extended to 40 bits and stored in the specified
accumulator.
Operands Wx, Wxd, Wy and Wyd specify optional prefetch operations
which support indirect and register offset addressing, as described in
Section 4.14.1 “MAC Prefetches”.
The ‘m’ bits select the operand register Wm for the square.
The ‘A’ bit selects the accumulator for the result.
The ‘x’ bits select the prefetch Wxd destination.
The ‘y’ bits select the prefetch Wyd destination.
The ‘i’ bits select the Wx prefetch operation.
The ‘j’ bits select the Wy prefetch operation.
Note 1: The IF bit (CORCON<0>), determines if the multiply is
fractional or an integer.
2: The US<1:0> bits (CORCON<13:12> in dsPIC33E,
CORCON<12> in dsPIC30F/dsPIC33F) determine if the
multiply is unsigned, signed, or mixed-sign. Only dsPIC33E
devices support mixed-sign multiplication.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 297
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 1:
MPY
W6*W6, A, [W9]+=2, W6
; Square W6 and store to ACCA
; Fetch [W9] to W6, Post-increment W9 by 2
; CORCON = 0x0000 (fractional multiply, no saturation)
W6
W9
ACCA
Data 0900
CORCON
SR
Example 2:
W6
W9
ACCA
Data 0900
CORCON
SR
After
Instruction
B865
0902
00 4FB2 0000
B865
0000
0000
MPY W4*W4, B, [W9+W12], W4, [W10]+=2, W5
; Square W4 and store to ACCB
; Fetch [W9+W12] to W4
; Fetch [W10] to W5, Post-increment W10 by 2
; CORCON = 0x0000 (fractional multiply, no saturation)
W4
W5
W9
W10
W12
ACCB
Data 1600
Data 1B00
CORCON
SR
DS70157F-page 298
Before
Instruction
6500
0900
00 7C80 0908
B865
0000
0000
Before
Instruction
E228
9000
1700
1B00
FF00
00 9834 4500
8911
F678
0000
0000
W4
W5
W9
W10
W12
ACCB
Data 1600
Data 1B00
CORCON
SR
After
Instruction
8911
F678
1700
1B02
FF00
00 06F5 4C80
8911
F678
0000
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
MPY.N
Multiply -Wm by Wn to Accumulator
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
{label:} MPY.N Wm * Wn, Acc
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F
dsPIC33E
X
X
X
{,[Wx], Wxd}
{,[Wy], Wyd}
{,[Wx] + = kx, Wxd}
{,[Wy] + = ky, Wyd}
{,[Wx] – = kx, Wxd}
{,[Wy] – = ky, Wyd}
{,[W9 + W12], Wxd}
{,[W11 + W12], Wyd}
Operands:
Wm * Wn ∈ [W4 * W5; W4 * W6; W4 * W7; W5 * W6; W5 * W7; W6 * W7]
Acc ∈ [A,B]
Wx ∈ [W8, W9]; kx ∈ [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wxd ∈ [W4 ... W7]
Wy ∈ [W10, W11]; ky ∈ [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wyd ∈ [W4 ... W7]
Operation:
-(Wm) * (Wn) →Acc(A or B)
([Wx]) →Wxd; (Wx) + kx →Wx
([Wy]) →Wyd; (Wy) + ky →Wy
Status Affected:
OA, OB, OAB
Encoding:
Description:
1100
0mmm
A1xx
yyii
iijj
jj11
Multiply the contents of a working register by the negative of the contents
of another working register, optionally prefetch operands in preparation for
another MAC type instruction and optionally store the unspecified
accumulator results. The 32-bit result of the signed multiply is
sign-extended to 40 bits and stored to the specified accumulator.
The ‘m’ bits select the operand registers Wm and Wn for the multiply.
The ‘A’ bit selects the accumulator for the result.
The ‘x’ bits select the prefetch Wxd destination.
The ‘y’ bits select the prefetch Wyd destination.
The ‘i’ bits select the Wx prefetch operation.
The ‘j’ bits select the Wy prefetch operation.
Note 1: The IF bit (CORCON<0>), determines if the multiply is
fractional or an integer.
2: The US<1:0> bits (CORCON<13:12> in dsPIC33E,
CORCON<12> in dsPIC30F/dsPIC33F) determine if the
multiply is unsigned, signed, or mixed-sign. Only dsPIC33E
devices support mixed-sign multiplication.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 299
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 1:
MPY.N
;
;
;
;
W4
W5
W8
W10
ACCA
Data 0B00
Data 2000
CORCON
SR
Example 2:
MPY.N
;
;
;
;
Before
Instruction
3023
1290
0B00
2000
00 0000 2387
0054
660A
0001
0000
W4
W5
W8
W10
ACCA
Data 0B00
Data 2000
CORCON
SR
After
Instruction
0054
660A
0B02
2002
FF FC82 7650
0054
660A
0001
0000
W4*W5, A, [W8]+=2, W4, [W10]+=2, W5
Multiply W4*W5, negate the result and store to ACCA
Fetch [W8] to W4, Post-increment W8 by 2
Fetch [W10] to W5, Post-increment W10 by 2
CORCON = 0x0000 (fractional multiply, no saturation)
W4
W5
W8
W10
ACCA
Data 0B00
Data 2000
CORCON
SR
DS70157F-page 300
W4*W5, A, [W8]+=2, W4, [W10]+=2, W5
Multiply W4*W5, negate the result and store to ACCA
Fetch [W8] to W4, Post-increment W8 by 2
Fetch [W10] to W5, Post-increment W10 by 2
CORCON = 0x0001 (integer multiply, no saturation)
Before
Instruction
3023
1290
0B00
2000
00 0000 2387
0054
660A
0000
0000
W4
W5
W8
W10
ACCA
Data 0B00
Data 2000
CORCON
SR
After
Instruction
0054
660A
0B02
2002
FF F904 ECA0
0054
660A
0000
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
MSC
Multiply and Subtract from Accumulator
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
{label:} MSC Wm * Wn, Acc
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F
dsPIC33E
X
X
X
{,[Wx], Wxd}
{,[Wy], Wyd}
{,AWB}
{,[Wx] + = kx, Wxd}
{,[Wy] + = ky, Wyd}
{,[Wx] – = kx, Wxd}
{,[Wy] – = ky, Wyd}
{,[W9 + W12], Wxd}
{,[W11 + W12], Wyd}
Operands:
Wm * Wn ∈ [W4 * W5, W4 * W6, W4 * W7, W5 * W6, W5 * W7, W6 * W7]
Acc ∈ [A,B]
Wx ∈ [W8, W9]; kx ∈ [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wxd ∈ [W4 ... W7]
Wy ∈ [W10, W11]; ky ∈ [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wyd ∈ [W4 ... W7]
AWB ∈ [W13, [W13] + = 2]
Operation:
(Acc(A or B)) −(Wm) * (Wn) →Acc(A or B)
([Wx]) →Wxd; (Wx) + kx →Wx
([Wy]) →Wyd; (Wy) + ky →Wy
(Acc(B or A)) rounded →AWB
Status Affected:
OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB
Encoding:
Description:
1100
0mmm
A1xx
yyii
iijj
jjaa
Multiply the contents of two working registers, optionally prefetch
operands in preparation for another MAC type instruction and optionally
store the unspecified accumulator results. The 32-bit result of the signed
multiply is sign-extended to 40 bits and subtracted from the specified
accumulator.
Operands Wx, Wxd, Wy and Wyd specify optional prefetch operations
which support indirect and register offset addressing as described in
Section 4.14.1 “MAC Prefetches”. Operand AWB specifies the optional
store of the “other” accumulator as described in
Section 4.14.4 “MAC Write Back”.
The ‘m’ bits select the operand registers Wm and Wn for the multiply.
The ‘A’ bit selects the accumulator for the result.
The ‘x’ bits select the prefetch Wxd destination.
The ‘y’ bits select the prefetch Wyd destination.
The ‘i’ bits select the Wx prefetch operation.
The ‘j’ bits select the Wy prefetch operation.
The ‘a’ bits select the accumulator Write Back destination.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
The IF bit (CORCON<0>), determines if the multiply is
fractional or an integer.
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 301
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 1:
MSC
;
;
;
;
W6
W7
W8
W10
ACCA
Data 0C00
Data 1C00
CORCON
SR
Example 2:
MSC
;
;
;
;
Before
Instruction
9051
7230
0C00
1C00
00 0567 8000
D309
100B
0001
0000
W6
W7
W8
W10
ACCA
Data 0C00
Data 1C00
CORCON
SR
After
Instruction
D309
100B
0BFC
1BFC
00 3738 5ED0
D309
100B
0001
0000
W4*W5, B, [W11+W12], W5, W13
Multiply W4*W5 and subtract the result from ACCB
Fetch [W11+W12] to W5
Write Back ACCA to W13
CORCON = 0x0000 (fractional multiply, no saturation)
W4
W5
W11
W12
W13
ACCA
ACCB
Data 2000
CORCON
SR
DS70157F-page 302
W6*W7, A, [W8]-=4, W6, [W10]-=4, W7
Multiply W6*W7 and subtract the result from ACCA
Fetch [W8] to W6, Post-decrement W8 by 4
Fetch [W10] to W7, Post-decrement W10 by 4
CORCON = 0x0001 (integer multiply, no saturation)
Before
Instruction
0500
2000
1800
0800
6233
00 3738 5ED0
00 1000 0000
3579
0000
0000
W4
W5
W11
W12
W13
ACCA
ACCB
Data 2000
CORCON
SR
After
Instruction
0500
3579
1800
0800
3738
00 3738 5ED0
00 0EC0 0000
3579
0000
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
MUL
Integer Unsigned Multiply f and WREG
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
ffff
ffff
ffff
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
f ∈ [0 ... 8191]
Operation:
For byte operation:
(WREG)<7:0> * (f)<7:0> →W2
For word operation:
(WREG) * (f) →W2:W3
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1011
Description:
MUL{.B}
1100
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
f
0B0f
Multiply the default working register WREG with the specified file
register and place the result in the W2:W3 register pair. Both operands
and the result are interpreted as unsigned integers. If this instruction is
executed in Byte mode, the 16-bit result is stored in W2. In Word mode,
the most significant word of the 32-bit result is stored in W3, and the
least significant word of the 32-bit result is stored in W2.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
The WREG is set to working register W0.
The IF bit (CORCON<0>), has no effect on this operation.
This is the only instruction, which provides for an 8-bit
multiply.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
MUL.B
0x800
Before
Instruction
WREG (W0)
9823
W2
FFFF
W3
FFFF
Data 0800
2690
SR
0000
; Multiply (0x800)*WREG (Byte mode)
After
Instruction
WREG (W0)
9823
W2
13B0
W3
FFFF
Data 0800
2690
SR
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 303
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 2:
MUL
TMR1
Before
Instruction
WREG (W0)
F001
W2
0000
W3
0000
TMR1
3287
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 304
; Multiply (TMR1)*WREG (Word mode)
After
Instruction
WREG (W0)
F001
W2
C287
W3
2F5E
TMR1
3287
SR
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
MUL.SS
Integer 16x16-bit Signed Multiply
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
MUL.SS
Wb,
Ws,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
dppp
ssss
Wnd
[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wnd ∈ [W0, W2, W4 ... W12]
Operation:
signed (Wb) * signed (Ws) →Wnd:Wnd + 1
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1011
Description:
1001
1www
wddd
Multiply the contents of Wb with the contents of Ws, and store the 32-bit
result in two successive working registers. The least significant word of
the result is stored in Wnd (which must be an even numbered working
register), and the most significant word of the result is stored in
Wnd + 1. Both source operands and the result Wnd are interpreted as
two’s complement signed integers. Register direct addressing must be
used for Wb and Wnd. Register direct or register indirect addressing
may be used for Ws.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘d’ bits select the address of the lower destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
This instruction operates in Word mode only.
Since the product of the multiplication is 32 bits, Wnd must be
an even working register. See Figure 4-2 for information on
how double words are aligned in memory.
Wnd may not be W14, since W15<0> is fixed to zero.
The IF bit and the US<1:0> bits in the CORCON register have
no effect on this operation.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 305
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 1:
MUL.SS
W0, W1, W12
Before
Instruction
W0
9823
W1
67DC
W12
FFFF
W13
FFFF
SR
0000
Example 2:
MUL.SS
After
Instruction
W0
9823
W1
67DC
W12
D314
W13 D5DC
SR
0000
W2, [--W4], W0
Before
Instruction
W0
FFFF
W1
FFFF
W2
0045
W4
27FE
Data 27FC
0098
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 306
; Multiply W0*W1
; Store the result to W12:W13
; Pre-decrement W4
; Multiply W2*[W4]
; Store the result to W0:W1
After
Instruction
W0
28F8
W1
0000
W2
0045
W4
27FC
Data 27FC
0098
SR
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Integer 16x16-bit Signed Multiply with Accumulator
Destination
MUL.SS
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
MUL.SS
Wb,
Ws,
[Ws],
A
[Ws++],
B
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
ACC ∈ [A, B]
Operation:
signed (Wb) * signed (Ws) →ACC(A or B)
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1011
Description:
1001
1www
w111
Appp
ssss
Performs a 16-bit x 16-bit signed multiply with a 32-bit result, which is
stored in one of the DSP engine accumulators, ACCA or ACCB. The
32-bit result is sign extended to bit 39 prior to being loaded into the
target accumulator.
The source operands are treated as integer or fractional values
depending upon the operating mode of the DSP engine (as defined by
the IF bit in CORCON<0>). Both source operands are treated as signed
values.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘d’ bits select the address of the source register.
The ‘p’ bits select source Address mode 2.
The ‘A’ bit selects the destination accumulator for the product.
Note 1: This instruction operates in Word mode only.
2: The state of the multiplier mode bits (US<1:0> in CORCON)
have no effect upon the operation of this instruction.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
MUL.SS
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Before
Instruction
9823
67DC
00 0000 0000
0000
W0
W1
Acc A
SR
After
Instruction
9823
67DC
FF D5DC D314
0000
Instruction
Descriptions
W0
W1
Acc A
SR
5
W0, W1, A
DS70157F-page 307
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
MUL.SU
Integer 16x16-bit Signed-Unsigned Short Literal Multiply
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
lit5 ∈ [0 ... 31]
Wnd ∈ [W0, W2, W4 ... W12]
Operation:
signed (Wb) * unsigned lit5 →Wnd:Wnd + 1
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
Description:
1011
MUL.SU
1001
Wb,
0www
#lit5,
wddd
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
d11k
kkkk
Wnd
Multiply the contents of Wb with the 5-bit literal, and store the 32-bit
result in two successive working registers. The least significant word of
the result is stored in Wnd (which must be an even numbered working
register), and the most significant word of the result is stored in Wnd + 1.
The Wb operand and the result Wnd are interpreted as a two’s
complement signed integer. The literal is interpreted as an unsigned
integer. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb and Wnd.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘d’ bits select the address of the lower destination register.
The ‘k’ bits define a 5-bit unsigned integer literal.
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
MUL.SU
W0, #0x1F, W2
Before
Instruction
W0
C000
W2
1234
W3
C9BA
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 308
This instruction operates in Word mode only.
Since the product of the multiplication is 32 bits, Wnd must be
an even working register. See Figure 4-3 for information on
how double words are aligned in memory.
Wnd may not be W14, since W15<0> is fixed to zero.
The IF bit and the US<1:0> bits in the CORCON register have
no effect on this operation.
; Multiply W0 by literal 0x1F
; Store the result to W2:W3
After
Instruction
W0
C000
W2
4000
W3
FFF8
SR
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 2:
MUL.SU
W2, #0x10, W0
Before
Instruction
W0 ABCD
W1
89B3
W2
F240
SR
0000
; Multiply W2 by literal 0x10
; Store the result to W0:W1
After
Instruction
W0
2400
W1
000F
W2
F240
SR
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 309
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
MUL.SU
Integer 16x16-bit Signed-Unsigned Multiply
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
MUL.SU
Wb,
Ws,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
dppp
ssss
Wnd
[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wnd ∈ [W0, W2, W4 ... W12]
Operation:
signed (Wb) * unsigned (Ws) →Wnd:Wnd + 1
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1011
Description:
1001
0www
wddd
Multiply the contents of Wb with the contents of Ws, and store the 32-bit
result in two successive working registers. The least significant word of
the result is stored in Wnd (which must be an even numbered working
register), and the most significant word of the result is stored in Wnd + 1.
The Wb operand and the result Wnd are interpreted as a two’s
complement signed integer. The Ws operand is interpreted as an
unsigned integer. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb and
Wnd. Register direct or register indirect addressing may be used for Ws.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘d’ bits select the address of the lower destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
DS70157F-page 310
This instruction operates in Word mode only.
Since the product of the multiplication is 32 bits, Wnd must be
an even working register. See Figure 4-3 for information on
how double words are aligned in memory.
Wnd may not be W14, since W15<0> is fixed to zero.
The IF bit and the US<1:0> bits in the CORCON register have
no effect on this operation.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 1:
MUL.SU
W8, [W9], W0
Before
Instruction
W0
68DC
W1
AA40
W8
F000
W9
178C
Data 178C
F000
SR
0000
Example 2:
MUL.SU
After
Instruction
W0
0000
W1
F100
W8
F000
W9
178C
Data 178C
F000
SR
0000
W2, [++W3], W4
Before
Instruction
W2
0040
W3
0280
W4
1819
W5
2021
Data 0282
0068
SR
0000
; Multiply W8*[W9]
; Store the result to W0:W1
; Pre-Increment W3
; Multiply W2*[W3]
; Store the result to W4:W5
After
Instruction
W2
0040
W3
0282
W4
1A00
W5
0000
Data 0282
0068
SR
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 311
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Integer 16x16-bit Signed-Unsigned Multiply with
Accumulator Destination
MUL.SU
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
MUL.SU
Wb,
Ws,
[Ws],
A
[Ws++],
B
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
ACC ∈ [A, B]
Operands:
Operation:
signed (Wb) * unsigned (Ws) →ACC(A or B)
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1011
Description:
1001
0www
w111
Appp
ssss
Performs a 16-bit x 16-bit signed multiply with a 32-bit result, which is
stored in one of the DSP engine accumulators, ACCA or ACCB. The
32-bit result is sign extended to bit 39 prior to being loaded into the target
accumulator.
The source operands are treated as integer or fractional values
depending upon the operating mode of the DSP engine (as defined by
the IF bit in CORCON<0>). The first source operand is interpreted as a
two’s complement signed value and the second source operand is
interpreted as an unsigned value.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘d’ bits select the address of the source register.
The ‘p’ bits select source Address mode 2.
The ‘A’ bit selects the destination accumulator for the product.
Note 1:
2:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
DS70157F-page 312
This instruction operates in Word mode only.
The state of the multiplier mode bits (US<1:0> in CORCON)
have no effect upon the operation of this instruction.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 1:
MUL.SU
W8
W9
Acc A
SR
W8, W9, A
Before
Instruction
F000
F000
00 0000 0000
0000
W8
W9
Acc A
SR
After
Instruction
F000
F000
FF F100 0000
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 313
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
MUL.SU
Integer 16x16-bit Signed-Unsigned Short Literal Multiply
with Accumulator Destination
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
MUL.SU
Wb,
#lit5,
A
B
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
lit5 ∈ [0 ... 31]
ACC ∈ [A, B]
Operation:
signed (Wb) * unsigned (lit5) →ACC(A or B)
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1011
Description:
1001
0www
w111
A11k
kkkk
Performs a 16-bit x 16-bit signed multiply with a 32-bit result, which is
stored in one of the DSP engine accumulators, ACCA or ACCB. The
32-bit result is sign extended to bit 39 prior to being loaded into the target
accumulator.
The source operands are treated as integer or fractional values
depending upon the operating mode of the DSP engine (as defined by
the IF bit in CORCON<0>). The first source operand is interpreted as a
two’s complement signed value and the second source operand is
interpreted as an unsigned value.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘k’ bits select the 5-bit literal value.
The ‘A’ bit selects the destination accumulator for the product.
Note 1:
2:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
MUL.SU
W8
Acc A
SR
DS70157F-page 314
This instruction operates in Word mode only.
The state of the multiplier mode bits (US<1:0> in CORCON)
have no effect upon the operation of this instruction.
W8, #0x02, A
Before
Instruction
0042
00 0000 0000
0000
W8
Acc A
SR
After
Instruction
0042
00 0000 0084
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
MUL.US
Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned-Signed Multiply
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
MUL.US
Wb,
Ws,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
dppp
ssss
Wnd
[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wnd ∈ [W0, W2, W4 ... W12]
Operation:
unsigned (Wb) * signed (Ws) →Wnd:Wnd + 1
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1011
Description:
1000
1www
wddd
Multiply the contents of Wb with the contents of Ws, and store the 32-bit
result in two successive working registers. The least significant word of
the result is stored in Wnd (which must be an even numbered working
register), and the most significant word of the result is stored in Wnd + 1.
The Wb operand is interpreted as an unsigned integer. The Ws operand
and the result Wnd are interpreted as a two’s complement signed
integer. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb and Wnd.
Register direct or register indirect addressing may be used for Ws.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘d’ bits select the address of the lower destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
This instruction operates in Word mode only.
Since the product of the multiplication is 32 bits, Wnd must be
an even working register. See Figure 4-3 for information on
how double words are aligned in memory.
Wnd may not be W14, since W15<0> is fixed to zero.
The IF bit and the US<1:0> bits in the CORCON register have
no effect on this operation.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 315
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 1:
MUL.US
W0, [W1], W2
Before
Instruction
W0
C000
W1
2300
W2
00DA
W3
CC25
Data 2300
F000
SR
0000
Example 2:
MUL.US
After
Instruction
W0
C000
W1
2300
W2
0000
W3
F400
Data 2300
F000
SR
0000
W6, [W5++], W10 ; Mult. W6*[W5] (unsigned-signed)
; Store the result to W10:W11
; Post-Increment W5
Before
Instruction
W5
0C00
W6
FFFF
W10
0908
W11
6EEB
Data 0C00
7FFF
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 316
; Multiply W0*[W1] (unsigned-signed)
; Store the result to W2:W3
After
Instruction
W5
0C02
W6
FFFF
W10
8001
W11
7FFE
Data 0C00
7FFF
SR
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned-Signed Multiply with
Accumulator Destination
MUL.US
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
MUL.US
Wb,
Ws,
A
[Ws],
B
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
ACC ∈ [A, B]
Operation:
unsigned (Wb) * signed (Ws) →ACC(A or B)
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1011
Description:
1000
0www
w111
Appp
ssss
Performs a 16-bit x 16-bit signed multiply with a 32-bit result, which is
stored in one of the DSP engine accumulators, ACCA or ACCB. The
32-bit result is sign extended to bit 39 prior to being loaded into the target
accumulator.
The source operands are treated as integer or fractional values
depending upon the operating mode of the DSP engine (as defined by
the IF bit in CORCON<0>). The first source operand is interpreted as a
unsigned value and the second source operand is interpreted as a two’s
complement signed value.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘d’ bits select the address of the source register.
The ‘p’ bits select source Address mode 2.
The ‘A’ bit selects the destination accumulator for the product.
Note 1:
2:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
This instruction operates in Word mode only.
The state of the multiplier mode bits (US<1:0> in CORCON)
have no effect upon the operation of this instruction.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 317
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 1:
MUL.US
W0
W1
Acc B
SR
DS70157F-page 318
W0, W1, B
Before
Instruction
C000
F000
00 0000 0000
0000
W0
W1
Acc B
SR
After
Instruction
0000
F000
FF F400 0000
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
MUL.UU
Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned Short Literal Multiply
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
lit5 ∈ [0 ... 31]
Wnd ∈ [W0, W2, W4 ... W12]
Operation:
unsigned (Wb) * unsigned lit5 →Wnd:Wnd + 1
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
Description:
1011
MUL.UU
1000
Wb,
0www
#lit5,
wddd
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
d11k
kkkk
Wnd
Multiply the contents of Wb with the 5-bit literal, and store the 32-bit
result in two successive working registers. The least significant word of
the result is stored in Wnd (which must be an even numbered working
register), and the most significant word of the result is stored in Wnd + 1.
Both operands and the result are interpreted as unsigned integers.
Register direct addressing must be used for Wb and Wnd.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘d’ bits select the address of the lower destination register.
The ‘k’ bits define a 5-bit unsigned integer literal.
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
MUL.UU
This instruction operates in Word mode only.
Since the product of the multiplication is 32 bits, Wnd must be
an even working register. See Figure 4-3 for information on
how double words are aligned in memory.
Wnd may not be W14, since W15<0> is fixed to zero.
The IF bit and the US<1:0> bits in the CORCON register have
no effect on this operation.
W0, #0xF, W12
Before
Instruction
W0
2323
W12
4512
W13
7821
SR
0000
Example 2:
MUL.UU
W7, #0x1F, W0
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
After
Instruction
W0
2323
W12
0F0D
W13
0002
SR
0000
; Multiply W7 by literal 0x1F
; Store the result to W0:W1
After
Instruction
W0
55C0
W1
001D
W7
F240
SR
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
Before
Instruction
W0
780B
W1
3805
W7
F240
SR
0000
; Multiply W0 by literal 0xF
; Store the result to W12:W13
DS70157F-page 319
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
MUL.UU
Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned Multiply
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
MUL.UU
Wb,
Ws,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
dppp
ssss
Wnd
[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wnd ∈ [W0, W2, W4 ... W12]
Operation:
unsigned (Wb) * unsigned (Ws) →Wnd:Wnd + 1
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1011
Description:
1000
0www
wddd
Multiply the contents of Wb with the contents of Ws, and store the 32-bit
result in two successive working registers. The least significant word of
the result is stored in Wnd (which must be an even numbered working
register), and the most significant word of the result is stored in
Wnd + 1. Both source operands and the result are interpreted as
unsigned integers. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb and
Wnd. Register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘d’ bits select the address of the lower destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
DS70157F-page 320
This instruction operates in Word mode only.
Since the product of the multiplication is 32 bits, Wnd must be
an even working register. See Figure 4-3 for information on
how double words are aligned in memory.
Wnd may not be W14, since W15<0> is fixed to zero.
The IF bit and the US<1:0> bits in the CORCON register have
no effect on this operation.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 1:
Example 2:
MUL.UU
W4, W0, W2
; Multiply W4*W0 (unsigned-unsigned)
; Store the result to W2:W3
Before
Instruction
W0
FFFF
W2
2300
W3
00DA
W4
FFFF
SR
0000
After
Instruction
W0
FFFF
W2
0001
W3
FFFE
W4
FFFF
SR
0000
MUL.UU W0, [W1++], W4
; Mult. W0*[W1] (unsigned-unsigned)
; Store the result to W4:W5
; Post-Increment W1
Before
Instruction
W0
1024
W1
2300
W4
9654
W5 BDBC
Data 2300
D625
SR
0000
After
Instruction
W0
1024
W1
2302
W4
6D34
W5
0D80
Data 2300
D625
SR
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 321
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned Multiply with Accumulator
Destination
MUL.UU
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
MUL.UU
Wb,
Ws,
A
[Ws],
B
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
ACC ∈ [A, B]
Operation:
unsigned (Wb) * unsigned (Ws) →ACC(A or B)
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1011
Description:
1000
0www
w111
Appp
ssss
Performs a 16-bit x 16-bit unsigned multiply with a 32-bit result, which is
stored in one of the DSP engine accumulators, ACCA or ACCB. The
32-bit result is zero extended to bit 39 prior to being loaded into the
target accumulator.
The source operands are treated as integer or fractional values
depending upon the operating mode of the DSP engine (as defined by
the IF bit in CORCON<0>). Both source operands are treated as
unsigned values.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘d’ bits select the address of the source register.
The ‘p’ bits select source Address mode 2.
The ‘A’ bit selects the destination accumulator for the product.
Note 1:
2:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
MUL.UU
W0
W4
Acc B
SR
DS70157F-page 322
This instruction operates in Word mode only.
The state of the multiplier mode bits (US<1:0> in CORCON)
have no effect upon the operation of this instruction.
W4, W0, B
Before
Instruction
FFFFF
FFFFF
00 0000 0000
0000
W0
W4
Acc B
SR
After
Instruction
FFFFF
FFFFF
FF FFFE 0001
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned Short Literal Multiply with
Accumulator Destination
MUL.UU
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
MUL.UU
Wb,
#lit5,
A
B
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
lit5 ∈ [0 ... 31]
ACC ∈ [A, B]
Operation:
unsigned (Wb) * unsigned (lit5) →ACC(A or B)
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1011
Description:
1000
0www
w111
A11k
kkkk
Performs a 16-bit x 16-bit signed multiply with a 32-bit result, which is
stored in one of the DSP engine accumulators, ACCA or ACCB. The
32-bit result is zero extended to bit 39 prior to being loaded into the
target accumulator.
The source operands are treated as integer or fractional values
depending upon the operating mode of the DSP engine (as defined by
the IF bit in CORCON<0>). Both source operands are treated as
unsigned values.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘k’ bits select the 5-bit literal.
The ‘A’ bit selects the destination accumulator for the product.
Note 1:
2:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
MUL.UU
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
W8, #0x02, A
Before
Instruction
0042
00 0000 0000
0000
W8
Acc A
SR
After
Instruction
0042
00 0000 0084
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
W8
Acc A
SR
This instruction operates in Word mode only.
The state of the multiplier mode bits (US<1:0> in CORCON)
have no effect upon the operation of this instruction.
DS70157F-page 323
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
MULW.SS
Integer 16x16-bit Signed Multiply with 16-bit Result
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
MULW.SS
Wb,
X
Ws,
Wnd
[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wnd ∈ [W0, W2, W4 ... W12]
Operation:
signed (Wb) * signed (Ws) →Wnd
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1011
Description:
1001
1www
wddd
dppp
ssss
Multiply the contents of Wb with the contents of Ws, and store the result
in a working register, which must be an even numbered working register.
Both source operands and the result Wnd are interpreted as two’s
complement signed integers. Register direct addressing must be used
for Wb and Wnd. Register direct or register indirect addressing may be
used for Ws.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘d’ bits select the address of the lower destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
MULW.SS
W0, W1, W12
Before
Instruction
W0
9823
W1
67DC
W12
FFFF
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 324
This instruction operates in Word mode only.
Wnd must be an even working register.
Wnd may not be W14, since W15<0> is fixed to zero.
The IF bit and the US<1:0> bits in the CORCON register have
no effect on this operation.
; Multiply W0*W1
; Store the result to W12
After
Instruction
W0
9823
W1
67DC
W12
D314
SR
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 2:
MULW.SS
W2, [--W4], W0
Before
Instruction
W0
FFFF
W2
0045
W4
27FE
Data 27FC
0098
SR
0000
; Pre-decrement W4
; Multiply W2*[W4]
; Store the result to W0
After
Instruction
W0
28F8
W2
0045
W4
27FC
Data 27FC
0098
SR
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 325
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Integer 16x16-bit Signed-Unsigned Multiply with 16-bit
Result
MULW.SU
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
MUL.SU
Wb,
X
Ws,
Wnd
[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wnd ∈ [W0, W2, W4 ... W12]
Operands:
Operation:
signed (Wb) * unsigned (Ws) →Wnd
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1011
Description:
1001
0www
wddd
dppp
ssss
Multiply the contents of Wb with the contents of Ws, and store the result
in a working register, which must be an even numbered working register.
The Wb operand and the result Wnd are interpreted as a two’s
complement signed integer. The Ws operand is interpreted as an
unsigned integer. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb and
Wnd. Register direct or register indirect addressing may be used for Ws.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘d’ bits select the address of the lower destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
MULW.SU
W8, [W9], W0
Before
Instruction
W0
68DC
W8
F000
W9
178C
Data 178C
F000
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 326
This instruction operates in Word mode only.
Wnd must be an even working register.
Wnd may not be W14, since W15<0> is fixed to zero.
The IF bit and the US<1:0> bits in the CORCON register have
no effect on this operation.
; Multiply W8*[W9]
; Store the result to W0
After
Instruction
W0
0000
W8
F000
W9
178C
Data 178C
F000
SR
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 2:
MULW.SU
W2, [++W3], W4 ; Pre-Increment W3
; Multiply W2*[W3]
; Store the result to W4
Before
Instruction
W2
0040
W3
0280
W4
1819
Data 0282
0068
SR
0000
After
Instruction
W2
0040
W3
0282
W4
1A00
Data 0282
0068
SR
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 327
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Integer 16x16-bit Signed-Unsigned Short Literal Multiply
with 16-bit Result
MULW.SU
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
lit5 ∈ [0 ... 31]
Wnd ∈ [W0, W2, W4 ... W12]
Operation:
signed (Wb) * unsigned (lit5) →Wnd
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
Description:
1011
MULW.SU
1001
Wb,
0www
X
#lit5,
wddd
Wnd
d11k
kkkk
Multiply the contents of Wb with a 5-bit literal value, and store the result
in a working register, which must be an even numbered working register.
The Wb operand and the result Wnd are interpreted as a two’s
complement signed integer. Register direct addressing must be used for
Wb and Wnd.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘d’ bits select the address of the lower destination register.
The ‘k’ bits select the 5-bit literal value.
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
MULW.SU
W8, #0x04, W0
Before
Instruction
W0
68DC
W8
1000
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 328
This instruction operates in Word mode only.
Wnd must be an even working register.
Wnd may not be W14, since W15<0> is fixed to zero.
The IF bit and the US<1:0> bits in the CORCON register have
no effect on this operation.
; Multiply W8 * #0x04
; Store the result to W0
After
Instruction
W0
4000
W8
1000
SR
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
MULW.US
Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned-Signed Multiply with 16-bit Result
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
MULW.US
Wb,
X
Ws,
Wnd
[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wnd ∈ [W0, W2, W4 ... W12]
Operation:
unsigned (Wb) * signed (Ws) →Wnd
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1011
Description:
1000
1www
wddd
dppp
ssss
Multiply the contents of Wb with the contents of Ws, and store the result
in a working register, which must be an even numbered working register.
The Wb operand is interpreted as an unsigned integer. The Ws operand
and the result Wnd are interpreted as a two’s complement signed
integer. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb and Wnd.
Register direct or register indirect addressing may be used for Ws.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘d’ bits select the address of the lower destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
This instruction operates in Word mode only.
Wnd must be an even working register.
Wnd may not be W14, since W15<0> is fixed to zero.
The IF bit and the US<1:0> bits in the CORCON register have
no effect on this operation.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
MULW.US
W0, [W1], W2 ; Multiply W0*[W1] (unsigned-signed)
; Store the result to W2
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
5
After
Instruction
W0
C000
W1
2300
W2
0000
Data 2300
F000
SR
0000
Instruction
Descriptions
Before
Instruction
W0
C000
W1
2300
W2
00DA
Data 2300
F000
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 329
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 2:
MULW.US
W6, [W5++], W10
Before
Instruction
W5
0C00
W6
FFFF
W10
0908
Data 0C00
7FFF
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 330
; Mult. W6*[W5] (unsigned-signed)
; Store the result to W10
; Post-Increment W5
After
Instruction
W5
0C02
W6
FFFF
W10
8001
Data 0C00
7FFF
SR
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
MULW.UU
Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned Multiply with 16-bit Result
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
MULW.UU
Wb,
X
Ws,
Wnd
[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wnd ∈ [W0, W2, W4 ... W12]
Operation:
unsigned (Wb) * unsigned (Ws) →Wnd
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1011
Description:
1000
0www
wddd
dppp
ssss
Multiply the contents of Wb with the contents of Ws, and store the result
in a working registers, which must be an even numbered working
register). Both source operands and the result are interpreted as
unsigned integers. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb and
Wnd. Register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘d’ bits select the address of the lower destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
This instruction operates in Word mode only.
Wnd must be an even working register.
Wnd may not be W14, since W15<0> is fixed to zero.
The IF bit and the US<1:0> bits in the CORCON register have
no effect on this operation.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
MULW.UU
W4, W0, W2 ; Multiply W4*W0 (unsigned-unsigned)
; Store the result to W2
Before
Instruction
W0
FFFF
W2
2300
W4
FFFF
SR
0000
After
Instruction
W0
FFFF
W2
0001
W4
FFFF
SR
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 331
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned Short Literal Multiply with
16-bit Result
MULW.UU
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
lit5 ∈ [0 ... 31]
Wnd ∈ [W0, W2, W4 ... W12]
Operation:
unsigned (Wb) * unsigned →Wnd
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
Description:
1011
MULW.UU
1000
Wb,
0www
X
#lit5,
wddd
Wnd
d11k
kkkk
Multiply the contents of Wb with a 5-bit literal value, and store the result
in a working registers, which must be an even numbered working
register). Both source operands and the result are interpreted as
unsigned integers. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb and
Wnd.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘d’ bits select the address of the lower destination register.
The ‘k’ bits select the 5-bit literal value.
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
MULW.UU
W4, #0x04, W2
Before
Instruction
W2
2300
W4
1000
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 332
This instruction operates in Word mode only.
Wnd must be an even working register.
Wnd may not be W14, since W15<0> is fixed to zero.
The IF bit and the US<1:0> bits in the CORCON register have
no effect on this operation.
; Multiply W4*W0 (unsigned-unsigned)
; Store the result to W2
After
Instruction
W2
4000
W4
1000
SR
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
NEG
Negate f
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
f ∈ [0 ... 8191]
Operation:
(f) + 1 →destination designated by D
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
1110
Description:
NEG{.B}
1110
f
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
ffff
ffff
{,WREG}
0BDf
ffff
Compute the two’s complement of the contents of the file register and
place the result in the destination register. The optional WREG operand
determines the destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is
stored in WREG. If WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file
register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘D’ bit selects the destination (‘0’ for WREG, ‘1’ for file register).
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1:
2:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
The WREG is set to working register W0.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
NEG.B
0x880, WREG
Before
Instruction
WREG (W0)
9080
Data 0880
2355
SR
0000
NEG 0x1200
Example 2:
Before
Instruction
Data 1200
8923
SR
0000
Implemented in:
Syntax:
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
After
Instruction
WREG (W0) 90AB
Data 0880
2355
SR
0008 (N = 1)
; Negate (0x1200) (Word mode)
After
Instruction
Data 1200 76DD
SR
0000
5
Negate Ws
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
NEG{.B}
Ws,
Wd
[Ws],
[Wd]
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
DS70157F-page 333
Instruction
Descriptions
NEG
; Negate (0x880) (Byte mode)
; Store result to WREG
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
NEG
Negate Ws
[Ws++],
Operands:
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Ws) + 1 →Wd
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
1110
Description:
1010
[Wd++]
[Ws--],
[Wd--]
[++Ws],
[++Wd]
[--Ws],
[--Wd]
0Bqq
qddd
dppp
ssss
Compute the two’s complement of the contents of the source register Ws
and place the result in the destination register Wd. Either register direct
or indirect addressing may be used for both Ws and Wd.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘q’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
Note 1:
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1: NEG.B W3, [W4++] ; Negate W3 and store to [W4] (Byte mode)
; Post-increment W4
Before
Instruction
W3
7839
W4
1005
Data 1004
2355
SR
0000
Example 2:
NEG
[W2++], [--W4]
Before
Instruction
W2
0900
W4
1002
Data 0900
870F
Data 1000
5105
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 334
After
Instruction
W3
7839
W4
1006
Data 1004 C755
SR
0008 (N = 1)
; Pre-decrement W4 (Word mode)
; Negate [W2] and store to [W4]
; Post-increment W2
After
Instruction
W2
0902
W4
1000
Data 0900
870F
Data 1000
78F1
SR
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
NEG
Negate Accumulator
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Acc ∈ [A,B]
Operation:
If (Acc = A):
-ACCA →ACCA
Else:
-ACCB →ACCB
Status Affected:
OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB
Encoding:
NEG
PIC24E
1100
Description:
1011
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
X
0000
0000
0000
Acc
A001
Compute the two’s complement of the contents of the specified
accumulator. Regardless of the Saturation mode, this instruction
operates on all 40 bits of the accumulator.
The ‘A’ bit specifies the selected accumulator.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
NEG
ACCA
CORCON
SR
Example 2:
NEG
ACCB
CORCON
SR
A
; Negate ACCA
; Store result to ACCA
; CORCON = 0x0000 (no saturation)
Before
Instruction
00 3290 59C8
0000
0000
B
ACCA
CORCON
SR
After
Instruction
FF CD6F A638
0000
0000
; Negate ACCB
; Store result to ACCB
; CORCON = 0x00C0 (normal saturation)
Before
Instruction
FF F230 10DC
00C0
0000
ACCB
CORCON
SR
After
Instruction
00 0DCF EF24
00C0
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 335
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
NOP
No Operation
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
0000
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
None
Operation:
No Operation
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
NOP
0000
Description:
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
No Operation is performed.
The ‘x’ bits can take any value.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
NOP
PC
SR
Example 2:
; execute no operation
Before
Instruction
00 1092
0000
NOP
PC
SR
After
Instruction
PC
00 1094
SR
0000
; execute no operation
Before
Instruction
00 08AE
0000
NOPR
After
Instruction
PC
00 08B0
SR
0000
No Operation
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
None
Operation:
No Operation
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
Description:
1111
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
NOPR
1111
No Operation is performed.
The ‘x’ bits can take any value.
DS70157F-page 336
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 1:
NOPR
PC
SR
Example 2:
; execute no operation
Before
Instruction
00 2430
0000
NOPR
PC
SR
After
Instruction
PC
00 2432
SR
0000
; execute no operation
Before
Instruction
00 1466
0000
POP
After
Instruction
PC
00 1468
SR
0000
Pop TOS to f
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
ffff
ffff
ffff
fff0
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
f ∈ [0 ... 65534]
Operation:
(W15) – 2 →W15
(TOS) →f
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1111
Description:
POP
1001
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
f
The Stack Pointer (W15) is pre-decremented by 2 and the Top-of-Stack
(TOS) word is written to the specified file register, which may reside
anywhere in the lower 32K words of data memory.
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1:
2:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
POP
0x1230
Before
Instruction
W15
1006
Data 1004 A401
Data 1230
2355
SR
0000
This instruction operates in Word mode only.
The file register address must be word-aligned.
; Pop TOS to 0x1230
After
Instruction
W15
1004
Data 1004 A401
Data 1230 A401
SR
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 337
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 2:
POP
0x880
Before
Instruction
W15
2000
Data 0880 E3E1
Data 1FFE A090
SR
0000
POP
; Pop TOS to 0x880
After
Instruction
W15 1FFE
Data 0880 A090
Data 1FFE A090
SR
0000
Pop TOS to Wd
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
hddd
d100
1111
{label:}
POP
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
Wd
[Wd]
[Wd++]
[Wd--]
[--Wd]
[++Wd]
[Wd+Wb]
Operands:
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(W15) – 2 →W15
(TOS) →Wd
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
0111
Description:
1www
w0hh
The Stack Pointer (W15) is pre-decremented by 2 and the Top-of-Stack
(TOS) word is written to Wd. Either register direct or indirect addressing
may be used for Wd.
The ‘w’ bits define the offset register Wb.
The ‘h’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
Note 1:
2:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
POP
W4
Before
Instruction
W4 EDA8
W15
1008
Data 1006 C45A
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 338
This instruction operates in Word mode only.
This instruction is a specific version of the “MOV Ws, Wd”
instruction (MOV [--W15], Wd). It reverse assembles as
MOV.
; Pop TOS to W4
After
Instruction
W4 C45A
W15
1006
Data 1006 C45A
SR
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 2:
POP
[++W10]
; Pre-increment W10
; Pop TOS to [W10]
Before
Instruction
W10 0E02
W15
1766
Data 0E04 E3E1
Data 1764 C7B5
SR
0000
After
Instruction
W10 0E04
W15
1764
Data 0E04 C7B5
Data 1764 C7B5
SR
0000
POP.D
Double Pop TOS to Wnd:Wnd+1
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
0ddd
0100
1111
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wnd ∈ [W0, W2, W4, ... W14]
Operation:
(W15) – 2 →W15
(TOS) →Wnd + 1
(W15) – 2 →W15
(TOS) →Wnd
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1011
Description:
POP.D
1110
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
Wnd
0000
A double word is POPped from the Top-of-Stack (TOS) and stored to
Wnd:Wnd + 1. The most significant word is stored to Wnd + 1, and the
least significant word is stored to Wnd. Since a double word is POPped,
the Stack Pointer (W15) gets decremented by 4.
The ‘d’ bits select the address of the destination register pair.
Note 1:
2:
3:
Words:
1
Cycles:
2
Example 1:
POP.D
W6
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
; Double pop TOS to W6
After
Instruction
W6
3210
W7
7654
W15 084C
Data 084C
3210
Data 084E
7654
SR
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
Before
Instruction
W6 07BB
W7 89AE
W15
0850
Data 084C
3210
Data 084E
7654
SR
0000
This instruction operates on double words. See Figure 4-3 for
information on how double words are aligned in memory.
Wnd must be an even working register.
This instruction is a specific version of the “MOV.D Ws, Wnd”
instruction (MOV.D [--W15], Wnd). It reverse assembles as
MOV.D.
DS70157F-page 339
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 2:
POP.D
W0
; Double pop TOS to W0
Before
Instruction
W0 673E
W1 DD23
W15 0BBC
Data 0BB8 791C
Data 0BBA D400
SR
0000
POP.S
After
Instruction
W0 791C
W1 D400
W15 0BB8
Data 0BB8 791C
Data 0BBA D400
SR
0000
Pop Shadow Registers
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
1000
0000
0000
0000
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
None
Operation:
POP shadow registers
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
1111
Description:
POP.S
1110
The values in the shadow registers are copied into their respective
primary registers. The following registers are affected: W0-W3, and the
C, Z, OV, N and DC STATUS register flags.
Note 1:
2:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
POP.S
The shadow registers are not directly accessible. They may
only be accessed with PUSH.S and POP.S.
The shadow registers are only one-level deep.
; Pop the shadow registers
; (See PUSH.S Example 1 for contents of shadows)
Before
Instruction
W0 07BB
W1 03FD
W2
9610
W3
7249
SR 00E0 (IPL = 7)
Note:
DS70157F-page 340
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
After
Instruction
W0
0000
W1
1000
W2
2000
W3
3000
SR 00E1 (IPL = 7, C = 1)
After instruction execution, contents of shadow registers are NOT modified.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
PUSH
Push f to TOS
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
ffff
ffff
ffff
fff0
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
f ∈ [0 ... 65534]
Operation:
(f) →(TOS)
(W15) + 2 →W15
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1111
Description:
PUSH
1000
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
f
The contents of the specified file register are written to the Top-of-Stack
(TOS) location and then the Stack Pointer (W15) is incremented by 2.
The file register may reside anywhere in the lower 32K words of data
memory.
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1:
2:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
This instruction operates in Word mode only.
The file register address must be word-aligned.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
PUSH
0x2004
Before
Instruction
W15 0B00
Data 0B00 791C
Data 2004 D400
SR
0000
Example 2:
PUSH
0xC0E
Before
Instruction
W15
0920
Data 0920
0000
Data 0C0E 67AA
SR
0000
; Push (0x2004) to TOS
After
Instruction
W15 0B02
Data 0B00 D400
Data 2004 D400
SR
0000
; Push (0xC0E) to TOS
After
Instruction
W15
0922
Data 0920 67AA
Data 2004 67AA
SR
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 341
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
PUSH
Push Ws to TOS
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
X
X
X
{label:}
PUSH
dsPIC30F dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
X
1111
1ggg
ssss
Ws
[Ws]
[Ws++]
[Ws--]
[--Ws]
[++Ws]
[Ws+Wb]
Operands:
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Ws) →(TOS)
(W15) + 2 →W15
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
0111
Description:
1www
w001
The contents of Ws are written to the Top-of-Stack (TOS) location and
then the Stack Pointer (W15) is incremented by 2.
The ‘w’ bits define the offset register Wb.
The ‘g’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note 1:
2:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
PUSH
W2
Before
Instruction
W2
6889
W15
1566
Data 1566
0000
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 342
This instruction operates in Word mode only.
This instruction is a specific version of the “MOV Ws, Wd”
instruction (MOV Ws, [W15++]). It reverse assembles as
MOV.
; Push W2 to TOS
After
Instruction
W2
6889
W15
1568
Data 1566
6889
SR
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 2:
PUSH
[W5+W10]
Before
Instruction
W5
1200
W10
0044
W15
0806
Data 0806
216F
Data 1244 B20A
SR
0000
PUSH.D
; Push [W5+W10] to TOS
After
Instruction
W5
1200
W10
0044
W15
0808
Data 0806 B20A
Data 1244 B20A
SR
0000
Double Push Wns:Wns+1 to TOS
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
1001
1111
1000
sss0
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wns ∈ [W0, W2, W4 ... W14]
Operation:
(Wns) →(TOS)
(W15) + 2 →W15
(Wns + 1) →(TOS)
(W15) + 2 →W15
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
Description:
1011
PUSH.D
1110
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
Wns
A double word (Wns:Wns + 1) is PUSHed to the Top-of-Stack (TOS).
The least significant word (Wns) is PUSHed to the TOS first, and the
most significant word (Wns + 1) is PUSHed to the TOS last. Since a
double word is PUSHed, the Stack Pointer (W15) gets incremented by 4.
The ‘s’ bits select the address of the source register pair.
Note 1:
2:
3:
Words:
1
Cycles:
2
Example 1:
PUSH.D
W6
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
; Push W6:W7 to TOS
After
Instruction
W6 C451
W7
3380
W15
1244
Data 1240 C451
Data 1242
3380
SR
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
Before
Instruction
W6 C451
W7
3380
W15
1240
Data 1240 B004
Data 1242
0891
SR
0000
This instruction operates on double words. See Figure 4-3 for
information on how double words are aligned in memory.
Wns must be an even working register.
This instruction is a specific version of the “MOV.D Wns, Wd”
instruction (MOV.D Wns, [W15++]). It reverse assembles
as MOV.D.
DS70157F-page 343
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 2:
PUSH.D
W10
Before
Instruction
W10 80D3
W11
4550
W15 0C08
Data 0C08 79B5
Data 0C0A 008E
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 344
; Push W10:W11 to TOS
After
Instruction
W10 80D3
W11
4550
W15 0C0C
Data 0C08 80D3
Data 0C0A
4550
SR
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
PUSH.S
Push Shadow Registers
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
1010
0000
0000
0000
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
None
Operation:
PUSH shadow registers
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
PUSH.S
1111
Description:
1110
The contents of the primary registers are copied into their respective
shadow registers. The following registers are shadowed: W0-W3, and
the C, Z, OV, N and DC STATUS register flags.
Note 1:
2:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
PUSH.S
The shadow registers are not directly accessible. They may
only be accessed with PUSH.S and POP.S.
The shadow registers are only one-level deep.
; Push primary registers into shadow registers
Before
Instruction
W0
0000
W1
1000
W2
2000
W3
3000
SR
0001 (C = 1)
Note:
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
After
Instruction
W0
0000
W1
1000
W2
2000
W3
3000
SR
0001 (C = 1)
After an instruction execution, contents of the shadow registers are updated.
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 345
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
PWRSAV
Enter Power Saving Mode
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
0100
0000
0000
000k
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
lit1 ∈ [0,1]
Operation:
0 →WDT count register
0 →WDT prescaler A count
0 →WDT prescaler B count
0 →WDTO (RCON<4>)
0 →SLEEP (RCON<3>)
0 →IDLE (RCON<2>)
If (lit1 = 0):
Enter Sleep mode
Else:
Enter Idle mode
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
Description:
1111
PWRSAV
1110
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
#lit1
Place the processor into the specified Power Saving mode. If lit1 = ‘0’,
Sleep mode is entered. In Sleep mode, the clock to the CPU and
peripherals are shutdown. If an on-chip oscillator is being used, it is also
shutdown. If lit1 = ‘1’, Idle mode is entered. In Idle mode, the clock to the
CPU shuts down, but the clock source remains active and the
peripherals continue to operate.
This instruction resets the Watchdog Timer Count register and the
Prescaler Count registers. In addition, the WDTO, Sleep and Idle flags of
the Reset System and Control register (RCON) are reset.
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
PWRSAV
#0
The processor will exit from Idle or Sleep through an interrupt,
processor Reset or Watchdog Time-out. See the specific
device data sheet for details.
If awakened from Idle mode, Idle bit (RCON<2>) is set to ‘1’
and the clock source is applied to the CPU.
If awakened from Sleep mode, Sleep bit (RCON<3>) is set to
‘1’ and the clock source is started.
If awakened from a Watchdog Time-out, WDTO bit
(RCON<4>) is set to ‘1’.
; Enter SLEEP mode
Before
Instruction
SR
0040 (IPL = 2)
Example 2:
PWRSAV
#1
; Enter IDLE mode
Before
Instruction
SR
0020 (IPL = 1)
DS70157F-page 346
After
Instruction
SR
0040 (IPL = 2)
After
Instruction
SR
0020 (IPL = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
RCALL
Relative Call
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
RCALL
Operands:
Expr may be an absolute address, label or expression.
Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where Slit16 ∈ [-32768 ... 32767].
Operation:
(PC) + 2 →PC
(PC<15:0>) →(TOS)
(W15) + 2 →W15
(PC<22:16>) →(TOS)
(W15) + 2 →W15
(PC) + (2 * Slit16) →PC
NOP →Instruction Register
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
0000
Description:
0111
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Expr
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
Relative subroutine call with a range of 32K program words forward or back
from the current PC. Before the call is made, the return address (PC + 2) is
PUSHed onto the stack. After the return address is stacked, the
sign-extended 17-bit value (2 * Slit16) is added to the contents of the PC
and the result is stored in the PC.
The ‘n’ bits are a signed literal that specifies the size of the relative call (in
program words) from (PC + 2).
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
2
Example 1:
When possible, this instruction should be used instead of CALL,
since it only consumes one word of program memory.
012004
012006
.
.
012458 _Task1:
01245A
PC
W15
Data 0810
Data 0812
SR
Before
Instruction
01 2004
0810
FFFF
FFFF
0000
RCALL
ADD
...
...
SUB
...
_Task1
W0, W1, W2
; Call _Task1
W0, W2, W3
; _Task1 subroutine
PC
W15
Data 0810
Data 0812
SR
After
Instruction
01 2458
0814
2006
0001
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 347
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 2:
00620E
006210
.
.
007000 _Init:
007002
PC
W15
Data 0C50
Data 0C52
SR
DS70157F-page 348
Before
Instruction
00 620E
0C50
FFFF
FFFF
0000
RCALL
MOV
...
...
CLR
...
_Init
W0, [W4++]
; Call _Init
W2
; _Init subroutine
PC
W15
Data 0C50
Data 0C52
SR
After
Instruction
00 7000
0C54
6210
0000
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
RCALL
Relative Call
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Expr may be an absolute address, label or expression.
Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where Slit16 ∈ [-32768 ... 32767].
Operation:
(PC) + 2 →PC
(PC<15:1>) →TOS<15:1>, SFA bit →TOS<0>
(W15) + 2 →W15
(PC<22:16>) →(TOS)
(W15) + 2 →W15
0 →SFA bit
(PC) + (2 * Slit16) →PC
NOP →Instruction Register
Status Affected:
SFA
Encoding:
RCALL
X
0000
Description:
0111
Expr
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
Relative subroutine call with a range of 32K program words forward or back
from the current PC. Before the call is made, the return address (PC + 2) is
PUSHed onto the stack. After the return address is stacked, the
sign-extended 17-bit value (2 * Slit16) is added to the contents of the PC
and the result is stored in the PC.
The ‘n’ bits are a signed literal that specifies the size of the relative call (in
program words) from (PC + 2).
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
4
Example 1:
When possible, this instruction should be used instead of CALL,
since it only consumes one word of program memory.
012004
012006
.
.
012458 _Task1:
01245A
PC
W15
Data 0810
Data 0812
SR
Before
Instruction
01 2004
0810
FFFF
FFFF
0000
RCALL
ADD
...
...
SUB
...
_Task1
W0, W1, W2
; Call _Task1
W0, W2, W3
; _Task1 subroutine
PC
W15
Data 0810
Data 0812
SR
After
Instruction
01 2458
0814
2006
0001
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 349
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 2:
00620E
006210
.
.
007000 _Init:
007002
PC
W15
Data 0C50
Data 0C52
SR
DS70157F-page 350
Before
Instruction
00 620E
0C50
FFFF
FFFF
0000
RCALL
MOV
...
...
CLR
...
_Init
W0, [W4++]
; Call _Init
W2
; _Init subroutine
PC
W15
Data 0C50
Data 0C52
SR
After
Instruction
00 7000
0C54
6210
0000
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
RCALL
Computed Relative Call
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wn ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(PC) + 2 →PC
(PC<15:0>) →(TOS)
(W15) + 2 →W15
(PC<22:16>) →(TOS)
(W15) + 2 →W15
(PC) + (2 * (Wn)) →PC
NOP →Instruction Register
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
0000
Description:
RCALL
PIC24E
0001
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
0000
0000
Wn
0010
ssss
Computed, relative subroutine call specified by the working register Wn. The
range of the call is 32K program words forward or back from the current PC.
Before the call is made, the return address (PC + 2) is PUSHed onto the
stack. After the return address is stacked, the sign-extended 17-bit value (2 *
(Wn)) is added to the contents of the PC and the result is stored in the PC.
Register direct addressing must be used for Wn.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Words:
1
Cycles:
2
Example 1:
00FF8C
00FF8E
.
.
010008
01000A
01000C
PC
W6
W15
Data 1004
Data 1006
SR
EX1:
Before
Instruction
01 000A
FFC0
1004
98FF
2310
0000
INC
...
...
...
W2, W3
; Destination of RCALL
RCALL
MOVE
W6
W4, [W10]
; RCALL with W6
PC
W6
W15
Data 1004
Data 1006
SR
After
Instruction
00 FF8C
FFC0
1008
000C
0001
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 351
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 2:
000302
000304
.
.
000450
000452
PC
W2
W15
Data 1004
Data 1006
SR
DS70157F-page 352
EX2:
Before
Instruction
00 0302
00A6
1004
32BB
901A
0000
RCALL
FF1L
...
...
CLR
...
W2
W0, W1
; RCALL with W2
W2
; Destination of RCALL
PC
W2
W15
Data 1004
Data 1006
SR
After
Instruction
00 0450
00A6
1008
0304
0000
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
RCALL
Computed Relative Call
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wn ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(PC) + 2 →PC
(PC<15:1>) →TOS<15:1>, SFA bit →TOS<0>
(W15) + 2 →W15
(PC<22:16>) →(TOS)
(W15) + 2 →W15
0 →SFA bit
(PC) + (2 * (Wn)) →PC
NOP →Instruction Register
Status Affected:
SFA
Encoding:
0000
Description:
RCALL
X
0001
Wn
0000
0010
0000
ssss
Computed, relative subroutine call specified by the working register Wn. The
range of the call is 32K program words forward or back from the current PC.
Before the call is made, the return address (PC + 2) is PUSHed onto the
stack. After the return address is stacked, the sign-extended 17-bit value (2 *
(Wn)) is added to the contents of the PC and the result is stored in the PC.
Register direct addressing must be used for Wn.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Words:
1
Cycles:
4
Example 1:
00FF8C
00FF8E
.
.
010008
01000A
01000C
PC
W6
W15
Data 1004
Data 1006
SR
EX1:
Before
Instruction
01 000A
FFC0
1004
98FF
2310
0000
INC
...
...
...
W2, W3
; Destination of RCALL
RCALL
MOVE
W6
W4, [W10]
; RCALL with W6
PC
W6
W15
Data 1004
Data 1006
SR
After
Instruction
00 FF8C
FFC0
1008
000C
0001
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 353
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 2:
000302
000304
.
.
000450
000452
PC
W2
W15
Data 1004
Data 1006
SR
DS70157F-page 354
EX2:
Before
Instruction
00 0302
00A6
1004
32BB
901A
0000
RCALL
FF1L
...
...
CLR
...
W2
W0, W1
; RCALL with W2
W2
; Destination of RCALL
PC
W2
W15
Data 1004
Data 1006
SR
After
Instruction
00 0450
00A6
1008
0304
0000
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
REPEAT
Repeat Next Instruction ‘lit14 + 1’ Times
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
lit14 ∈ [0 ... 16383]
Operation:
(lit14) →RCOUNT
(PC) + 2 →PC
Enable Code Looping
Status Affected:
RA
Encoding:
0000
Description:
REPEAT
1001
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
kkkk
kkkk
#lit14
00kk
kkkk
Repeat the instruction immediately following the REPEAT instruction
(lit14 + 1) times. The repeated instruction (or target instruction) is held in
the instruction register for all iterations and is only fetched once.
When this instruction executes, the RCOUNT register is loaded with the
repeat count value specified in the instruction. RCOUNT is decremented
with each execution of the target instruction. When RCOUNT equals
zero, the target instruction is executed one more time, and then normal
instruction execution continues with the instruction following the target
instruction.
The ‘k’ bits are an unsigned literal that specifies the loop count.
Special Features, Restrictions:
1. When the repeat literal is ‘0’, REPEAT has the effect of a NOP and
the RA bit is not set.
2. The target REPEAT instruction cannot be:
• an instruction that changes program flow
• a DO, DISI, LNK, MOV.D, PWRSAV, REPEAT or UNLK
instruction
• a 2-word instruction
Unexpected results may occur if these target instructions are used.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
000452
000454
PC
RCOUNT
SR
The REPEAT and target instruction are interruptible.
REPEAT #9
ADD
[W0++], W1, [W2++]
Before
Instruction
00 0452
0000
0000
; Execute ADD 10 times
; Vector update
After
Instruction
PC
00 0454
RCOUNT
0009
SR
0010 (RA = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 355
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 2:
00089E
0008A0
PC
RCOUNT
SR
DS70157F-page 356
REPEAT
CLR
Before
Instruction
00 089E
0000
0000
#0x3FF
[W6++]
; Execute CLR 1024 times
; Clear the scratch space
After
Instruction
PC
00 08A0
RCOUNT
03FF
SR
0010 (RA = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
REPEAT
Repeat Next Instruction ‘lit15 + 1’ Times
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
lit15 ∈ [0 ... 32767]
Operation:
(lit15) →RCOUNT
(PC) + 2 →PC
Enable Code Looping
Status Affected:
RA
Encoding:
0000
Description:
REPEAT
1001
X
#lit15
0kkk
kkkk
kkkk
kkkk
Repeat the instruction immediately following the REPEAT instruction
(lit15 + 1) times. The repeated instruction (or target instruction) is held in
the instruction register for all iterations and is only fetched once.
When this instruction executes, the RCOUNT register is loaded with the
repeat count value specified in the instruction. RCOUNT is decremented
with each execution of the target instruction. When RCOUNT equals
zero, the target instruction is executed one more time, and then normal
instruction execution continues with the instruction following the target
instruction.
The ‘k’ bits are an unsigned literal that specifies the loop count.
Special Features, Restrictions:
1. When the repeat literal is ‘0’, REPEAT has the effect of a NOP and
the RA bit is not set.
2. The target REPEAT instruction cannot be:
• an instruction that changes program flow
• a DISI, LNK, MOV.D, PWRSAV, REPEAT or UNLK
instruction
• a 2-word instruction
Unexpected results may occur if these target instructions are used.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
000452
000454
PC
RCOUNT
SR
The REPEAT and target instruction are interruptible.
REPEAT #9
ADD
[W0++], W1, [W2++]
Before
Instruction
00 0452
0000
0000
; Execute ADD 10 times
; Vector update
After
Instruction
PC
00 0454
RCOUNT
0009
SR
0010 (RA = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 357
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 2:
00089E
0008A0
PC
RCOUNT
SR
DS70157F-page 358
REPEAT
CLR
Before
Instruction
00 089E
0000
0000
#0x3FF
[W6++]
; Execute CLR 1024 times
; Clear the scratch space
After
Instruction
PC
00 08A0
RCOUNT
03FF
SR
0010 (RA = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
REPEAT
Repeat Next Instruction Wn+1 Times
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
X
X
PIC24E
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wn ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Wn<13:0>) →RCOUNT
(PC) + 2 →PC
Enable Code Looping
Status Affected:
RA
Encoding:
0000
Description:
REPEAT
1001
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
0000
0000
Wn
1000
ssss
Repeat the instruction immediately following the REPEAT instruction
(Wn<13:0>) times. The instruction to be repeated (or target instruction)
is held in the instruction register for all iterations and is only fetched
once.
When this instruction executes, the RCOUNT register is loaded with the
lower 14 bits of Wn. RCOUNT is decremented with each execution of
the target instruction. When RCOUNT equals zero, the target instruction
is executed one more time, and then normal instruction execution
continues with the instruction following the target instruction.
The ‘s’ bits specify the Wn register that contains the repeat count.
Special Features, Restrictions:
1. When (Wn) = 0, REPEAT has the effect of a NOP and the RA bit is
not set.
2. The target REPEAT instruction cannot be:
• an instruction that changes program flow
• a DO, DISI, LNK, MOV.D, PWRSAV, REPEAT or ULNK
instruction
• a 2-word instruction
Unexpected results may occur if these target instructions are used.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
000A26
000A28
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Before
Instruction
00 0A26
0023
0000
0000
W4
[W0++], [W2++]
; Execute COM (W4+1) times
; Vector complement
PC
W4
RCOUNT
SR
After
Instruction
00 0A28
0023
0023
0010 (RA = 1)
DS70157F-page 359
5
Instruction
Descriptions
PC
W4
RCOUNT
SR
REPEAT
COM
The REPEAT and target instruction are interruptible.
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 2:
00089E
0008A0
PC
W10
RCOUNT
SR
DS70157F-page 360
REPEAT
TBLRDL
Before
Instruction
00 089E
00FF
0000
0000
W10
; Execute TBLRD (W10+1) times
[W2++], [W3++] ; Decrement (0x840)
After
Instruction
PC
00 08A0
W10
00FF
RCOUNT
00FF
SR
0010 (RA = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
REPEAT
Repeat Next Instruction Wn+1 Times
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wn ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Wn) →RCOUNT
(PC) + 2 →PC
Enable Code Looping
Status Affected:
RA
Encoding:
0000
Description:
REPEAT
1001
X
Wn
1000
0000
0000
ssss
Repeat the instruction immediately following the REPEAT instruction
(Wn) times. The instruction to be repeated (or target instruction) is held
in the instruction register for all iterations and is only fetched once.
When this instruction executes, the RCOUNT register is loaded with Wn.
RCOUNT is decremented with each execution of the target instruction.
When RCOUNT equals zero, the target instruction is executed one more
time, and then normal instruction execution continues with the
instruction following the target instruction.
The ‘s’ bits specify the Wn register that contains the repeat count.
Special Features, Restrictions:
1. When (Wn) = 0, REPEAT has the effect of a NOP and the RA bit is
not set.
2. The target REPEAT instruction cannot be:
• an instruction that changes program flow
• a DO, DISI, LNK, MOV.D, PWRSAV, REPEAT or ULNK
instruction
• a 2-word instruction
Unexpected results may occur if these target instructions are used.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
000A26
000A28
PC
W4
RCOUNT
SR
REPEAT
COM
Before
Instruction
00 0A26
0023
0000
0000
The REPEAT and target instruction are interruptible.
W4
[W0++], [W2++]
; Execute COM (W4+1) times
; Vector complement
PC
W4
RCOUNT
SR
After
Instruction
00 0A28
0023
0023
0010 (RA = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 361
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 2:
00089E
0008A0
PC
W10
RCOUNT
SR
DS70157F-page 362
REPEAT
TBLRDL
Before
Instruction
00 089E
00FF
0000
0000
W10
; Execute TBLRD (W10+1) times
[W2++], [W3++] ; Decrement (0x840)
After
Instruction
PC
00 08A0
W10
00FF
RCOUNT
00FF
SR
0010 (RA = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
RESET
Reset
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
None
Operation:
Force all registers that are affected by a MCLR Reset to their Reset
condition.
1 →SWR (RCON<6>)
0 →PC
Status Affected:
OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB, DA, DC, IPL<2:0>, RA, N, OV, Z, C, SFA
Encoding:
Description:
1111
RESET
1110
0000
0000
0000
0000
This instruction provides a way to execute a software Reset. All core and
peripheral registers will take their power-on value. The PC will be set to
‘0’, the location of the RESET GOTO instruction. The SWR bit
(RCON<6>), will be set to ‘1’ to indicate that the RESET instruction was
executed.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Refer to the specific device family reference manual for the
power-on value of all registers.
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 363
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 1:
00202A
PC
W0
W1
W2
W3
W4
W5
W6
W7
W8
W9
W10
W11
W12
W13
W14
W15
SPLIM
TBLPAG
PSVPAG
CORCON
RCON
SR
DS70157F-page 364
RESET
; Execute software RESET on dsPIC33F
Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
00 202A
PC
00 0000
8901
W0
0000
08BB
W1
0000
B87A
W2
0000
872F
W3
0000
C98A
W4
0000
AAD4
W5
0000
981E
W6
0000
1809
W7
0000
C341
W8
0000
90F4
W9
0000
F409
W10
0000
1700
W11
0000
1008
W12
0000
6556
W13
0000
231D
W14
0000
1704
W15
0800
1800
SPLIM
0000
007F
TBLPAG
0000
0001
PSVPAG
0000
00F0
CORCON
0020 (SATDW = 1)
0000
RCON
0040 (SWR = 1)
0021 (IPL, C = 1)
SR
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
RETFIE
Return from Interrupt
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
X
X
PIC24E
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
None
Operation:
(W15) - 2 →W15
(TOS<15:8>) →(SR<7:0>)
(TOS<7>) →(IPL3, CORCON<3>)
(TOS<6:0>) →(PC<22:16>)
(W15) - 2 →W15
(TOS<15:0>) →(PC<15:0>)
NOP →Instruction Register
Status Affected:
IPL<3:0>, RA, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
0000
Description:
2:
0110
0100
X
0000
0000
0000
Restoring IPL<3> and the low byte of the STATUS register
restores the Interrupt Priority Level to the level before the
execution was processed.
Before RETFIE is executed, the appropriate interrupt flag
must be cleared in software to avoid recursive interrupts.
1
Cycles:
3 (2 if exception pending)
000A26
PC
W15
Data 0830
Data 0832
CORCON
SR
RETFIE
Before
Instruction
00 0A26
0834
0230
8101
0001
0000
008050
RETFIE
Before
Instruction
00 8050
0926
7008
0300
0000
0000
; Return from ISR
PC
W15
Data 0830
Data 0832
CORCON
SR
After
Instruction
01 0230
0830
0230
8101
0001
0081 (IPL = 4, C = 1)
; Return from ISR
PC
W15
Data 0922
Data 0924
CORCON
SR
After
Instruction
00 7008
0922
7008
0300
0000
0003 (Z, C = 1)
DS70157F-page 365
5
Instruction
Descriptions
PC
W15
Data 0922
Data 0924
CORCON
SR
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
X
RETFIE
Words:
Example 2:
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
Return from Interrupt Service Routine. The stack is POPped, which
loads the low byte of the STATUS register, IPL<3> (CORCON<3>) and
the Most Significant Byte of the PC. The stack is POPped again, which
loads the lower 16 bits of the PC.
Note 1:
Example 1:
dsPIC30F
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
RETFIE
Return from Interrupt
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
None
Operation:
(W15) - 2 →W15
(TOS<15:8>) →(SR<7:0>)
(TOS<7>) →(IPL3, CORCON<3>)
(TOS<6:0>) →(PC<22:16>)
(W15) - 2 →W15
(TOS<15:1>) →(PC<15:1>)
TOS<0> →SFA bit
NOP →Instruction Register
Status Affected:
IPL<3:0>, RA, N, OV, Z, C, SFA
Encoding:
0000
Description:
RETFIE
0110
0100
2:
1
Cycles:
6 (5 if exception pending)
000A26
PC
W15
Data 0830
Data 0832
CORCON
SR
Example 2:
0000
0000
Restoring IPL<3> and the low byte of the STATUS register
restores the Interrupt Priority Level to the level before the
execution was processed.
Before RETFIE is executed, the appropriate interrupt flag
must be cleared in software to avoid recursive interrupts.
Words:
Example 1:
0000
Return from Interrupt Service Routine. The stack is POPped, which
loads the low byte of the STATUS register, IPL<3> (CORCON<3>) and
the Most Significant Byte of the PC. The stack is POPped again, which
loads the lower 16 bits of the PC.
Note 1:
RETFIE
Before
Instruction
00 0A26
0834
0230
8101
0001
0000
008050
PC
W15
Data 0922
Data 0924
CORCON
SR
DS70157F-page 366
X
RETFIE
Before
Instruction
00 8050
0926
7008
0300
0000
0000
; Return from ISR
PC
W15
Data 0830
Data 0832
CORCON
SR
After
Instruction
01 0230
0830
0230
8101
0001
0081 (IPL = 4, C = 1)
; Return from ISR
PC
W15
Data 0922
Data 0924
CORCON
SR
After
Instruction
00 7008
0922
7008
0300
0000
0003 (Z, C = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
RETLW
Return with Literal in Wn
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
X
X
PIC24E
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
lit10 ∈ [0 ... 255] for byte operation
lit10 ∈ [0 ... 1023] for word operation
Wn ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(W15) – 2 →W15
TOS<15:8> →SR<7:0>
TOS<7:0> →IPL<3> : PC<22:16>
(W15) – 2 →W15
(TOS) →(PC<15:0>)
lit10 →Wn
NOP →Instruction register
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
0000
Description:
RETLW{.B} #lit10,
0101
0Bkk
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
kkkk
kkkk
Wn
dddd
Return from subroutine with the specified, unsigned 10-bit literal stored
in Wn. The software stack is POPped twice to restore the PC and the
signed literal is stored in Wn. Since two POPs are made, the Stack
Pointer (W15) is decremented by 4.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘k’ bits specify the value of the literal.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
Note 1:
2:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
For byte operations, the literal must be specified as an
unsigned value [0:255]. See Section 4.6 “Using 10-bit Literal Operands” for information on using 10-bit literal
operands in Byte mode.
Words:
1
Cycles:
3 (2 if exception pending)
Example 1:
000440
PC
W0
W15
Data 1984
Data 1986
SR
RETLW.B #0xA, W0
Before
Instruction
00 0440
9846
1988
7006
0000
0000
; Return with 0xA in W0
PC
W0
W15
Data 1984
Data 1986
SR
After
Instruction
00 7006
980A
1984
7006
0000
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 367
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 2:
00050A
PC
W2
W15
Data 11FC
Data 11FE
SR
DS70157F-page 368
RETLW
Before
Instruction
00 050A
0993
1200
7008
0001
0000
#0x230, W2
; Return with 0x230 in W2
PC
W2
W15
Data 11FC
Data 11FE
SR
After
Instruction
01 7008
0230
11FC
7008
0001
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
RETLW
Return with Literal in Wn
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
X
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
lit10 ∈ [0 ... 255] for byte operation
lit10 ∈ [0 ... 1023] for word operation
Wn ∈ [W0 ... W15]
(W15) – 2 →W15
TOS<15:8> →SR<7:0>
TOS<7:0> →IPL<3>: PC<22:16>
(W15) – 2 →W15
(TOS<15:1>) →(PC<15:1>)
TOS<0> →SFA bit
lit10 →Wn
NOP →Instruction register
SFA
0000
0101
0Bkk
kkkk
kkkk
dddd
Return from subroutine with the specified, unsigned 10-bit literal stored
in Wn. The software stack is POPped twice to restore the PC and the
signed literal is stored in Wn. Since two POPs are made, the Stack
Pointer (W15) is decremented by 4.
Operation:
Status Affected:
Encoding:
Description:
RETLW{.B} #lit10,
dsPIC30F
Wn
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘k’ bits specify the value of the literal.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
Note 1:
2:
Words:
Cycles:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
For byte operations, the literal must be specified as an
unsigned value [0:255]. See Section 4.6 “Using 10-bit Literal Operands” for information on using 10-bit literal
operands in Byte mode.
1
6 (5 if exception pending)
Example 1:
000440
PC
W0
W15
Data 1984
Data 1986
SR
RETLW.B #0xA, W0
Before
Instruction
00 0440
9846
1988
7006
0000
0000
; Return with 0xA in W0
PC
W0
W15
Data 1984
Data 1986
SR
After
Instruction
00 7006
980A
1984
7006
0000
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 369
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 2:
00050A
PC
W2
W15
Data 11FC
Data 11FE
SR
DS70157F-page 370
RETLW
Before
Instruction
00 050A
0993
1200
7008
0001
0000
#0x230, W2
; Return with 0x230 in W2
PC
W2
W15
Data 11FC
Data 11FE
SR
After
Instruction
01 7008
0230
11FC
7008
0001
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
RETURN
Return
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
None
Operation:
(W15) – 2 →W15
(TOS) →(PC<22:16>)
(W15) – 2 →W15
(TOS) →(PC<15:0>)
NOP →Instruction Register
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
0000
Description:
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
0110
0000
0000
0000
0000
Return from subroutine. The software stack is POPped twice to restore
the PC. Since two POPs are made, the Stack Pointer (W15) is
decremented by 4.
1
Cycles:
3 (2 if exception pending)
001A06
PC
W15
Data 1244
Data 1246
SR
Example 2:
dsPIC30F
RETURN
Words:
Example 1:
PIC24E
Before
Instruction
00 1A06
1248
0004
0001
0000
005404
PC
W15
Data 0906
Data 0908
SR
RETURN
RETURN
Before
Instruction
00 5404
090A
0966
0000
0000
; Return from subroutine
PC
W15
Data 1244
Data 1246
SR
After
Instruction
01 0004
1244
0004
0001
0000
; Return from subroutine
PC
W15
Data 0906
Data 0908
SR
After
Instruction
00 0966
0906
0966
0000
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 371
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
RETURN
Return
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
None
Operation:
(W15) – 2 →W15
(TOS) →(PC<22:16>)
(W15) – 2 →W15
(TOS<15:1) →(PC<15:1>)
TOS<0> →SFA bit
NOP →Instruction Register
Status Affected:
SFA
Encoding:
0000
RETURN
0110
0000
0000
0000
0000
Description:
Return from subroutine. The software stack is POPped twice to restore
the PC. Since two POPs are made, the Stack Pointer (W15) is
decremented by 4.
Words:
1
Cycles:
6 (5 if exception pending)
Example 1:
001A06
PC
W15
Data 1244
Data 1246
SR
Example 2:
RETURN
Before
Instruction
00 1A06
1248
0004
0001
0000
005404
PC
W15
Data 0906
Data 0908
SR
DS70157F-page 372
X
RETURN
Before
Instruction
00 5404
090A
0966
0000
0000
; Return from subroutine
PC
W15
Data 1244
Data 1246
SR
After
Instruction
01 0004
1244
0004
0001
0000
; Return from subroutine
PC
W15
Data 0906
Data 0908
SR
After
Instruction
00 0966
0906
0966
0000
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
RLC
Rotate Left f through Carry
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
RLC{.B}
f
Operands:
f ∈ [0 ... 8191]
Operation:
For byte operation:
(C) →Dest<0>
(f<6:0>) →Dest<7:1>
(f<7>) →C
For word operation:
(C) →Dest<0>
(f<14:0>) →Dest<15:1>
(f<15>) →C
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
ffff
ffff
{,WREG}
C
Status Affected:
N, Z, C
Encoding:
1101
Description:
0110
1BDf
ffff
Rotate the contents of the file register f one bit to the left through the
Carry flag and place the result in the destination register. The Carry flag
of the STATUS Register is shifted into the Least Significant bit of the
destination, and it is then overwritten with the Most Significant bit of Ws.
The optional WREG operand determines the destination register. If
WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not
specified, the result is stored in the file register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘D’ bit selects the destination (‘0’ for f, ‘1’ for WREG).
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1:
2:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
RLC.B
0x1233
Before
Instruction
Data 1232 E807
SR
0000
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
The WREG is set to working register W0.
; Rotate Left w/ C (0x1233) (Byte mode)
After
Instruction
Data 1232 D007
SR
0009 (N, C = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 373
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 2:
RLC
0x820, WREG
; Rotate Left w/ C (0x820) (Word mode)
; Store result in WREG
Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
WREG (W0)
5601
WREG (W0) 42DD
Data 0820 216E
Data 0820 216E
SR
0001 (C = 1)
SR
0000 (C = 0)
DS70157F-page 374
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
RLC
Rotate Left Ws through Carry
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
RLC{.B}
Ws,
[Wd]
[Ws++],
[Wd++]
[Ws--],
[Wd--]
[++Ws],
[++Wd]
[--Ws],
[--Wd]
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
For byte operation:
(C) →Wd<0>
(Ws<6:0>) →Wd<7:1>
(Ws<7>) →C
For word operation:
(C) →Wd<0>
(Ws<14:0>) →Wd<15:1>
(Ws<15>) →C
X
X
dppp
ssss
Wd
[Ws],
Operands:
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
C
Status Affected:
N, Z, C
Encoding:
1101
Description:
0010
1Bqq
qddd
Rotate the contents of the source register Ws one bit to the left through
the Carry flag and place the result in the destination register Wd. The
Carry flag of the STATUS register is shifted into the Least Significant bit
of Wd, and it is then overwritten with the Most Significant bit of Ws.
Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws and Wd.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘q’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
RLC.B
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
W0, W3
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
5
Instruction
Descriptions
Before
Instruction
W0
9976
W3
5879
SR
0001 (C = 1)
; Rotate Left w/ C (W0) (Byte mode)
; Store the result in W3
After
Instruction
W0
9976
W3 58ED
SR
0009 (N = 1)
DS70157F-page 375
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 2:
RLC
[W2++], [W8]
; Rotate Left w/ C [W2] (Word mode)
; Post-increment W2
; Store result in [W8]
Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
W2
2008
W2 200A
W8 094E
W8 094E
Data 094E
3689
Data 094E
8082
Data 2008 C041
Data 2008 C041
SR
0001 (C = 1)
SR
0009 (N, C = 1)
DS70157F-page 376
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
RLNC
Rotate Left f without Carry
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
f ∈ [0 ... 8191]
Operation:
For byte operation:
(f<6:0>) →Dest<7:1>
(f<7>) →Dest<0>
For word operation:
(f<14:0>) →Dest<15:1>
(f<15>) →Dest<0>
Status Affected:
N, Z
Encoding:
1101
Description:
RLNC{.B}
0110
f
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
ffff
ffff
{,WREG}
0BDf
ffff
Rotate the contents of the file register f one bit to the left and place the
result in the destination register. The Most Significant bit of f is stored in
the Least Significant bit of the destination, and the Carry flag is not
affected.
The optional WREG operand determines the destination register. If
WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not
specified, the result is stored in the file register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘D’ bit selects the destination (‘0’ for WREG, ‘1’ for file register).
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1:
2:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
The WREG is set to working register W0.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 377
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 1:
RLNC.B
0x1233
Before
Instruction
Data 1232 E807
SR
0000
Example 2:
RLNC
; Rotate Left (0x1233) (Byte mode)
After
Instruction
Data 1233 D107
SR
0008 (N = 1)
0x820, WREG
; Rotate Left (0x820) (Word mode)
; Store result in WREG
Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
WREG (W0)
5601
WREG (W0) 42DC
Data 0820 216E
Data 0820 216E
SR
0001 (C = 1)
SR
0000 (C = 0)
DS70157F-page 378
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
RLNC
Rotate Left Ws without Carry
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
RLNC{.B}
Ws,
Wd
[Ws],
[Wd]
[Ws++],
[Wd++]
[Ws--],
[Wd--]
[++Ws],
[++Wd]
[--Ws],
[--Wd]
Operands:
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
For byte operation:
(Ws<6:0>) →Wd<7:1>
(Ws<7>) →Wd<0>
For word operation:
(Ws<14:0>) →Wd<15:1>
(Ws<15>) →Wd<0>
Status Affected:
N, Z
Encoding:
1101
Description:
0010
0Bqq
qddd
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
dppp
ssss
Rotate the contents of the source register Ws one bit to the left and place
the result in the destination register Wd. The Most Significant bit of Ws is
stored in the Least Significant bit of Wd, and the Carry flag is not
affected. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws
and Wd.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for byte, ‘1’ for word).
The ‘q’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 379
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 1:
RLNC.B
W0, W3
Before
Instruction
W0
9976
W3
5879
SR
0001 (C = 1)
Example 2:
RLNC
; Rotate Left (W0) (Byte mode)
; Store the result in W3
After
Instruction
W0
9976
W3 58EC
SR
0009 (N, C = 1)
[W2++], [W8] ; Rotate Left [W2] (Word mode)
; Post-increment W2
; Store result in [W8]
Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
W2
2008
W2 200A
W8 094E
W8 094E
Data 094E
3689
Data 094E
8083
Data 2008 C041
Data 2008 C041
SR
0001 (C = 1)
SR
0009 (N, C = 1)
DS70157F-page 380
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
RRC
Rotate Right f through Carry
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
RRC{.B}
f
Operands:
f ∈ [0 ... 8191]
Operation:
For byte operation:
(C) →Dest<7>
(f<7:1>) →Dest<6:0>
(f<0>) →C
For word operation:
(C) →Dest<15>
(f<15:1>) →Dest<14:0>
(f<0>) →C
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
ffff
ffff
{,WREG}
C
Status Affected:
N, Z, C
Encoding:
1101
Description:
0111
1BDf
ffff
Rotate the contents of the file register f one bit to the right through the
Carry flag and place the result in the destination register. The Carry flag
of the STATUS Register is shifted into the Most Significant bit of the
destination, and it is then overwritten with the Least Significant bit of Ws.
The optional WREG operand determines the destination register. If
WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not
specified, the result is stored in the file register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for byte, ‘1’ for word).
The ‘D’ bit selects the destination (‘0’ for WREG, ‘1’ for file register).
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1:
2:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
The WREG is set to working register W0.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
RRC.B
0x1233
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
5
After
Instruction
Data 1232
7407
SR
0000
Instruction
Descriptions
Before
Instruction
Data 1232 E807
SR
0000
; Rotate Right w/ C (0x1233) (Byte mode)
DS70157F-page 381
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 2:
RRC
0x820, WREG
; Rotate Right w/ C (0x820) (Word mode)
; Store result in WREG
Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
WREG (W0)
5601
WREG (W0) 90B7
Data 0820 216E
Data 0820 216E
SR
0001 (C = 1)
SR
0008 (N = 1)
DS70157F-page 382
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
RRC
Rotate Right Ws through Carry
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
RRC{.B}
Ws,
[Wd]
[Ws++],
[Wd++]
[Ws--],
[Wd--]
[++Ws],
[++Wd]
[--Ws],
[--Wd]
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
For byte operation:
(C) →Wd<7>
(Ws<7:1>) →Wd<6:0>
(Ws<0>) →C
For word operation:
(C) →Wd<15>
(Ws<15:1>) →Wd<14:0>
(Ws<0>) →C
X
X
dppp
ssss
Wd
[Ws],
Operands:
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
C
Status Affected:
N, Z, C
Encoding:
1101
Description:
0011
1Bqq
qddd
Rotate the contents of the source register Ws one bit to the right through
the Carry flag and place the result in the destination register Wd. The
Carry flag of the STATUS Register is shifted into the Most Significant bit
of Wd, and it is then overwritten with the Least Significant bit of Ws.
Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws and Wd.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘q’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 383
5
Instruction
Descriptions
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 1:
RRC.B
W0, W3
Before
Instruction
W0
9976
W3
5879
SR
0001 (C = 1)
Example 2:
RRC
[W2++], [W8]
; Rotate Right w/ C (W0) (Byte mode)
; Store the result in W3
After
Instruction
W0
9976
W3 58BB
SR
0008 (N = 1)
; Rotate Right w/ C [W2] (Word mode)
; Post-increment W2
; Store result in [W8]
Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
W2
2008
W2 200A
W8 094E
W8 094E
Data 094E
3689
Data 094E E020
Data 2008 C041
Data 2008 C041
SR
0001 (C = 1)
SR
0009 (N, C = 1)
DS70157F-page 384
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
RRNC
Rotate Right f without Carry
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
f ∈ [0 ... 8191]
Operation:
For byte operation:
(f<7:1>) →Dest<6:0>
(f<0>) →Dest<7>
For word operation:
(f<15:1>) →Dest<14:0>
(f<0>) →Dest<15>
Status Affected:
N, Z
Encoding:
1101
Description:
RRNC{.B}
0111
f
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
ffff
ffff
{,WREG}
0BDf
ffff
Rotate the contents of the file register f one bit to the right and place the
result in the destination register. The Least Significant bit of f is stored in
the Most Significant bit of the destination, and the Carry flag is not
affected.
The optional WREG operand determines the destination register. If
WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not
specified, the result is stored in the file register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘D’ bit selects the destination (‘0’ for WREG, ‘1’ for file register).
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1:
2:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
The WREG is set to working register W0.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 385
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 1:
RRNC.B
0x1233
Before
Instruction
Data 1232 E807
SR
0000
Example 2:
RRNC
; Rotate Right (0x1233) (Byte mode)
After
Instruction
Data 1232
7407
SR
0000
0x820, WREG
; Rotate Right (0x820) (Word mode)
; Store result in WREG
Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
WREG (W0)
5601
WREG (W0) 10B7
Data 0820 216E
Data 0820 216E
SR
0001 (C = 1)
SR
0001 (C = 1)
DS70157F-page 386
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
RRNC
Rotate Right Ws without Carry
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
RRNC{.B}
Ws,
[Wd]
[Ws++],
[Wd++]
[Ws--],
[Wd--]
[++Ws],
[++Wd]
[--Ws],
[--Wd]
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
For byte operation:
(Ws<7:1>) →Wd<6:0>
(Ws<0>) →Wd<7>
For word operation:
(Ws<15:1>) →Wd<14:0>
(Ws<0>) →Wd<15>
Status Affected:
N, Z
Encoding:
1101
Description:
0011
0Bqq
X
X
dppp
ssss
Wd
[Ws],
Operands:
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
qddd
Rotate the contents of the source register Ws one bit to the right and
place the result in the destination register Wd. The Least Significant bit
of Ws is stored in the Most Significant bit of Wd, and the Carry flag is not
affected. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws
and Wd.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘q’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 387
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 1:
RRNC.B
W0, W3
; Rotate Right (W0) (Byte mode)
; Store the result in W3
Before
Instruction
W0
9976
W3
5879
SR
0001 (C = 1)
Example 2:
RRNC
[W2++], [W8]
Before
Instruction
W2
2008
W8 094E
Data 094E
3689
Data 2008 C041
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 388
After
Instruction
W0
9976
W3 583B
SR
0001 (C = 1)
; Rotate Right [W2] (Word mode)
; Post-increment W2
; Store result in [W8]
After
Instruction
W2 200A
W8 094E
Data 094E E020
Data 2008 C041
SR
0008 (N = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
SAC
Store Accumulator
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
SAC
Acc,
{#Slit4,}
X
X
Wd
[Wd]
[Wd++]
[Wd--]
[--Wd]
[++Wd]
[Wd + Wb]
Operands:
Acc ∈ [A,B]
Slit4 ∈ [-8 ... +7]
Wb, Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
ShiftSlit4(Acc) (optional)
(Acc[31:16]) →Wd
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1100
Description:
1100
Awww
wrrr
rhhh
dddd
Perform an optional, signed 4-bit shift of the specified accumulator, then
store the shifted contents of ACCxH (Acc[31:16]) to Wd. The shift range
is -8:7, where a negative operand indicates an arithmetic left shift and a
positive operand indicates an arithmetic right shift. Either register direct
or indirect addressing may be used for Wd.
The ‘A’ bit specifies the source accumulator.
The ‘w’ bits specify the offset register Wb.
The ‘r’ bits encode the optional accumulator pre-shift.
The ‘h’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits specify the destination register Wd.
Note 1:
2:
3:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
SAC A, #4, W5
; Right shift ACCA by 4
; Store result to W5
; CORCON = 0x0010 (SATDW = 1)
Before
Instruction
B900
00 120F FF00
0010
0000
W5
ACCA
CORCON
SR
5
Instruction
Descriptions
W5
ACCA
CORCON
SR
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
This instruction does not modify the contents of Acc.
This instruction stores the truncated contents of Acc. The
instruction SAC.R may be used to store the rounded
accumulator contents.
If Data Write saturation is enabled (SATDW, CORCON<5>,
= 1), the value stored to Wd is subject to saturation after the
optional shift is performed.
After
Instruction
0120
00 120F FF00
0010
0000
DS70157F-page 389
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 2:
SAC B, #-4, [W5++]
; Left shift ACCB by 4
; Store result to [W5], Post-increment W5
; CORCON = 0x0010 (SATDW = 1)
W5
ACCB
Data 2000
CORCON
SR
DS70157F-page 390
Before
Instruction
2000
FF C891 8F4C
5BBE
0010
0000
W5
ACCB
Data 2000
CORCON
SR
After
Instruction
2002
FF C891 1F4C
8000
0010
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
SAC.R
Store Rounded Accumulator
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
SAC.R
Acc,
{#Slit4,}
X
X
Wd
[Wd]
[Wd++]
[Wd--]
[--Wd]
[++Wd]
[Wd + Wb]
Operands:
Acc ∈ [A,B]
Slit4 ∈ [-8 ... +7]
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
ShiftSlit4(Acc) (optional)
Round(Acc)
(Acc[31:16]) →Wd
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
Description:
1100
1101
Awww
wrrr
rhhh
dddd
Perform an optional, signed 4-bit shift of the specified accumulator, then
store the rounded contents of ACCxH (Acc[31:16]) to Wd. The shift
range is -8:7, where a negative operand indicates an arithmetic left shift
and a positive operand indicates an arithmetic right shift. The Rounding
mode (Conventional or Convergent) is set by the RND bit,
CORCON<1>. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used
for Wd.
The ‘A’ bit specifies the source accumulator.
The ‘w’ bits specify the offset register Wb.
The ‘r’ bits encode the optional accumulator pre-shift.
The ‘h’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits specify the destination register Wd.
Note 1:
2:
3:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
This instruction does not modify the contents of the Acc.
This instruction stores the rounded contents of Acc. The
instruction SAC may be used to store the truncated
accumulator contents.
If Data Write saturation is enabled (SATDW, CORCON<5>,
= 1), the value stored to Wd is subject to saturation after the
optional shift is performed.
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 391
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 1:
SAC.R A, #4, W5
; Right shift ACCA by 4
; Store rounded result to W5
; CORCON = 0x0010 (SATDW = 1)
W5
ACCA
CORCON
SR
Example 2:
W5
ACCA
CORCON
SR
After
Instruction
0121
00 120F FF00
0010
0000
SAC.R B, #-4, [W5++]
; Left shift ACCB by 4
; Store rounded result to [W5], Post-increment W5
; CORCON = 0x0010 (SATDW = 1)
W5
ACCB
Data 2000
CORCON
SR
DS70157F-page 392
Before
Instruction
B900
00 120F FF00
0010
0000
Before
Instruction
2000
FF F891 8F4C
5BBE
0010
0000
W5
ACCB
Data 2000
CORCON
SR
After
Instruction
2002
FF F891 8F4C
8919
0010
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
SE
Sign-Extend Ws
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
0ddd
dppp
ssss
{label:}
SE
Ws,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
Wnd
[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wnd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
Ws<7:0> →Wnd<7:0>
If (Ws<7> = 1):
0xFF →Wnd<15:8>
Else:
0 →Wnd<15:8>
Status Affected:
N, Z, C
Encoding:
1111
Description:
1011
0000
Sign-extend the byte in Ws and store the 16-bit result in Wnd. Either
register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws, and register
direct addressing must be used for Wnd. The C flag is set to the
complement of the N flag.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note 1: This operation converts a byte to a word, and it uses no .B or
.W extension.
2: The source Ws is addressed as a byte operand, so any
address modification is by ‘1’.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
SE
W3, W4
Before
Instruction
W3
7839
W4
1005
SR
0000
; Sign-extend W3 and store to W4
After
Instruction
W3
7839
W4
0039
SR
0001 (C = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 393
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 2:
SE
[W2++], W12
Before
Instruction
W2
0900
W12
1002
Data 0900
008F
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 394
; Sign-extend [W2] and store to W12
; Post-increment W2
After
Instruction
W2
0901
W12 FF8F
Data 0900
008F
SR
0008 (N = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
SETM
Set f or WREG
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
SETM{.B}
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
ffff
ffff
f
WREG
Operands:
f ∈ [0 ... 8191]
Operation:
For byte operation:
0xFF →destination designated by D
For word operation:
0xFFFF →destination designated by D
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1110
Description:
1111
1BDf
ffff
All the bits of the specified register are set to ‘1’. If WREG is specified,
the bits of WREG are set. Otherwise, the bits of the specified file register
are set.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘D’ bit selects the destination (‘0’ for WREG, ‘1’ for file register).
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The WREG is set to working register W0.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
SETM.B
0x891
Before
Instruction
Data 0890
2739
SR
0000
Example 2:
SETM
WREG
Before
Instruction
WREG (W0)
0900
SR
0000
; Set 0x891 (Byte mode)
After
Instruction
Data 0890 FF39
SR
0000
; Set WREG (Word mode)
After
Instruction
WREG (W0) FFFF
SR
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 395
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
SETM
Set Ws
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
qddd
d000
0000
{label:}
SETM{.B}
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
Wd
[Wd]
[Wd++]
[Wd--]
[++Wd]
[--Wd]
Operands:
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
For byte operation:
0xFF →Wd for byte operation
For word operation:
0xFFFF →Wd for word operation
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1110
Description:
1011
1Bqq
All the bits of the specified register are set to ‘1’. Either register direct or
indirect addressing may be used for Wd.
The ‘B’ bits selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘q’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
SETM.B
Note:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
W13
; Set W13 (Byte mode)
Before
Instruction
W13
2739
SR
0000
Example 2:
SETM
[--W6]
Before
Instruction
W6
1250
Data 124E 3CD9
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 396
After
Instruction
W13 27FF
SR
0000
; Pre-decrement W6 (Word mode)
; Set [W6]
After
Instruction
W6 124E
Data 124E FFFF
SR
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
SFTAC
Arithmetic Shift Accumulator by Slit6
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Acc ∈ [A,B]
Slit6 ∈ [-16 ... 16]
Operation:
Shiftk(Acc) →Acc
Status Affected:
OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB
Encoding:
1100
Description:
SFTAC
1000
Acc,
A000
X
X
01kk
kkkk
#Slit6
0000
Arithmetic shift the 40-bit contents of the specified accumulator by the
signed, 6-bit literal and store the result back into the accumulator. The
shift range is -16:16, where a negative operand indicates a left shift and a
positive operand indicates a right shift. Any bits which are shifted out of
the accumulator are lost.
The ‘A’ bit selects the accumulator for the result.
The ‘k’ bits determine the number of bits to be shifted.
Note 1: If saturation is enabled for the target accumulator (SATA,
CORCON<7> or SATB, CORCON<6>), the value stored to
the accumulator is subject to saturation.
2: If the shift amount is greater than 16 or less than -16, no
modification will be made to the accumulator, and an
arithmetic trap will occur.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
SFTAC A, #12
; Arithmetic right shift ACCA by 12
; Store result to ACCA
; CORCON = 0x0080 (SATA = 1)
ACCA
CORCON
SR
Example 2:
ACCA
CORCON
SR
After
Instruction
00 0001 20FF
0080
0000
SFTAC B, #-10
; Arithmetic left shift ACCB by 10
; Store result to ACCB
; CORCON = 0x0040 (SATB = 1)
Before
Instruction
FF FFF1 8F4C
0040
0000
ACCB
CORCON
SR
5
After
Instruction
FF C63D 3000
0040
0000
Instruction
Descriptions
ACCB
CORCON
SR
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Before
Instruction
00 120F FF00
0080
0000
DS70157F-page 397
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
SFTAC
Arithmetic Shift Accumulator by Wb
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Acc ∈ [A,B]
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
Shift(Wb)(Acc) →Acc
Status Affected:
OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB
Encoding:
1100
Description:
SFTAC
PIC24E
1000
Acc,
A000
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
X
0000
0000
ssss
Wb
Arithmetic shift the 40-bit contents of the specified accumulator and store
the result back into the accumulator. The Least Significant 6 bits of Wb
are used to specify the shift amount. The shift range is -16:16, where a
negative value indicates a left shift and a positive value indicates a right
shift. Any bits which are shifted out of the accumulator are lost.
The ‘A’ bit selects the accumulator for the source/destination.
The ‘s’ bits select the address of the shift count register.
Note 1: If saturation is enabled for the target accumulator (SATA,
CORCON<7> or SATB, CORCON<6>), the value stored to
the accumulator is subject to saturation.
2: If the shift amount is greater than 16 or less than -16, no
modification will be made to the accumulator, and an
arithmetic trap will occur.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
SFTAC A, W0
; Arithmetic shift ACCA by (W0)
; Store result to ACCA
; CORCON = 0x0000 (saturation disabled)
W0
ACCA
CORCON
SR
Example 2:
W0
ACCA
CORCON
SR
After
Instruction
FFFC
03 20FA B090
0000
8800 (OA, OAB = 1)
SFTAC B, W12
; Arithmetic shift ACCB by (W12)
; Store result to ACCB
; CORCON = 0x0040 (SATB = 1)
W12
ACCB
CORCON
SR
DS70157F-page 398
Before
Instruction
FFFC
00 320F AB09
0000
0000
Before
Instruction
000F
FF FFF1 8F4C
0040
0000
W12
ACCB
CORCON
SR
After
Instruction
000F
FF FFFF FFE3
0040
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
SL
Shift Left f
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
f ∈ [0... 8191]
Operation:
For byte operation:
(f<7>) →(C)
(f<6:0>) →Dest<7:1>
0 →Dest<0>
For word operation:
(f<15>) →(C)
(f<14:0>) →Dest<15:1>
0 →Dest<0>
C
Status Affected:
f
X
X
ffff
ffff
{,WREG}
0
N, Z, C
Encoding:
1101
Description:
SL{.B}
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
0100
0BDf
ffff
Shift the contents of the file register one bit to the left and place the result
in the destination register. The Most Significant bit of the file register is
shifted into the Carry bit of the STATUS register, and zero is shifted into
the Least Significant bit of the destination register.
The optional WREG operand determines the destination register. If
WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not
specified, the result is stored in the file register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘D’ bit selects the destination (‘0’ for WREG, ‘1’ for file register).
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The WREG is set to working register W0.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
SL.B
0x909
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
5
After
Instruction
Data 0908
0839
SR
0001 (C = 1)
Instruction
Descriptions
Before
Instruction
Data 0908
9439
SR
0000
; Shift left (0x909) (Byte mode)
DS70157F-page 399
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 2:
SL
0x1650, WREG
Before
Instruction
WREG (W0)
0900
Data 1650
4065
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 400
; Shift left (0x1650) (Word mode)
; Store result in WREG
After
Instruction
WREG (W0) 80CA
Data 1650
4065
SR
0008 (N = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
SL
Shift Left Ws
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
SL{.B}
Ws,
[Wd]
[Ws++],
[Wd++]
[Ws--],
[Wd--]
[++Ws],
[++Wd]
[--Ws],
[--Wd]
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
For byte operation:
(Ws<7>) →C
(Ws<6:0>) →Wd<7:1>
0 →Wd<0>
For word operation:
(Ws<15>) →C
(Ws<14:0>) →Wd<15:1>
0 →Wd<0>
C
Status Affected:
X
dppp
ssss
0
N, Z, C
Encoding:
1101
Description:
X
Wd
[Ws],
Operands:
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
0000
0Bqq
qddd
Shift the contents of the source register Ws one bit to the left and place
the result in the destination register Wd. The Most Significant bit of Ws is
shifted into the Carry bit of the STATUS register, and ‘0’ is shifted into the
Least Significant bit of Wd. Either register direct or indirect addressing
may be used for Ws and Wd.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘q’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 401
5
Instruction
Descriptions
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 1:
SL.B
W3, W4
; Shift left W3 (Byte mode)
; Store result to W4
Before
Instruction
W3 78A9
W4
1005
SR
0000
Example 2:
SL
[W2++], [W12]
Before
Instruction
W2
0900
W12
1002
Data 0900
800F
Data 1002
6722
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 402
After
Instruction
W3 78A9
W4
1052
SR
0001 (C = 1)
; Shift left [W2] (Word mode)
; Store result to [W12]
; Post-increment W2
After
Instruction
W2
0902
W12
1002
Data 0900
800F
Data 1002 001E
SR
0001 (C = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
SL
Shift Left by Short Literal
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
lit4 ∈ [0...15]
Wnd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
lit4<3:0> →Shift_Val
Wnd<15:Shift_Val> = Wb<15-Shift_Val:0>
Wd<Shift_Val – 1:0> = 0
Status Affected:
N, Z
Encoding:
1101
Description:
SL
Wb,
1101
#lit4,
0www
wddd
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
d100
kkkk
Wnd
Shift left the contents of the source register Wb by the 4-bit unsigned
literal and store the result in the destination register Wnd. Any bits
shifted out of the source register are lost. Direct addressing must be
used for Wb and Wnd.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘k’ bits provide the literal operand, a five-bit integer number.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
SL
W2, #4, W2
Before
Instruction
W2 78A9
SR
0000
Example 2:
SL
W3, #12, W8
Before
Instruction
W3
0912
W8
1002
SR
0000
This instruction operates in Word mode only.
; Shift left W2 by 4
; Store result to W2
After
Instruction
W2 8A90
SR
0008 (N = 1)
; Shift left W3 by 12
; Store result to W8
After
Instruction
W3
0912
W8
2000
SR
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 403
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
SL
Shift Left by Wns
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wns ∈ [W0 ...W15]
Wnd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
Wns<4:0> →Shift_Val
Wnd<15:Shift_Val> = Wb<15 – Shift_Val:0>
Wd<Shift_Val – 1:0> = 0
Status Affected:
N, Z
Encoding:
1101
Description:
SL
Wb,
1101
0www
Wns,
wddd
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
d000
ssss
Wnd
Shift left the contents of the source register Wb by the 5 Least Significant
bits of Wns (only up to 15 positions) and store the result in the
destination register Wnd. Any bits shifted out of the source register are
lost. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb, Wns and Wnd.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note 1: This instruction operates in Word mode only.
2: If Wns is greater than 15, Wnd will be loaded with 0x0.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
SL
W0, W1, W2
Before
Instruction
W0 09A4
W1
8903
W2 78A9
SR
0000
Example 2:
SL
W4, W5, W6
Before
Instruction
W4 A409
W5 FF01
W6
0883
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 404
; Shift left W0 by W1<0:4>
; Store result to W2
After
Instruction
W0 09A4
W1
8903
W2 4D20
SR
0000
; Shift left W4 by W5<0:4>
; Store result to W6
After
Instruction
W4 A409
W5 FF01
W6
4812
SR
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
SUB
Subtract WREG from f
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
X
X
X
{label:}
Operands:
f ∈ [0 ... 8191]
Operation:
(f) – (WREG) →destination designated by D
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
1011
Description:
0101
f
X
Syntax:
Encoding:
SUB{.B}
dsPIC30F dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
ffff
ffff
{,WREG}
0BDf
ffff
Subtract the contents of the default working register WREG from the
contents of the specified file register, and place the result in the
destination register. The optional WREG operand determines the
destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG.
If WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘D’ bit selects the destination (‘0’ for WREG, ‘1’ for file register).
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The WREG is set to working register W0.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
SUB.B 0x1FFF
; Sub. WREG from (0x1FFF) (Byte mode)
; Store result to 0x1FFF
Before
Instruction
WREG (W0)
7804
Data 1FFE
9439
SR
0000
Example 2:
SUB
0xA04, WREG
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
; Sub. WREG from (0xA04) (Word mode)
; Store result to WREG
After
Instruction
WREG (W0) E2EF
Data 0A04
4523
SR
0008 (N = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
Before
Instruction
WREG (W0)
6234
Data 0A04
4523
SR
0000
After
Instruction
WREG (W0)
7804
Data 1FFE
9039
SR
0001 (C = 1)
DS70157F-page 405
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
SUB
Subtract Literal from Wn
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
kkkk
kkkk
dddd
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
lit10 ∈ [0 ... 255] for byte operation
lit10 ∈ [0 ... 1023] for word operation
Wn ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Wn) – lit10 →Wn
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
SUB{.B}
1011
Description:
0001
#lit10,
0Bkk
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
Wn
Subtract the 10-bit unsigned literal operand from the contents of the
working register Wn, and store the result back in the working register
Wn. Register direct addressing must be used for Wn.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation.
The ‘k’ bits specify the literal operand.
The ‘d’ bits select the address of the working register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: For byte operations, the literal must be specified as an
unsigned value [0:255]. See Section 4.6 “Using 10-bit Literal Operands” for information on using 10-bit literal
operands in Byte mode.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
SUB.B
#0x23, W0
Before
Instruction
W0
7804
SR
0000
Example 2:
SUB
#0x108, W4
Before
Instruction
W4
6234
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 406
; Sub. 0x23 from W0 (Byte mode)
; Store result to W0
After
Instruction
W0 78E1
SR
0008 (N = 1)
; Sub. 0x108 from W4 (Word mode)
; Store result to W4
After
Instruction
W4 612C
SR
0001 (C = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
SUB
Subtract Short Literal from Wb
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
SUB{.B}
Wb,
#lit5,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
Wd
[Wd]
[Wd++]
[Wd--]
[++Wd]
[--Wd]
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
lit5 ∈ [0 ... 31]
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Wb) – lit5 →Wd
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
0101
Description:
0www
wBqq
qddd
d11k
kkkk
Subtract the 5-bit unsigned literal operand from the contents of the base
register Wb, and place the result in the destination register Wd. Register
direct addressing must be used for Wb. Register direct or indirect
addressing must be used for Wd.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘q’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘k’ bits provide the literal operand, a five-bit integer number.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
SUB.B
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
W4, #0x10, W5
Before
Instruction
W4
1782
W5
7804
SR
0000
Example 2:
SUB
; Sub. 0x8 from W0 (Word mode)
; Store result to [W2]
; Post-increment W2
After
Instruction
W0
F230
W2
2006
Data 2004
F228
SR
0009 (N, C = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
After
Instruction
W4
1782
W5
7872
SR
0005 (OV, C = 1)
W0, #0x8, [W2++]
Before
Instruction
W0
F230
W2
2004
Data 2004 A557
SR
0000
; Sub. 0x10 from W4 (Byte mode)
; Store result to W5
DS70157F-page 407
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
SUB
Subtract Ws from Wb
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
SUB{.B}
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Wb) – (Ws) →Wd
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
0101
Description:
0www
Wb,
wBqq
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Ws,
Wd
[Ws],
[Wd]
[Ws++],
[Wd++]
[Ws--],
[Wd--]
[++Ws],
[++Wd]
[--Ws],
[--Wd]
qddd
dppp
X
ssss
Subtract the contents of the source register Ws from the contents of the
base register Wb and place the result in the destination register Wd.
Register direct addressing must be used for Wb. Either register direct or
indirect addressing may be used for Ws and Wd.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘q’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
SUB.B
W0, W1, W0
Before
Instruction
W0
1732
W1
7844
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 408
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
; Sub. W1 from W0 (Byte mode)
; Store result to W0
After
Instruction
W0 17EE
W1
7844
SR
0108 (DC, N = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 2:
SUB
W7, [W8++], [W9++]
Before
Instruction
W7
2450
W8
1808
W9
2020
Data 1808 92E4
Data 2020 A557
SR
0000
;
;
;
;
Sub. [W8] from W7 (Word mode)
Store result to [W9]
Post-increment W8
Post-increment W9
After
Instruction
W7
2450
W8 180A
W9
2022
Data 1808 92E4
Data 2020 916C
SR 010C (DC, N, OV = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 409
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
SUB
Subtract Accumulators
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Acc ∈ [A,B]
Operation:
If (Acc = A):
ACCA – ACCB →ACCA
Else:
ACCB – ACCA →ACCB
Status Affected:
OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB
Encoding:
SUB
PIC24E
1100
Description:
1011
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
X
0000
0000
0000
Acc
A011
Subtract the contents of the unspecified accumulator from the contents
of Acc, and store the result back into Acc. This instruction performs a
40-bit subtraction.
The ‘A’ bit specifies the destination accumulator.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
SUB
A
Before
Instruction
76 120F 098A
23 F312 BC17
0000
0000
ACCA
ACCB
CORCON
SR
Example 2:
SUB
ACCA
ACCB
CORCON
SR
DS70157F-page 410
; Subtract ACCB from ACCA
; Store the result to ACCA
; CORCON = 0x0000 (no saturation)
B
ACCA
ACCB
CORCON
SR
After
Instruction
52 1EFC 4D73
23 F312 BC17
0000
1100 (OA, OB = 1)
; Subtract ACCA from ACCB
; Store the result to ACCB
; CORCON = 0x0040 (SATB = 1)
Before
Instruction
FF 9022 2EE1
00 2456 8F4C
0040
0000
ACCA
ACCB
CORCON
SR
After
Instruction
FF 9022 2EE1
00 7FFF FFFF
0040
1400 (SB, SAB = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
SUBB
Subtract WREG and Carry bit from f
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
X
X
X
{label:}
Operands:
f ∈ [0 ... 8191]
Operation:
(f) – (WREG) – (C) →destination designated by D
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
1011
Description:
0101
f
X
Syntax:
Encoding:
SUBB{.B}
dsPIC30F dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
ffff
ffff
{,WREG}
1BDf
ffff
Subtract the contents of the default working register WREG and the
Borrow flag (Carry flag inverse, C) from the contents of the specified file
register and place the result in the destination register. The optional
WREG operand determines the destination register. If WREG is
specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not specified, the
result is stored in the file register
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘D’ bit selects the destination (‘0’ for WREG, ‘1’ for file register).
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The WREG is set to working register W0.
3: The Z flag is “sticky” for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR.
These instructions can only clear Z.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
SUBB.B 0x1FFF
; Sub. WREG and C from (0x1FFF) (Byte mode)
; Store result to 0x1FFF
Before
Instruction
WREG (W0)
7804
Data 1FFE
9439
SR
0000
Example 2:
SUBB 0xA04, WREG
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
; Sub. WREG and C from (0xA04) (Word mode)
; Store result to WREG
After
Instruction
WREG (W0)
0000
Data 0A04
6235
SR
0001 (C = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
Before
Instruction
WREG (W0)
6234
Data 0A04
6235
SR
0000
After
Instruction
WREG (W0)
7804
Data 1FFE
8F39
SR
0011 (DC, C = 1)
DS70157F-page 411
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
SUBB
Subtract Wn from Literal with Borrow
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
kkkk
kkkk
dddd
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
lit10 ∈ [0 ... 255] for byte operation
lit10 ∈ [0 ... 1023] for word operation
Wn ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Wn) – lit10 – (C) →Wn
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
SUBB{.B}
1011
Description:
0001
#lit10,
1Bkk
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
Wn
Subtract the unsigned 10-bit literal operand and the Borrow flag (Carry
flag inverse, C) from the contents of the working register Wn, and store
the result back in the working register Wn. Register direct addressing
must be used for Wn.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘k’ bits specify the literal operand.
The ‘d’ bits select the address of the working register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .w extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: For byte operations, the literal must be specified as an
unsigned value [0:255]. See Section 4.6 “Using 10-bit Literal Operands” for information on using 10-bit literal
operands in Byte mode.
3: The Z flag is “sticky” for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR.
These instructions can only clear Z.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
SUBB.B
#0x23, W0
Before
Instruction
W0
7804
SR
0000
Example 2:
SUBB
#0x108, W4
Before
Instruction
W4
6234
SR
0001 (C = 1)
DS70157F-page 412
; Sub. 0x23 and C from W0 (Byte mode)
; Store result to W0
After
Instruction
W0 78E0
SR
0108 (DC, N = 1)
; Sub. 0x108 and C from W4 (Word mode)
; Store result to W4
After
Instruction
W4 612C
SR
0001 (C = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
SUBB
Subtract Short Literal from Wb with Borrow
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
SUBB{.B}
Wb,
#lit5,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
Wd
[Wd]
[Wd++]
[Wd--]
[++Wd]
[--Wd]
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
lit5 ∈ [0 ... 31]
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Wb) – lit5 – (C) →Wd
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
0101
Description:
1www
wBqq
qddd
d11k
kkkk
Subtract the 5-bit unsigned literal operand and the Borrow flag (Carry
flag inverse, C) from the contents of the base register Wb and place the
result in the destination register Wd. Register direct addressing must be
used for Wb. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for
Wd.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘q’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘k’ bits provide the literal operand, a five-bit integer number.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The Z flag is “sticky” for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR.
These instructions can only clear Z.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
SUBB.B
W4, #0x10, W5
Before
Instruction
W4
1782
W5
7804
SR
0000
; Sub. 0x10 and C from W4 (Byte mode)
; Store result to W5
After
Instruction
W4
1782
W5
7871
SR
0005 (OV, C = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 413
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 2:
SUBB
W0, #0x8, [W2++]
; Sub. 0x8 and C from W0 (Word mode)
; Store result to [W2]
; Post-increment W2
Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
W0
0009
W0
0009
W2
2004
W2
2006
Data 2004 A557
Data 2004
0000
SR
0002 (Z = 1)
SR
0103 (DC, Z, C = 1)
DS70157F-page 414
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
SUBB
Subtract Ws from Wb with Borrow
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
SUBB{.B}
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Wb) – (Ws) – (C) →Wd
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
0101
Description:
1www
Wb,
wBqq
Ws,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Wd
[Ws],
[Wd]
[Ws++],
[Wd++]
[Ws--],
[Wd--]
[++Ws],
[++Wd]
[--Ws],
[--Wd]
qddd
X
dppp
ssss
Subtract the contents of the source register Ws and the Borrow flag
(Carry flag inverse, C) from the contents of the base register Wb, and
place the result in the destination register Wd. Register direct addressing
must be used for Wb. Register direct or indirect addressing may be used
for Ws and Wd.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘q’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The Z flag is “sticky” for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR.
These instructions can only clear Z.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
SUBB.B
W0, W1, W0
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
After
Instruction
W0 17ED
W1
7844
SR
0108 (DC, N = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
Before
Instruction
W0
1732
W1
7844
SR
0000
; Sub. W1 and C from W0 (Byte mode)
; Store result to W0
DS70157F-page 415
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 2:
SUBB
W7,[W8++],[W9++] ;
;
;
;
Before
Instruction
W7
2450
W8
1808
W9
2022
Data 1808 92E4
Data 2022 A557
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 416
Sub. [W8] and C from W7 (Word mode)
Store result to [W9]
Post-increment W8
Post-increment W9
After
Instruction
W7
2450
W8 180A
W9
2024
Data 1808 92E4
Data 2022 916B
SR 010C (DC, N, OV = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
SUBBR
Subtract f from WREG with Borrow
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
f ∈ [0 ... 8191]
Operation:
(WREG) – (f) – (C) →destination designated by D
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
1011
Description:
SUBBR{.B} f
dsPIC30F dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
1101
X
X
ffff
ffff
{,WREG}
1BDf
ffff
Subtract the contents of the specified file register f and the Borrow flag
(Carry flag inverse, C) from the contents of WREG, and place the result
in the destination register. The optional WREG operand determines the
destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG.
If WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘D’ bit selects the destination (‘0’ for WREG, ‘1’ for file register).
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The WREG is set to working register W0.
3: The Z flag is “sticky” for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR.
These instructions can only clear Z.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
SUBBR.B 0x803
; Sub. (0x803) and C from WREG (Byte mode)
; Store result to 0x803
Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
WREG (W0)
7804
WREG (W0)
7804
Data 0802
9439
Data 0802
6F39
SR
0002 (Z = 1)
SR
0000
Example 2:
SUBBR 0xA04, WREG ; Sub. (0xA04) and C from WREG (Word mode)
; Store result to WREG
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
5
After
Instruction
WREG (W0) FFFE
Data 0A04
6235
SR
0008 (N = 1)
Instruction
Descriptions
Before
Instruction
WREG (W0)
6234
Data 0A04
6235
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 417
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
SUBBR
Subtract Wb from Short Literal with Borrow
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
SUBBR{.B} Wb,
#lit5,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
Wd
[Wd]
[Wd++]
[Wd--]
[++Wd]
[--Wd]
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
lit5 ∈ [0 ... 31]
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
lit5 – (Wb) – (C) →Wd
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
0001
Description:
1www
wBqq
qddd
d11k
kkkk
Subtract the contents of the base register Wb and the Borrow flag (Carry
flag inverse, C) from the 5-bit unsigned literal and place the result in the
destination register Wd. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb.
Register direct or indirect addressing must be used for Wd.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘q’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘k’ bits provide the literal operand, a five-bit integer number.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The Z flag is “sticky” for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR.
These instructions can only clear Z.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
SUBBR.B
W0, #0x10, W1 ; Sub. W0 and C from 0x10 (Byte mode)
; Store result to W1
Before
Instruction
W0
F310
W1 786A
SR
0003 (Z, C = 1)
DS70157F-page 418
After
Instruction
W0
F310
W1
7800
SR
0103 (DC, Z, C = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 2:
SUBBR
W0, #0x8, [W2++] ; Sub. W0 and C from 0x8 (Word mode)
; Store result to [W2]
; Post-increment W2
Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
W0
0009
W0
0009
W2
2004
W2
2006
Data 2004 A557
Data 2004 FFFE
SR
0020 (Z = 1)
SR
0108 (DC, N = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 419
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
SUBBR
Subtract Wb from Ws with Borrow
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
SUBBR{.B} Wb,
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Ws) – (Wb) – (C) →Wd
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
0001
Description:
1www
wBqq
Ws,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Wd
[Ws],
[Wd]
[Ws++],
[Wd++]
[Ws--],
[Wd--]
[++Ws],
[++Wd]
[--Ws],
[--Wd]
qddd
X
dppp
ssss
Subtract the contents of the base register Wb and the Borrow flag (Carry
flag inverse, C) from the contents of the source register Ws and place
the result in the destination register Wd. Register direct addressing must
be used for Wb. Register direct or indirect addressing may be used for
Ws and Wd.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘q’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The Z flag is “sticky” for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR.
These instructions can only clear Z.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
SUBBR.B
W0, W1, W0
Before
Instruction
W0
1732
W1
7844
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 420
; Sub. W0 and C from W1 (Byte mode)
; Store result to W0
After
Instruction
W0
1711
W1
7844
SR
0001 (C = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 2:
SUBBR W7,[W8++],[W9++] ;
;
;
;
Before
Instruction
W7
2450
W8
1808
W9
2022
Data 1808 92E4
Data 2022 A557
SR
0000
Sub. W7 and C from [W8] (Word mode)
Store result to [W9]
Post-increment W8
Post-increment W9
After
Instruction
W7
2450
W8 180A
W9
2024
Data 1808 92E4
Data 2022 6E93
SR
0005 (OV, C = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 421
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
SUBR
Subtract f from WREG
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
f ∈ [0 ... 8191]
Operation:
(WREG) – (f) →destination designated by D
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
SUBR{.B} f
dsPIC30F dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
1011
Description:
1101
X
X
ffff
ffff
{,WREG}
0BDf
ffff
Subtract the contents of the specified file register from the contents of
the default working register WREG, and place the result in the
destination register. The optional WREG operand determines the
destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG.
If WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘D’ bit selects the destination (‘0’ for WREG, ‘1’ for file register).
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The WREG is set to working register W0.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
SUBR.B
0x1FFF
Before
Instruction
WREG (W0)
7804
Data 1FFE
9439
SR
0000
Example 2:
SUBR
After
Instruction
WREG (W0)
7804
Data 1FFE
7039
SR
0000
0xA04, WREG
Before
Instruction
WREG (W0)
6234
Data 0A04
6235
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 422
; Sub. (0x1FFF) from WREG (Byte mode)
; Store result to 0x1FFF
; Sub. (0xA04) from WREG (Word mode)
; Store result to WREG
After
Instruction
WREG (W0) FFFF
Data 0A04
6235
SR
0008 (N = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
SUBR
Subtract Wb from Short Literal
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
SUBR{.B}
Wb,
#lit5
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
Wd
[Wd]
[Wd++]
[Wd--]
[++Wd]
[--Wd]
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
lit5 ∈ [0 ... 31]
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
lit5 – (Wb) →Wd
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
0001
Description:
0www
wBqq
qddd
d11k
kkkk
Subtract the contents of the base register Wb from the unsigned 5-bit
literal operand, and place the result in the destination register Wd.
Register direct addressing must be used for Wb. Either register direct or
indirect addressing may be used for Wd.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘q’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘k’ bits provide the literal operand, a five-bit integer number.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
SUBR.B
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
W0, #0x10, W1
Before
Instruction
W0
F310
W1 786A
SR
0000
Example 2:
SUBR
; Sub. W0 from 0x8 (Word mode)
; Store result to [W2]
; Post-increment W2
After
Instruction
W0
0009
W2
2006
Data 2004 FFFF
SR
0108 (DC, N = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
After
Instruction
W0
F310
W1
7800
SR
0103 (DC, Z, C = 1)
W0, #0x8, [W2++]
Before
Instruction
W0
0009
W2
2004
Data 2004 A557
SR
0000
; Sub. W0 from 0x10 (Byte mode)
; Store result to W1
DS70157F-page 423
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
SUBR
Subtract Wb from Ws
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
SUBR{.B}
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Ws) – (Wb) →Wd
Status Affected:
DC, N, OV, Z, C
Encoding:
0001
Description:
0www
Wb,
wBqq
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Ws,
Wd
[Ws],
[Wd]
[Ws++],
[Wd++]
[Ws--],
[Wd--]
[++Ws],
[++Wd]
[--Ws],
[--Wd]
qddd
dppp
X
ssss
Subtract the contents of the base register Wb from the contents of the
source register Ws and place the result in the destination register Wd.
Register direct addressing must be used for Wb. Either register direct or
indirect addressing may be used for Ws and Wd.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘q’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
SUBR.B
W0, W1, W0
Before
Instruction
W0
1732
W1
7844
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 424
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
; Sub. W0 from W1 (Byte mode)
; Store result to W0
After
Instruction
W0
1712
W1
7844
SR
0001 (C = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 2:
SUBR
W7, [W8++], [W9++]
Before
Instruction
W7
2450
W8
1808
W9
2022
Data 1808 92E4
Data 2022 A557
SR
0000
;
;
;
;
Sub. W7 from [W8] (Word mode)
Store result to [W9]
Post-increment W8
Post-increment W9
After
Instruction
W7
2450
W8 180A
W9
2024
Data 1808 92E4
Data 2022 6E94
SR
0005 (OV, C = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 425
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
SWAP
Byte or Nibble Swap Wn
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
X
X
X
X
X
X
1B00
0000
0000
ssss
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
Wn ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
For byte operation:
(Wn)<7:4> ↔ (Wn)<3:0>
For word operation:
(Wn)<15:8> ↔ (Wn)<7:0>
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
SWAP{.B} Wn
1111
Description:
dsPIC30F dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
1101
Swap the contents of the working register Wn. In Word mode, the two
bytes of Wn are swapped. In Byte mode, the two nibbles of the Least
Significant Byte of Wn are swapped, and the Most Significant Byte of
Wn is unchanged. Register direct addressing must be used for Wn.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘s’ bits select the address of the working register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
SWAP.B
W0
Before
Instruction
W0 AB87
SR
0000
Example 2:
SWAP
W0
Before
Instruction
W0
8095
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 426
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
; Nibble swap (W0)
After
Instruction
W0 AB78
SR
0000
; Byte swap (W0)
After
Instruction
W0
9580
SR
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
TBLRDH
Table Read High
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
TBLRDH{.B} [Ws],
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
dppp
ssss
Wd
[Ws++],
[Wd]
[Ws--],
[Wd++]
[++Ws],
[Wd--]
[--Ws],
[++Wd]
[--Wd]
Operands:
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
For byte operation:
If (LSB(Ws) = 1)
0 →Wd
Else
Program Mem [(TBLPAG),(Ws)] <23:16> →Wd
For word operation:
Program Mem [(TBLPAG),(Ws)] <23:16> →Wd <7:0>
0 →Wd <15:8>
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
Description:
1011
1010
1Bqq
qddd
Read the contents of the most significant word of program memory and
store it to the destination register Wd. The target word address of program
memory is formed by concatenating the 8-bit Table Pointer register,
TBLPAG<7:0>, with the effective address specified by Ws. Indirect
addressing must be used for Ws, and either register direct or indirect
addressing may be used for Wd.
In Word mode, zero is stored to the Most Significant Byte of the destination
register (due to non-existent program memory) and the third program
memory byte (PM<23:16>) at the specified program memory address is
stored to the Least Significant Byte of the destination register.
In Byte mode, the source address depends on the contents of Ws. If Ws is
not word-aligned, zero is stored to the destination register (due to
non-existent program memory). If Ws is word-aligned, the third program
memory byte (PM<23:16>) at the specified program memory address is
stored to the destination register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘q’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
2 (PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F)
5 (PIC24E, dsPIC33E)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 427
Instruction
Descriptions
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte move rather
than a word move. You may use a .W extension to denote a
word move, but it is not required.
5
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 1:
TBLRDH.B
W0
W1
Data 0F70
Program 01 0812
TBLPAG
SR
Example 2:
DS70157F-page 428
Before
Instruction
0812
0F71
0944
EF 2042
0001
0000
TBLRDH
W6
W8
Program 00 3406
TBLPAG
SR
[W0], [W1++]
W0
W1
Data 0F70
Program 01 0812
TBLPAG
SR
[W6++], W8
Before
Instruction
3406
65B1
29 2E40
0000
0000
; Read PM (TBLPAG:[W0]) (Byte mode)
; Store to [W1]
; Post-increment W1
After
Instruction
0812
0F72
EF44
EF 2042
0001
0000
; Read PM (TBLPAG:[W6]) (Word mode)
; Store to W8
; Post-increment W6
W6
W8
Program 00 3406
TBLPAG
SR
After
Instruction
3408
0029
29 2E40
0000
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
TBLRDL
Table Read Low
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
TBLRDL{.B} [Ws],
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
dppp
ssss
Wd
[Ws++],
[Wd]
[Ws--],
[Wd++]
[++Ws],
[Wd--]
[--Ws],
[++Wd]
[--Wd]
Operands:
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
For byte operation:
If (LSB(Ws) = 1)
Program Mem [(TBLPAG),(Ws)] <15:8> →Wd
Else
Program Mem [(TBLPAG),(Ws)] <7:0> →Wd
For word operation:
Program Mem [(TBLPAG),(Ws)] <15:0> →Wd
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
Description:
1011
1010
0Bqq
qddd
Read the contents of the least significant word of program memory and
store it to the destination register Wd. The target word address of program
memory is formed by concatenating the 8-bit Table Pointer register,
TBLPAG<7:0>, with the effective address specified by Ws. Indirect
addressing must be used for Ws, and either register direct or indirect
addressing may be used for Wd.
In Word mode, the lower 2 bytes of program memory are stored to the
destination register. In Byte mode, the source address depends on the
contents of Ws. If Ws is not word-aligned, the second byte of the program
memory word (PM<15:7>) is stored to the destination register. If Ws is
word-aligned, the first byte of the program memory word (PM<7:0>) is
stored to the destination register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word mode, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘q’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte move rather
than a word move. You may use a .W extension to denote a
word move, but it is not required.
Words:
1
Cycles:
2 (PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F)
5
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Instruction
Descriptions
5 (PIC24E, dsPIC33E)
DS70157F-page 429
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 1:
TBLRDL.B
W0
W1
Data 0F70
Program 01 0812
TBLPAG
SR
Example 2:
DS70157F-page 430
Before
Instruction
0813
0F71
0944
EF 2042
0001
0000
TBLRDL
W6
W8
Data 1202
Program 00 3406
TBLPAG
SR
[W0++], W1
W0
W1
Data 0F70
Program 01 0812
TBLPAG
SR
[W6], [W8++]
Before
Instruction
3406
1202
658B
29 2E40
0000
0000
; Read PM (TBLPAG:[W0]) (Byte mode)
; Store to W1
; Post-increment W0
After
Instruction
0814
0F20
EF44
EF 2042
0001
0000
; Read PM (TBLPAG:[W6]) (Word mode)
; Store to W8
; Post-increment W8
W6
W8
Data 1202
Program 00 3406
TBLPAG
SR
After
Instruction
3406
1204
2E40
29 2E40
0000
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
TBLWTH
Table Write High
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
TBLWTH{.B} Ws,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
dppp
ssss
[Wd]
[Ws],
[Wd++]
[Ws++],
[Wd--]
[Ws--],
[++Wd]
[++Ws],
[--Wd]
[--Ws],
Operands:
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
For byte operation:
If (LSB(Wd) = 1)
NOP
Else
(Ws) →Program Mem [(TBLPAG),(Wd)]<23:16>
For word operation:
(Ws)<7:0> →Program Mem [(TBLPAG),(Wd)] <23:16>
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1011
Description:
1011
1Bqq
qddd
Store the contents of the working source register Ws to the most significant
word of program memory. The destination word address of program
memory is formed by concatenating the 8-bit Table Pointer register,
TBLPAG<7:0>, with the effective address specified by Wd. Either direct or
indirect addressing may be used for Ws, and indirect addressing must be
used for Wd.
Since program memory is 24 bits wide, this instruction can only write to the
upper byte of program memory (PM<23:16>). This may be performed using
a Wd that is word-aligned in Byte mode or Word mode. If Byte mode is
used with a Wd that is not word-aligned, no operation is performed.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘q’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
2(1)
Note 1:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte move rather
than a word move. You may use a .W extension to denote a word
move, but it is not required.
5
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 431
Instruction
Descriptions
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 1:
TBLWTH.B
W0
W1
Data 0812
Program 01 0F70
TBLPAG
SR
Before
Instruction
0812
0F70
0944
EF 2042
0001
0000
Note:
Example 2:
Note:
DS70157F-page 432
; Write [W0]... (Byte mode)
; to PM Latch High (TBLPAG:[W1])
; Post-increment W0
W0
W1
Data 0812
Program 01 0F70
TBLPAG
SR
After
Instruction
0814
0F70
EF44
44 2042
0001
0000
Only the Program Latch is written to. The contents of program memory
are not updated until the Flash memory is programmed using the
procedure described in the specific device family reference manual.
TBLWTH
W6
W8
Program 00 0870
TBLPAG
SR
[W0++], [W1]
W6, [W8++]
Before
Instruction
0026
0870
22 3551
0000
0000
; Write W6... (Word mode)
; to PM Latch High (TBLPAG:[W8])
; Post-increment W8
W6
W8
Program 00 0870
TBLPAG
SR
After
Instruction
0026
0872
26 3551
0000
0000
Only the Program Latch is written to. The contents of program memory
are not updated until the Flash memory is programmed using the
procedure described in the specific device family reference manual.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
TBLWTL
Table Write Low
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
TBLWTL{.B} Ws,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
dppp
ssss
[Wd]
[Ws],
[Wd++]
[Ws++],
[Wd--]
[Ws--],
[++Wd]
[++Ws],
[--Wd]
[--Ws],
Operands:
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
For byte operation:
If (LSB(Wd)=1)
(Ws) →Program Mem [(TBLPAG),(Wd)] <15:8>
Else
(Ws) →Program Mem [(TBLPAG),(Wd)] <7:0>
For word operation:
(Ws) →Program Mem [(TBLPAG),(Wd)] <15:0>
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1011
Description:
1011
0Bqq
qddd
Store the contents of the working source register Ws to the least significant
word of program memory. The destination word address of program
memory is formed by concatenating the 8-bit Table Pointer register,
TBLPAG<7:0>, with the effective address specified by Wd. Either direct or
indirect addressing may be used for Ws, and indirect addressing must be
used for Wd.
In Word mode, Ws is stored to the lower 2 bytes of program memory. In
Byte mode, the Least Significant bit of Wd determines the destination byte.
If Wd is not word-aligned, Ws is stored to the second byte of program
memory (PM<15:8>). If Wd is word-aligned, Ws is stored to the first byte of
program memory (PM<7:0>).
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘q’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
2(1)
5
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 433
Instruction
Descriptions
Note 1:
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte move rather
than a word move. You may use a .W extension to denote a word
move, but it is not required.
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 1:
TBLWTL.B
W0
W1
Program 00 1224
TBLPAG
SR
Before
Instruction
6628
1225
78 0080
0000
0000
Note:
Example 2:
Note:
DS70157F-page 434
; Write W0... (Byte mode)
; to PM Latch Low (TBLPAG:[W1])
; Post-increment W1
W0
W1
Program 01 1224
TBLPAG
SR
After
Instruction
6628
1226
78 2880
0000
0000
Only the Program Latch is written to. The contents of program memory
are not updated until the Flash memory is programmed using the
procedure described in the specific device family reference manual.
TBLWTL
W6
W8
Data 1600
Program 01 7208
TBLPAG
SR
W0, [W1++]
[W6], [W8]
Before
Instruction
1600
7208
0130
09 0002
0001
0000
; Write [W6]... (Word mode)
; to PM Latch Low (TBLPAG:[W8])
; Post-increment W8
W6
W8
Data 1600
Program 01 7208
TBLPAG
SR
After
Instruction
1600
7208
0130
09 0130
0001
0000
Only the Program Latch is written to. The contents of program memory
are not updated until the Flash memory is programmed using the
procedure described in the specific device family reference manual.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
ULNK
De-allocate Stack Frame
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
None
Operation:
W14 →W15
(W15) – 2 →W15
(TOS) →W14
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1111
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
0000
0000
ULNK
1010
1000
0000
Description:
This instruction de-allocates a Stack Frame for a subroutine calling
sequence. The Stack Frame is de-allocated by setting the Stack Pointer
(W15) equal to the Frame Pointer (W14), and then POPping the stack
to reset the Frame Pointer (W14).
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
ULNK
; Unlink the stack frame
Before
Instruction
W14
2002
W15
20A2
Data 2000
2000
SR
0000
Example 2:
ULNK
After
Instruction
W14
2000
W15
2000
Data 2000
2000
SR
0000
; Unlink the stack frame
Before
Instruction
W14
0802
W15
0812
Data 0800
0800
SR
0000
After
Instruction
W14
0800
W15
0800
Data 0800
0800
SR
0000
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 435
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
ULNK
De-allocate Stack Frame
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
None
Operation:
W14 →W15
(W15) – 2 →W15
(TOS) →W14
0 →SFA bit
Status Affected:
SFA
Encoding:
1111
Description:
1
Cycles:
1
ULNK
ULNK
1000
0000
0000
0000
After
Instruction
W14
2000
W15
2000
Data 2000
2000
SR
0000
; Unlink the stack frame
Before
Instruction
W14
0802
W15
0812
Data 0800
0800
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 436
1010
; Unlink the stack frame
Before
Instruction
W14
2002
W15
20A2
Data 2000
2000
SR
0000
Example 2:
ULNK
This instruction de-allocates a Stack Frame for a subroutine calling
sequence. The Stack Frame is de-allocated by setting the Stack Pointer
(W15) equal to the Frame Pointer (W14), and then POPping the stack
to reset the Frame Pointer (W14).
Words:
Example 1:
X
After
Instruction
W14
0800
W15
0800
Data 0800
0800
SR
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
XOR
Exclusive OR f and WREG
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
f ∈ [0 ... 8191]
Operation:
(f).XOR.(WREG) →destination designated by D
Status Affected:
N, Z
Encoding:
XOR{.B}
1011
Description:
0110
f
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
ffff
ffff
{,WREG}
1BDf
ffff
Compute the logical exclusive OR operation of the contents of the
default working register WREG and the contents of the specified file
register and place the result in the destination register. The optional
WREG operand determines the destination register. If WREG is
specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not specified, the
result is stored in the file register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘D’ bit selects the destination (‘0’ for WREG, ‘1’ for file register).
The ‘f’ bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The WREG is set to working register W0.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
XOR.B
0x1FFF
Before
Instruction
WREG (W0)
7804
Data 1FFE
9439
SR
0000
Example 2:
XOR
After
Instruction
WREG (W0)
7804
Data 1FFE
9039
SR
0008 (N = 1)
0xA04, WREG
; XOR (0xA04) and WREG (Word mode)
; Store result to WREG
5
After
Instruction
WREG (W0) C267
Data 0A04 A053
SR
0008 (N = 1)
Instruction
Descriptions
Before
Instruction
WREG (W0)
6234
Data 0A04 A053
SR
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
; XOR (0x1FFF) and WREG (Byte mode)
; Store result to 0x1FFF
DS70157F-page 437
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
XOR
Exclusive OR Literal and Wn
Implemented in:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
kkkk
kkkk
dddd
Syntax:
{label:}
Operands:
lit10 ∈ [0 ... 255] for byte operation
lit10 ∈ [0 ... 1023] for word operation
Wn ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
lit10.XOR.(Wn) →Wn
Status Affected:
N, Z
Encoding:
1011
Description:
XOR{.B}
0010
#lit10,
1Bkk
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
Wn
Compute the logical exclusive OR operation of the unsigned 10-bit literal
operand and the contents of the working register Wn and store the result
back in the working register Wn. Register direct addressing must be
used for Wn.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘k’ bits specify the literal operand.
The ‘d’ bits select the address of the working register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: For byte operations, the literal must be specified as an
unsigned value [0:255]. See Section 4.6 “Using 10-bit Literal Operands” for information on using 10-bit literal
operands in Byte mode.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
XOR.B
#0x23, W0
Before
Instruction
W0
7804
SR
0000
Example 2:
XOR
#0x108, W4
Before
Instruction
W4
6134
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 438
; XOR 0x23 and W0 (Byte mode)
; Store result to W0
After
Instruction
W0
7827
SR
0000
; XOR 0x108 and W4 (Word mode)
; Store result to W4
After
Instruction
W4 603C
SR
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
XOR
Exclusive OR Wb and Short Literal
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
XOR{.B}
Wb,
#lit5,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
X
Wd
[Wd]
[Wd++]
[Wd--]
[++Wd]
[--Wd]
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
lit5 ∈ [0 ... 31]
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Wb).XOR.lit5 →Wd
Status Affected:
N, Z
Encoding:
0110
Description:
1www
wBqq
qddd
d11k
kkkk
Compute the logical exclusive OR operation of the contents of the base
register Wb and the unsigned 5-bit literal operand and place the result in
the destination register Wd. Register direct addressing must be used for
Wb. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Wd.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘q’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘k’ bits provide the literal operand, a 5-bit integer number.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Example 1:
XOR.B
W4, #0x14, W5
Before
Instruction
W4
C822
W5
1200
SR
0000
Example 2:
XOR
; XOR W4 and 0x14 (Byte mode)
; Store result to W5
After
Instruction
W4
C822
W5
1234
SR
0000
W2, #0x1F, [W8++]
; XOR W2 by 0x1F (Word mode)
; Store result to [W8]
; Post-increment W8
After
Instruction
W2
8505
W8
1006
Data 1004
851A
SR
0008 (N = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
Before
Instruction
W2
8505
W8
1004
Data 1004
6628
SR
0000
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
DS70157F-page 439
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
XOR
Exclusive OR Wb and Ws
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
{label:}
XOR{.B}
Operands:
Wb ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
(Wb).XOR.(Ws) →Wd
Status Affected:
N, Z
Encoding:
0110
Description:
1www
Wb,
wBqq
Ws,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Wd
[Ws],
[Wd]
[Ws++],
[Wd++]
[Ws--],
[Wd--]
[++Ws],
[++Wd]
[--Ws],
[--Wd]
qddd
X
dppp
ssss
Compute the logical exclusive OR operation of the contents of the source
register Ws and the contents of the base register Wb, and place the
result in the destination register Wd. Register direct addressing must be
used for Wb. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for
Ws and Wd.
The ‘w’ bits select the address of the base register.
The ‘B’ bit selects byte or word operation (‘0’ for word, ‘1’ for byte).
The ‘q’ bits select the destination Address mode.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note:
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
DS70157F-page 440
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 1:
XOR.B
W1, [W5++], [W9++]
Before
Instruction
W1 AAAA
W5
2000
W9
2600
Data 2000
115A
Data 2600
0000
SR
0000
Example 2:
XOR
W1, W5, W9
Before
Instruction
W1 FEDC
W5
1234
W9
A34D
SR
0000
; XOR W1 and [W5] (Byte mode)
; Store result to [W9]
; Post-increment W5 and W9
After
Instruction
W1 AAAA
W5
2001
W9
2601
Data 2000
115A
Data 2600
00F0
SR
0008 (N = 1)
; XOR W1 and W5 (Word mode)
; Store the result to W9
After
Instruction
W1 FEDC
W5
1234
W9
ECE8
SR
0008 (N = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 441
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
ZE
Zero-Extend Ws
Implemented in:
Syntax:
PIC24F
PIC24H
PIC24E
dsPIC30F
X
X
X
X
X
X
0ddd
dppp
ssss
{label:}
ZE
Ws,
dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
Wnd
[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:
Ws ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Wnd ∈ [W0 ... W15]
Operation:
Ws<7:0> →Wnd<7:0>
0 →Wnd<15:8>
Status Affected:
N, Z, C
Encoding:
1111
Description:
1011
1000
Zero-extend the Least Significant Byte in source working register Ws to
a 16-bit value and store the result in the destination working register
Wnd. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws,
and register direct addressing must be used for Wnd. The N flag is
cleared and the C flag is set, because the zero-extended word is always
positive.
The ‘d’ bits select the destination register.
The ‘p’ bits select the source Address mode.
The ‘s’ bits select the source register.
Note 1: This operation converts a byte to a word, and it uses no .B or
.W extension.
2: The source Ws is addressed as a byte operand, so any
address modification is by ‘1’.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(1)
Note 1:
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the listed cycle count does not apply to read and
read-modify-write operations on non-CPU Special Function Registers. For more
details, see Note 3 in Section 3.2.1 “Multi-Cycle Instructions”.
Example 1:
ZE
W3, W4
Before
Instruction
W3
7839
W4
1005
SR
0000
DS70157F-page 442
; zero-extend W3
; Store result to W4
After
Instruction
W3
7839
W4
0039
SR
0001 (C = 1)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions
Example 2:
ZE
[W2++], W12
Before
Instruction
W2
0900
W12
1002
Data 0900
268F
SR
0000
; Zero-extend [W2]
; Store to W12
; Post-increment W2
After
Instruction
W2
0901
W12
008F
Data 0900
268F
SR
0001 (C = 1)
5
Instruction
Descriptions
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 443
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
NOTES:
DS70157F-page 444
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
6
Built-in Functions
Section 6. Built-in Functions
HIGHLIGHTS
This section of the manual contains the following major topics:
6.1
6.2
Introduction ................................................................................................................... 446
Built-in Function List...................................................................................................... 447
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 445
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
6.1
INTRODUCTION
This section describes the built-in functions that are specific to the MPLAB C Compiler for PIC24
MCUs and dsPIC DSCs (formerly MPLAB C30).
Built-in functions give the C programmer access to assembler operators or machine instructions
that are currently only accessible using in-line assembly, but are sufficiently useful that they are
applicable to a broad range of applications. Built-in functions are coded in C source files
syntactically like function calls, but they are compiled to assembly code that directly implements
the function, and do not involve function calls or library routines.
There are a number of reasons why providing built-in functions is preferable to requiring
programmers to use in-line assembly. They include the following:
1.
2.
3.
Providing built-in functions for specific purposes simplifies coding.
Certain optimizations are disabled when in-line assembly is used. This is not the case for
built-in functions.
For machine instructions that use dedicated registers, coding in-line assembly while
avoiding register allocation errors can require considerable care. The built-in functions
make this process simpler as you do not need to be concerned with the particular register
requirements for each individual machine instruction.
The built-in functions are listed below followed by their individual detailed descriptions.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
__builtin_addab
__builtin_add
__builtin_btg
__builtin_clr
__builtin_clr_prefetch
__builtin_divf
__builtin_divmodsd
__builtin_divmodud
__builtin_divsd
__builtin_divud
__builtin_dmaoffset
__builtin_ed
__builtin_edac
__builtin_edsoffset
__builtin_edspage
__builtin_fbcl
__builtin_lac
__builtin_mac
__builtin_modsd
__builtin_modud
__builtin_movsac
__builtin_mpy
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
__builtin_mpyn
__builtin_msc
__builtin_mulss
__builtin_mulsu
__builtin_mulus
__builtin_muluu
__builtin_nop
__builtin_psvpage
__builtin_psvoffset
__builtin_readsfr
__builtin_return_address
__builtin_sac
__builtin_sacr
__builtin_sftac
__builtin_subab
__builtin_tbladdress
__builtin_tblpage
__builtin_tbloffset
__builtin_tblrdh
__builtin_tblrdl
__builtin_tblwth
__builtin_tblwtl
This section describes only the built-in functions related to the CPU operations. The compiler
provides additional built-in functions for operations such as writing to Flash program memory and
changing the oscillator settings. Refer to the “MPLAB® C Compiler for PIC24 MCUs and dsPIC®
DSCs User’s Guide” (DS51284) for a complete list of compiler built-in functions.
DS70157F-page 446
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 6. Built-in Functions
6
BUILT-IN FUNCTION LIST
This section describes the programmer interface to the compiler built-in functions. Since the
functions are “built-in”, there are no header files associated with them. Similarly, there are no
command-line switches associated with the built-in functions – they are always available. The
built-in function names are chosen such that they belong to the compiler’s namespace (they all
have the prefix __builtin_), so they will not conflict with function or variable names in the
programmer’s namespace.
__builtin_addab
Description:
Add accumulators A and B with the result written back to the specified accumulator. For
example:
register int result asm("A");
register int B asm("A");
result = __builtin_addab(result,B);
will generate:
add A
Prototype:
int __builtin_addab(int Accum_a, int Accum_b);
Argument:
Accum_a First accumulator to add.
Accum_b Second accumulator to add.
Return Value:
Returns the addition result to an accumulator.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
add
Error Messages:
An error message appears if the result is not an accumulator register.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 447
Built-in Functions
6.2
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
__builtin_add
Description:
Add value to the accumulator specified by result with a shift specified by literal shift. For
example:
register int result asm("A");
int value;
result = __builtin_add(result,value,0);
If value is held in w0, the following will be generated:
add w0, #0, A
Prototype:
int __builtin_add(int Accum,int value,
const int shift);
Argument:
Accum
value
shift
Accumulator to add.
Integer number to add to accumulator value.
Amount to shift resultant accumulator value.
Return Value:
Returns the shifted addition result to an accumulator.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
add
Error Messages:
An error message appears if:
• the result is not an accumulator register
• argument 0 is not an accumulator
• the shift value is not a literal within range
DS70157F-page 448
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 6. Built-in Functions
6
Description:
This function will generate a btg machine instruction. Some examples include:
int i;
/* near by default */
int l _ _attribute_ _((far));
struct foo {
int bit1:1;
} barbits;
int bar;
void some_bittoggles() {
register int j asm("w9");
int k;
k = i;
_ _builtin_btg(&i,1);
_ _builtin_btg(&j,3);
_ _builtin_btg(&k,4);
_ _builtin_btg(&l,11);
return j+k;
}
Note that taking the address of a variable in a register will produce warning by the compiler and
cause the register to be saved onto the stack (so that its address may be taken); this form is
not recommended. This caution only applies to variables explicitly placed in registers by the
programmer.
Prototype:
void _ _builtin_btg(unsigned int *, unsigned int 0xn);
Argument:
*
0xn
A pointer to the data item for which a bit should be toggled.
A literal value in the range of 0 to 15.
Return Value:
Returns a btg machine instruction.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
btg
Error Messages:
An error message appears if the parameter values are not within range.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 449
Built-in Functions
__builtin_btg
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
__builtin_clr
Description:
Clear the specified accumulator. For example:
register int result asm("A");
result = _ _builtin_clr();
will generate:
clr A
Prototype:
int _ _builtin_clr(void);
Argument:
None
Return Value:
Returns the cleared value result to an accumulator.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
clr
Error Messages:
An error message appears if the result is not an accumulator register.
DS70157F-page 450
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 6. Built-in Functions
6
Description:
Clear an accumulator and prefetch data ready for a future MAC operation.
xptr may be null to signify no X prefetch to be performed, in which case the values of xincr
and xval are ignored, but required.
yptr may be null to signify no Y prefetch to be performed, in which case the values of yincr
and yval are ignored, but required.
xval and yval nominate the address of a C variable where the prefetched value will be stored.
xincr and yincr may be the literal values: -6, -4, -2, 0, 2, 4, 6 or an integer value.
If AWB is non null, the other accumulator will be written back into the referenced variable.
For example:
register int result asm("A");
register int B asm("B");
int x_memory_buffer[256]
_ _attribute_ _((space(xmemory)));
int y_memory_buffer[256]
_ _attribute_ _((space(ymemory)));
int *xmemory;
int *ymemory;
int awb;
int xVal, yVal;
xmemory = x_memory_buffer;
ymemory = y_memory_buffer;
result = _ _builtin_clr(&xmemory, &xVal, 2,
&ymemory, &yVal, 2, &awb, B);
May generate:
clr A, [w8]+=2, w4, [w10]+=2, w5, w13
The compiler may need to spill w13 to ensure that it is available for the write-back. It may be
recommended to users that the register be claimed for this purpose.
After this instruction:
•
•
•
•
result will be cleared
xVal will contain x_memory_buffer[0]
yVal will contain y_memory_buffer[0]
xmemory and ymemory will be incremented by 2, ready for the next mac operation
Prototype:
int
int
int
int
_ _builtin_clr_prefetch(
**xptr, int *xval, int xincr,
**yptr, int *yval, int yincr, int *AWB,
AWB_accum);
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 451
Built-in Functions
__builtin_clr_prefetch
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
__builtin_clr_prefetch
(Continued)
Argument:
xptr
xval
xincr
yptr
yval
yincr
AWB
AWB_accum
Note:
Integer pointer to x prefetch.
Integer value of x prefetch.
Integer increment value of x prefetch.
Integer pointer to y prefetch.
Integer value of y prefetch.
Integer increment value of y prefetch.
Accumulator write back location.
Accumulator to write back.
The arguments xptr and yptr must point to the arrays located in the x data
memory and y data memory, respectively.
Return Value:
Returns the cleared value result to an accumulator.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
clr
Error Messages:
An error message appears if:
•
•
•
•
DS70157F-page 452
the result is not an accumulator register
xval is a null value but xptr is not null
yval is a null value but yptr is not null
AWB_accum is not an accumulator and AWB is not null
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 6. Built-in Functions
6
Description:
Computes the quotient num / den. A math error exception occurs if den is zero. Function
arguments are unsigned, as is the function result.
Prototype:
unsigned int _ _builtin_divf(unsigned int num,
unsigned int den);
Argument:
num numerator
den denominator
Return Value:
Returns the unsigned integer value of the quotient num / den.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
div.f
__builtin_divmodsd
Description:
Issues the 16-bit architecture’s native signed divide support. Notably, if the quotient does not fit
into a 16-bit result, the results (including remainder) are unexpected. This form of the built-in
function will capture both the quotient and remainder.
Prototype:
signed int _ _builtin_divmodsd(
signed long dividend, signed int divisor,
signed int *remainder);
Argument:
dividend
divisor
remainder
number to be divided
number to divide by
pointer to remainder
Return Value:
Quotient and remainder.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
divmodsd
Error Messages:
None.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 453
Built-in Functions
__builtin_divf
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
__builtin_divmodud
Description:
Issues the 16-bit architecture’s native unsigned divide support. Notably, if the quotient does not
fit into a 16-bit result, the results (including remainder) are unexpected. This form of the built-in
function will capture both the quotient and remainder.
Prototype:
unsigned int _ _builtin_divmodud(
unsigned long dividend, unsigned int divisor,
unsigned int *remainder);
Argument:
dividend
divisor
remainder
number to be divided
number to divide by
pointer to remainder
Return Value:
Quotient and remainder.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
divmodud
Error Messages:
None.
__builtin_divsd
Description:
Computes the quotient num / den. A math error exception occurs if den is zero. Function
arguments are signed, as is the function result. The command-line option -Wconversions
can be used to detect unexpected sign conversions.
Prototype:
int _ _builtin_divsd(const long num, const int den);
Argument:
num numerator
den denominator
Return Value:
Returns the signed integer value of the quotient num / den.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
div.sd
DS70157F-page 454
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 6. Built-in Functions
6
Description:
Computes the quotient num / den. A math error exception occurs if den is zero. Function
arguments are unsigned, as is the function result. The command-line option -Wconversions
can be used to detect unexpected sign conversions.
Prototype:
unsigned int _ _builtin_divud(const unsigned
long num, const unsigned int den);
Argument:
num numerator
den denominator
Return Value:
Returns the unsigned integer value of the quotient num / den.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
div.ud
__builtin_dmaoffset
Description:
Obtains the offset of a symbol within DMA memory.
For example:
unsigned int result;
char buffer[256] _ _attribute_ _((space(dma)));
result = _ _builtin_dmaoffset(&buffer);
May generate:
mov #dmaoffset(buffer), w0
Prototype:
unsigned int _ _builtin_dmaoffset(const void *p);
Argument:
*p
pointer to DMA address value
Return Value:
Returns the offset to a variable located in DMA memory.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
dmaoffset
Error Messages:
An error message appears if the parameter is not the address of a global symbol.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 455
Built-in Functions
__builtin_divud
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
__builtin_ed
Description:
Squares sqr, returning it as the result. Also prefetches data for future square operation by
computing **xptr - **yptr and storing the result in *distance.
xincr and yincr may be the literal values: -6, -4, -2, 0, 2, 4, 6 or an integer value.
For example:
register int result asm("A");
int *xmemory, *ymemory;
int distance;
result = _ _builtin_ed(distance,
&xmemory, 2,
&ymemory, 2,
&distance);
May generate:
ed w4*w4, A, [w8]+=2, [W10]+=2, w4
Prototype:
int _ _builtin_ed(int sqr, int **xptr, int xincr,
int **yptr, int yincr, int *distance);
Argument:
sqr
xptr
xincr
yptr
yincr
distance
Note:
Integer squared value.
Integer pointer to pointer to x prefetch.
Integer increment value of x prefetch.
Integer pointer to pointer to y prefetch.
Integer increment value of y prefetch.
Integer pointer to distance.
The arguments xptr and yptr must point to the arrays located in the x data
memory and y data memory, respectively.
Return Value:
Returns the squared result to an accumulator.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
ed
Error Messages:
An error message appears if:
•
•
•
•
DS70157F-page 456
the result is not an accumulator register
xptr is null
yptr is null
distance is null
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 6. Built-in Functions
6
Description:
Squares sqr and sums with the nominated accumulator register, returning it as the result. Also
prefetches data for future square operation by computing **xptr - **yptr and storing the
result in *distance.
xincr and yincr may be the literal values: -6, -4, -2, 0, 2, 4, 6 or an integer value.
For example:
register int result asm("A");
int *xmemory, *ymemory;
int distance;
result = _ _builtin_ed(result, distance,
&xmemory, 2,
&ymemory, 2,
&distance);
May generate:
edac w4*w4, A, [w8]+=2, [W10]+=2, w4
Prototype:
int _ _builtin_edac(int Accum, int sqr,
int **xptr, int xincr, int **yptr, int yincr,
int *distance);
Argument:
Accum
sqr
xptr
xincr
yptr
yincr
distance
Note:
Accumulator to sum.
Integer squared value.
Integer pointer to pointer to x prefetch.
Integer increment value of x prefetch.
Integer pointer to pointer to y prefetch.
Integer increment value of y prefetch.
Integer pointer to distance.
The arguments xptr and yptr must point to the arrays located in the x data
memory and y data memory, respectively.
Return Value:
Returns the squared result to specified accumulator.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
edac
Error Messages:
An error message appears if:
•
•
•
•
•
the result is not an accumulator register
Accum is not an accumulator register
xptr is null
yptr is null
distance is null
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 457
Built-in Functions
__builtin_edac
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
__builtin_edsoffset
Description:
Returns the eds page offset of the object whose address is given as a parameter. The argument
p must be the address of an object in extended data space; otherwise an error message is
produced and the compilation fails. See the space attribute in Section 2.3.1 “Specifying
Attributes of Variables” of the “MPLAB® C Compiler for PIC24 MCUs and dsPIC® DSCs
User’s Guide” (DS51284).
Prototype:
unsigned int __builtin_edsoffset(int *p);
Argument:
p
object address
Return Value:
Returns the eds page number of the object whose address is given as a parameter
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
edsoffset
__builtin_edspage
Description:
Returns the eds page number of the object whose address is given as a parameter. The
argument p must be the address of an object in extended data space; otherwise an error
message is produced and the compilation fails. See the space attribute in
Section 2.3.1 “Specifying Attributes of Variables” of the “MPLAB® C Compiler for PIC24
MCUs and dsPIC® DSCs User’s Guide” (DS51284).
Prototype:
unsigned int __builtin_edspage(int *p);
Argument:
p
object address
Return Value:
Returns the eds page number of the object whose address is given as a parameter.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
edspage
DS70157F-page 458
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 6. Built-in Functions
6
Description:
Finds the first bit change from left in value. This is useful for dynamic scaling of fixed-point data.
For example:
int result, value;
result = _ _builtin_fbcl(value);
May generate:
fbcl w4, w5
Prototype:
int _ _builtin_fbcl(int value);
Argument:
value
Integer number of first bit change.
Return Value:
Returns the shifted addition result to an accumulator.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
fbcl
Error Messages:
An error message appears if the result is not an accumulator register.
__builtin_lac
Description:
Shifts value by shift (a literal between -8 and 7) and returns the value to be stored into the
accumulator register. For example:
register int result asm("A");
int value;
result = _ _builtin_lac(value,3);
May generate:
lac w4, #3, A
Prototype:
int _ _builtin_lac(int value, int shift);
Argument:
value
shift
Integer number to be shifted.
Literal amount to shift.
Return Value:
Returns the shifted addition result to an accumulator.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
lac
Error Messages:
An error message appears if:
• the result is not an accumulator register
• the shift value is not a literal within range
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 459
Built-in Functions
__builtin_fbcl
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
__builtin_mac
Description:
Computes a x b and sums with accumulator; also prefetches data ready for a future MAC
operation.
xptr may be null to signify no X prefetch to be performed, in which case the values of xincr
and xval are ignored, but required.
yptr may be null to signify no Y prefetch to be performed, in which case the values of yincr
and yval are ignored, but required.
xval and yval nominate the address of a C variable where the prefetched value will be stored.
xincr and yincr may be the literal values: -6, -4, -2, 0, 2, 4, 6 or an integer value.
If AWB is non null, the other accumulator will be written back into the referenced variable.
For example:
register int result asm("A");
register int B asm("B");
int *xmemory;
int *ymemory;
int xVal, yVal;
result = _ _builtin_mac(result, xVal, yVal,
&xmemory, &xVal, 2,
&ymemory, &yVal, 2, 0, B);
May generate:
mac w4*w5, A, [w8]+=2, w4, [w10]+=2, w5
Prototype:
int
int
int
int
_ _builtin_mac(int Accum, int a, int b,
**xptr, int *xval, int xincr,
**yptr, int *yval, int yincr, int *AWB,
AWB_accum);
Argument:
Accum
a
b
xptr
xval
xincr
yptr
yval
yincr
AWB
AWB_accum
Note:
Accumulator to sum.
Integer multiplicand.
Integer multiplier.
Integer pointer to pointer to x prefetch.
Integer pointer to value of x prefetch.
Integer increment value of x prefetch.
Integer pointer to pointer to y prefetch.
Integer pointer to value of y prefetch.
Integer increment value of y prefetch.
Accumulator write-back location.
Accumulator to write-back.
The arguments xptr and yptr must point to the arrays located in the x data
memory and y data memory, respectively.
Return Value:
Returns the cleared value result to an accumulator.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
mac
DS70157F-page 460
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 6. Built-in Functions
6
Built-in Functions
__builtin_mac
(Continued)
Error Messages:
An error message appears if:
•
•
•
•
•
the result is not an accumulator register
Accum is not an accumulator register
xval is a null value but xptr is not null
yval is a null value but yptr is not null
AWB_accum is not an accumulator register and AWB is not null
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 461
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
__builtin_modsd
Description:
Issues the 16-bit architecture’s native signed divide support. Notably, if the quotient does not fit
into a 16-bit result, the results (including remainder) are unexpected. This form of the built-in
function will capture only the remainder.
Prototype:
signed int _ _builtin_modsd(signed long dividend,
signed int divisor);
Argument:
dividend number to be divided
divisor number to divide by
Return Value:
Remainder.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
modsd
Error Messages:
None.
__builtin_modud
Description:
Issues the 16-bit architecture’s native unsigned divide support. Notably, if the quotient does not
fit into a 16-bit result, the results (including remainder) are unexpected. This form of the built-in
function will capture only the remainder.
Prototype:
unsigned int _ _builtin_modud(unsigned long dividend,
unsigned int divisor);
Argument:
dividend number to be divided
divisor number to divide by
Return Value:
Remainder.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
modud
Error Messages:
None.
DS70157F-page 462
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 6. Built-in Functions
6
Description:
Computes nothing, but prefetches data ready for a future MAC operation.
xptr may be null to signify no X prefetch to be performed, in which case the values of xincr
and xval are ignored, but required.
yptr may be null to signify no Y prefetch to be performed, in which case the values of yincr
and yval are ignored, but required.
xval and yval nominate the address of a C variable where the prefetched value will be stored.
xincr and yincr may be the literal values: -6, -4, -2, 0, 2, 4, 6 or an integer value.
If AWB is not null, the other accumulator will be written back into the referenced variable.
For example:
register int result asm("A");
int *xmemory;
int *ymemory;
int xVal, yVal;
result = _ _builtin_movsac(&xmemory, &xVal, 2,
&ymemory, &yVal, 2, 0, 0);
May generate:
movsac A, [w8]+=2, w4, [w10]+=2, w5
Prototype:
int
int
int
int
_ _builtin_movsac(
**xptr, int *xval, int xincr,
**yptr, int *yval, int yincr, int *AWB
AWB_accum);
Argument:
xptr
xval
xincr
yptr
yval
yincr
AWB
AWB_accum
Note:
Integer pointer to pointer to x prefetch.
Integer pointer to value of x prefetch.
Integer increment value of x prefetch.
Integer pointer to pointer to y prefetch.
Integer pointer to value of y prefetch.
Integer increment value of y prefetch.
Accumulator write back location.
Accumulator to write back.
The arguments xptr and yptr must point to the arrays located in the x data
memory and y data memory, respectively.
Return Value:
Returns prefetch data.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
movsac
Error Messages:
An error message appears if:
•
•
•
•
the result is not an accumulator register
xval is a null value but xptr is not null
yval is a null value but yptr is not null
AWB_accum is not an accumulator register and AWB is not null
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 463
Built-in Functions
__builtin_movsac
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
__builtin_mpy
Description:
Computes a x b ; also prefetches data ready for a future MAC operation.
xptr may be null to signify no X prefetch to be performed, in which case the values of xincr
and xval are ignored, but required.
yptr may be null to signify no Y prefetch to be performed, in which case the values of yincr
and yval are ignored, but required.
xval and yval nominate the address of a C variable where the prefetched value will be stored.
xincr and yincr may be the literal values: -6, -4, -2, 0, 2, 4, 6 or an integer value.
For example:
register int result asm("A");
int *xmemory;
int *ymemory;
int xVal, yVal;
result = _ _builtin_mpy(xVal, yVal,
&xmemory, &xVal, 2,
&ymemory, &yVal, 2);
May generate:
mac w4*w5, A, [w8]+=2, w4, [w10]+=2, w5
Prototype:
int _ _builtin_mpy(int a, int b,
int **xptr, int *xval, int xincr,
int **yptr, int *yval, int yincr);
Argument:
a
b
xptr
xval
xincr
yptr
yval
yincr
AWB
Note:
Integer multiplicand.
Integer multiplier.
Integer pointer to pointer to x prefetch.
Integer pointer to value of x prefetch.
Integer increment value of x prefetch.
Integer pointer to pointer to y prefetch.
Integer pointer to value of y prefetch.
Integer increment value of y prefetch.
Integer pointer to accumulator selection.
The arguments xptr and yptr must point to the arrays located in the x data
memory and y data memory, respectively.
Return Value:
Returns the cleared value result to an accumulator.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
mpy
Error Messages:
An error message appears if:
• the result is not an accumulator register
• xval is a null value but xptr is not null
• yval is a null value but yptr is not null
DS70157F-page 464
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 6. Built-in Functions
6
Description:
Computes -a x b ; also prefetches data ready for a future MAC operation.
xptr may be null to signify no X prefetch to be performed, in which case the values of xincr
and xval are ignored, but required.
yptr may be null to signify no Y prefetch to be performed, in which case the values of yincr
and yval are ignored, but required.
xval and yval nominate the address of a C variable where the prefetched value will be stored.
xincr and yincr may be the literal values: -6, -4, -2, 0, 2, 4, 6 or an integer value.
For example:
register int result asm("A");
int *xmemory;
int *ymemory;
int xVal, yVal;
result = _ _builtin_mpy(xVal, yVal,
&xmemory, &xVal, 2,
&ymemory, &yVal, 2);
May generate:
mac w4*w5, A, [w8]+=2, w4, [w10]+=2, w5
Prototype:
int _ _builtin_mpyn(int a, int b,
int **xptr, int *xval, int xincr,
int **yptr, int *yval, int yincr);
Argument:
Integer multiplicand.
Integer multiplier.
Integer pointer to pointer to x prefetch.
Integer pointer to value of x prefetch.
Integer increment value of x prefetch.
Integer pointer to pointer to y prefetch.
Integer pointer to value of y prefetch.
Integer increment value of y prefetch.
Integer pointer to accumulator selection.
a
b
xptr
xval
xincr
yptr
yval
yincr
AWB
Note:
The arguments xptr and yptr must point to the arrays located in the x data
memory and y data memory, respectively.
Return Value:
Returns the cleared value result to an accumulator.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
mpyn
Error Messages:
An error message appears if:
• the result is not an accumulator register
• xval is a null value but xptr is not null
• yval is a null value but yptr is not null
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 465
Built-in Functions
__builtin_mpyn
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
__builtin_msc
Description:
Computes a x b and subtracts from accumulator; also prefetches data ready for a future MAC
operation.
xptr may be null to signify no X prefetch to be performed, in which case the values of xincr
and xval are ignored, but required.
yptr may be null to signify no Y prefetch to be performed, in which case the values of yincr
and yval are ignored, but required.
xval and yval nominate the address of a C variable where the prefetched value will be stored.
xincr and yincr may be the literal values: -6, -4, -2, 0, 2, 4, 6 or an integer value.
If AWB is non null, the other accumulator will be written back into the referenced variable.
For example:
register int result asm("A");
int *xmemory;
int *ymemory;
int xVal, yVal;
result = _ _builtin_msc(result, xVal, yVal,
&xmemory, &xVal, 2,
&ymemory, &yVal, 2, 0, 0);
May generate:
msc w4*w5, A, [w8]+=2, w4, [w10]+=2, w5
Prototype:
int _ _builtin_msc(int Accum, int a, int b,
int **xptr, int *xval, int xincr,
int **yptr, int *yval, int yincr, int *AWB,
int AWB_accum);
Argument:
Accum
a
b
xptr
xval
xincr
yptr
yval
yincr
AWB
AWB_accum
Note:
IAccumulator to sum.
Integer multiplicand.
Integer multiplier.
Integer pointer to pointer to x prefetch.
Integer pointer to value of x prefetch.
Integer increment value of x prefetch.
Integer pointer to pointer to y prefetch.
Integer pointer to value of y prefetch.
Integer increment value of y prefetch.
Accumulator write back location.
Accumulator to write back.
The arguments xptr and yptr must point to the arrays located in the x data
memory and y data memory, respectively.
Return Value:
Returns the cleared value result to an accumulator.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
msc
DS70157F-page 466
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 6. Built-in Functions
6
Built-in Functions
__builtin_msc
(Continued)
Error Messages:
An error message appears if:
• the result is not an accumulator register
• Accum is not an accumulator register
• xval is a null value but xptr is not null
• yval is a null value but yptr is not null
• AWB_accum is not an accumulator register and AWB is not null
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 467
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
__builtin_mulss
Description:
Computes the product p0 x p1. Function arguments are signed integers, and the function result
is a signed long integer. The command-line option -Wconversions can be used to detect
unexpected sign conversions.
Prototype:
signed long __builtin_mulss(const signed int p0, const signed int p1);
Argument:
p0
p1
multiplicand
multiplier
Return Value:
Returns the signed long integer value of the product p0 x p1.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
mul.ss
__builtin_mulsu
Description:
Computes the product p0 x p1. Function arguments are integers with mixed signs, and the
function result is a signed long integer. The command-line option -Wconversions can be
used to detect unexpected sign conversions. This function supports the full range of addressing
modes of the instruction, including immediate mode for operand p1.
Prototype:
signed long __builtin_mulsu(const signed int p0, const unsigned int p1);
Argument:
p0
p1
multiplicand
multiplier
Return Value:
Returns the signed long integer value of the product p0 x p1.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
mul.su
DS70157F-page 468
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 6. Built-in Functions
6
Description:
Computes the product p0 x p1. Function arguments are integers with mixed signs, and the
function result is a signed long integer. The command-line option -Wconversions can be
used to detect unexpected sign conversions. This function supports the full range of addressing
modes of the instruction.
Prototype:
signed long __builtin_mulus(const unsigned int p0, const signed int p1);
Argument:
p0
p1
multiplicand
multiplier
Return Value:
Returns the signed long integer value of the product p0 x p1.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
mul.us
__builtin_muluu
Description:
Computes the product p0 x p1. Function arguments are unsigned integers, and the function
result is an unsigned long integer. The command-line option -Wconversions can be used to
detect unexpected sign conversions. This function supports the full range of addressing modes
of the instruction, including immediate mode for operand p1.
Prototype:
unsigned long __builtin_muluu(const unsigned int p0, const unsigned int p1);
Argument:
p0
p1
multiplicand
multiplier
Return Value:
Returns the signed long integer value of the product p0 x p1.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
mul.uu
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 469
Built-in Functions
__builtin_mulus
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
__builtin_nop
Description:
Generates a nop instruction.
Prototype:
void _ _builtin_nop(void);
Argument:
None.
Return Value:
Returns a no operation (nop).
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
nop
__builtin_psvoffset
Description:
Returns the psv page offset of the object whose address is given as a parameter. The argument
p must be the address of an object in an EE data, PSV or executable memory space; otherwise
an error message is produced and the compilation fails. See the space attribute in
Section 2.3.1 “Specifying Attributes of Variables” of the “MPLAB® C Compiler for PIC24
MCUs and dsPIC® DSCs User’s Guide” (DS51284).
Prototype:
unsigned int _ _builtin_psvoffset(const void *p);
Argument:
p
object address
Return Value:
Returns the psv page number offset of the object whose address is given as a parameter.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
psvoffset
Error Messages:
The following error message is produced when this function is used incorrectly:
“Argument to _ _builtin_psvoffset() is not the address of an object in code, psv, or
eedata section”.
The argument must be an explicit object address.
For example, if obj is object in an executable or read-only section, the following syntax is valid:
unsigned page = _ _builtin_psvoffset(&obj);
DS70157F-page 470
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 6. Built-in Functions
6
Description:
Returns the psv page number of the object whose address is given as a parameter. The
argument p must be the address of an object in an EE data, PSV or executable memory space;
otherwise an error message is produced and the compilation fails. See the space attribute in
Section 2.3.1 “Specifying Attributes of Variables” of the “MPLAB® C Compiler for PIC24
MCUs and dsPIC® DSCs User’s Guide” (DS51284).
Prototype:
unsigned int _ _builtin_psvpage(const void *p);
Argument:
p
object address
Return Value:
Returns the psv page number of the object whose address is given as a parameter.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
psvpage
Error Messages:
The following error message is produced when this function is used incorrectly:
“Argument to _ _builtin_psvpage() is not the address of an object in code, psv, or eedata
section”.
The argument must be an explicit object address.
For example, if obj is object in an executable or read-only section, the following syntax is valid:
unsigned page = _ _builtin_psvpage(&obj);
__builtin_readsfr
Description:
Reads the SFR.
Prototype:
unsigned int _ _builtin_readsfr(const void *p);
Argument:
p
object address
Return Value:
Returns the SFR.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
readsfr
Error Messages:
The following error message is produced when this function is used incorrectly:
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 471
Built-in Functions
__builtin_psvpage
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
__builtin_return_address
Description:
Returns the return address of the current function, or of one of its callers. For the level
argument, a value of 0 yields the return address of the current function, a value of 1 yields the
return address of the caller of the current function, and so forth. When level exceeds the current
stack depth, 0 will be returned. This function should only be used with a non-zero argument for
debugging purposes.
Prototype:
int _ _builtin_return_address (const int level);
Argument:
level
Number of frames to scan up the call stack.
Return Value:
Returns the return address of the current function, or of one of its callers.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
return_address
__builtin_sac
Description:
Shifts value by shift (a literal between -8 and 7) and returns the value.
For example:
register int value asm("A");
int result;
result = _ _builtin_sac(value,3);
May generate:
sac A, #3, w0
Prototype:
int _ _builtin_sac(int value, int shift);
Argument:
value
shift
Integer number to be shifted.
Literal amount to shift.
Return Value:
Returns the shifted result to an accumulator.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
sac
Error Messages:
An error message appears if:
• the result is not an accumulator register
• the shift value is not a literal within range
DS70157F-page 472
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 6. Built-in Functions
6
Description:
Shifts value by shift (a literal between -8 and 7) and returns the value which is rounded using
the rounding mode determined by the CORCONbits.RND control bit.
For example:
register int value asm("A");
int result;
result = _ _builtin_sac(value,3);
May generate:
sac.r A, #3, w0
Prototype:
int _ _builtin_sacr(int value, int shift);
Argument:
value
shift
Integer number to be shifted.
Literal amount to shift.
Return Value:
Returns the shifted result to the CORCON register.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
sacr
Error Messages:
An error message appears if:
• the result is not an accumulator register
• the shift value is not a literal within range
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 473
Built-in Functions
__builtin_sacr
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
__builtin_sftac
Description:
Shifts accumulator by shift. The valid shift range is -16 to 16.
For example:
register int result asm("A");
int i;
result = _ _builtin_sftac(result,i);
May generate:
sftac A, w0
Prototype:
int _ _builtin_sftac(int Accum, int shift);
Argument:
Accum
shift
Accumulator to shift.
Amount to shift.
Return Value:
Returns the shifted result to an accumulator.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
sftac
Error Messages:
An error message appears if:
• the result is not an accumulator register
• Accum is not an accumulator register
• the shift value is not a literal within range
DS70157F-page 474
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 6. Built-in Functions
6
Description:
Subtracts accumulators A and B with the result written back to the specified accumulator. For
example:
register int result asm("A");
register int B asm("B");
result = _ _builtin_subab(result,B);
will generate:
sub A
Prototype:
int _ ___builtin_subab(int Accum_a, int Accum_b);
Argument:
Accum_a
Accum_b
Accumulator from which to subtract.
Accumulator to subtract.
Return Value:
Returns the subtraction result to an accumulator.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
sub
Error Messages:
An error message appears if the result is not an accumulator register.
__builtin_tbladdress
Description:
Returns a value that represents the address of an object in program memory. The argument p
must be the address of an object in an EE data, PSV or executable memory space; otherwise
an error message is produced and the compilation fails. See the space attribute in
Section 2.3.1 “Specifying Attributes of Variables” of the “MPLAB® C Compiler for PIC24
MCUs and dsPIC® DSCs User’s Guide” (DS51284).
Prototype:
unsigned long _ _builtin_tblpage(const void *p);
Argument:
p
object address
Return Value:
Returns an unsigned
memory.
long value that represents the address of an object in program
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
tbladdress
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 475
Built-in Functions
__builtin_subab
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
__builtin_tbladdress
Error Messages:
The following error message is produced when this function is used incorrectly:
“Argument to _ _builtin_tbladdress() is not the address of an object in code, psv, or
eedata section”.
The argument must be an explicit object address.
For example, if obj is object in an executable or read-only section, the following syntax is valid:
unsigned long page = _ _builtin_tbladdress(&obj);
__builtin_tbloffset
Description:
Returns the table page offset of the object whose address is given as a parameter. The
argument p must be the address of an object in an EE data, PSV or executable memory space;
otherwise an error message is produced and the compilation fails. See the space attribute in
Section 2.3.1 “Specifying Attributes of Variables” of the “MPLAB® C Compiler for PIC24
MCUs and dsPIC® DSCs User’s Guide” (DS51284).
Prototype:
unsigned int _ _builtin_tbloffset(const void *p);
Argument:
p
object address
Return Value:
Returns the table page number offset of the object whose address is given as a parameter.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
tbloffset
Error Messages:
The following error message is produced when this function is used incorrectly:
“Argument to _ _builtin_tbloffset() is not the address of an object in code, psv, or
eedata section”.
The argument must be an explicit object address.
For example, if obj is object in an executable or read-only section, the following syntax is valid:
unsigned page = _ _builtin_tbloffset(&obj);
DS70157F-page 476
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 6. Built-in Functions
6
Description:
Returns the table page number of the object whose address is given as a parameter. The
argument p must be the address of an object in an EE data, PSV or executable memory space;
otherwise an error message is produced and the compilation fails. See the space attribute in
Section 2.3.1 “Specifying Attributes of Variables” of the “MPLAB® C Compiler for PIC24
MCUs and dsPIC® DSCs User’s Guide” (DS51284).
Prototype:
unsigned int _ _builtin_tblpage(const void *p);
Argument:
p
object address
Return Value:
Returns the table page number of the object whose address is given as a parameter.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
tblpage
Error Messages:
The following error message is produced when this function is used incorrectly:
“Argument to _ _builtin_tblpage() is not the address of an object in code, psv, or eedata
section”.
The argument must be an explicit object address.
For example, if obj is object in an executable or read-only section, the following syntax is valid:
unsigned page = _ _builtin_tblpage(&obj);
__builtin_tblrdh
Description:
Issues the tblrdh.w instruction to read a word from Flash or EEDATA memory. You must set
up the TBLPAG to point to the appropriate page. To do this, you may make use of
_ _builtin_tbloffset() and _ _builtin_tblpage().
Please refer to the specific device data sheet or the appropriate family reference manual for
complete details regarding reading and writing program Flash.
Prototype:
unsigned int _ _builtin_tblrdh(unsigned int offset);
Argument:
offset
desired memory offset
Return Value:
None.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
tblrdh
Error Messages:
None.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 477
Built-in Functions
__builtin_tblpage
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
__builtin_tblrdl
Description:
Issues the tblrdl.w instruction to read a word from Flash or EEDATA memory. You must set
up the TBLPAG to point to the appropriate page. To do this, you may make use of
_ _builtin_tbloffset() and_ _builtin_tblpage().
Please refer to the specific device data sheet or the appropriate family reference manual for
complete details regarding reading and writing program Flash.
Prototype:
unsigned int _ _builtin_tblrdl(unsigned int offset);
Argument:
offset
desired memory offset
Return Value:
None.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
tblrdl
Error Messages:
None.
__builtin_tblwth
Description:
Issues the tblwth.w instruction to write a word to Flash or EEDATA memory. You must set up
the TBLPAG to point to the appropriate page. To do this, you may make use of
_ _builtin_tbloffset() and _ _builtin_tblpage().
Please refer to the specific device data sheet or the appropriate family reference manual for
complete details regarding reading and writing program Flash.
Prototype:
void _ _builtin_tblwth(unsigned int offset
unsigned int data);
Argument:
offset
data
desired memory offset
data to be written
Return Value:
None.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
tblwth
Error Messages:
None.
DS70157F-page 478
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 6. Built-in Functions
6
Description:
Issues the tblrdl.w instruction to write a word to Flash or EEDATA memory. You must set up
the TBLPAG to point to the appropriate page. To do this, you may make use of
_ _builtin_tbloffset() and _ _builtin_tblpage().
Please refer to the specific device data sheet or the appropriate family reference manual for
complete details regarding reading and writing program Flash.
Prototype:
void _ _builtin_tblwtl(unsigned int offset
unsigned int data);
Argument:
offset
data
desired memory offset
data to be written
Return Value:
None.
Assembler Operator / Machine Instruction:
tblwtl
Error Messages:
None.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 479
Built-in Functions
__builtin_tblwtl
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
Example 6-1:
Additional Inline Functions
#include "p33fxxxx.h"
volatile
volatile
volatile
volatile
volatile
long
long
long
long
long
Result_mpy1616;
Result_addab;
Result_subab;
Result_mpy3216;
Result_div3216;
register int Accu_A asm("A");
register int Accu_B asm("B");
inline static long mpy_32_16 (long, int);
inline static long mpy_32_16 (long x, int y)
{
long result;
int temp1, temp2;
temp1 = (x>>1)&0x7FFF;
temp2 = x>>16;
Accu_A = __builtin_mpy (temp1, y, 0,0,0,0,0,0);
Accu_A = __builtin_sftac (15);
Accu_A = __builtin_mac (temp2, y, 0,0,0,0,0,0,0);
asm("mov _ACCAL,%0\n\t"
"mov _ACCAH,%d0" : "=r"(result) : "w"(Accu_A));
return result;
}
int main (void)
{
// Variable declarations
int Input1;
int Input2;
int Input3;
int Input4;
long Input5;
int Input6;
long Input7;
int Input8;
// Enable 32-bit saturation, signed and fractional modes for both ACCA
and ACCB
CORCON = 0x00C0;
// Example of 16*16-bit fractional multiplication using ACCA
Input1 = 32767;
Input2 = 32767;
Accu_A = __builtin_mpy (Input1, Input2, 0,0,0,0,0,0);
asm("mov _ACCAL,%0\n\t"
"mov _ACCAH,%d0" : "=r"(Result_mpy1616) : "w"(Accu_A));
// Example of 16*16-bit fractional multiplication using ACCB
Input3 = 16384;
Input4 = 16384;
Accu_B = __builtin_mpy (Input3, Input4, 0,0,0,0,0,0);
asm("mov _ACCBL,%0\n\t"
"mov _ACCBH,%d0" : "=r"(Result_mpy1616) : "w"(Accu_B));
// Example of 32-bit addition using ACCA (ACCA = ACCA + ACCB)
Accu_A = __builtin_addab();
asm("mov _ACCAL,%0\n\t"
"mov _ACCAH,%d0" : "=r"(Result_addab) : "w"(Accu_A));
// Example of 32-bit subtraction using ACCB (ACCB = ACCB - ACCA)
Accu_B = __builtin_subab();
asm("mov _ACCBL,%0\n\t"
"mov _ACCBH,%d0" : "=r"(Result_subab) : "w"(Accu_B));
// Example of 32*16-bit fractional multiplication using ACCA
Input5 = 0x7FFFFFFF;
Input6 = 32767;
Result_mpy3216 = mpy_32_16 (Input5, Input6);
while(1);
}
DS70157F-page 480
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 6. Built-in Functions
6
Built-in Functions
Example 6-2:
Divide_32_by_16
#include <p33Fxxxx.h>
#include "divide.h"
_FOSCSEL(FNOSC_FRC);
_FOSC(FCKSM_CSDCMD & OSCIOFNC_OFF & POSCMD_NONE);
_FWDT(FWDTEN_OFF);
unsigned int divide_(long a, int b) {
union convert {
unsigned long l;
unsigned int i[2];
} c;
int sign;
unsigned int result;
c.l = a;
sign = c.i[1] ^ b;
if (a < 0) a = (-a);
if (b < 0) b = -b;
result = __builtin_divud(a,b);
result >>= 1;
if (sign < 0) result = -result;
return result;
}
int main(void)
{
unsigned long dividend;
unsigned int divisor;
unsigned int quotient;
dividend = 0x3FFFFFFF;
divisor = 0x7FFF;
quotient = divide_((long)dividend, (int)divisor);
while(1);
}
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 481
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
NOTES:
DS70157F-page 482
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Section 7. Reference
HIGHLIGHTS
7
This section of the manual contains the following major topics:
Instruction Bit Map ........................................................................................................ 484
Instruction Set Summary Table ..................................................................................... 486
Revision History ............................................................................................................ 496
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 483
Reference
7.1
7.2
7.3
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
7.1
INSTRUCTION BIT MAP
Instruction encoding for the 16-bit MCU and DSC family devices is summarized in Table 7-1. This
table contains the encoding for the MSB of each instruction. The first column in the table
represents bits 23:20 of the opcode, and the first row of the table represents bits 19:16 of the
opcode. The first byte of the opcode is formed by taking the first column bit value and appending
the first row bit value. For instance, the MSB of the PUSH instruction (last row, ninth column) is
encoded with 11111000b (0xF8).
Note:
DS70157F-page 484
The complete opcode for each instruction may be determined by the instruction
descriptions in Section 5. “Instruction Descriptions”, using Table 5-1 through
Table 5-12.
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Instruction Encoding
Opcode<19:16>
0000
0000
NOP
0001
BRA
CALL
GOTO
RCALL
0010
0011
CALL
—
0001
0100
GOTO
0101
RETLW
0110
RETFIE
RETURN
0111
1000
RCALL
DO(1)
Opcode<23:20>
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
REPEAT
—
—
BRA(1)
BRA(1)
BRA(1)
(OA)
(OB)
(SA)
BRA(1)
(SB)
BRA
(GT)
BRA
(GE)
BRA
(GTU)
—
SUBBR
MOV
BRA
(OV)
BRA
(C)
BRA
(Z)
BRA
(N)
BRA
(LE)
BRA
(LT)
BRA
(LEU)
BRA
BRA (NOV)
BRA
(NC)
BRA
(NZ)
BRA
(NN)
0100
ADD
ADDC
0101
SUB
SUBB
0110
AND
XOR
0111
IOR
MOV
1000
MOV
1001
MOV
1010
BSET
BCLR
BTG
BTST
BTSTS
BTST
BTSS
BTSC
BSET
BCLR
BTG
BTST
BTSTS
BSW
BTSS
BTSC
1011
ADD
ADDC
SUB
SUBB
AND
XOR
IOR
MOV
ADD
ADDC
SUB
SUBB
AND
XOR
IOR
MOV
MUL.US
MUL.UU
MUL.SS
MUL.SU
TBLRDH
TBLRDL
TBLWTH
TBLWTL
MUL
SUB
SUBB
MOV.D
MOV
MOVSAC(1)
SFTAC(1)
ADD(1)
LAC(1)
ADD(1)
NEG(1)
SUB(1)
SAC(1)
SAC.R(1)
—
FF1L
FF1R
1100
MAC(1)
MPY(1)
MPY.N(1)
MSC(1)
CLRAC(1)
MAC(1)
MPY(1)
MPY.N(1)
MSC(1)
SL
ASR
LSR
RLC
RLNC
RRC
RRNC
SL
ASR
LSR
RLC
RLNC
RRC
RRNC
DIV.S
DIV.U
DIVF(1)
—
—
—
SL
ASR
LSR
FBCL
1110
CP0
CP
CPB
CP0
CP
CPB
—
—
CPBGT(2)
CPBLT(2)
CPSGT
CPSLT
CPBEQ(2)
CPBNE(2)
CPSEQ
CPSNE
INC
INC2
DEC
DEC2
COM
NEG
CLR
SETM
INC
INC2
DEC
DEC2
COM
NEG
CLR
SETM
—
—
—
—
PUSH
POP
LNK
ULNK
SE
ZE
DISI
DAW
EXCH
SWAP
CLRWDT
MOVPAG(2)
PWRSAV
POP.S
PUSH.S
RESET
NOPR
DS70157F-page 485
1:
2:
ED(1)
EDAC(1)
MAC(1)
MPY(1)
This instruction is only available in dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E family devices.
This instruction is only available in PIC24E and dsPIC33E family devices.
Section 7. Reference
1101
1111
Note
1010
SUBR
0010
0011
1001
7
Reference
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Table 7-1:
INSTRUCTION SET SUMMARY TABLE
The complete 16-bit MCU and DSC device instruction set is summarized in Table 7-2. This table contains an alphabetized listing of the
instruction set. It includes instruction assembly syntax, description, size (in 24-bit words), execution time (in instruction cycles), affected
Status bits, and the page number in which the detailed description can be found. Table 1-2 identifies the symbols that are used in the
Instruction Set Summary Table.
Note:
Table 7-2:
The instruction cycle counts listed here are for PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F devices. Some instructions require
additional cycles in PIC24E and dsPIC33E devices. Refer to Section 3.3 “Instruction Set Summary Tables” and Section
5.4 “Instruction Descriptions” for details.
Instruction Set Summary Table
Assembly Syntax
Mnemonic, Operands
Description
Words Cycles OA(2) OB(2) SA(1,2) SB(1,2) OAB(2) SAB(1,2)
DC
N
OV
Z
C
Page
Number
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
ADD
f {,WREG}
Destination = f + WREG
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
99
ADD
#lit10,Wn
Wn = lit10 + Wn
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
100
ADD
Wb,#lit5,Wd
Wd = Wb + lit5
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
101
ADD
Wb,Ws,Wd
Wd = Wb + Ws
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
102
ADD
Acc(2)
Add accumulators
1
1
Ú
Ú
×
×
Ú
×
—
—
—
—
—
103
ADD
Wso,#Slit4,Acc
16-bit signed add to accumulator
1
1
Ú
Ú
×
×
Ú
×
—
—
—
—
—
104
ADDC
f {,WREG}
Destination = f + WREG + (C)
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ø
Ú
106
ADDC
#lit10,Wn
Wn = lit10 + Wn + (C)
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ø
Ú
107
ADDC
Wb,#lit5,Wd
Wd = Wb + lit5 + (C)
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ø
Ú
108
ADDC
Wb,Ws,Wd
Wd = Wb + Ws + (C)
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ø
Ú
110
AND
f {,WREG}
Destination = f .AND. WREG
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
—
Ú
—
112
AND
#lit10,Wn
Wn = lit10 .AND. Wn
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
—
Ú
—
113
AND
Wb,#lit5,Wd
Wd = Wb .AND. lit5
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
—
Ú
—
114
AND
Wb,Ws,Wd
Wd = Wb .AND. Ws
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
—
Ú
—
115
ASR
f {,WREG}
Destination = arithmetic right shift f, LSb →C
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
—
Ú
Ú
117
ASR
Ws,Wd
Wd = arithmetic right shift Ws, LSb →C
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
—
Ú
Ú
119
ASR
Wb,#lit4,Wnd
Wnd = arithmetic right shift Wb by lit4, LSb →C
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
—
Ú
—
121
Legend:
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
Ú set or cleared; Ø may be cleared, but never set; × may be set, but never cleared; ‘1’ always set; ‘0’ always cleared; — unchanged
SA, SB and SAB are only modified if the corresponding saturation is enabled, otherwise unchanged.
This instruction/operand is only available in dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E devices.
This instruction/operand is only available in PIC24E and dsPIC33E devices.
This instruction/operand is only available in dsPIC33E devices.
This instruction/operand is only available in PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, and dsPIC33F devices.
This instruction/operand is only available in dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F devices.
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
DS70157F-page 486
7.2
Instruction Set Summary Table (Continued)
Assembly Syntax
Mnemonic, Operands
Description
Words Cycles OA(2) OB(2) SA(1,2) SB(1,2) OAB(2) SAB(1,2)
DC
N
OV
Z
C
Page
Number
Wb,Wns,Wnd
Wnd = arithmetic right shift Wb by Wns, LSb →C
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
—
Ú
—
122
BCLR
f,#bit4
Bit clear f
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
123
BCLR
Ws,#bit4
Bit clear Ws
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
124
BRA
Expr
Branch unconditionally
1
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
126
BRA
Wn
Computed branch
1
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
128
BRA
C,Expr
Branch if Carry
1
1 (2)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
130
BRA
GE,Expr
Branch if greater than or equal
1
1 (2)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
132
BRA
GEU,Expr
Branch if Carry
1
1 (2)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
134
BRA
GT,Expr
Branch if greater than
1
1 (2)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
135
BRA
GTU,Expr
Branch if unsigned greater than
1
1 (2)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
136
BRA
LE,Expr
Branch if less than or equal
1
1 (2)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
137
BRA
LEU,Expr
Branch if unsigned less than or equal
1
1 (2)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
138
BRA
LT,Expr
Branch if less than
1
1 (2)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
139
BRA
LTU,Expr
Branch if not Carry
1
1 (2)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
140
BRA
N,Expr
Branch if Negative
1
1 (2)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
141
BRA
NC,Expr
Branch if not Carry
1
1 (2)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
142
BRA
NN,Expr
Branch if not Negative
1
1 (2)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
143
BRA
NOV,Expr
Branch if not Overflow
1
1 (2)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
144
BRA
NZ,Expr
Branch if not Zero
1
1 (2)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
145
BRA
OA,Expr(2)
Branch if Accumulator A overflow
1
1 (2)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
146
BRA
OB,Expr(2)
Branch if Accumulator B overflow
1
1 (2)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
147
BRA
OV,Expr
Branch if Overflow
1
1 (2)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
148
BRA
SA,Expr(2)
Branch if Accumulator A saturated
1
1 (2)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
149
BRA
(2)
SB,Expr
Branch if Accumulator B saturated
1
1 (2)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
150
BRA
Z,Expr
Branch if Zero
1
1 (2)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
151
BSET
f,#bit4
Bit set f
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
152
BSET
Ws,#bit4
Bit set Ws
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
153
BSW.C
Ws,Wb
Write C bit to Ws<Wb>
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
155
DS70157F-page 487
Legend:
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
Ú set or cleared; Ø may be cleared, but never set; × may be set, but never cleared; ‘1’ always set; ‘0’ always cleared; — unchanged
SA, SB and SAB are only modified if the corresponding saturation is enabled, otherwise unchanged.
This instruction/operand is only available in dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E devices.
This instruction/operand is only available in PIC24E and dsPIC33E devices.
This instruction/operand is only available in dsPIC33E devices.
This instruction/operand is only available in PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, and dsPIC33F devices.
This instruction/operand is only available in dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F devices.
Section 7. Reference
ASR
7
Reference
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Table 7-2:
Instruction Set Summary Table (Continued)
Assembly Syntax
Mnemonic, Operands
Description
Words Cycles OA(2) OB(2) SA(1,2) SB(1,2) OAB(2) SAB(1,2)
DC
N
OV
Z
C
Page
Number
BSW.Z
Ws,Wb
Write Z bit to Ws<Wb>
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
155
BTG
f,#bit4
Bit toggle f
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
157
BTG
Ws,#bit4
Bit toggle Ws
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
158
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
160
BTSC
f,#bit4
Bit test f, skip if clear
1
1
(2 or 3)
BTSC
Ws,#bit4
Bit test Ws, skip if clear
1
1
(2 or 3)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
162
BTSS
f,#bit4
Bit test f, skip if set
1
1
(2 or 3)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
164
BTSS
Ws,#bit4
Bit test Ws, skip if set
1
1
(2 or 3)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
166
BTST
f,#bit4
Bit test f to Z
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
—
168
BTST.C Ws,#bit4
Bit test Ws to C
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
169
BTST.Z Ws,#bit4
Bit test Ws to Z
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
—
169
BTST.C Ws,Wb
Bit test Ws<Wb> to C
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
171
BTST.Z Ws,Wb
Bit test Ws<Wb> to Z
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
—
171
BTSTS
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Bit test f to Z, then set f
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
—
173
BTSTS.C Ws,#bit4
Bit test Ws to C then set
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
175
BTSTS.Z Ws,#bit4
Bit test Ws to Z then set
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
—
175
CALL
Expr
Call subroutine
2
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
177
CALL
Wn
Call indirect subroutine
1
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
180
CALL.L Wn(3)
Call indirect subroutine (long address)
1
4
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
183
CLR
f
f = 0x0000
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
184
CLR
WREG
WREG = 0x0000
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
184
CLR
Wd
Wd = 0
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
185
CLR
Acc,[Wx],Wxd,[Wy],Wyd,AWB(2) Clear accumulator
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
—
—
—
—
186
Clear Watchdog Timer
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
188
f,#bit4
CLRWDT
COM
f {,WREG}
Destination = f
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
—
Ú
—
189
COM
Ws,Wd
Wd = Ws
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
—
Ú
—
190
Legend:
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
Ú set or cleared; Ø may be cleared, but never set; × may be set, but never cleared; ‘1’ always set; ‘0’ always cleared; — unchanged
SA, SB and SAB are only modified if the corresponding saturation is enabled, otherwise unchanged.
This instruction/operand is only available in dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E devices.
This instruction/operand is only available in PIC24E and dsPIC33E devices.
This instruction/operand is only available in dsPIC33E devices.
This instruction/operand is only available in PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, and dsPIC33F devices.
This instruction/operand is only available in dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F devices.
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
DS70157F-page 488
Table 7-2:
Instruction Set Summary Table (Continued)
Assembly Syntax
Mnemonic, Operands
Description
Words Cycles OA(2) OB(2) SA(1,2) SB(1,2) OAB(2) SAB(1,2)
DC
N
OV
Z
C
Page
Number
CP
f
Compare (f – WREG)
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
191
CP
Wb,#lit5
Compare (Wb – lit5)
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
192
CP
Wb,#lit8
Compare (Wb – lit8)
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
193
CP
Wb,Ws
Compare (Wb – Ws)
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
194
CP0
f
Compare (f – 0x0000)
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
1
Ú
Ú
Ú
1
196
CP0
Ws
Compare (Ws – 0x0000)
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
1
Ú
Ú
Ú
1
197
CPB
f
Compare with borrow (f – WREG – C)
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ø
Ú
198
CPB
Wb,#lit5
Compare with borrow (Wb – lit5 – C)
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ø
Ú
199
CPB
Wb,#lit8
Compare with borrow (Wb – lit8 – C)
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ø
Ú
200
CPB
Wb,Ws
Compare with borrow (Wb – Ws – C)
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ø
Ú
201
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
203
Wb,Wn,Expr(3)
Compare Wb with Wn, branch if =
1
CPBGT
Wb,Wn,Expr(3)
Signed Compare Wb with Wn, branch if >
1
1
(5)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
204
CPBLT
Wb,Wn,Expr(3)
Signed Compare Wb with Wn, branch if <
1
1
(5)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
205
CPBNE
Wb,Wn,Expr(3)
Compare Wb with Wn, branch if ≠
1
1
(5)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
206
CPSEQ
Wb,Wn
Compare (Wb with Wn), skip if =
1
1
(2 or 3)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
207
CPSGT
Wb,Wn
Signed Compare (Wb with Wn), skip if >
1
1
(2 or 3)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
211
CPSLT
Wb,Wn
Signed Compare (Wb with Wn), skip if <
1
1
(2 or 3)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
212
CPSNE
Wb,Wn
Compare (Wb with Wn), skip if ≠
1
1
(2 or 3)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
214
DAW.B
Wn
Wn = decimal adjust Wn
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
216
DEC
f {,WREG}
Destination = f – 1
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
217
DEC
Ws,Wd
Wd = Ws – 1
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
218
DEC2
f {,WREG}
Destination = f – 2
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
220
DEC2
Ws,Wd
Wd = Ws – 2
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
221
Legend:
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
Ú set or cleared; Ø may be cleared, but never set; × may be set, but never cleared; ‘1’ always set; ‘0’ always cleared; — unchanged
SA, SB and SAB are only modified if the corresponding saturation is enabled, otherwise unchanged.
This instruction/operand is only available in dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E devices.
This instruction/operand is only available in PIC24E and dsPIC33E devices.
This instruction/operand is only available in dsPIC33E devices.
This instruction/operand is only available in PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, and dsPIC33F devices.
This instruction/operand is only available in dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F devices.
Section 7. Reference
DS70157F-page 489
CPBEQ
1
(5)
7
Reference
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Table 7-2:
Instruction Set Summary Table (Continued)
Assembly Syntax
Mnemonic, Operands
Description
Words Cycles OA(2) OB(2) SA(1,2) SB(1,2) OAB(2) SAB(1,2)
DC
N
OV
Z
C
Page
Number
DISI
#lit14
Disable interrupts for lit14 instruction cycles
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
223
DIV.S
Wm,Wn
Signed 16/16-bit integer divide, Q →Wo, R →W1
1
18
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
224
DIV.SD Wm,Wn
Signed 32/16-bit integer divide, Q →Wo, R →W1
1
18
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
224
DIV.U
Wm,Wn
Unsigned 16/16-bit integer divide, Q →Wo, R →W1
1
18
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
Ú
Ú
226
DIV.UD Wm,Wn
Unsigned 32/16-bit integer divide, Q →Wo, R →W1
1
18
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
Ú
Ú
Ú
226
Signed 16/16-bit fractional divide, Q →Wo, R →W1
1
18
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
228
DO
(6)
#lit14,Expr
Do code to PC + Expr, (lit14 + 1) times
2
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
230
DO
#lit15,Expr(4)
Do code to PC + Expr, (lit15 + 1) times
2
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
233
DO
Wn,Expr(2)
Do code to PC + Expr, (Wn + 1) times
2
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
235
ED
Wm*Wm,Acc,[Wx],[Wy],Wxd(2)
Euclidean distance (no accumulate)
1
1
Ú
Ú
×
×
Ú
×
—
—
—
—
—
239
DIVF
Wm,Wn(2)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
EDAC
Wm*Wm,Acc,[Wx],[Wy],Wxd
Euclidean distance
1
1
Ú
Ú
×
×
Ú
×
—
—
—
—
—
241
EXCH
Wns,Wnd
Swap Wns and Wnd
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
243
FBCL
Ws,Wnd
Find bit change from left (MSb) side
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
244
FF1L
Ws,Wnd
Find first one from left (MSb) side
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
246
FF1R
Ws,Wnd
Find first one from right (LSb) side
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
248
GOTO
Expr
Go to address
2
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
250
GOTO
Wn
Go to address indirectly
1
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
251
GOTO.L Wn(3)
Go to address indirectly (long address)
1
4
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
253
INC
f {,WREG}
Destination = f + 1
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
254
INC
Ws,Wd
Wd = Ws + 1
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
255
INC2
f {,WREG}
Destination = f + 2
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
257
INC2
Ws,Wd
Wd = Ws + 2
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
258
IOR
f {,WREG}
Destination = f .IOR. WREG
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
—
Ú
—
260
IOR
#lit10,Wn
Wn = lit10 .IOR. Wn
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
—
Ú
—
261
IOR
Wb,#lit5,Wd
Wd = Wb .IOR. lit5
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
—
Ú
—
262
IOR
Wb,Ws,Wd
Wd = Wb .IOR. Ws
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
—
Ú
—
263
Load accumulator
1
1
Ú
Ú
×
×
Ú
×
—
—
—
—
—
265
LAC
Legend:
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
(2)
Wso,#Slit4,
Acc(2)
Ú set or cleared; Ø may be cleared, but never set; × may be set, but never cleared; ‘1’ always set; ‘0’ always cleared; — unchanged
SA, SB and SAB are only modified if the corresponding saturation is enabled, otherwise unchanged.
This instruction/operand is only available in dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E devices.
This instruction/operand is only available in PIC24E and dsPIC33E devices.
This instruction/operand is only available in dsPIC33E devices.
This instruction/operand is only available in PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, and dsPIC33F devices.
This instruction/operand is only available in dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F devices.
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
DS70157F-page 490
Table 7-2:
Instruction Set Summary Table (Continued)
Assembly Syntax
Mnemonic, Operands
Description
Words Cycles OA(2) OB(2) SA(1,2) SB(1,2) OAB(2) SAB(1,2)
DC
N
OV
Z
C
Page
Number
#lit14
Link Frame Pointer
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
267
LSR
f {,WREG}
Destination = logical right shift f, MSb →C
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
—
Ú
Ú
269
LSR
Ws,Wd
Wd = logical right shift Ws, MSb →C
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
—
Ú
Ú
271
LSR
Wb,#lit4,Wnd
Wnd = logical right shift Wb by lit4, MSb →C
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
—
Ú
—
273
LSR
Wb,Wns,Wnd
Wnd = logical right shift Wb by Wns, MSb →C
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
—
Ú
—
274
MAC
Wm*Wn,Acc,[Wx],Wxd,[Wy],
Wyd,AWB(2)
Multiply and accumulate
1
1
Ú
Ú
×
×
Ú
×
—
—
—
—
—
275
MAC
Wm*Wm,Acc,[Wx],Wxd,[Wy],
Wyd(2)
Square and accumulate
1
1
Ú
Ú
×
×
Ú
×
—
—
—
—
—
277
MOV
f {,WREG}
Move f to destination
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
—
Ú
—
279
MOV
WREG,f
Move WREG to f
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
280
MOV
f,Wnd
Move f to Wnd
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
281
MOV
Wns,f
Move Wns to f
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
282
MOV.B
#lit8,Wnd
Move 8-bit unsigned literal to Wnd
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
283
MOV
#lit16,Wnd
Move 16-bit literal to Wnd
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
284
MOV
[Ws+Slit10],Wnd
Move [Ws + Slit10] to Wnd
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
285
MOV
Wns,[Wd+Slit10]
Move Wns to [Wd + Slit10]
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
286
MOV
Wso,Wdo
Move Wso to Wdo
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
287
MOV.D
Wns,Wnd
Move double Wns to Wnd:Wnd + 1
1
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
289
Wns,Wnd
Move double Wns:Wns + 1 to Wnd
1
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
289
MOVPAG #lit10,DSRPAG
Move 10-bit literal to DSRPAG
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
291
MOVPAG #lit9,DSWPAG(3)
Move 9-bit literal to DSWPAG
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
291
MOVPAG #lit8,TBLPAG(3)
Move 8-bit literal to TBLPAG
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
291
MOVPAG Wn,DSRPAG(3)
Move Wn to DSRPAG
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
292
MOVPAG Wn,DSWPAG(3)
Move Wn to DSWPAG
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
292
Move Wn to TBLPAG
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
292
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
293
1
1
Ú
Ú
×
×
Ú
×
—
—
—
—
—
295
MOV.D
(3)
(3)
MOVPAG Wn,TBLPAG
MOVSAC Acc,[Wx],Wxd,[Wy],Wyd,AWB(2) Move [Wx] to Wxd, and [Wy] to Wyd
MPY
DS70157F-page 491
Legend:
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
Wm*Wn,Acc,[Wx],Wxd,[Wy],
Wyd(2)
Multiply Wn by Wm to accumulator
Ú set or cleared; Ø may be cleared, but never set; × may be set, but never cleared; ‘1’ always set; ‘0’ always cleared; — unchanged
SA, SB and SAB are only modified if the corresponding saturation is enabled, otherwise unchanged.
This instruction/operand is only available in dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E devices.
This instruction/operand is only available in PIC24E and dsPIC33E devices.
This instruction/operand is only available in dsPIC33E devices.
This instruction/operand is only available in PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, and dsPIC33F devices.
This instruction/operand is only available in dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F devices.
Section 7. Reference
LNK
7
Reference
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Table 7-2:
Instruction Set Summary Table (Continued)
Assembly Syntax
Mnemonic, Operands
Description
Words Cycles OA(2) OB(2) SA(1,2) SB(1,2) OAB(2) SAB(1,2)
DC
N
OV
Z
C
Page
Number
MPY
Wm*Wm,Acc,[Wx],Wxd,[Wy],
Wyd(2)
Square to accumulator
1
1
Ú
Ú
×
×
Ú
×
—
—
—
—
—
297
MPY.N
Wm*Wn,Acc,[Wx],Wxd,[Wy],
Wyd(2)
-(Multiply Wn by Wm) to accumulator
1
1
0
0
—
—
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
299
MSC
Wm*Wn,Acc,[Wx],Wxd,[Wy],
Wyd,AWB(2)
Multiply and subtract from accumulator
1
1
Ú
Ú
×
×
Ú
×
—
—
—
—
—
301
MUL
f
W3:W2 = f * WREG
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
303
MUL.SS Wb,Ws,Wnd
{Wnd + 1,Wnd} = signed(Wb) * signed(Ws)
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
305
MUL.SS Wb,Ws,Acc(4)
Accumulator = signed(Wb) * signed(Ws)
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
307
MUL.SU Wb,#lit5,Wnd
{Wnd + 1,Wnd} = signed(Wb) * unsigned(lit5)
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
308
MUL.SU Wb,Ws,Wnd
{Wnd + 1,Wnd} = signed(Wb) * unsigned(Ws)
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
310
MUL.SU Wb,Ws,Acc(4)
Accumulator = signed(Wb) * unsigned(Ws)
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
312
MUL.SU Wb,#lit5,Acc
Accumulator = signed(Wb) * unsigned(lit5)
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
314
MUL.US Wb,Ws,Wnd
{Wnd + 1,Wnd} = unsigned(Wb) * signed(Ws)
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
315
MUL.US Wb,Ws,Acc(4)
Accumulator = unsigned(Wb) * signed(Ws)
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
317
MUL.UU Wb,#lit5,Wnd
{Wnd + 1,Wnd} = unsigned(Wb) * unsigned(lit5)
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
319
MUL.UU Wb,Ws,Wnd
{Wnd + 1,Wnd} = unsigned(Wb) * unsigned(Ws)
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
320
MUL.UU Wb,Ws,Acc(4)
Accumulator = unsigned(Wb) * unsigned(Ws)
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
322
MUL.UU Wb,#lit5,Acc
Accumulator = unsigned(Wb) * unsigned(lit5)
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
323
MULW.SS Wb,Ws,Wnd(3)
Wnd = signed(Wb) * signed(Ws)
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
324
MULW.SU Wb,Ws,Wnd(3)
Wnd = signed(Wb) * unsigned(Ws)
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
326
MULW.SU Wb,#lit5,Wnd(3)
Wnd = signed(Wb) * unsigned(lit5)
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
328
MULW.US Wb,Ws,Wnd(3)
Wnd = unsigned(Wb) * signed(Ws)
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
329
MULW.UU Wb,Ws,Wnd(3)
Wnd = unsigned(Wb) * unsigned(Ws)
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
331
MULW.UU Wb,#lit5,Wnd
Wnd = unsigned(Wb) * unsigned(lit5)
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
332
NEG
f {,WREG}
Destination = f + 1
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
333
NEG
Ws,Wd
Wd = Ws + 1
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
333
NEG
Acc(2)
Negate accumulator
1
1
Ú
Ú
×
×
Ú
×
—
—
—
—
—
335
No operation
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
336
(4)
(4)
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
(3)
NOP
Legend:
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
Ú set or cleared; Ø may be cleared, but never set; × may be set, but never cleared; ‘1’ always set; ‘0’ always cleared; — unchanged
SA, SB and SAB are only modified if the corresponding saturation is enabled, otherwise unchanged.
This instruction/operand is only available in dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E devices.
This instruction/operand is only available in PIC24E and dsPIC33E devices.
This instruction/operand is only available in dsPIC33E devices.
This instruction/operand is only available in PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, and dsPIC33F devices.
This instruction/operand is only available in dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F devices.
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
DS70157F-page 492
Table 7-2:
Instruction Set Summary Table (Continued)
Assembly Syntax
Mnemonic, Operands
Description
Words Cycles OA(2) OB(2) SA(1,2) SB(1,2) OAB(2) SAB(1,2)
DC
N
OV
Z
C
Page
Number
No operation
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
336
POP
f
POP TOS to f
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
337
POP
Wdo
POP TOS to Wdo
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
338
POP.D
Wnd
POP double from TOS to Wnd:Wnd + 1
1
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
339
POP shadow registers
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
340
NOPR
POP.S
PUSH
f
PUSH f to TOS
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
341
PUSH
Wso
PUSH Wso to TOS
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
342
PUSH.D Wns
PUSH double Wns:Wns + 1 to TOS
1
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
343
PUSH.S
PUSH shadow registers
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
345
PWRSAV #lit1
Enter Power-saving mode
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
346
RCALL
Expr
Relative call
1
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
347
RCALL
Wn
Computed call
1
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
351
(5)
REPEAT #lit14
Repeat next instruction (lit14 + 1) times
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
355
REPEAT #lit15(3)
Repeat next instruction (lit15 + 1) times
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
357
REPEAT Wn
Repeat next instruction (Wn + 1) times
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
359
RESET
Software device Reset
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
363
RETFIE
Return from interrupt enable
1
3 (2)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
365
Return with lit10 in Wn
1
3 (2)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
367
Return from subroutine
1
3 (2)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
371
RETLW
#lit10,Wn
RETURN
f {,WREG}
Destination = rotate left through Carry f
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
—
Ú
Ú
373
RLC
Ws,Wd
Wd = rotate left through Carry Ws
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
—
Ú
Ú
375
RLNC
f {,WREG}
Destination = rotate left (no Carry) f
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
—
Ú
—
377
RLNC
Ws,Wd
Wd = rotate left (no Carry) Ws
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
—
Ú
—
379
RRC
f {,WREG}
Destination = rotate right through Carry f
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
—
Ú
Ú
381
RRC
Ws,Wd
Wd = rotate right through Carry Ws
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
—
Ú
Ú
383
RRNC
f {,WREG}
Destination = rotate right (no Carry) f
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
—
Ú
—
385
RRNC
Ws,Wd
Wd = rotate right (no Carry) Ws
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
—
Ú
—
387
Store accumulator
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
389
SAC
Legend:
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
(2)
Acc,#Slit4,Wdo
Ú set or cleared; Ø may be cleared, but never set; × may be set, but never cleared; ‘1’ always set; ‘0’ always cleared; — unchanged
SA, SB and SAB are only modified if the corresponding saturation is enabled, otherwise unchanged.
This instruction/operand is only available in dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E devices.
This instruction/operand is only available in PIC24E and dsPIC33E devices.
This instruction/operand is only available in dsPIC33E devices.
This instruction/operand is only available in PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, and dsPIC33F devices.
This instruction/operand is only available in dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F devices.
Section 7. Reference
DS70157F-page 493
RLC
7
Reference
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Table 7-2:
Instruction Set Summary Table (Continued)
Assembly Syntax
Mnemonic, Operands
Description
Words Cycles OA(2) OB(2) SA(1,2) SB(1,2) OAB(2) SAB(1,2)
DC
N
OV
Z
C
Page
Number
SAC.R
Acc,#Slit4,Wdo(2)
Store rounded Accumulator
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
391
SE
Ws,Wd
Wd = sign-extended Ws
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
—
Ú
Ú
393
SETM
f
f = 0xFFFF
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
395
SETM
WREG
WREG = 0xFFFF
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
395
SETM
Wd
Wd = 0xFFFF
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
396
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
SFTAC
Acc,#Slit6
Arithmetic shift accumulator by Slit6
1
1
Ú
Ú
×
×
Ú
×
—
—
—
—
—
397
SFTAC
Acc,Wb(2)
Arithmetic shift accumulator by (Wb)
1
1
Ú
Ú
×
×
Ú
×
—
—
—
—
—
398
SL
f {,WREG}
Destination = arithmetic left shift f
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
—
Ú
Ú
399
SL
Ws,Wd
Wd = arithmetic left shift Ws
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
—
Ú
Ú
401
SL
Wb,#lit4,Wnd
Wnd = left shift Wb by lit4
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
—
Ú
—
403
SL
Wb,Wns,Wnd
Wnd = left shift Wb by Wns
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
—
Ú
—
404
SUB
f {,WREG}
Destination = f – WREG
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
405
SUB
#lit10,Wn
Wn = Wn – lit10
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
406
SUB
Wb,#lit5,Wd
Wd = Wb – lit5
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
407
SUB
Wb,Ws,Wd
Wd = Wb – Ws
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
408
SUB
Acc(2)
Subtract accumulators
1
1
Ú
Ú
×
×
Ú
×
—
—
—
—
—
410
SUBB
f {,WREG}
destination = f – WREG – (C)
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ø
Ú
411
SUBB
#lit10,Wn
Wn = Wn – lit10 – (C)
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ø
Ú
412
SUBB
Wb,#lit5,Wd
Wd = Wb – lit5 – (C)
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ø
Ú
413
SUBB
Wb,Ws,Wd
Wd = Wb – Ws – (C)
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ø
Ú
415
SUBBR
f {,WREG}
Destination = WREG – f – (C)
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ø
Ú
417
SUBBR
Wb,#lit5,Wd
Wd = lit5 – Wb – (C)
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ø
Ú
418
SUBBR
Wb,Ws,Wd
Wd = Ws – Wb – (C)
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ø
Ú
420
SUBR
f {,WREG}
Destination = WREG – f
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
422
SUBR
Wb,#lit5,Wd
Wd = lit5 – Wb
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
423
SUBR
Wb,Ws,Wd
Wd = Ws – Wb
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
Ú
424
SWAP
Wn
Wn = byte or nibble swap Wn
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
426
Legend:
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
(2)
Ú set or cleared; Ø may be cleared, but never set; × may be set, but never cleared; ‘1’ always set; ‘0’ always cleared; — unchanged
SA, SB and SAB are only modified if the corresponding saturation is enabled, otherwise unchanged.
This instruction/operand is only available in dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E devices.
This instruction/operand is only available in PIC24E and dsPIC33E devices.
This instruction/operand is only available in dsPIC33E devices.
This instruction/operand is only available in PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, and dsPIC33F devices.
This instruction/operand is only available in dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F devices.
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
DS70157F-page 494
Table 7-2:
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Table 7-2:
Instruction Set Summary Table (Continued)
Assembly Syntax
Mnemonic, Operands
Description
Words Cycles OA(2) OB(2) SA(1,2) SB(1,2) OAB(2) SAB(1,2)
DC
N
OV
Z
C
Page
Number
TBLRDH [Ws],Wd
Read high program word to Wd
1
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
427
TBLRDL [Ws],Wd
Read low program word to Wd
1
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
429
TBLWTH Ws,[Wd]
Write Ws to high program word
1
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
431
TBLWTL Ws,[Wd]
Write Ws to low program word
1
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
433
ULNK
Unlink Frame Pointer
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
435
XOR
f {,WREG}
Destination = f .XOR. WREG
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
—
Ú
—
437
XOR
#lit10,Wn
Wn = lit10 .XOR. Wn
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
—
Ú
—
438
XOR
Wb,#lit5,Wd
Wd = Wb .XOR. lit5
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
—
Ú
—
439
XOR
Wb,Ws,Wd
Wd = Wb .XOR. Ws
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ú
—
Ú
—
440
ZE
Ws,Wnd
Wnd = zero-extended Ws
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
—
Ú
1
442
Legend:
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
Ú set or cleared; Ø may be cleared, but never set; × may be set, but never cleared; ‘1’ always set; ‘0’ always cleared; — unchanged
SA, SB and SAB are only modified if the corresponding saturation is enabled, otherwise unchanged.
This instruction/operand is only available in dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E devices.
This instruction/operand is only available in PIC24E and dsPIC33E devices.
This instruction/operand is only available in dsPIC33E devices.
This instruction/operand is only available in PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, and dsPIC33F devices.
This instruction/operand is only available in dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F devices.
Section 7. Reference
DS70157F-page 495
7
Reference
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
7.3
REVISION HISTORY
Revision A (May 2005)
This is the initial release of this document.
Revision B (September 2005)
This revision incorporates all known errata at the time of this document update.
Revision C (February 2008)
This revision includes the following corrections and updates:
• Instruction Updates:
- Updated BRA Instruction (see “BRA”)
- Updated DIVF Instruction (see “DIVF”)
- Updated DO Instruction (see “DO”)
- Updated SUB instruction (see “SUB”)
Revision D (November 2009)
This revision includes the following corrections and updates:
• Document renamed from dsPIC30F/33F Programmer’s Reference Manual to 16-bit MCU
and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
• Document has been completely redesigned to accommodate all current 16-bit families:
dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, PIC24F and PIC24H
Revision E (June 2010)
This revision includes the following corrections and updates:
• Information specific to dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices has been added throughout the
document
Revision F (July 2011)
This revision includes the following corrections and updates:
•
•
•
•
Added a new section “Built-in Functions”
Added and updated the cross-references throughout the document
Updated the bit characteristics from U to U-0 in Register 2-4 and Register 2-6
Added a note throughout the document specifying the requirement of an additional cycle for
read and read-modify-write operations on non-CPU special function registers in dsPIC33E
and PIC24E devices
• Updates to formatting and minor text changes were incorporated throughout the document
DS70157F-page 496
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Index
INDEX
Symbols
A
Accumulator A, Accumulator B ........................................... 19
Accumulator Access ........................................................... 84
Accumulator Selection ........................................................ 97
Accumulator Usage............................................................. 83
Addressing Modes for Wd Destination Register ................. 95
Addressing Modes for Ws Source Register ........................ 95
Assigned Working Register Usage ..................................... 78
B
Built-In Functions
__builtin_addab......................................................... 447
__builtin_btg...................................................... 447, 448
__builtin_divmodud ................................................... 454
__builtin_divsd .......................................................... 454
__builtin_edsoffset .................................................... 458
__builtin_edspage..................................................... 458
__builtin_mac............................................................ 460
__builtin_modsd........................................................ 462
__builtin_modud........................................................ 462
__builtin_mpy............................................................ 464
__builtin_mpyn.......................................................... 465
__builtin_mulss ......................................................... 468
__builtin_muluu......................................................... 469
__builtin_nop............................................................. 470
__builtin_psvoffset .................................................... 470
__builtin_sac ............................................................. 472
__builtin_subab......................................................... 475
__builtin_tbladdress .................................................. 475
__builtin_tblwth ......................................................... 478
__builtin_tblwtl .......................................................... 479
Byte Operations .................................................................. 64
C
Code Examples
’Z’ Status bit Operation for 32-bit Addition .................. 77
Base MAC Syntax....................................................... 85
File Register Addressing............................................. 53
File Register Addressing and WREG.......................... 53
Frame Pointer Usage.................................................. 73
Illegal Word Move Operations..................................... 68
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
D
Data Addressing Mode Tree............................................... 59
Data Addressing Modes ..................................................... 52
DCOUNT Register .............................................................. 20
Default Working Register (WREG) ............................... 18, 79
Development Support ........................................................... 6
DOEND Register ................................................................ 21
DOSTART Register ............................................................ 20
DSP Accumulator Instructions ............................................ 88
DSP Data Formats.............................................................. 81
DSP MAC Indirect Addressing Modes................................ 57
DSP MAC Instructions ........................................................ 84
F
File Register Addressing..................................................... 52
I
Immediate Addressing ........................................................ 58
Operands in the Instruction Set .................................. 58
Implied DSP Operands ....................................................... 78
Implied Frame and Stack Pointer ....................................... 78
Instruction Bit Map ............................................................ 484
Instruction Description Example ......................................... 98
Instruction Descriptions ...................................................... 99
ADD (16-bit Signed Add to Accumulator) ................. 104
ADD (Add Accumulators) ......................................... 103
ADD (Add f to WREG) ................................................ 99
ADD (Add Literal to Wn) ........................................... 100
ADD (Add Wb to Short Literal) ................................. 101
ADD (Add Wb to Ws)................................................ 102
ADDC (Add f to WREG with Carry) .......................... 106
ADDC (Add Literal to Wn with Carry) ....................... 107
ADDC (Add Wb to Short Literal with Carry).............. 108
ADDC (Add Wb to Ws with Carry) ............................ 110
AND (AND f and WREG) .......................................... 112
AND (AND Literal and Wn) ....................................... 113
AND (AND Wb and Short Literal) ............................. 114
AND (AND Wb and Ws) ........................................... 115
ASR (Arithmetic Shift Right by Short Literal) ............ 121
ASR (Arithmetic Shift Right by Wns) ........................ 122
ASR (Arithmetic Shift Right f) ................................... 117
ASR (Arithmetic Shift Right Ws) ............................... 119
DS70157F-page 497
Index
__builtin_addab................................................................. 447
__builtin_btg.............................................................. 447, 448
__builtin_divmodud ........................................................... 454
__builtin_divsd .................................................................. 454
__builtin_edsoffset ............................................................ 458
__builtin_edspage ............................................................. 458
__builtin_mac .................................................................... 460
__builtin_modsd ................................................................ 462
__builtin_modud................................................................ 462
__builtin_mpy .................................................................... 464
__builtin_mpyn .................................................................. 465
__builtin_mulss ................................................................. 468
__builtin_muluu ................................................................. 469
__builtin_nop..................................................................... 470
__builtin_psvoffset ............................................................ 470
__builtin_sac ..................................................................... 472
__builtin_subab ................................................................. 475
__builtin_tbladdress .......................................................... 475
__builtin_tblwth ................................................................. 478
__builtin_tblwtl .................................................................. 479
Immediate Addressing................................................ 59
Indirect Addressing with Effective Address Update .... 55
Indirect Addressing with Register Offset .................... 56
Legal Word Move Operations ..................................... 67
MAC Accumulator WB Syntax .................................... 87
MAC Prefetch Syntax ................................................. 86
Move with Literal Offset Instructions........................... 56
MSC Instruction with Two Prefetches and Accumulator
Write Back .......................................................... 87
Normalizing with FBCL ............................................... 90
Register Direct Addressing......................................... 54
Sample Byte Math Operations.................................... 65
Sample Byte Move Operations................................... 64
Scaling with FBCL ...................................................... 89
Stack Pointer Usage................................................... 71
Unsigned f and WREG Multiply (Legacy MULWF
Instruction).......................................................... 80
Using 10-bit Literals for Byte Operands...................... 69
Using the Default Working Register WREG ............... 79
Conditional Branch Instructions .......................................... 76
Core Control Register ......................................................... 24
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
BCLR (Bit Clear in Ws) ............................................. 124
BCLR.B (Bit Clear f) .................................................. 123
BRA (Branch Unconditionally) .................................. 126
BRA (Computed Branch) .................................. 128, 129
BRA C (Branch if Carry)............................................ 130
BRA GE (Branch if Signed Greater Than or Equal) .. 132
BRA GEU (Branch if Unsigned Greater Than
or Equal) ........................................................... 134
BRA GT (Branch if Signed Greater Than) ................ 135
BRA GTU (Branch if Unsigned Greater Than) .......... 136
BRA LE (Branch if Signed Less Than or Equal) ....... 137
BRA LEU (Branch if Unsigned Less Than or Equal). 138
BRA LT (Branch if Signed Less Than) ...................... 139
BRA LTU (Branch if Not Carry) ................................. 142
BRA LTU (Branch if Unsigned Less Than) ............... 140
BRA N (Branch if Negative) ...................................... 141
BRA NN (Branch if Not Negative) ............................. 143
BRA NOV (Branch if Not Overflow) .......................... 144
BRA NZ (Branch if Not Zero) .................................... 145
BRA OA (Branch if Overflow Accumulator A) ........... 146
BRA OB (Branch if Overflow Accumulator B) ........... 147
BRA OV (Branch if Overflow).................................... 148
BRA SA (Branch if Saturation Accumulator A) ......... 149
BRA SB (Branch if Saturation Accumulator B) ......... 150
BRA Z (Branch if Zero) ............................................. 151
BSET (Bit Set f)......................................................... 152
BSET (Bit Set in Ws)................................................. 153
BSW (Bit Write in Ws) ............................................... 155
BTG (Bit Toggle f) ..................................................... 157
BTG (Bit Toggle in Ws) ............................................. 158
BTSC (Bit Test f, Skip if Clear) ................................. 160
BTSC (Bit Test Ws, Skip if Clear) ............................. 162
BTSS (Bit Test f, Skip if Set) ..................................... 164
BTSS (Bit Test Ws, Skip if Set)................................. 166
BTST (Bit Test f) ....................................................... 168
BTST (Bit Test in Ws) ....................................... 169, 171
BTSTS (Bit Test/Set f) .............................................. 173
BTSTS (Bit Test/Set in Ws) ...................................... 175
CALL (Call Indirect Subroutine) ........................ 180, 181
CALL (Call Subroutine) ..................................... 177, 178
CALL.L (Call Indirect Subroutine Long) .................... 183
CBSLT (Signed Compare Wb with Wn, Branch if
Less Than) ........................................................ 205
CLR (Clear Accumulator, Prefetch Operands).......... 186
CLR (Clear f or WREG) ............................................ 184
CLR (Clear Wd) ........................................................ 185
CLRWDT (Clear Watchdog Timer) ........................... 188
COM (Complement f) ................................................ 189
COM (Complement Ws)............................................ 190
CP (Compare f with WREG, Set Status Flags) ......... 191
CP (Compare Wb with lit5, Set Status Flags) ........... 192
CP (Compare Wb with lit8, Set Status Flags) ........... 193
CP (Compare Wb with Ws, Set Status Flags) .......... 194
CP0 (Compare f with 0x0, Set Status Flags) ............ 196
CP0 (Compare Ws with 0x0, Set Status Flags) ........ 197
CPB (Compare f with WREG using Borrow,
Set Status Flags) .............................................. 198
CPB (Compare Wb with lit5 using Borrow,
Set Status Flags) ...................................... 199, 200
CPB (Compare Ws with Wb using Borrow,
Set Status Flags) .............................................. 201
CPBEQ (Compare Wb with Wn, Branch if Equal)..... 203
CPBGT (Signed Compare Wb with Wn, Branch if
Greater Than) ................................................... 204
CPBNE (Signed Compare Wb with Wn, Branch if Not
Equal)................................................................ 206
CPSEQ (Compare Wb with Wn, Skip if Equal) . 207, 208
DS70157F-page 498
CPSGT (Signed Compare Wb with Wn,
Skip if Greater Than) ........................................ 210
CPSGT (Signed Compare Wb with Wn, Skip if Greater
Than) ................................................................ 211
CPSLT (Signed Compare Wb with Wn,
Skip if Less Than) ..................................... 212, 213
CPSNE (Signed Compare Wb with Wn,
Skip if Not Equal)...................................... 214, 215
DAW.B (Decimal Adjust Wn) .................................... 216
DEC (Decrement f) ................................................... 217
DEC (Decrement Ws) ............................................... 218
DEC2 (Decrement f by 2) ......................................... 220
DEC2 (Decrement Ws by 2) ..................................... 221
DISI (Disable Interrupts Temporarily) ....................... 223
DIV.S (Signed Integer Divide)................................... 224
DIV.U (Unsigned Integer Divide) .............................. 226
DIVF (Fractional Divide) ........................................... 228
DO (Initialize Hardware Loop Literal)................ 230, 233
DO (Initialize Hardware Loop Wn) .................... 235, 237
ED (Euclidean Distance, No Accumulate) ................ 239
EDAC (Euclidean Distance)...................................... 241
EXCH (Exchange Wns and Wnd)............................. 243
FBCL (Find First Bit Change from Left) .................... 244
FF1L (Find First One from Left) ................................ 246
FF1R (Find First One from Right) ............................. 248
GOTO (Unconditional Indirect Jump) ............... 251, 252
GOTO (Unconditional Jump) .................................... 250
GOTO.L (Unconditional Indirect Jump Long) ........... 253
INC (Increment f) ...................................................... 254
INC (Increment Ws) .................................................. 255
INC2 (Increment f by 2) ............................................ 257
INC2 (Increment Ws by 2) ........................................ 258
IOR (Inclusive OR f and WREG) .............................. 260
IOR (Inclusive OR Literal and Wn) ........................... 261
IOR (Inclusive OR Wb and Short Literal).................. 262
IOR (Inclusive OR Wb and Ws) ................................ 263
LAC (Load Accumulator) .......................................... 265
LNK (Allocate Stack Frame) ............................. 267, 268
LSR (Logical Shift Right by Short Literal) ................. 273
LSR (Logical Shift Right by Wns) ............................. 274
LSR (Logical Shift Right f) ........................................ 269
LSR (Logical Shift Right Ws) .................................... 271
MAC (Multiply and Accumulate) ............................... 275
MAC (Square and Accumulate) ................................ 277
MOV (Move 16-bit Literal to Wn) .............................. 284
MOV (Move f to Destination) .................................... 279
MOV (Move f to Wnd) ............................................... 281
MOV (Move Wns to [Wd with offset])........................ 286
MOV (Move Wns to f) ............................................... 282
MOV (Move WREG to f) ........................................... 280
MOV (Move Ws to Wd)............................................. 287
MOV (Move Ws with offset to Wnd).......................... 285
MOV.B (Move 8-bit Literal to Wnd)........................... 283
MOV.D (Double-Word Move from Source to Wnd)... 289
MOVPAG (Move Literal to Page Register) ............... 291
MOVPAG (Move Ws to Page Register).................... 292
MOVSAC (Prefetch Operands and
Store Accumulator) ........................................... 293
MPY (Multiply Wm by Wn to Accumulator)............... 295
MPY (Square to Accumulator) .................................. 297
MPY.N (Multiply -Wm by Wn to Accumulator) .......... 299
MSC (Multiply and Subtract from Accumulator)........ 301
MUL (Integer Unsigned Multiply f and WREG) ......... 303
MUL.SS (Integer 16x16-bit Signed Multiply with
Accumulator Destination) ................................. 307
MUL.SS (Integer 16x16-bit Signed Multiply)............. 305
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
Index
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
SETM (Set f or WREG) ............................................ 395
SETM (Set Ws)......................................................... 396
SFTAC (Arithmetic Shift Accumulator by Slit5) ........ 397
SFTAC (Arithmetic Shift Accumulator by Wb) .......... 398
SL (Shift Left by Short Literal) .................................. 403
SL (Shift Left by Wns)............................................... 404
SL (Shift Left f).......................................................... 399
SL (Shift Left Ws) ..................................................... 401
SUB (Subtract Accumulators)................................... 410
SUB (Subtract Literal from Wn) ................................ 406
SUB (Subtract Short Literal from Wb) ...................... 407
SUB (Subtract WREG from f) ................................... 405
SUB (Subtract Ws from Wb)..................................... 408
SUBB (Subtract Short Literal from Wb with Borrow) 413
SUBB (Subtract Wn from Literal with Borrow) .......... 412
SUBB (Subtract WREG and Carry bit from f) ........... 411
SUBB (Subtract Ws from Wb with Borrow) .............. 415
SUBBR (Subtract f from WREG with Borrow) .......... 417
SUBBR (Subtract Wb from Short Literal
with Borrow)...................................................... 418
SUBBR (Subtract Wb from Ws with Borrow) ............ 420
SUBR (Subtract f from WREG) ................................ 422
SUBR (Subtract Wb from Short Literal) .................... 423
SUBR (Subtract Wb from Ws) .................................. 424
SWAP (Byte or Nibble Swap Wn)............................. 426
TBLRDH (Table Read High) ..................................... 427
TBLRDL (Table Read Low) ...................................... 429
TBLWTH (Table Write High)..................................... 431
TBLWTL (Table Write Low) ...................................... 433
ULNK (De-allocate Stack Frame) ..................... 435, 436
XOR (Exclusive OR f and WREG)............................ 437
XOR (Exclusive OR Literal and Wn)......................... 438
XOR (Exclusive OR Wb and Short Literal) ............... 439
XOR (Exclusive OR Wb and Ws) ............................. 440
ZE (Zero-Extend Wn) ............................................... 442
Instruction Encoding Field Descriptors Introduction ........... 94
Instruction Set Overview..................................................... 38
Bit Instructions ............................................................ 45
Compare/Skip Instructions ......................................... 46
Control Instructions..................................................... 49
DSP Instructions......................................................... 50
dsPIC30F/33F Instruction Groups .............................. 38
Logic Instructions........................................................ 43
Math Instructions ........................................................ 41
Move Instructions ....................................................... 40
Program Flow Instructions .......................................... 47
Rotate/Shift Instructions ............................................. 44
Shadow/Stack Instructions ......................................... 49
Instruction Set Summary Table ........................................ 486
Instruction Set Symbols ........................................................ 8
(text) ............................................................................. 8
[text].............................................................................. 8
{ } .................................................................................. 8
{label:}........................................................................... 8
#text.............................................................................. 8
<n:m> ........................................................................... 8
Acc................................................................................ 8
AWB ............................................................................. 8
bit4................................................................................ 8
Expr .............................................................................. 8
f..................................................................................... 8
lit1 ................................................................................. 8
lit10 ............................................................................... 8
lit14 ............................................................................... 8
lit16 ............................................................................... 8
lit23 ............................................................................... 8
lit4 ................................................................................. 8
DS70157F-page 499
Index
MUL.SU (Integer 16x16-bit Signed-Unsigned
Multiply with Accumulator Destination) ............. 312
MUL.SU (Integer 16x16-bit Signed-Unsigned Multiply)310
MUL.SU (Integer 16x16-bit Signed-Unsigned Short
Literal Multiply with Accumulator Destination) .. 314
MUL.SU (Integer 16x16-bit Signed-Unsigned
Short Literal Multiply) ........................................ 308
MUL.US (Integer 16x16-bit Signed-Unsigned
Multiply with Accumulator Destination) ............. 317
MUL.US (Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned-Signed
Multiply) ............................................................ 315
MUL.UU (Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned Multiply /rwith Accumulator Destination).......................................... 322
MUL.UU (Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned Multiply) ........ 320
MUL.UU (Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned Short Literal
Multiply with Accumulator Destination) ............. 323
MUL.UU (Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned
Short Literal Multiply) ........................................ 319
MULW.SS (Integer 16x16-bit Signed Multiply
with 16-bit Result) ............................................. 324
MULW.SU (Integer 16x16-bit Signed-Unsigned
Multiply with 16-bit Result) ................................ 326
MULW.SU (Integer 16x16-bit Signed-Unsigned
Short Literal Multiply with 16-bit Result) ........... 328
MULW.US (Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned-Signed
Multiply with 16-bit Result) ................................ 329
MULW.UU (Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned Multiply
with 16-bit Result) ............................................. 331
MULW.UU (Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned Short
Literal Multiply
with 16-bit Result) ............................................. 332
NEG (Negate Accumulator) ...................................... 335
NEG (Negate f) ......................................................... 333
NEG (Negate Ws) ..................................................... 333
NOP (No Operation) ................................................. 336
NOPR (No Operation)............................................... 336
POP (Pop TOS to f) .................................................. 337
POP (Pop TOS to Wd).............................................. 338
POP.D (Double Pop TOS to Wnd/
Wnd+1) ............................................................. 339
POP.S (Pop Shadow Registers) ............................... 340
PUSH (Push f to TOS) .............................................. 341
PUSH (Push Ws to TOS).......................................... 342
PUSH.D (Double Push Wns/
Wns+1 to TOS) ................................................. 343
PUSH.S (Push Shadow Registers)........................... 345
PWRSAV (Enter Power Saving Mode) ..................... 346
RCALL (Computed Relative Call) ..................... 351, 353
RCALL (Relative Call)....................................... 347, 349
REPEAT (Repeat Next Instruction ’lit14 + 1’ Times). 355
REPEAT (Repeat Next Instruction ’lit15 + 1’ Times). 357
REPEAT (Repeat Next Instruction Wn + 1 Times)359, 361
RESET (Reset) ......................................................... 363
RETFIE (Return from Interrupt) ........................ 365, 366
RETLW (Return with Literal in Wn)................... 367, 369
RETURN (Return)............................................. 371, 372
RLC (Rotate Left f through Carry)............................. 373
RLC (Rotate Left Ws through Carry)......................... 375
RLNC (Rotate Left f without Carry) ........................... 377
RLNC (Rotate Left Ws without Carry)....................... 379
RRC (Rotate Right f through Carry).......................... 381
RRC (Rotate Right Ws through Carry)...................... 383
RRNC (Rotate Right f without Carry) ........................ 385
RRNC (Rotate Right Ws without Carry).................... 387
SAC (Store Accumulator).......................................... 389
SAC.R (Store Rounded Accumulator) ...................... 391
SE (Sign-Extend Ws) ................................................ 393
16-bit MCU and DSC Programmer’s Reference Manual
lit5 ................................................................................. 8
lit8 ................................................................................. 8
Slit10 ............................................................................. 8
Slit16 ............................................................................. 8
Slit4 ............................................................................... 8
Slit5 ............................................................................... 8
TOS............................................................................... 8
Wb................................................................................. 8
Wd................................................................................. 8
Wm, Wn ........................................................................ 8
Wm*Wm ........................................................................ 8
Wm*Wn ......................................................................... 8
Wn................................................................................. 8
Wnd............................................................................... 8
Wns ............................................................................... 8
WREG ........................................................................... 8
Ws ................................................................................. 8
Wx ................................................................................. 8
Wxd ............................................................................... 8
Wy ................................................................................. 8
Wyd ............................................................................... 8
Instruction Stalls.................................................................. 62
DO/REPEAT Loops .................................................... 63
Exceptions .................................................................. 63
Instructions that Change Program Flow...................... 63
PSV............................................................................. 63
RAW Dependency Detection ...................................... 62
Instruction Symbols............................................................. 94
Integer 16x16-bit Signed-Unsigned Short Literal Multiply . 328
Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned Short Literal Multiply
with 16-bit Result ...................................................... 332
Integer and Fractional Data................................................. 81
Representation............................................................ 82
Interrupt Priority Level ......................................................... 23
Program Counter ................................................................ 19
Programmer’s Model .......................................................... 14
Register Descriptions.................................................. 18
PSVPAG Register............................................................... 19
R
RCOUNT Register .............................................................. 20
Register Direct Addressing ................................................. 53
Register Indirect Addressing............................................... 54
Modes ......................................................................... 54
Register Indirect Addressing and the Instruction Set.......... 57
Registers
CORCON (Core Control) ...................................... 32, 35
CORCON (Core Control) Register........................ 31, 33
SR (CPU Status)................................................... 26, 29
SR (Status) Register................................................... 27
S
M
Scaling Data with the FBCL Instruction .............................. 88
Scaling Examples ....................................................... 89
Shadow Registers............................................................... 24
Automatic Usage ........................................................ 24
Software Stack Frame Pointer ...................................... 18, 72
Example...................................................................... 73
Overflow...................................................................... 74
Underflow.................................................................... 75
Software Stack Pointer ................................................. 19, 70
Example...................................................................... 71
Stack Pointer Limit Register (SPLIM) ................................. 19
Status Register ................................................................... 21
DSP ALU Status Bits .................................................. 23
Loop Status Bits.......................................................... 21
MCU ALU Status Bits ................................................. 21
Style and Symbol Conventions ............................................. 7
Document Conventions ................................................ 7
MAC
T
Operations .................................................................. 85
Prefetch Register Updates .......................................... 85
Prefetches ................................................................... 84
Syntax ......................................................................... 85
Write Back................................................................... 85
MAC Accumulator Write Back Selection ............................. 97
MAC or MPY Source Operands (Different Working Register)97
MAC or MPY Source Operands (Same Working Register). 97
Manual Objective .................................................................. 6
Modulo and Bit-Reversed Addressing Modes..................... 57
MOPAG Destination Selection ............................................ 97
Multi-Cycle Instructions ....................................................... 39
Multi-Word Instructions ....................................................... 39
N
Normalizing the Accumulator with the FBCL Instruction ..... 90
O
Offset Addressing Modes for Wd Destination Register
(with Register Offset) .................................................. 95
Offset Addressing Modes for Ws Source Register
(with Register Offset) .................................................. 95
TBLPAG Register ............................................................... 19
U
Using 10-bit Literal Operands ............................................. 69
10-bit Literal Coding.................................................... 69
W
Word Move Operations ....................................................... 66
Data Alignment in Memory ......................................... 66
Working Register Array....................................................... 18
X
X Data Space Prefetch Destination .................................... 96
X Data Space Prefetch Operation ...................................... 96
Y
Y Data Space Prefetch Destination .................................... 97
Y Data Space Prefetch Operation ...................................... 96
Z
Z Status Bit ......................................................................... 77
P
PIC® Microcontroller Compatibility ..................................... 79
PRODH
PRODL Register Pair .................................................. 79
Program Addressing Modes................................................ 61
Methods of Modifying Flow ......................................... 61
DS70157F-page 500
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
NOTES:
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157F-page 501
Worldwide Sales and Service
AMERICAS
ASIA/PACIFIC
ASIA/PACIFIC
EUROPE
Corporate Office
2355 West Chandler Blvd.
Chandler, AZ 85224-6199
Tel: 480-792-7200
Fax: 480-792-7277
Technical Support:
http://www.microchip.com/
support
Web Address:
www.microchip.com
Asia Pacific Office
Suites 3707-14, 37th Floor
Tower 6, The Gateway
Harbour City, Kowloon
Hong Kong
Tel: 852-2401-1200
Fax: 852-2401-3431
India - Bangalore
Tel: 91-80-3090-4444
Fax: 91-80-3090-4123
India - New Delhi
Tel: 91-11-4160-8631
Fax: 91-11-4160-8632
Austria - Wels
Tel: 43-7242-2244-39
Fax: 43-7242-2244-393
Denmark - Copenhagen
Tel: 45-4450-2828
Fax: 45-4485-2829
India - Pune
Tel: 91-20-2566-1512
Fax: 91-20-2566-1513
France - Paris
Tel: 33-1-69-53-63-20
Fax: 33-1-69-30-90-79
Japan - Yokohama
Tel: 81-45-471- 6166
Fax: 81-45-471-6122
Germany - Munich
Tel: 49-89-627-144-0
Fax: 49-89-627-144-44
Atlanta
Duluth, GA
Tel: 678-957-9614
Fax: 678-957-1455
Boston
Westborough, MA
Tel: 774-760-0087
Fax: 774-760-0088
Chicago
Itasca, IL
Tel: 630-285-0071
Fax: 630-285-0075
Cleveland
Independence, OH
Tel: 216-447-0464
Fax: 216-447-0643
Dallas
Addison, TX
Tel: 972-818-7423
Fax: 972-818-2924
Detroit
Farmington Hills, MI
Tel: 248-538-2250
Fax: 248-538-2260
Indianapolis
Noblesville, IN
Tel: 317-773-8323
Fax: 317-773-5453
Los Angeles
Mission Viejo, CA
Tel: 949-462-9523
Fax: 949-462-9608
Santa Clara
Santa Clara, CA
Tel: 408-961-6444
Fax: 408-961-6445
Toronto
Mississauga, Ontario,
Canada
Tel: 905-673-0699
Fax: 905-673-6509
Australia - Sydney
Tel: 61-2-9868-6733
Fax: 61-2-9868-6755
China - Beijing
Tel: 86-10-8569-7000
Fax: 86-10-8528-2104
China - Chengdu
Tel: 86-28-8665-5511
Fax: 86-28-8665-7889
Netherlands - Drunen
Tel: 31-416-690399
Fax: 31-416-690340
China - Chongqing
Tel: 86-23-8980-9588
Fax: 86-23-8980-9500
Korea - Seoul
Tel: 82-2-554-7200
Fax: 82-2-558-5932 or
82-2-558-5934
China - Hangzhou
Tel: 86-571-2819-3180
Fax: 86-571-2819-3189
Malaysia - Kuala Lumpur
Tel: 60-3-6201-9857
Fax: 60-3-6201-9859
China - Hong Kong SAR
Tel: 852-2401-1200
Fax: 852-2401-3431
Malaysia - Penang
Tel: 60-4-227-8870
Fax: 60-4-227-4068
China - Nanjing
Tel: 86-25-8473-2460
Fax: 86-25-8473-2470
Philippines - Manila
Tel: 63-2-634-9065
Fax: 63-2-634-9069
China - Qingdao
Tel: 86-532-8502-7355
Fax: 86-532-8502-7205
Singapore
Tel: 65-6334-8870
Fax: 65-6334-8850
China - Shanghai
Tel: 86-21-5407-5533
Fax: 86-21-5407-5066
Taiwan - Hsin Chu
Tel: 886-3-6578-300
Fax: 886-3-6578-370
China - Shenyang
Tel: 86-24-2334-2829
Fax: 86-24-2334-2393
Taiwan - Kaohsiung
Tel: 886-7-213-7830
Fax: 886-7-330-9305
China - Shenzhen
Tel: 86-755-8203-2660
Fax: 86-755-8203-1760
Taiwan - Taipei
Tel: 886-2-2500-6610
Fax: 886-2-2508-0102
China - Wuhan
Tel: 86-27-5980-5300
Fax: 86-27-5980-5118
Thailand - Bangkok
Tel: 66-2-694-1351
Fax: 66-2-694-1350
Spain - Madrid
Tel: 34-91-708-08-90
Fax: 34-91-708-08-91
UK - Wokingham
Tel: 44-118-921-5869
Fax: 44-118-921-5820
China - Xian
Tel: 86-29-8833-7252
Fax: 86-29-8833-7256
China - Xiamen
Tel: 86-592-2388138
Fax: 86-592-2388130
China - Zhuhai
Tel: 86-756-3210040
Fax: 86-756-3210049
DS70157F-page 502
Italy - Milan
Tel: 39-0331-742611
Fax: 39-0331-466781
Korea - Daegu
Tel: 82-53-744-4301
Fax: 82-53-744-4302
05/02/11
© 2005-2011 Microchip Technology Inc.